HCIP-Transmission V2.5 Training Material

WDM Principles
Foreword
⚫ The wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) technology is an advanced

technology for optical fiber communication. It is mature and has entered
the commercial use stage.
⚫ This course will help you gain a basic understanding of WDM principles.
2 Huawei Confidential
Objectives
⚫ On completion of this course, you will be able to:

 Understand the basic concepts, principles, transmission modes, and basic
composition of WDM.
 Know the WDM transmission media.
 Have a good command of WDM technical principles and key technologies.
Contents
1. System Overview
2. WDM Transmission Media
3. Key Technologies of WDM
• On the completion of this chapter, you will be able to:
▫ Understand the basic concepts of WDM.
▫ Have a good command of the basic principles, transmission modes, and

composition of WDM.
▫ Know the background and technical characteristics of WDM.
How to Increase Network Capacity?
◼ TDM+WDM
◼ Largest rate
◼ Largest
◼ TDM ◼ WDM number of
◼ Higher bit ◼ Economic channels
rates ◼ Fast ◼ Largest system
◼ STM-16 -> ◼ Mature capacity
STM-64
◼ Higher cost
◼ SDM
and
◼ New optical
complexity
cable layout
◼ Time and cost
Capacity expansion solution
• The linear transmission capability increase of space division multiplexing (SDM) is

implemented by adding optical fibers and transmission devices.
• Time division multiplexing (TDM) evolves from primary rate multiplexing into
quaternary groups in legacy PDH to STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, and STM-64
multiplexing in SDH. The capacity expansion has the following disadvantages:
▫ Disadvantage 1: Services are affected.
▫ Disadvantage 2: The rate upgrade is not flexible.
▫ Disadvantage 3: For a higher-rate TDM device, the cost is high, and the 40
Gbit/s TDM device has reached the rate limit of electronic components.
• WDM multiplexes optical signals at multiple rates (wavelengths) over one fiber
for transmission. The digital signals carried by these optical signals can have the
same rate and data format or different rates and data formats. New wavelengths
can be deployed on a network to expand the network capacity based on
customer requirements.
What is WDM?
Refueling station
Highway
Patrol car
• Legend:
▫ Highway: optical fiber
▫ Patrol car: supervisory signal
▫ Refueling station: optical regeneration (amplifier) station
▫ Gray car: client service
▫ Colored car: service on a different channel (wavelength)
▫ Lane: optical wavelength
• If an optical fiber is regarded as a multi-lane highway, a traditional TDM system

uses only one of the lanes. To improve the bit rate of the traditional system, the
speed on the lane must be increased to increase the traffic within a time unit.
However, a dense WDM (DWDM) system uses all these lanes on the highway to
fully utilize the fiber transmission capacity.
WDM Concept
⚫ WDM refers to a technology that allows optical signals at multiple wavelengths to
transmit over one optical fiber.
λ1
SDH signal λ1 λ2 λn
IP package
λ2
ATM cells …
…
λn
• The DWDM technology uses a number of wavelengths as carriers and transmits

the carrier channels over the same optical fiber. Generally, the DWDM
technology is in use with single-mode optical fibers because they have low loss
but provide large bandwidth. In contrast to a single channel system, DWDM
considerably enlarges the network capacity by fully utilizing optical fiber
bandwidth. It features simple expansion, reliable performance, and especially
direct access of multiple services, showing a bright future in application.
WDM System Structure
⚫ Components of a WDM system that multiplexes N wavelengths:
 Optical transponder unit (OTU)
 Optical multiplexer unit/Optical demultiplexer unit (OMU/ODU)

Optical amplifier (OA) (Note: BA is short for booster amplifier, LA is short for line amplifier, and PA
is short for pre-amplifier.)
 Optical supervisory channel/Electrical supervisory channel (OSC/ESC)
OTU OTU
OM
OD
TU LU OA OA OA LU TU
TU LU LU TU
OSC OSC OSC
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit

• An OTU converts diverse wavelengths to standard wavelengths specified by ITU-T

using the optical to electrical to optical (O/E/O) scheme. That is, a positive-
intrinsic-negative (PIN) photodiode or an avalanche photodiode (APD) converts
received optical signals to electrical signals, and the electrical signals are
modulated based on the standard wavelength output by the laser to obtain new
optical signals over ITU-T-compliant WDM wavelengths.
• An OMU, located at the transmit end, is a component that has several input
ports and one output port. Each input port receives one optical signal. These
signals are transmitted together through the output port. An ODU, located at the
receive end, has one input port and several output ports and separates signals at
multiple wavelengths.
• An OA (such as BA/LA/PA) amplifies optical signals. An all-optical amplifier
features real-time, high gain, broad bandwidth, on-line, low noise, and low
attenuation. It is an essential component in a next-generation optical fiber
communication system. Erbium-doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs) and fiber Raman
amplifiers (RFAs) are commonly used in practice. Particularly, EDFAs have
outstanding performance and are extensively used as BAs, LAs, or PAs in optical
fiber communication systems that support long-haul, large-capacity, and high-
speed transmission.
• An OSC is set up to monitor WDM optical transmission systems. ITU-T
recommends the use of 1510 nm wavelength at 2 Mbit/s. The OSC can work
properly at low rates based on high receiver sensibility (better than –48 dBm).
However, it must be dropped before reaching an EDFA and be added after
reaching the EDFA.
Transmission Mode (1)
⚫ Single-fiber unidirectional transmission
MUX DMUX
OTU
OTU
T
U
• A single-fiber unidirectional WDM system uses two optical fibers. One fiber is
used to transmit optical signals in only one direction, and the other fiber is used
to transmit optical signals in the reverse direction.
• The WDM system can use the huge bandwidth resources of optical fibers, so that
the transmission capacity of each optical fiber can be increased by several to
dozens of times. In a long-haul transmission network, wavelengths can be added
gradually based on the actual service volume to implement capacity expansion.
• Most WDM systems on the live network use the single-fiber unidirectional
transmission mode.
Transmission Mode (2)
⚫ Single-fiber bidirectional transmission
MUX/DMUX DMUX/MUX
O O
OTU
OTU
T T
U U
• A single-fiber bidirectional WDM system uses only one optical fiber to transmit
optical signals in two directions at the same time. The optical signals in the two
directions should use different wavelengths.
• When optical signals need to be amplified to extend the transmission distance,

components such as bidirectional optical fiber amplifiers and optical circulators
must be used. However, the noise figure is relatively poor.
Application Mode (1)
⚫ Integrated system
MUX DMUX
Client device Client device
• An integrated DWDM system does not use the wavelength conversion

technology. It requires that the wavelengths for optical signals of multiplexing
terminals comply with the DWDM system specifications. Different multiplexing
terminals send different ITU-T-compliant wavelengths. In this way, they occupy
different channels when connecting to a multiplexer for wavelength multiplexing.
• You can select different application modes according to the requirements of the
project. In practice, open DWDM and integrated DWDM can be used together.
Application Mode (2)
⚫ Open system
MUX DMUX
O O
T T
OTU
OTU
U U
Client device Client device
• An open DWDM system requires that the optical interfaces of multiplexing

terminals comply with ITU-T standards.
• The DWDM system uses the wavelength conversion technology to convert the
optical signals of multiplexing terminals into specified wavelengths. The optical
signals of different terminals are converted into different ITU-T-compliant
wavelengths, and then are multiplexed.
Advantages of WDM
⚫ Ultra-large capacity and ultra-long haul transmission
⚫ Transparent transmission of data
⚫ Maximum investment protection during system upgrades
⚫ High networking flexibility, cost-effectiveness, and reliability
⚫ Compatibility with all-optical switching
• Currently, a common optical fiber provides high bandwidth, but its utilization rate
is very low. The DWDM technology increases the transmission capacity of an
optical fiber by several, dozens of, or even hundreds of times the transmission
capacity of a single wavelength. Currently, the highest capacity of an optical fiber
transmission system in commercial use is 48 Tbit/s. Multiple Raman amplifiers
(forward/backward Raman + enhanced Raman) and a remote optical pumping
amplifier (ROPA) can implement a maximum single-span transmission distance of
400+ km over low-attenuation optical fibers.
• The DWDM system multiplexes and demultiplexes signals by optical wavelength,
regardless of the signal rate and electrical modulation mode. That is, the
multiplexing and demultiplexing are transparent to data. The WDM system can
carry service signals in various formats, such as ATM, IP, and possible signals in the
future. The WDM system transmits signals transparently. For service-layer signals,
each wavelength channel in the WDM system is similar to a virtual optical fiber.
• During network expansion and development, only optical transmitters and optical
receivers need to be replaced, and optical cables do not need to be reconstructed.
This is an ideal expansion method and also a convenient method for introducing
broadband services (such as CATV, HDTV, and B-ISDN). In addition, any new
service or capacity can be introduced by adding a wavelength.
• The new communication network using WDM technologies is more simplified than
that using traditional electrical TDM technologies, and has clear network layers.
The grooming of various services can be achieved by only adjusting the
wavelengths of corresponding optical signals. The simplified network structure,
clear network layers, and convenient service grooming bring about high flexibility,
cost-effectiveness, and reliability.
• All-optical switching: Service signals are directly groomed at the optical layer
without optical-to-electrical conversion.
DWDM
Extended C band
Even wavelengths: 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz Even wavelengths: 191.30 THz to 196.00 THz
C band
Odd wavelengths: 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz Odd wavelengths: 191.35 THz to 196.05 THz
ITU-T G.694.1 Extended C band: 192 wavelengths at a 25 GHz channel spacing

C band: 160 wavelengths
32 wavelengths extended
196.075 THz 192.100 THz 192.075 THz 191.300 THz
• The 160 wavelengths in the C band are classified into odd and even wavelengths.
The details are as follows:
▫ C-band odd wavelengths: There are 80 odd-numbered wavelengths in total.
The center frequency ranges from 192.150 THz to 196.050 THz (the center
wavelength ranges from 1529.16 nm to 1560.20 nm) and the frequency
spacing is 50 GHz.
▫ C-band even wavelengths: There are 80 even-numbered wavelengths in

total. The center frequency ranges from 192.100 THz to 196.000 THz (the
center wavelength ranges from 1529.55 nm to 1560.61 nm) and the
frequency spacing is 50 GHz.
• The 192 wavelengths in the extended C band are classified into odd and even
wavelengths. The details are as follows:
▫ Extended C-band odd wavelengths: There are 96 odd-numbered
wavelengths in total. The center frequency ranges from 191.350 THz to
196.050 THz (the center wavelength ranges from 1529.16 nm to 1566.72
nm) and the frequency spacing is 50 GHz.
▫ Extended C-band even wavelengths: There are 96 even-numbered

wavelengths in total. The center frequency ranges from 191.300 THz to
196.000 THz (the center wavelength ranges from 1529.55 nm to 1567.13
nm) and the frequency spacing is 50 GHz.
CWDM
(dB/km)
(nm)
Coarse WDM (CWDM) systems generally work on bands ranging from
1271 nm to 1611 nm at a 20 nm spacing.
• Compared with a DWDM system, a CWDM system provides a certain number of

wavelengths and a transmission distance within 100 km, which improves
flexibility while reducing system costs. Therefore, the CWDM system is mainly
applied to metro networks. CWDM provides high access bandwidth with low
costs. It is applicable to various popular network structures, such as point-to-
point, Ethernet, and SONET rings, especially for short-distance, high-bandwidth,
and dense access points. For example, CWDM applies to network communication
within buildings or between buildings.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following are the components of a

WDM system?
A. Optical transponder unit (OTU)
B. Optical amplifier (OA)

C. Optical multiplexer unit/Optical demultiplexer unit (OMU/ODU)
D. Optical supervisory channel/Electrical supervisory channel (OSC/ESC)
• Answer: ABCD
Contents
1. System Overview
• This chapter describes the structure, types, and features of optical fibers.
• Through this chapter, you will have a basic understanding of G.652, G.653, G.654,
and G.655 optical fibers as well as concepts such as dispersion.
Optical Fiber Structure
⚫ An optical fiber consists of a cylindrical glass fiber core and a glass cladding. The
outer layer is a flexible and wearable plastic sheath, and the entire optical fiber is
cylindrical.
Refraction
n2 Cladding
θ
Total reflection n1 Fiber core
Sheath
• Factors, such as the fiber core diameter and refractive index of fiber and cladding
materials, determine optical fiber characteristics.
• The fiber core refractive index n1 must be higher than the cladding refractive
index n2, which is a necessary condition for transmitting optical signals in optical
fibers.
• Optical fibers can be classified into single-mode and multi-mode optical fibers by
transmission mode.
▫ In the case of a single-mode optical fiber, the diameter of the fiber core is
extremely small and generally smaller than 10 μm.
▫ In the case of a multi-mode optical fiber, the diameter of the fiber core is
large and generally about 50 μm.
Light Guide Principles of Optical Fibers (1)
⚫ Light is transmitted in a straight line in a homogeneous medium, but reflection and
refraction occur on the boundary surfaces of two different media, as shown in the
following figure.
Incidence angle θ1 Reflection angle θ3
Air: n1 = 1
Glass: n2 = 1.5
Refraction angle θ2
Reflection and refraction of light
• When a beam of light radiates to the surface of an object (such as glass) through
the air, the transmission speed slows down, and the transmission direction
changes at the same time. Therefore, the refractive index is measured by the
bending degree of light transmitted from one medium into another. In general,
when a beam of light radiates to the boundary of two media, it splits into two
beams as reflected light and refracted light, as shown in the preceding figure.
• According to the Snell's law, the incidence angle and refraction angle are equal
(θ1 = θ3), and the relationship between the incidence angle and refraction angle
meets n1sinθ1 = n2sinθ2.
• Light travels at different rates in different media, which seem as if different
transmission media resist transmitting light at different levels. The parameter
used to describe this feature for the medium is named refractive index or index
of refraction. Therefore, if ν is the speed of light in a medium, and с is the speed
of light in vacuum, the refractive index can be determined by using the following
formula: n = с/ν.
• The following figure lists the refractive indexes of different media.
Material Air Water Glass Quartz Diamond
Refractive
1.003 1.33 1.52-1.89 1.43 2.42
Index
Light Guide Principles of Optical Fibers (2)
⚫ Optical fiber transmission uses the principle of total reflection of light, as shown in
the following figure.
Air: n1 = 1
Glass: n2 = 1.5
Critical angle: θ
Total reflection of light
• According to the Snell's law, the incidence angle and refraction angle are equal
(θ1 = θ3), and the relationship between the incidence angle and refraction angle
meets n1sinθ1 = n2sinθ2. When the incidence angle is greater than a critical
angle θc, the light is completely reflected on the contact surface, and no
refraction light exists.
• Then, what will happen when light radiates from a medium with large refractive
index (such as the glass) into a medium with small refractive index (such as the
air)?
▫ As shown in the preceding figure, when the incidence angle θ (shown as

the dashed arrow in the figure) reaches a specific value, the refraction
angle (shown as the dashed arrow in the figure) is equal to 90°, and the
light no longer enters the second medium (air in this example). In this case,
the incidence angle is called critical angle θc. If the angle is further
increased to reach θ > θc, all the light will be reflected back to the incident
medium (shown as the solid arrow in the figure). Because all light is
reflected back to the incident medium, this phenomenon is called total
reflection.
• It is easy to understand that the attenuation of an optical fiber can be greatly

reduced when all light is completely reflected in the optical fiber, because the
light is basically transmitted in the fiber core area and does not enter the
cladding.
Number of Fiber Modes
⚫ According to the number of transmission modes, optical fibers can be classified into
single-mode optical fibers and multi-mode optical fibers.
2b
2a
Light transmission inside a single-mode fiber
2b
2a
Light transmission in a step-index Light transmission in a graded-index
multi-mode fiber multi-mode fiber
• Light is a kind of high-frequency electromagnetic wave. Based on the wave optics

and electromagnetic field theory, according to Maxwell's equations, in an optical
fiber, light is transmitted in tens and even hundreds of modes if the geometry
size of the fiber core is much larger than the optical wavelengths. The number of
transmission modes of an optical fiber varies depending on the fiber diameter.
Therefore, step-index fibers or graded-index fibers can be further classified into
single-mode optical fibers and multi-mode optical fibers by number of
transmission modes. A single-mode optical fiber transmits only one mode of
optical signals. The diameter of the fiber core is small and is generally within the
range of 5 μm to 10 μm. A multi-mode optical fiber transmits multiple modes of
optical signals. The diameter of the fiber core is large and has a typical size of
about 50 μm.
Attenuation
dB/km
Multi-mode (850–900 nm)

O E S C L U
4
3 OH
-
800 900 12001300 1400 15001600 1700 nm
• The attenuation of an optical fiber depends on absorption attenuation, scattering

attenuation, and bending attenuation.
• Absorption attenuation: This type of attenuation is caused by the fiber materials,
because the fiber materials absorb a fraction of the light passing through them.
It specially refers to the absorption caused by the presence of impurities, such as
metallic ions and OH- ions.
• Scattering attenuation: Generally, a microscopic bit of change in the fiber
material density and uneven concentration of SiO2, GeO2, and P2O5 ions can
cause uneven refraction in some parts inside an optical fiber. As a result,
scattering occurs. Some light power is scattered outside the optical fiber, and this
is scattering attenuation. Scattering attenuation also occurs due to impurities at
the core-cladding interface, strains, or bubbles generated in the optical fiber
during optical fiber manufacturing. The defect size is much greater than the
optical wavelength, and the scattering attenuation caused by these defects is
irrelevant to the wavelength. The attenuation curve moves upward, which means
that the attenuation increases. However, this type of attenuation is much lower
than the first type of attenuation.
• The attenuation coefficients of single-mode fibers (SMFs) in the 1310 nm and
1550 nm ranges are generally 0.3–0.4 dB/km and 0.17–0.25 dB/km respectively.
According to ITU-T G.652, the attenuation coefficients of optical fibers in the
1310 nm and 1550 nm ranges should be less than 0.5 dB/km and 0.4 dB/km
respectively.
Dispersion
⚫ Chromatic dispersion (CD)
Power
Optical pulse signal
Transmission Transmission
L1 (km) L2 (km)
Time
• When signals are carried over optical fibers, different mode components or
frequency components present in the signals have different group velocities.
Therefore, the signals diffuse during transmission, causing signal distortion. This
phenomenon is called dispersion.
• CD: The group velocities vary according to frequencies (or wavelengths) in the
light source. Light with different frequencies arrives at the fiber end with
different time delays. This type of dispersion is known as CD.
CD Compensation
⚫ To mitigate the impact of CD, dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) are mainly used to
compensate for accumulated CD through their dispersion compensation fibers (DCFs).
⚫ The difference between a DCF and a common optical fiber is that the DCF has a negative
dispersion coefficient in the 1550 nm window. Because of this feature, the DCF is connected
to counterbalance the positive dispersion of the G.652/G.655 optical fiber.
Dispersion coefficient
G.652
Wavelength
Common DCF
Dispersion slope compensation fiber (DSCF)
• DCF: dispersion compensation fiber

PMD
⚫ Polarization mode dispersion (PMD)
Fast
Elliptical fiber core
Fiber profile
Slow
Delay difference
• PMD is the dispersion caused by different speeds of two orthogonal polarization

states of optical signals.
• In an actual optical fiber, the fiber core cross section has a specific locality due to
the fiber manufacturing process. The uneven thermal expansion coefficients of
the fiber material cause anisotropic stresses on the fiber cross section, which
results in the fiber refractive index anisotropy. Therefore, the two polarized
modes have different propagation speeds, and the delay difference of group
velocities occurs, leading to PMD. PMD is a random value because it is caused by
random factors.
• In an actual WDM system, the system with a rate of 10 Gbit/s or lower is slightly
affected by PMD. For a 40G system, coding technologies can be used to improve
the PMD tolerance.
Optical Fiber Categories
G.655: It has small dispersion
G.652: It is widely used in in the 1550 nm window
China and has zero and effectively controls the
dispersion in the 1310 nm non-linear effect.
window.
Dispersion coefficient
G.652 G.653: It has zero dispersion in the

1550 nm window and severe four-
17 ps/(nm·km) G.655 wave mixing (FWM).
G.653
Wavelength
1310 nm 1550 nm
• The G.652 fiber is the widely used single-mode fiber that has the best 1310 nm
performance. It is also called the dispersion-unshifted fiber.
• The G.653 fiber has the best 1550 nm performance and is called dispersion-
shifted fiber (DSF). With the design of the fiber refractive index profile, the zero-
dispersion point is shifted to the 1550 nm window to match the minimum
attenuation window of the fiber. This makes the fiber transmission at an ultra-
high rate and for an ultra-long distance possible.
• The G.654 fiber is the cut-off shifted single-mode fiber. The design of this fiber
aims to decrease the attenuation in the 1550 nm window. The zero-dispersion
point is still around 1310 nm. Therefore, the dispersion in 1550 nm is high, and
can reach 18 ps/(nm·km). In this case, single-longitudinal mode lasers are
required to eliminate the impact of dispersion. The G.654 fiber is mainly applied
to submarine fiber communication that requires long regeneration sections.
• The G.655 fiber is a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode fiber, which is
similar to the G.653 fiber. Therefore, a specific dispersion value is maintained
around 1550 nm, which avoids FWM during DWDM transmission. The fiber is
applicable to DWDM systems.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following statements about fiber

features are true?
A. The G.652 fiber is the single-mode fiber that has the best 1310 nm performance.
B. The G.653 fiber has the best 1550 nm performance and is called dispersion-unshifted
fiber (DSF).
C. The G.654 fiber is mainly applied to submarine fiber communication that requires long
regeneration sections.
D. The G.655 fiber is a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode fiber and is applicable to

DWDM systems.
• Answer: ACD
Contents
1. System Overview
• If we want to turn DWDM into a commodity, how can we implement it on

hardware? This chapter describes the key technologies and implementation
methods of DWDM, including the light source, optical amplifier, and WDM
components.
• On the completion of this chapter, you will be able to:

▫ Understand the requirements and solutions of DWDM light sources.
▫ Understand the optical amplification technologies of DWDM.
▫ Understand the multiplexing and demultiplexing technologies of DWDM.
▫ Understand the optical supervisory channel (OSC) of DWDM.

Key Technologies of WDM
⚫ Light source ⚫ Optical multiplexing

technologies and demultiplexing
technologies
Key technologies
⚫ Optical amplification ⚫ Supervisory technologies

technologies
• In a WDM system, the key technologies are mainly classified into four major
technologies: light source technologies, optical multiplexing and demultiplexing
technologies, optical amplification technologies, and supervisory technology.
Requirements on WDM Light Sources
1 High dispersion tolerance
Output of standard and stable

2
wavelengths
• The dispersion tolerance is described as follows: If the dispersion tolerance of a

10 Gbit/s OTU board is 800 spa/nm, the dispersion coefficient is 20 ps/(nm·km)
(considering the dispersion redundancy of the system) and the dispersion limit
(L) is 40 km (L = 800/20 = 40) over the G.652 fiber. That is, when the
transmission distance exceeds 40 km, a DCM must be added for compensation.
Therefore, the larger the dispersion tolerance, the better.
Modulation Technology
⚫ Modulation is a process in which information of a signal source is processed and added to a carrier to
make the information suitable for channel transmission. It is a technology in which a carrier changes
with a signal.
⚫ There are two types of modulation signals: analog signals and digital signals. Analog modulation
controls the parameters of carrier signals by analog signals. Digital modulation controls the parameters
of carrier signals by digital signals.
⚫ Digital modulation is an important method of modern communication, and it has many advantages
compared with analog modulation. Digital modulation has better anti-interference performance, better
performance withstanding the channel loss, and higher security. Error control techniques can be used in
digital transmission systems to support complex signal conditions and processing techniques such as
source coding, encryption, and equalization.
• Modulation is a process in which information of a signal source is processed and

added to a carrier to make the information suitable for channel transmission. It is
a technology in which a carrier changes with a signal.
• Generally, information of a signal source (or information source) includes a direct

current component (DC component) and a frequency component with a
relatively low frequency, and is called a baseband signal.
• A baseband signal cannot be used as a transmission signal. It must be converted

into a signal with a very high frequency relative to the baseband frequency so
that it is suitable for channel transmission. This signal is called modulated signal,
and the baseband signal is called modulation signal.
• Modulation is implemented by changing the amplitude, phase, or frequency of a
high-frequency carrier (or carrier signal of a piece of information), so that the
carrier signal changes with the amplitude of a baseband signal. Demodulation is
a process in which a baseband signal is extracted from a carrier for a
predetermined receiver (or information sink) to process and understand.
Modulation Mode
⚫ Non-coherent modulation
 Direct modulation
 Electro absorption (EA) modulation
 Mach-Zehnder (M-Z) modulation
⚫ Coherent modulation
• Direct modulation: It is also called internal modulation, and is used to directly

modulate the light source signal. This modulation mode controls the injection
current of the semiconductor laser to change the intensity of light waves output
by the laser.
▫ Generally, direct modulation on common G.652 fibers can implement
transmission at a rate up to 2.5 Gbit/s over a distance up to 100 km. It
generally applies to CWDM systems.
• EA modulation: It does not directly modulate the light source. In this modulation
mode, an external modulator is used on the output path of the light source to
modulate the light wave. This modulator is equivalent to a switch.
▫ The laser of EA modulation is complex, the loss is large, and the cost is
high. However, EA modulation has a small modulation frequency chirp, and
can be applied to a system with a transmission rate of 2.5 Gbit/s or higher
and a transmission distance of over 300 km. Therefore, in a DWDM system
that uses an optical line amplifier, a laser of the transmitter part is
generally a laser in EA modulation mode.
• Mach-Zehnder (M-Z) modulation: An M-Z modulator splits input light into two
equal channels of signals, which enter its two optical paths. On the two optical
paths, electro-optic material is used and the refractive index of the material
varies with the strength of the externally fed electrical signal. Because a
refractive index change on the optical paths will cause a change in the signal
phase, the combined optical signal at the output end of the two optical paths is
an interference signal with varying strengths. In this manner, information carried
on electrical signals is transformed onto optical signals, achieving modulation
based on the strength of optical signals. The frequency chirp of a separated
externally modulated laser can be equal to zero. Compared with an EA
modulated laser, the separated externally modulated laser has high cost.
PDM Modulation Technology (1)
⚫ Pulse density modulation (PDM)
 A polarization beam splitter (PBS) splits a beam of laser light into two perpendicular
polarizations: x-pol and y-pol.
Polarization of a
photon
Transmission Splitting polarized
di rection of optical signals to the x-pol
si gnals
Splitting polarized
signals to the y-pol
a. Laser signal (electromagnetic wave) b. Passing through the PBS c. Signals split into the x -pol and y-pol
• PDM modulation
▫ Step 1: At the transmit end, the PBS splits the laser light into two
perpendicular polarizations (x-pol and y-pol).
• 40G/100G coherent modulation technologies:

▫ ePDM-QPSK, short for enhanced Polarization Division Multiplexing-
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying, is the best solution for 100G WDM
transmission.
▫ ePDM-BPSK, short for enhanced Polarization Division Multiplexing-Binary

Phase Shift Keying, is the solution for 40G ultra-long haul WDM
transmission.
PDM Modulation Technology (2)
⚫ PDM modulation
 A polarization beam combiner (PBC) combines the modulated optical signals in
polarizations on the x-pol and y-pol into one optical fiber.
QPSK-modulated signal
on the x-pol
QPSK-modulated signal
on the y-pol
• PDM modulation:
▫ Step 2: After the laser at the transmit end is split into two parts in
polarizations x and y, QPSK/BPSK modulation is performed on the two
polarized light (on the x-pol and y-pol). The PBC combines the modulated
optical signals in polarizations x and y into one optical fiber, and then the
signals are multiplexed and amplified for optical cable transmission.
• Traditional WDM modulation implements amplitude modulation. Both PDM-
BPSK and PDM-QPSK modulate signal phases.
• The 100G coherent transmission system uses the PDM and QPSK technologies to
reduce the electrical-layer processing rate. For the current electrical technology,
the 40 Gbit/s rate is close to the bottleneck limit. Higher rate brings about more
signal loss, power consumption, electromagnetic radiation (interference), and
impedance match problems, which cost much financially and technically.
▫ In PDM, one optical signal is divided into two polarizations, and the signal
is then modulated onto the two polarizations. This procedure is equivalent
to splitting a data stream into two parts, reducing the data rate by half.
▫ For QPSK, a phase equals to two bits, which has the same effect as dividing
data into two parts, and therefore the rate is reduced by half.
▫ For 100G (112 Gbit/s) signals, the actual data baud rate is only 28G baud
(112/2/2 = 28).
• A 40G coherent transmission system can use PDM-BPSK modulation, and a phase
of the BPSK indicates a digital bit. In this way, the decision accuracy and
transmission nonlinear capability are improved.
QPSK Modulation Technology
28 Gbit/s
data I
Pre- Input Signal Signal Output Phase
coder Cosωt
I Q θ
+
Optical signal on 0 0 π/4
the x-pol Σ
- 0 1 3π/4
π/2
Pre- Sinωt s(t) = I x Cosωt – Q x Sinωt = √2 Cos(ωt+θ) 1 1 5π/4
28 Gbit/s coder Q 1 0 7π/4
data
Mapping relationship (constellation diagram)

Stream Q
01 00
θ I
I
11 10
Q
The distribution diagram of signal vector endpoints is
called a constellation diagram. The constellation
diagram completely and clearly expresses the
QPSK mapping relationship of digital modulation, and
digital modulation is often referred to as
constellation modulation.
• QPSK first converts two channels of 28 Gbit/s digital signals (2 bits) into the I-
channel component (real part) and Q-channel component (imaginary part) in
the optical field, and then converts them into a phase signal θ after calculation
using the following formula: s(t) = I x Cosωt – Q x Sinωt = √2 Cos(ωt + θ). This
phase signal contains 2 bits. The value of θ can be π/4, 3π/4, 5π/4, and 7π/4,
which represent 00, 01, 11, and 10 respectively.
Coherent Detection Technology
⚫ Coherent detection
 At the receive end, the received signal light is divided into two parts. One is allocated to
the x-pol and the other is allocated to the y-pol.
Splitting polarized
signals to the x-pol
Splitting polarized
signals to the y-pol
• Coherent detection:
▫ Step 3: A local oscillator (LO) laser that has the same frequency as the
received signal is used to implement coherent processing between the LO
laser signal and received signal to restore the amplitude, phase, and
polarization state information from the received signal.
A coherent light consists of two light waves that meet the coherent condition.
Coherent condition: In the area where they meet, the two light waves
① Have the same oscillation direction.
② Have the same oscillation frequency.
③ Have the same phase or maintain a constant phase relationship with each
other.
Two coherent light waves interfere with each other within the area where they
meet.
Comparison Between Modulation Technologies
Modulation Technology Direct modulation EA modulation M-Z modulation Coherent modulation
Dispersion Tolerance
1200~4000 7200~12800 > 12800 40000
(ps/nm)
Cost Medium High Quite high Quite high
Wavelength Stability Good Relatively good Very good Excellent
OA Types
EDFA Erbium-doped fiber amplifier
RFA Raman fiber amplifier
OA
OA
• Optical fiber amplifiers (OFAs) can be classified into rare earth ion doped OFAs
and non-linear OFAs. Rare earth ion doped OFAs amplify optical signals using the
simulated radiation mechanism, and non-linear OFAs amplify optical signals
using the non-linear effect of optical fibers. Among OFAs, EDFAs and RFAs are
practical.
• OAs do not need to convert optical signals to electrical signals and then convert
electrical signals back to optical signals. This feature helps form two advantages
over regenerators for OAs.
▫ First, OAs support any bit rates and signal formats, and simply amplify all
received signals. This attribute is generally described as that OAs are
transparent to any bit rates and signal formats.
▫ Second, OAs not only support the amplification of a single signal

wavelength, which is similar to a regenerator, but also support optical
signal amplification within a specific wavelength range. In addition, only
OAs support the TDM and WDM networks with multiple bit rates, various
modulation formats, and different wavelengths.
• Actually, WDM technologies play an important role in optical fiber

communication only after OAs, especially EDFAs, become available. The EDFA is
the most popular OA. It has transformed the theories of WDM and all-optical
network into reality.
Working Principles of EDFAs
E3 excited state
1550 nm
signal photon
E2 metastable state
Stimulated radiation
1550 nm
signal photon
980 nm
pump photon
E1 ground state
⚫ Er3+ ion energy level diagram
• Erbium-doped fibers are the key components of EDFAs and contain Er3+ ions of a
certain concentration. Before illustrating the working principle of EDFAs, this
course introduces the energy level diagram of erbium ions. The outer-shell
electrons of an erbium ion occupy three energy levels (E1, E2, and E3). E1 is the
ground state, E2 the metastable state, and E3 the high-energy state.
▫ When a high-energy pump laser is used to simulate an erbium-doped fiber,
a large number of bound electrons of the erbium ion are simulated from
the ground state to high-energy state (E3).
▫ However, the high-energy state is unstable, and therefore the erbium ion
soon undergoes radiationless decay (photons are not released) and enters
the metastable state E2.
▫ E2 is a metastable energy state, at which a particle can exist for a long

time. The particles simulated by the pump laser continuously assemble to
this state in radiationless transition mode, achieving distribution for
population inversion.
▫ When optical signals with a 1550 nm wavelength traverse the erbium-

doped fiber, particles at the metastable state transit to the ground state in
stimulated radiation mode and generate the same photons as incident
signal photons. In this way, photons in the signal light are increased, and
signals are continuously amplified when traversing the erbium-doped fiber.
EDFA Structure
Signal input Optical splitter Isolator Coupler Isolator Optical splitter Signal output
TAP TAP
Erbium-doped fiber
Pump light source
Photoelectric Photoelectric
detection PIN detection PIN
• EDFA: It is a key component of the next-generation optical communication

system. It has the advantages of high gain, high output power, large working
optical bandwidth, independent of polarization, low noise figure, and
independent of system bit rates and data formats. It is an indispensable key
component in a large-capacity DWDM system.
• Erbium-doped fiber: It is one of the most important parts of the EDFA. The fiber
length is about 10 m to 30 m. During manufacturing, erbium is doped to the
quartz fiber core. Therefore, the fiber is called an erbium-doped fiber.
• Isolator (ISO): One isolator is configured before the erbium-doped fiber and
another is configured after the erbium-doped fiber to transmit optical signals in a
single direction.
• Pump light source: 980 nm and 1480 nm pumping supplies are the most
common ones. This is because the 1480 nm pump light source has the highest
laser efficiency, and the 980 nm pump light source has a low noise figure and the
second highest efficiency. The function is to enable the erbium ion to transit from
the low-energy state to the high-energy state.
• Coupler: It combines signal light and pump light and injects them into the
erbium-doped fiber.
• Photoelectric detector: It converts optical/electrical signals. There are two kinds of

commonly used semiconductor photodetectors: PIN photodiode and APD
avalanche photodiode.
EDFA Characteristics
Advantage Disadvantage
⚫ Operating wavelength
⚫ Fixed gain range
consistent with the minimum ⚫ Gain unflatness
attenuation window of ⚫ Optical surge problem
single-mode fibers
⚫ High coupling efficiency
⚫ High energy conversion
efficiency
⚫ High gain, low noise figure,
and high output power
⚫ Good gain stability
• Main advantages of EDFAs:

▫ High coupling efficiency: EDFAs can be easily interconnected with
transmission fibers.
▫ High energy conversion efficiency: The diameter of the erbium-doped fiber
core is smaller than that of the transmission fiber core, and both the signal
light and pump light are transmitted over the erbium-doped fiber.
Therefore, the light energy is concentrated, enabling adequate interaction
between light and gain medium (Er ions). With the erbium-doped fiber of a
proper length, the light energy conversion efficiency is high.
▫ Good gain stability: EDFAs are insensitive to temperature, and the gain is
independent of polarization. The gain is independent of system bit rates
and signal formats.
• Main disadvantages of EDFAs:
▫ Fixed gain bandwidth range: Due to the differences between energy levels
of Er ions, the operating wavelength range of EDFAs can only be in the
1550 nm window.
▫ Gain unflatness: The gain bandwidth of EDFAs is large but not flat. During
application in WDM systems, a special technology must be used to optimize
the gain flatness.
▫ Optical surge: The input optical power can be increased quickly using
EDFAs, but the dynamic gain of the EDFAs changes slowly. Therefore,
optical surge may occur in case of a step change of the input signals. That
is, an input optical power peak occurs. Optical surge is more severe when
EDFAs are cascaded. The peak optical power can be several walts, which
may damage O/E converters and optical connector endfaces.
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
λ1~ λn
λ1~ λn Gain
EDFA
Pin Pout
The gain remains unchanged.
Gain = Pout/Pin, which remains unchanged
Input optical power: Pin Coupler EDF Output optical power: Pout
Splitter Pump Splitter

PIN DSP PIN
• The gain locking of an EDFA is an important issue. As a WDM system is a multi-

wavelength working system, if the signals of certain wavelengths are lost, the
energy of the WDM system is shifted to the signals that are not lost due to gain
competition, thereby increasing the power of other wavelengths. At the receive
end, the sudden level increase may cause bit errors. In extreme cases, if seven of
the eight wavelengths are lost, all the power will be concentrated on the
remaining wavelength, and the power may reach about 17 dBm. This will result
in a strong nonlinear effect or the receive power overload of the receiver, as well
as a large number of bit errors.
• There are many technologies for locking the EDFA gain. The typical method is to
control the gain of a pump light source. The internal monitoring circuit of the
EDFA monitors the ratio of the input power to the output to control the output
of the pump source. When some signals of the input wavelengths are lost, the
input power decreases and the ratio of the output power to the input power
increases. Through the feedback circuit, the output power of the pump source is
reduced to keep the EDFA gain (output/input) unchanged. In this way, the total
output power of the EDFA is reduced, and the output signal level is stable.
Working Principles of a Raman Amplifier
⚫ Stimulated Raman scattering (SRS)
Gain
Pump
30 nm
13 THz (70–100 nm)

Gain
Pump 1Pump 2 Pump 3
30 nm
70–100 nm
• In a common optical fiber system, the optical power is low, and the optical fiber
has linear transmission characteristics. When the incident optical power of the
light into an optical fiber (non-linear optical medium) is rather high, the high-
energy (short-wavelength) pump light scatters to transfer a small portion of the
incident optical power to the beam whose frequency is down shifted. The amount
of frequency shift depends on the vibration mode of the medium. This process is
called Raman effect. In quantum mechanics, the process is described as that a
photon of the incident wavelength is scattered to a low-frequency photon, and
the molecule performs the transition between the vibration states. The incident
photon is referred to as pump light, and the low-frequency frequency-shift
photon is called Stokes wave.
• Common Raman scattering requires very high laser power. However, in optical
fiber communication, the diameter of a single-mode fiber as a nonlinear medium
is very small (generally less than 10 μm). The single-mode fiber can be used to
restrict the interaction between the high-strength laser field and the medium to
a very small sectional area. This greatly increases the optical power density of the
incident optical field. In a low-loss fiber, the action between the optical field and
the medium can be kept in a long distance. The energy coupling in the process is
very robust, which makes it possible to utilize SRS in the fiber.
• The quartz fiber has a wide SRS gain spectrum with a wide gain peak around 13
THz that the pump light frequency is down shifted. If a weak signal and a strong
pump light are transmitted in an optical fiber simultaneously, and the
wavelength of the weak signal is within the range of Raman gain bandwidth of
the pump light, the weak signal light can be amplified. An optical amplifier based
on the SRS mechanism is called a Raman amplifier. The gain of the Raman
amplifier is on-off gain, which is the difference of the output power values when
the amplifier is enabled and disabled.
Raman Amplifier Characteristics
Advantage Disadvantage
⚫ Flexible gain range ⚫ High pump power
⚫ Simple structure ⚫ Low energy conversion

efficiency
⚫ Use of the non-linear effect
⚫ High costs
⚫ Low noise
• The Raman amplifier has three prominent characteristics:
▫ The gain wavelength of a Raman amplifier is determined by pump light

wavelengths. Theoretically, optical signals of any wavelength can be
amplified if only the pump light wavelengths are proper. Raman fiber
amplifiers or RFAs can amplify optical signals in the band that EDFAs
cannot amplify. When multiple pump sources are used, RFAs can obtain a
gain bandwidth much larger than that of EDFAs (whose gain bandwidth is
only 80 nm due to limitation of the energy state transition mechanism).
Therefore, the entire low-loss bandwidth range of fibers, which is from
1270 nm to 1670 nm, can be developed.
▫ The gain medium is the transmission fiber. In this way, RFAs can amplify
optical signals online, which constitutes distributed amplification and
achieves remote pumping and long-haul transmission without regeneration.
RFAs are especially suitable for submarine optical cable communication
where it is inconvenient to deploy repeaters. In addition, amplified optical
signals are distributed along the fiber instead of being concentrated.
Therefore, the optical power is low, which can reduce the non-linear effect,
especially the four-wave mixing (FWM) effect.
▫ The noise figure is low. When being used with EDFAs, RFAs can significantly
lower the system noise figure and extend the transmission distance.
OA Application
OTU OTU
...
...
OM
OD
OA OA OA
OTU OTU
Booster amplifier (BA) Line amplifier (LA) Pre-amplifier (PA)
• According to the position in a DWDM optical transmission network, EDFAs can be

classified into booster amplifiers (BAs), line amplifiers (LAs), and pre-amplifiers
(PAs).
• BA: It is mainly used at the transmit end. It is located after the multiplexer to
increase the power of multiplexed signals and then transmit the signals. Because
the power of multiplexed signals is generally high, there is no high requirement
on the noise figure or gain of the BA; however, it is required that the output
power be relatively high after amplification.
• LA: It is used on the line to periodically compensate for the line transmission loss.
Generally, a small noise figure and a large output optical power of the LA are
required.
Optical Multiplexers and Demultiplexers
TFF
TFF Thin film filter
AWG
AWG Arrayed waveguide grating
λ1 λ2 λn λ1 λ2 λn λ1
λ1 λ2
λ2 λn
OM
OD
...
...
...
λn
Optical multiplexer Optical demultiplexer
• The core components of a WDM system are wavelength division multiplexing

components, which are optical multiplexers and demultiplexers. They are actually
optical filters, and their performance largely determines the performance of the
entire system.
• A multiplexer mainly combines multiple signal wavelengths into one optical fiber
for transmission. A demultiplexer mainly separates multiple signal wavelengths
transmitted over the same optical fiber.
• WDM components determine WDM system performance. The requirements are

as follows: There is plenty of multiplexed channels, the insertion loss is low, the
crosstalk attenuation is large, and the passband range is wide.
• Theoretically, a multiplexer is the same as a demultiplexer. Their only difference
lies in the optical signal input and output directions.
Thin Film Filter (TFF)
λ1–λ4
λ1 filter
Self-focusing lens
λ1
λ3 filter
λ2
λ3
λ4 Glass
• A TFF comprises tens of alternating layers of high- and low-refractive-index thin

films, which are made of different materials and have varying thickness. The
thickness of each thin film is 1/4 of a wavelength.
• The TFF allows passband transmission of required wavelengths, but blocks those
unwanted wavelengths through a stopband, exhibiting the required filtering
characteristic.
• The main features of a TFF multiplexer are as follows: The component is small-
factor with stable structure, signal passband is flat and independent from
polarization, insertion loss is low, and channel spacing is proper. The
disadvantage is that the number of channels is not large.
• In a WDM system, it is ideal to use TFFs as multiplexers when only 4 to 16
wavelengths need to be multiplexed.
Arrayed Waveguide Grating (AWG)
Waveguide array
W1
Wn
Fiber array
λ1 + λ2 + λ3 + …λn λ1
λn
• AWG is a planar waveguide device developed based on optical integration

technologies. Typically, an AWG is fabricated by depositing a thin layer of silicon
dioxide (SiO2) glass on the silicon chip and printing it into required pattern using
photolithography.
• AWGs are commonly used as multiplexers/demultiplexers in DWDM systems. One

outstanding representative of AWGs was developed by NTT (in Japan). This AWG
has small wavelength spacing, supports many channels, and provides flat
passband. It is very suitable for ultra-high speed and large-capacity WDM
systems.
Supervisory Technologies
TFF
OSC Optical supervisory technology
AWG
ESC Electrical supervisory technology
• Supervisory technologies can be classified into optical supervisory technology and

electrical supervisory technology.
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC)
⚫ Requirements on the OSC:
 The pump optical wavelength on the OA board should not be restricted.
 Services in the 1310 nm window in future should not be restricted.
 The OSC is still valid when the OA board fails.
 The OSC supports ultra-long haul transmission and provides the function of span-specific
bidirectional transmission.
OSC OSC
OTU1
OTU1 OTU1
FIU
FIU
SCC
SCC
OTU2
OTU2 OTU2
OD
OM
OTU2
OTU3
OTU3 OTU3
OTU3
OTU4
OTU4 OTU4
OTU4
• According to ITU-T Recommendations, the OSC of a DWDM system should be

completely independent of the main channel, and the independence of the OSC
from the main channel is fully reflected in the signal flow.
▫ In the transmit direction of an optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) site, the

OSC is connected to the main channel only after the main channel is
multiplexed and amplified. In the receive direction, the OSC is first
separated, and then the system performs pre-amplification and
demultiplexing for the main channel.
▫ In the transmit direction of an optical line amplifier (OLA) site, the OSC is
the last to be connected. In the receive direction of the OLA site, the OSC is
the first to be separated.
• It can be seen that during the entire transmission process, the OSC is not involved
in amplification, but is terminated and regenerated at each site. This is the
opposite of the main channel. The main channel participates in optical power
amplification of the entire process, but is not terminated or regenerated on the
entire line.
• OSC wavelength: 1510 nm

• OSC rate: 2 Mbit/s
• Receiver sensitivity of an OSC: up to –48 dBm

OSC Frame Structure
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 ... TS14 TS15 TS16 ... TS31
TS0 FA framing byte TS17 F2 byte

TS1 E1 byte TS18 F3 byte
TS2 F1 byte TS19 E2 byte
TS14 ALC byte Others Reserved
TS3-TS13, TS15 D1 to D12 bytes
• FA: framing byte
• E1 and E2: orderwire phone
• ALC: automatic level control
• F1, F2, and F3: transparent transmission of data in the same direction
• D1 to D12: DCC bytes

Electric Supervisory Channel (ESC)
⚫ Feature:
 Simple structure and low costs
 Redundancy backup
 Optimized optical power budget
 Reduced system complexity
OTU1 OTU1
SCC
OTU2 OTU2
OM
SCC
OD
OTU3 OTU3
OTU4 OTU4
• The SCC board sends supervisory information to an OTU board, and the OTU
board encapsulates signals into its signal transmission unit frame (OTN frame
structure, SDH frame structure, or using the pilot-tone technology).
• The ESC saves the investment for OSC and FIU boards, disregards the insertion
loss of the FIU boards, and improves the optical power budget.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following is not an advantage of

EDFAs?
A. High gain
B. High output power

C. Large working optical bandwidth
D. Gain flatness
• Answer: D
Summary
⚫ WDM overview
⚫ WDM transmission media
⚫ Key technologies of WDM
Thank you. 把数字世界带入每个人、每个家庭、
每个组织，构建万物互联的智能世界。
Bring digital to every person, home, and
organization for a fully connected,
intelligent world.
Co pyright© 2021 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A l l Rights Reserved.
The information in this document may contain predictive

statements including, without limitation, statements regarding
the future financial and operating results, future product
portfolio, new technology, etc. There are a number of factors
that
could cause actual results and developments to differ materially
from those expressed or implied in the predictive statements.
Therefore, such information is provided for reference purpose
only and constitutes neither an offer nor an acceptance. Huawei
may change the information at any time without notice.
Transmission Network Products
Foreword
⚫
The advent of flattened networks brings increasingly simplified transmission networks and less diversified transmission
network products on the live network. Currently, the following three types of transmission network products are used
based on application scenarios:
 Huawei OptiXtrans E9600 series subracks and OptiX OSN 9800 U series subracks, a next-generation large-capacity and intelligent
OTN products that integrate packet functions. They are intended for 100G and beyond, and can be applied to various networks, such
as super backbone, backbone, and metro networks.
 Huawei OptiXtrans E6600 series subracks and OptiX OSN 1800 II Pro/1800 V Pro, targeted for metro edge node applications. They
can be used together with metro and backbone WDM network devices to form a complete E2E OTN network for unified
management.
 Huawei OptiXtrans DC908, an optical-electrical integrated WDM transmission device designed for Data Center Interconnect (DCI).
⚫ The chapter describes some basic knowledge about transmission network products, such as product positioning,
subracks, and boards.
Objectives
On completion of this course, you will be able to:

 Describe the positioning and application scenarios of Huawei OptiXtrans
E9600/E6600 series and OptiXtrans DC908.
 Understand the appearance and cabinets of Huawei OptiXtrans E9600/E6600
series and OptiXtrans DC908.
 List the boards and functions of Huawei OptiXtrans E9600/E6600 series and
OptiXtrans DC908.
Contents
1. Product Overview
2. Cabinets and Subracks
3. Boards
OptiXtrans E9600 Series
Item OptiXtrans E9605 OptiXtrans E9612 OptiXtrans E9624
Appearance
Subrack
dimensions (H x W 177 mm x 442 mm x 295 mm 347.2 mm x 442 mm x 295 mm 747.2 mm x 442 mm x 295 mm
x D)
Maximum number 1:1 mode: 12 large slots or 24

small slots
of service board 5 13
1:3 mode: 10 large slots or 20
slots small slots
• Note: The E9624 subrack supports slot splitting. One 11 U slot of the E9624
subrack can be split into two 5.5 U slots.
OptiX OSN 9800 Series
OSN 9800
OSN 9800 OSN 9800 OSN 9800
Item OSN 9800 U32 OSN 9800 U64 OSN 9800 P32 Universal
U16 U32 Enhanced U64 Enhanced
Platform Subrack
Appearance
2200 mm x 600 2200 mm x 600

847 mm X 442 1900 mm x 498 1900 mm x 498 1390 mm x 96
Subrack mm x 600 mm mm x 600 mm 397 mm x 442 mm
mm x 295 mm mm x 295 mm mm x 295 mm mm x 315 mm
dimensions (without the (without the
(integrated
(without the
(integrated
(without the
x 295 mm (without
(H x W x D) cabinet+subracks cabinet+subrack the cabinet)
cabinet) cabinet) cabinet) cabinet)
) s)
Maximum DC power supply:

number of 16
14 32 64 32 64 32
service AC power supply:
board slots 15
OptiXtrans E6600 Series
Item OptiXtrans E6608T OptiXtrans E6608 OptiXtrans E6616
Appearance
Subrack
88.1 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm 88.1 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm 222 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
dimensions (excluding mounting ears) (excluding mounting ears) (excluding mounting ears)
(H x W x D)
Maximum
number of DC-powered chassis: 7 DC-powered chassis: 6 DC-powered chassis: 14
service board AC-powered chassis: 5 AC-powered chassis: 4 AC-powered chassis: 12
slots
Highlights of the OptiXtrans E9600
⚫ High integration
 Industry's highest-integration platform. One cabinet can house five E9612 subracks and support a maximum of
256 100GE services.
 0.33 W/Gbit, which is 35% lower than the industry average
⚫ New optical layer

 New spectrum: Super C band with a maximum of 120 wavelengths@50 GHz
 New rate: Super 200G, 200G–800G programmable
 Up to 48T/fiber capacity, 60 wavelengths x 800G@100 GHz
⚫ Optical-electrical integration
 Industry's most powerful optical-electrical integration platform, integrating multiple optical and electrical
functions and simplifying sites
 2/3 equipment room space saving, significantly reducing site cost
Highlights of the OptiXtrans E6600
⚫ Convergence and simplification

Unified access and bearing of multiple services, bringing more service connections, higher bandwidth efficiency, and lower
latency

Ultra-broadband access of 1.5 Mbit/s to 100 Gbit/s services, including PCM, PDH, SDH, OTN, and packet services, meeting
various service requirements of industries
⚫ Ultra-large capacity
 Up to 800G OTN, 400G packet, 40G SDH higher-order, and 5G SDH lower-order capacities per subrack for the OptiXtrans E6608

2 U, high integration, and energy saving for the OptiXtrans E6608, reducing customer OPEX

Up to 2.8T OTN, 140G SDH higher-order, and 20G SDH lower-order capacities per subrack for the OptiXtrans E6616
 4-fold increase in capacity for the OptiXtrans E6616, providing 200G per slot; 20-degree ROADM grooming
⚫ Intelligent O&M

Real-time performance visualization and big data analysis for network sub-health, shifting from reactive O&M to proactive O&M

OD/FD-based optical-layer visualization and online real-time monitoring
• Highlights of the OptiXtrans E6608T
▫ Unified transmission
▪ All low-rate services and high-bandwidth services can be encapsulated

into OTN frames for unified transmission.
▫ Unified management
▪ A unified NMS can be used to manage and maintain all SDH and
WDM/OTN devices in a unified manner.
▫ Easy deployment
▪ The case-shaped design features high integration and easy

deployment at any place.
Product Positioning of the OptiXtrans E9600/E6600
E6616
E9624 E9624/
OSN 9800 U32E
ODUk/VC/Packet
E6608
E9612 E9624/
E9624 OSN 9800 U32E
E9624
E6616
E9624/
OSN 9800 U32E
Edge/Access layer Metro/Aggregation layer Backbone/Core layer
• The OptiX OSN 9800 is mainly used at the backbone/core layer, and the
OptiXtrans E9600 is mainly used at the metro/aggregation layer. The OptiXtrans
E9600 & OptiX OSN 9800 and the OptiXtrans E6600/OptiX OSN 1800 can form a
complete E2E OTN network for unified management.
Product Positioning of the OptiXtrans DC908
⚫ Huawei OptiXtrans DC908 is an optical-electrical WDM transmission device designed
for DCI. Built to withstand the toughest challenges of the intelligent era, the
OptiXtrans DC908 features simplified deployment in just eight minutes, ultra-
broadband and high integration (with 48T per fiber, future proof for the next five
years), and intelligent, AI-ready, proactive O&M.
• Huawei OptiXtrans DC908 can be widely applied in highly digitalized industries

and enterprise DCI scenarios, such as over the top (OTT) providers, multi-tenant
data centers (MTDCs), Internet exchange providers (IXPs), finance, education,
government, healthcare, energy, transportation, and manufacturing.
Highlights
⚫ Ultra-high bandwidth and integration: 48T/fiber, no need to lease fibers for the next
five years
⚫ High simplification: deployment in 8 minutes, low skill requirements
⚫ Intelligence: AI ready and proactive O&M
⚫ High security
• Ultra-broadband
▫ – 48 Tbit/s@C120 per fiber pair, continuous evolution: The single-fiber

capacity is improved to support smooth upgrade to the C+L band in the
future.
▫ – 100G–600G programmable
• High integration
▫ – Optical-electrical integration: Optical-layer and electrical-layer boards are
deployed in the same subrack, halving the required space. These boards suit
IT and CT equipment rooms and can be deployed with IT devices in the
same cabinet.
▫ – Programmable Muxponder boards: The maximum capacity per slot is 1.2
Tbit/s, and the maximum capacity per chassis is 9.6 Tbit/s@2 U.
• Simplified fiber connections
▫ – One optical-layer board integrates functions of N traditional optical-layer
boards such as optical amplifier (OA), multiplexer/demultiplexer, add/drop
multiplexer, optical supervisory, and optical spectrum analysis boards. This
reduces the number of fiber connections inside the optical layer by 90% to
simplify the optical layer.
▫ – DLC fibers, halving fiber connections required

Typical Application Scenario (1)
⚫ Small networks
 Point-to-point (P2P)/Ring DWDM
 One OptiXtrans DC908 = High-density electrical-layer device + FOADM + OLA
Router/Switch
Router/Switch
DC908 DC908
Storage array Storage array
Data center-1 Data center-2
• FOADM: fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
• OLA: optical line amplifier

⚫ Medium-sized and large networks
 Full mesh: high-density DCI + ROADM device + NCE-T
NCE-T
ROADM
IXP/MTDC IXP/MTDC
DC DC
• DC: data center
• DCI: Data Center Interconnect
• ROADM: reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
• NCE-T: Network Cloud Engine (Transport Domain), that is, NMS
• IXP: Internet exchange point
• MTDC: multi-tenant data center

⚫ Disaster recovery (DR)
 Three centers in two cities: DWDM
Remote DR center
WDM + Storage
Active DC Standby DC
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following items does not belong to "5A"
deployment of the OptiXtrans DC908?
A. Fiber auto-discovery
B. Fiber connection auto-verification

C. Wavelength auto-configuration
D. Port auto-selection
E. Optical-layer auto-commissioning
• Answer: D
Contents
1. Product Overview
3. Boards
Cabinets
Item N66B N63B A63B A66B
Appearance
OSN 9800 U32 enhanced subrack OSN 9800 U32 standard

subrack
OSN 9800 U16 subrack (central
OSN 9800 U32 standard OSN 9800 U32 enhanced
OSN 9800 U32 standard subrack switching subrack)
subrack subrack
OSN 9800 U16 subrack (used as E9624 subrack
Supported OSN 9800 U16 subrack (used E9624 subrack
a service subrack)
devices as a service subrack) OSN 9800 universal platform subrack
OSN 9800 universal platform OSN 9800 universal platform
OSN 9800 universal platform OSN 9800 P32 subrack subrack
subrack
subrack E9612 subrack E9612 subrack
E9605 subrack E9605 subrack
• Dimensions of an N66B/A66B cabinet (H x W x D):
▫ Without a height extension frame: 2200 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm
▫ With a height extension frame: 2600 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm
• Dimensions of an N63B/A63B cabinet (H x W x D):
▫ Without a height extension frame: 2200 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm
▫ With a height extension frame: 2600 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm

Huawei OptiXtrans DC908 Chassis
Panel Service board System control board
• When two system control boards need to be configured in 1+1 backup mode,
replace the panel on the left with a system control and communication (SCC)
board, and insert the SCC board in the direction reverse to the SCC board on the
right.
• Fan tray assemblies are installed on the rear side of the OptiXtrans DC908
chassis. Through front-to-rear airflow, the heat generated by service boards can
be dissipated out of the chassis. This ensures that the chassis is running within a
normal temperature range.
• The power modules have a built-in heat dissipation system. Through side-to-rear
airflow, the heat generated by power modules can be dissipated out of the
chassis. This ensures that the power modules are running within a normal
temperature range.
Huawei OptiXtrans E6608T Chassis
DC chassis
System control board Fan board
AC chassis
Mounting ear Power board Service board Mounting ear
• The AC chassis is used as an example to describe the name of each module.
• The E6608T chassis has the following types:
Chassis Type Model Start Version Description
Backplane Subrack (shelf,

V100R019C1 frame),OptiXtrans
TMBK31AFB
0SPC300 E6608T,TMBK31AFB,Assembly
E6608T DC Chassis(2U,DC)
chassis Backplane Subrack (shelf,
TMBK32AFB
Chassis(2U,DC,with fiber storage)
Backplane Subrack (shelf,
TMBK33AFB
E6608T AC Chassis(2U,AC)
chassis Backplane Subrack (shelf,
TMBK34AFB
Chassis(2U,AC,with Fiber Storage)
Huawei OptiXtrans E6608 Chassis
DC chassis
System control board Fan board
Mounting ear Power board AC chassis Service board Mounting ear


• Through left-to-right airflow, fan tray assemblies draw external air into the
chassis and dissipate heat by blowing air out of the subracks, forming air ducts
from left to right.
Huawei OptiXtrans E6616 Chassis
System control board Service board Fan board
DC chassis AC chassis
Mounting ear Power board Mounting ear
• The OptiXtrans E6616 chassis is a 5 U case-shaped device of high integration.
• The E6616 chassis supports MS-OTN-based universal service grooming. According

to the planned chassis capability, a single chassis supports a maximum of 2.8
Tbit/s OTN capacity, 160 Gbit/s SDH higher-order capacity, and 20 Gbit/s SDH
lower-order capacity.
• Through left-to-right airflow, fan tray assemblies draw external air into the
chassis and dissipate heat by blowing air out of the subracks, forming air ducts
from left to right.
Huawei OptiXtrans E9624 Subrack
Power supply and interface area

Fan tray area
System control and cross-

connect board area
Service board area
Service board area
Fiber routing area

Fan tray area
• The areas in the E9624 subrack in 1:1 cross-connect mode are used as an
example.
• The E9624 subrack supports two cross-connect modes: 1:1 and 1:3. The two
modes differ in the number of cross-connect boards, number of available slots
for service boards, cross-connect capacity, and application scenarios.
• Compared with the 1:1 cross-connect mode, the 1:3 cross-connect mode has the
following features:
▫ The single-slot service grooming capacity is improved to adapt to more

large-capacity service boards.
▫ Two CXCS cross-connect boards are required for the 1:3 cross-connect
mode. Therefore, the number of 11 U service board slots supported by the
1:3 cross-connect mode is two less than that supported by the 1:1 cross-
connect mode.
▫ The 1:3 cross-connect mode is mainly applied to the backbone core layer,
and the 1:1 cross-connect mode is mainly applied to the metro aggregation
layer.
▫ The 1:1 cross-connect mode supports the configuration of lower power

consumption. In the initial phase of network construction, the 1:1 cross-
connect mode can be used.
Areas in the OptiXtrans E9624 Subrack
Area Element Slot Main Functions
PIU: IU100–IU101 and IU105–

⚫ The PIU boards are in mutual backup. Therefore, the failure of
IU106 any power input to the device does not affect the normal
Power supply and ⚫ Four PIU boards
running of the device.
interface area ⚫ One EFI board EFI: IU103
⚫ The EFI board provides maintenance and management
Reserved: IU102 and IU104 interfaces. The EFI board is powered by the CXP board.
Lower: IU90
Fan tray area Two fan tray assemblies Fan tray assemblies are used to ventilate the device.
Upper: IU91
Optical fibers connecting to boards are routed to the left or right
Fiber routing area Two fiber troughs N/A
side of the device through the upper- and lower-side fiber troughs.
Service boards need to be configured based on the service plan and
24 x 5.5 U service boards Lower: IU1–IU6 and IU7–IU12
Service board area all of them are installed in the two service board areas.
12 x 11 U service boards Upper: IU13–IU18 and IU19–IU24
A slot splitter can be used to split an 11 U slot into two 5.5 U slots.
⚫ Functions:
− The boards manage the subrack and implement inter-NE
communication.
Two universal cross- The boards provide clock signals for service boards and
System control and −
connect, system control, implement inter-board cross-connections and service
cross-connect board IU71–IU72
and clock processing grooming.
area
boards (CXP)
⚫ Protection:
− SCC boards support active/standby protection (1+1).
− Cross-connect units support load sharing.
• The PIU boards on the left and right sides of the EFI board back up each other.
For example, the PIU board in slot IU100 and the PIU board in slot IU105 back up
each other, and the PIU board in slot IU101 and the PIU board in slot IU106 back
up each other.
• Note:
▫ The installed service boards have their ejector levers on the left sides of the
board front panels.
▫ You are advised to install service boards in the outer slots first. In this
manner, if the cross-connect mode needs to be upgraded to 1:3, the CXCS
boards can be installed in slot IU6/IU7/IU18/IU19.
Cross-Connect Capacity
Subrack Working
Max. Cross-Connect Capacity per Slot Max. Cross-Connect Capacity per Subrack
Type Mode
ODUk VC-3/ ODUk VC-3/

OSUflex VC-4 Packet OSUflex VC-4 Packet
VC-12a VC-12a
E9624 400
1:1 mode 400 Gbit/s 160 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 200 Gbit/s 4.8 Tbit/s 4.8 Tbit/s 1.92 Tbit/s 80 Gbit/s 2.4 Tbit/s
Gbit/s
1:3 mode 1 Tbit/s 1 Tbit/s 160 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 200 Gbit/s 10 Tbit/s 10 Tbit/s 1.6 Tbit/s 80 Gbit/s 2 Tbit/s
• a: For a G3CXP board, the centralized grooming of VC-3/VC-12 services is

supported only when the G3CXP board is used together with a G1SXCL board. All
service slots share VC-3/VC-12 cross-connections. The maximum cross-connect
capacity of a single slot or the entire subrack is 80 Gbit/s.
• Two small slots can be combined into one large slot. A small slot is 5.5 U high,
and a large one is 11 U high.
• The E9624 subrack supports grooming of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex), VC-

3/VC-4/VC-12, and packet services.
E9612
System control
board area
Fiber routing area
Service System control

board area board area
Power supply and
Power supply and
interface area
interface area
• By default, only one AUX board is inserted in slot IU73 in an E9612 subrack.
• When the E9612 subrack is configured with the clock function, it is recommended
that two AUX boards be configured to implement clock protection.
Huawei OptiXtrans E9605 Subrack
System control
board area
Power supply and Service board area

Cable tray interface area Fan tray area
Area Composition Slot Main Functions

The PIU/APIU boards are in mutual
Power Two PIU/APIU backup. Therefore, the failure of any
supply PIU/APIU board: power input to the device does not
and boards IU100–U101 affect the normal running of the
interface One or two EFI board: device.
area EFI boards IU71–IU72 The EFI board provides maintenance
and management interfaces.
Fan tray One fan tray The fan tray assembly is used to
IU90
area assembly ventilate the device.
Fiber Optical fibers connecting to boards are
One cable
routing N/A routed to the left or right side of the
tray
area device through the cable tray.
Service boards need to be configured
Service
5 service based on the service plan and all of
board IU1–IU5
board slots them are installed in the service board
area
area.
The two CTU boards work in 1+1
backup mode, provide the system
System control function, and provide system
control Two CTU clock signals for each service board.
IU73–IU74
board boards The CTU board interoperates with the
area NMS to manage each board of the
device and provide communication
between different devices.
Quiz
1. (True or false) Two CXCS cross-connect boards are required for the 1:3 cross-
connect mode. As a result, the number of 11 U slots supported by the 1:3 cross-
connect mode is two less than that supported by the 1:1 cross-connect mode.
Therefore, the maximum cross-connect capacity of the E9624 subrack in 1:3
cross-connect mode is smaller than that in 1:1 cross-connect mode.
A. True
B. False
• Answer: B
Contents
1. Product Overview
3. Boards
◼ Boards of the OptiXtrans E9600
▫ Boards of the OptiXtrans E6600
▫ Boards of the OptiXtrans DC908
Board Type (1)
Board Type Function
Tributary board Locally adds/drops client-side services from/to the WDM side.
Line mode
Locally adds/drops client-side services from/to the WDM side together with the tributary board.
Locally pass through services on the WDM side together with another line board.
Line board Regeneration mode
Receives WDM-side OTN signals and performs O/E conversion and the retiming, reshaping, regeneration
(3R) functions for the OTN signals. Then the board performs E/O conversion and outputs the regenerated
OTN signals.
The packet service board performs Layer 2 processing for the received Ethernet services. The processed
Packet board
packets are transmitted to the centralized cross-connect board for flexible grooming.
Performs O-E-O conversion for the received client-side signals and outputs ITU-T-compliant standard
Optical transponder unit
DWDM wavelengths.
General service processing Supports hybrid transmission of OTN and SDH services. Compared with an OTN tributary board, a general
board service processing board additionally supports SDH services.
Turbo WDM board Processes 200G/400G/800G Turbo WDM line services.
Receives and transmits STM-n (n=1, 4, 16, 64) optical signals, or receives Ethernet services, manages
TDM board
bandwidths, and performs Layer 2 switching.
Board Type (2)
Board Type Function
Cross-connect board Cross-connects services in the subrack, manages configurations, and outputs alarms.
Interoperates with the NMS to manage each board of the device and provide communication between
SCC board
different devices.
Optical
Multiplexes multiple single-wavelength optical signals into one multiplexed signal or demultiplexes one
multiplexer/demultiplexer
multiplexed signal into multiple single-wavelength optical signals.
board
Optical add/drop
Implements optical-layer service grooming for multiple wavelengths.
multiplexer board
Optical supervisory channel Transmits and receives two optical supervisory signals. Extracts and processes system overheads, and then
(OSC) board transmits the processed information to the system control board.
Optical protection board Implements optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client 1+1 protection.
Detects the optical power, standard wavelength, and center wavelength of signals over the fixed/flexible
Spectrum analyzer board
grid wavelengths.
Variable optical attenuator Queries its preconfigured attenuation and adjusts the optical power for optical signals according to the
board control command sent by the system control board.
OTN Tributary Boards
Board Name Board Description
TNG1T206 6 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TNV1T210U 10 x 2.5/10 Gbit/s universal tributary service processing board
TNV1T502 2 x 200GE tributary service processing board
TNV8T402 2 x 100 Gbit/s tributary service processing board (QSFP28)
TNV8T404 4 x 100 Gbit/s tributary service processing board (QSFP28)
TNV2T601 1 x 400GE tributary service processing board
TNG1T401 Board and Its Application
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
Cross-connect board
Client-side device
100GE/ 1x 1x
OTU4 ODU4/ODUflex ODU4/ODUflex 1 x OTU4
board
N401
T401
• Conversion between one 100GE/OTU4 optical signal and one ODU4/ODUflex

electrical signal
• High-density 100 Gbit/s tributary board, saving service slots.
• Front panel dimensions (H x W x D): 237.1 mm x 30.5 mm x 220.0 mm

• Weight: 1.54 kg
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
QSFP28-100G(4x25G)-850nm(SR4)- Transmits service
TX MPO-MMF-0.1km: MPO optical signals to the
Other optical modules: LC client-side device.
QSFP28-100G(4x25G)-850nm(SR4)- Receives the service

optical signals output
RX MPO-MMF-0.1km: MPO by the client-side
Other optical modules: LC device.
Functions and Features of the TNG1T401 Board
Function and Feature Description
Supports the following service conversions:
1 x 100GE (Bit transparent mapping)/(MAC transparent mapping) <-> 1 x ODU4
Basic functions
1 x 100GE (MAC transparent mapping) <-> 1 x ODUflex
1 x OTU4 <-> 1 x ODU4
100GE: Ethernet services at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s
Client-side service type
OTU4: OTN services at a rate of 111.81 Gbit/s
PRBS Supported
Electrical-layer ASON Supported
LPT Not supported
IEEE 1588v2 Supported when 100GE(GFP-F) services are received
Physical-layer clock Supported when 100GE services are received
Protection ODUk SNCP/Client 1+1 protection/Tributary SNCP
Loopback Inloop/Outloop/ODUk inloop/ODUk outloop
RTU Supported
LLDP Supported when 100GE services are received on the client side
• ALS is supported when this board receives 100GE services, and ESC is supported
when the board receives OTU4 services.
OTN Line Boards
TNG1N206 6 x 10 Gbit/s line service processing board
TNU6N402 2 x 100 Gbit/s line service processing board
TNS2N220 20 x 10 Gbit/s line service processing board
TNS7N502C01 2 x 100/200 Gbit/s programmable hybrid line service processing board (CFP)
TNU3N602 2 x 200/400 Gbit/s programmable line service processing board
TNU6N502 2 x 100/200 Gbit/s programmable line service processing board (CFP)
TNG1N401 Board and Its Application
Cross-connect board
Multiplexer/Demulti
Multiplexer/Demulti
Multiplexer/Demulti
plexer board
plexer board
plexer board
ODUk OTU4
N401
N401
1 x OTU4 1 x OTU4
Line mode Regeneration mode
• Weight: 1.7 kg
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical
IN LC demultiplexer unit or the optical add/drop multiplexer
(OADM) unit.
Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical
OUT LC multiplexer unit or the OADM unit.
Functions and Features of the TNG1N401 Board
Function and Feature Description
Supports the following service conversions:
Basic functions 80 x ODU0/40 x ODU1/10 x ODU2/10 x ODU2e/2 x ODU3/1 x ODU4/80 x ODUflex <-> 1 x OTU4
Supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3, and ODUflex signals.
When the OTU4-4x28G-10km module is used: FEC
FEC type
Other optical modules: LC
PRBS Supported
ESC Supported
Used as a regeneration board Supported

Tunes optical signals on the WDM side within the range of 96 wavelengths in extended C band at a 50
Tunable wavelength
GHz channel spacing.
Physical-layer clock Supported
Optical-layer ASON Supported
Protection SNCP/ODUk SNCP/Intra-board 1+1 protection
• ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex)

Packet Service Boards
Receives FE/GE/10GE/100GE services, processes packet services, and transmits the packet services to the
TNV2E224
cross-connect board for device-level centralized grooming.
Receives FE/GE/10GE/25GE services, processes packet services, and transmits the packet services to the
TNV3E224
cross-connect board for device-level centralized grooming.
Receives 50GE/100GE services, processes packet services, and transmits the packet services to the cross-
TNV3E402
connect board for device-level centralized grooming.
TNV2E224 Board and Its Application
Client-side device
Cross-connect
24 x FE/GE
Packets
board
E224
24 x 10GE
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Transmits service optical signals to the client-side
TX1–TX24 LC
device.
Receives the service optical signals output by the
RX1–RX24 LC client-side device.
Functions and Features of the TNV2E224 Board
Function Description
Basic functions Receives Ethernet service signals and processes packet services.
QoS Supported
QinQ Supported
Jumbo Frame Supported
802.1Q Supported
E-Line (VPWS) Supported
ETH-OAM Supported
MPLS-TP OAM Supported

Intra-board and inter-board LAG protection
PW APS 1:1 protection
Protection
Tunnel APS 1:1 protection
ERPS V1/V2
Optical Transponder Boards
TNG1M210D Service aggregation board that converges 10 x Any-rate signals into 2 x OTU2 signals
TNG1M402D Optical transponder unit (OTU) board that multiplexes 2 x 100 Gbit/s signals into 1 x 200 Gbit/s signal
TNG2M402D 2 x 100 Gbit/s OTU board
TNG1M402DM OTU board that multiplexes 2 x 100 Gbit/s signals into 1 x 200 Gbit/s signal
TNG2M402DM 2 x 100 Gbit/s multi-function OTU board
TNG1M404DM OTU board that multiplexes 4 x 40 Gbit/s signals into 2 x 100 Gbit/s signals
Programmable OTU board that multiplexes 20 x 10GE or 2 x 100GE signals into 1 x 100/200 Gbit/s
TNG1M520SM
signal
TNG1M504DM Programmable OTU board that multiplexes 4 x 100 Gbit/s signals into 2 x 100/200 Gbit/s signals
TNG2M402D Board and Its Application
Multiplexer/Demulti
C lient-side device
plexer board
100GE/OTU4 OTU4
M402D
100GE/OTU4 OTU4
Working Mode Mapping Path

• 2 x 100GE <-> 2 x ODU4 (bit transparent
mapping/MAC transparent mapping) <-> 2 x OTU4
Transponder mode • 2 x 100GE <-> 2 x ODUflex <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 2 x
OTU4
• 2 x OTU4 <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 2 x OTU4
• Weight: 1.8 kg
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical
IN1–IN2 LC
demultiplexer unit or the OADM unit.
OUT1– Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical
LC multiplexer unit or the OADM unit.
OUT2
Transmits service optical signals to the client-side
TX1–TX2 LC device.
Receives the service optical signals output by the
RX1–RX2 LC client-side device.
Functions and Features of the TNG2M402D Board
ALS Supported when non-OTN services are received on the client side
Tunes optical signals on the WDM side within the range of 96 wavelengths in extended C band at a 50
Tunable wavelength
GHz channel spacing.
Supported on the WDM side
PRBS The PRBS test function in the optical port direction is supported only when OTU4 services are received
on the client side.
ESC Supported
LPT Not supported
Client side: FEC (OTU4), RS_FEC (100GE)
FEC encoding
WDM side: FEC and SDFEC2
Latency measurement Supported
IEEE 1588v2 Supported when 100GE (MAC transparent mapping) services are received
Protection ODUk SNCP/Client 1+1 protection/Intra-board 1+1 protection
Loopback Supports WDM-side and client-side optical port loopbacks and channel loopbacks.
RTU Supported
General Service Processing Boards
12 x 10 Gbit/s Any-rate service processing board (OTN tributary board, OTN & SDH hybrid line board,
TNG1A212
and SDH line board)
• The A212 board is a general service processing board. Each port can be used as a
tributary port, an OTN line port, an SDH line port, or a line port (regeneration
mode). When the A212 board ports are used as OTN line ports and SDH line
ports simultaneously, the sum of the number of OTN line ports receiving STM-
16/STM-64 services and the number of SDH line ports receiving STM-64 services
is less than or equal to 3.
▫ *To use a port on the A212 board as a line port (in line mode) to receive
SDH services, an SDH service license is required.
▫ *The A212 board supports a maximum of 40 Gbit/s SDH services, regardless

of whether its port is used as an OTN or SDH line port.
TNG1A212 Board and Its Application
Its port used as an OTN line port. Its port used as an SDH line port.
C ross-connect board
Multiplexer/Demulti
plexer board
A212
A212
A212
12 x STM-n (n=1,4,16)/ 12 x STM-n (n=1,4,16)/
4 x STM-64 4 x STM-64
(total capacity ≤ 40 (total capacity ≤ 40
Gbit/s) Gbit/s)
• When the TNG1A212 board port is used as an OTN line port, the following signal
conversion functions are supported:
▫ 80 x ODU0/40 x ODU1/80 x ODUflex/10 x ODU2 <-> 10 x OTU2
▫ 10 x ODU2e <-> 10 x OTU2e

▫ An optical port supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex
signals.
TNG1A212 Board and Its Application
Its port used as a line port Its port used as a

(regeneration mode). tributary port.
Multiplexer/Demultiplex
Multiplexer/Demultiplex
C lient-side device
Backplane
er board
er board
A212
A212
12 x OTU2/OTU2e 12 x OTU2/OTU2e
• When this board port is used as an OTN tributary port, the following signal
conversion functions are supported:
▫ ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any -> ODU0)
▪ 12 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 12 x ODU0
▪ 12 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals) <-> 12 x ODU1
▫ ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any -> ODU2(e))
▪ n x 10GE LAN (GFP-F)/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-
192/OTU2/FC800/FICON8G <-> n x ODU2
▪ n x 10GE LAN (BMP)/OTU2e/FC1200/FICON10G <-> n x ODU2e
▫ ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any -> ODUflex)
▪ 12 x 3G-SDI/3G-SDIRBR/FC400/FICON4G/FC800/FICON8G/10GE LAN
(GFP-F) <-> 12 x ODUflex
▪ 4 x FC1600 <-> 4 x ODUflex
▪ ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1 -> ODU1 -> ODU0)
▪ 12 x OTU1 <-> 24 x ODU0
▪ ODU1 convergence mode (12 x Any -> ODU1)
▪ 12 x (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> ODU1
Functions and Features of the TNG1A212 Board (1)
Function (OTN) Description Function (SDH) Description
FEC encoding FEC/AFEC-2 SDH ASON Not supported
Outband DCN Supported

PRBS Supported
Protection SNCP/1+1 linear MSP/Ring MSP
Electrical-layer ASON Not supported
SDH clock
Supported
Supported synchronization
ESC
IEEE 1588v2 Not supported
Regeneration board Supported
Loopback VC-3/VC-4/VC-12 channel loopback
Physical-layer clock Supported VC-3/VC-4/VC-12 services and VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-
Service processing
4-64c concatenation services
Protection Tributary SNCP/ODUk SNCP
ALS Supported
The TNG1A212 board can substitute for the
Substitution relationship
TNG1N210 and TNG1N206 boards.
Tunable wavelength Supported
Loopback Supported
• The preceding table lists the functions and features of the TNG1A212 board
when its port functions as a line port.
Functions and Features of the TNG1A212 Board (2)
PRBS Supported
ESC Supported when OTU1/OTU2/OTU2e services are received
LPT Supported only when the client-side service type is FE/GE/10GE LAN
IEEE 1588 V2 Supported (Not supported when a port is equipped with an electrical module)
Client 1+1 protection/ODUk SNCP/Tributary SNCP (Tributary SNCP is supported only

Protection
when OTN, SDH, or SONET services are received on the client side.)
Substitution relationship The TNG1A212 board can substitute for the TNG1T212 and TNG1T206 boards.
Ethernet service encapsulation mode Bit transparent mapping (11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G)
Loopback Supported
ITU-T G.8275.1 Supported (Not supported when a port is equipped with an electrical module)
ITU-T G.8273.2 Supported
• The preceding table lists the functions and features of the TNG1A212 board
when its port functions as a tributary port.
• Note: In ODUflex non-convergence mode, when the E9624 subrack works in 1:1
cross-connect mode, the board supports a maximum access capability of 100
Gbit/s services; when the E9624 subrack works in 1:3 cross-connect mode, the
board supports a maximum access capability of 120 Gbit/s services.
• In ODU2 non-convergence mode, when the E9624 subrack works in 1:1 cross-
connect mode, n is 10; when the E9624 subrack works in 1:3 cross-connect mode,
n is 12.
Turbo WDM Boards
TNU5NP400 1 x 200 Gbit/s Turbo WDM universal line service processing board (that can be expanded to 400 Gbit/s)
TNU5NP400E 1 x 200 Gbit/s Turbo WDM extended line service processing board
1 x 400 Gbit/s Turbo WDM line service processing board (that can be expanded to 800 Gbit/s, single-fiber
TNS3NP800S
bidirectional)
TNS3NP800SE 1 x 400 Gbit/s Turbo WDM extended line service processing board (single-fiber bidirectional)
TNU5NP400/TNU5NP400E Board
Board Port Silkscreen Port Type Function

Receives optical signals that are output by the
IN LC
line side.
OUT LC Transmits optical signals to the line side.

NP400 Receives one OTUC2 optical signal from the
EXP_RX LC
OUT port of the NP400E board.
Transmits one OTUC2 optical signal to the IN
EXP_TX LC
port of the NP400E board.
Receives one OTUC2 optical signal from the
IN LC
EXP_TX port of the NP400 board.
NP400E
Transmits one OTUC2 optical signal to the
OUT LC
EXP_RX port of the NP400 board.
TNU5NP400E TNU5NP400
• Note:
▫ When the NP400 board applies to a 200G system, the EXP_RX and EXP_TX
ports cannot be directly connected.
▫ Only when the NP400 board and NP400E board apply to a 400G system,
the EXP_RX and EXP_TX ports are used.
TNU5NP400/TNU5NP400E Board and Its Application
200G
OTUC2
NP400
NP400
400G
2 x OTUC2
(2 x λ) NP400
NP400
OTUC2 OTUC2
(1 x λ) (1 x λ)
NP400E NP400E
• Cross-connect capacity: ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex)/80G SDH/200G packet
• The NP400 board and NP400E board are Turbo WDM boards.
• The NP400 board can be independently used in a 200G system or can be used
together with the NP400E board in a 400G system.
• The NP400E board must be used together with the NP400 board in a 400G
system.
Functions and Features of the TNU5NP400/TNU5NP400E Board
Function (OTN) Description Function (Packet) Description
QoS Supported
FEC encoding SDFEC
E-LAN Supported
PRBS Supported on the WDM side E-Line Supported
CFM Supported
ESC Supported
EFM Not supported
IEEE 1588v2 BC/OC mode MPLS-TP OAM Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.8113.1
Physical-layer clock Supported IGMP snooping Not supported

Tunnel APS/PW APS/LAG
Protection ODUk SNCP Protection
ERPS V1/V2
WDM-side loopback Service transmission mode PW/QinQ
Loopback ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or flex) channel
loopback
Function (SDH) Description
Optical-layer ASON Not supported In 1:1 mode of the E9624 subrack, a maximum of 40
Basic functions Gbit/s services is supported.
Electrical-layer ASON Supported In 1:3 mode of the E9624 subrack, a maximum of 80
Gbit/s services is supported.
ITU-T G.8273.2 Supported only by the E9624 subrack
Protection SNCP/1+1 single-ended linear MSP/Ring MSP
ITU-T G.8275.1 Supported SDH synchronous clock Supported
Loopback VC channel loopback
• The NP400 board multiplexes and demultiplexes two optical signals. That is, the
NP400 board receives one OTUC2 optical signal from the NP400E board and
converts its own OTUC2 optical signal and the received OTUC2 optical signal into
one multiplexed optical signal.
TDM Boards
TNV1EMS20 20-port Ethernet service processing board
TNV4S216 16 x STM-N (N=1, 4, or 16)/8 x STM-64 optical interface board with a capacity not greater than 80G
Application and Functions of the TNV1EMS20 Board
Receives 20 Ethernet services, encapsulates
and maps the services into SDH signals,
Client-side device Basic and then forwards the signals to the SDH
10GE (SFP+)/ VC-3/VC-4/VC-12
functions plane for transmission. The maximum
EMS20
GE/FE(eSFP) (Capacity ≤ 2 x 2.5G)
uplink bandwidth of the board is 2 x 2.5
Gbit/s.
Ethernet
EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN
type
Dynamic
MAC 2 x 16K
address
QoS Supported
Test frame Supported
VC12: 1008
Bound
VC3: 96
bandwidth
VC4: 32
• The EMS20 board is used to provide access to Ethernet services, manage

bandwidths, and achieve Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.
• Note:
▫ Ports on the board are classified into two groups (TX1/RX1 to TX10/RX10
and TX11/RX11 to TX20/RX20). The two groups cannot communicate with
each other at Layer 2.
▫ All ports on the EMS20 board support GE optical ports, GE electrical ports,
and FE optical ports.
▫ Only the TX1/RX1 and TX11/RX11 ports support 10GE optical ports.
Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Boards

TNG2UD40 40-channel demultiplexer board (Super C band)
TNG2UM40 40-channel multiplexer board (Super C band)
TNG2UM40V 40-channel multiplexer board with the variable optical attenuator (VOA) (Super C band)
TNG3D48 48-channel demultiplexer board (Extended C band)
TNG3M48 48-channel multiplexer board (Extended C band)
TNG3M48V 48-channel multiplexer board with the VOA (Extended C band)
TNG2D60 60-channel demultiplexer board (Super C band)
TNG2M60 60-channel multiplexer board (Super C band)
TNG2M60V 60-channel multiplexer board with the VOA (Super C band)
TNG2ITL Interleaver (Super C band)
TNG3ITL Interleaver (Extended C band)
TNG2UITL Interleaver board (Super C band)
• As an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, the ITL board multiplexes and
demultiplexes wavelength signals at a 50 GHz or 100 GHz channel spacing.
• As an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, the UITL board multiplexes
and demultiplexes wavelength signals at a 75 GHz or 150 GHz channel spacing.
TNG2D60 Board and Its Application
01 01
OTU OTU
M60V
D60
...
...
OA OA
60 60
OTU OTU
• As an optical demultiplexer board, the D60 board demultiplexes one optical

signal into a maximum of 60 optical signals at a 100 GHz channel spacing.
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2D60
Board
Optical Port Specifications
Item Unit Specifications Function Description
Channel spacing GHz 100
The D6001 board demultiplexes one
Operating wavelength D6001: 190.7–196.6 multiplexed optical signal into a
THz
range D6002: 190.75–196.65 maximum of 60 even-wavelength
optical signals.
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5 Basic functions
The D6002 board demultiplexes one
Reflectance dB < –40 multiplexed optical signal into a
maximum of 60 odd-wavelength
Adjacent channel optical signals.
dB ≥ 22
isolation
Non-adjacent channel Spectrum application Super C band
dB ≥ 25
isolation Online optical power
Supported
Polarization-dependent monitoring
dB ≤ 0.5
loss
Alarm and performance
Supported
Maximum insertion loss event monitoring
difference between dB ≤3
channels Optical-layer ASON Supported
TNG2M60 Board and Its Application
01 01
OTU OTU
M60V
D60
...
...
OA OA
60 60
OTU OTU
• As an optical multiplexer board, the M60 board multiplexes a maximum of 60

optical signals at a 100 GHz channel spacing into one multiplexed optical signal.
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2M60
Board
Channel spacing GHz 100 The M6001 board multiplexes a
maximum of 60 even-wavelength
Operating wavelength M6001: 190.7–196.6 optical signals into one multiplexed
THz
range M6002: 190.75–196.65 optical signal.
Basic functions
The M6002 board multiplexes a
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
maximum of 60 odd-wavelength
Reflectance dB < –40 optical signals into one multiplexed
optical signal.
Adjacent channel
dB > 22 Spectrum
isolation Super C band
application
Non-adjacent channel
dB > 25 Online optical
isolation Supported
power monitoring
Polarization-dependent
dB ≤ 0.5 Alarm and
loss
performance event Supported
Maximum insertion loss monitoring
difference between nm ≤3
channels Optical-layer ASON Supported
TNG2ITL06 Board and Its Application
01 01
OTU OTU
D60
M60
…
…
60 60
OTU OTU
OA OA
01 01
OTU OTU
M60
D60
…
…
60 60
OTU OTU
ITL
ITL
01 01
OTU OTU
M60
D60
…
…
60 60
OTU OTU
OA OA
01 01
OTU OTU
D60
M60
…
…
60 60
OTU OTU
• As an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, the ITL board multiplexes and
demultiplexes wavelength signals at a 50 GHz or 100 GHz channel spacing.
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2ITL06
Board
Item Specifications Function Description
Input channel spacing 100 GHz Multiplexes and demultiplexes C_ODD and
Basic functions
C_EVEN signals.
Output channel spacing 50 GHz
Spectrum application Super C band
Insertion loss RE-OUT/RO-OUT ≤ 5.0 dB
IN-TE/IN-TO ≤ 2.5 dB Provides an online monitoring optical

port. Through this optical port, a small
Isolation IN-TE/IN-TO ≥ 24 dB number of optical signals can be output to
In-service spectrum the optical spectrum analyzer or the
Maximum reflectance –40 dB detection and optical spectrum analyzer board. In this
monitoring manner, the spectrum and optical
Directivity ≥ 45 dB performance of the multiplexed optical
signals can be monitored without
Polarization-dependent loss < 0.5 dB interrupting the services.
Input optical power range of the –10 dBm to 23.8 dBm Optical-layer ASON Supported
IN port
Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (ROADM)
Boards
TNG2ADC0824 Contentionless add/drop multiplexer board (Super C band)
TNG3ADC0824 Contentionless add/drop multiplexer board (Extended C band)
TNG2WSMD9 9-port wavelength selective multiplexer/demultiplexer board (Super C band)
TNG3WSMD9 9-port wavelength selective multiplexer/demultiplexer board (Extended C band)
TNG2DWSS20 Dual 20-port wavelength selective switching board (Super C band)
TNG3DWSS20 Dual 20-port wavelength selective switching board (Extended C band)
TNG2TMD20 Dual 20-port wavelength selective switching board (Super C band)
TNG3TMD20 Dual 20-port wavelength selective switching board (Extended C band)
TNG2WSMD9 Board and Its Application
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX MUX
DM1 AM1
IN DM2 AM2 OUT
OA OA
WSMD9 WSMD9
OUT AM2 DM2 IN

OA OA
AM1 DM1
MUX DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
• As a ROADM board, the WSMD9 board is used with the optical multiplexer
board, optical demultiplexer board, or OADM board to perform wavelength
grooming on DWDM network nodes.

Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2WSMD9
Board (1)
Basic functions Implements optical-layer service grooming for multiple wavelengths.
• Supports Super C band.
Spectrum application
• Supports flexible grid wavelength signals.
Online optical performance
Supported
monitoring
Alarm and performance event
Supported
monitoring
Optical power adjustment Supported
• m = 1–964
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2WSMD9
Board (2)
Item Un it Specifications
Slice width GHz 6.25
Total number of slices (m) - 964
Center frequency of each slice THz 190.653125 + (m – 1) x 0.00625
Number of slices on each wavelength (n) - 6–64
Spectral width of each wavelength GHz n x 6.25 (n = 6 to 64)
AMx/EXPI-OUT dB ≤8
Insertion loss
IN-DMx/EXPO ≤ 12
Maximum insertion loss difference between channels dB 1.5
–1 dB spectral width GHz > 6.25 x n – 25 (n = 6 to 64)

Port isolation dB > 25
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35
Reconfiguration time second ≤3
Maximum reflectance dB –40
Polarization-dependent loss dB ≤ 1.5
Attenuation range of each adding wavelength dB 0–15
Attenuation precision of each adding wavelength dB ≤ 1 (0–10 dB), ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Degree - 9
• m = 1–964
TNG2TMD20 Board and Its Application
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
TMD20 TMD20
DM1 … DM19 AM1 … AM19

IN DM20 AM20 OUT
R_OUT T_IN
DAPXF
DAPXF
DWSS20 DWSS20
OUT AM20 DM20 IN

T_IN R_OUT
AM1 … AM19 DM1 … DM19
TMD20 TMD20
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
• As an optical multiplexer/demultiplexer board, the TMD20 board adds/drops 20

optical signals over different wavelengths in colorless mode.
• The preceding figure shows the application of the TMD20 board in a DWDM
system.
▫ Add any wavelengths through ports AM01 to AM20.
▫ Drop any wavelengths through ports DM01 to DM20.

Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2TMD20
Board
Item Unit Specifications
Slice width GHz 6.25
Wavelength adding: adds any wavelengths
Total number of slices (m) - 964
from any directions through ports AM1 to
190.653125 + (m – 1) x 0.00625 AM20 and outputs the wavelengths through
Center frequency of each slice THz
(m = 1 to 964) the OUT port.
Basic functions
Wavelength dropping: receives optical signals
Number of slices per channel width (n) - 6–64
from the main path through the IN port,
Channel width GHz n x 6.25 (n = 6 to 64) drops wavelengths to any directions, and
outputs them through ports DM1 to DM20.
Insertion loss dB AMx-OUT: ≤ 8; IN-DMx: ≤ 8
Supports Super C band.
Maximum insertion loss difference Spectrum application
dB 2.5 Supports flexible grid wavelength signals.
between channels
Optical power
Port isolation dB ≥ 25 Supported
adjustment
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35
Optical-layer loopback Supported
Reconfiguration time s ≤3
Maximum reflectance dB –30 Optical-layer ASON Supported
Directivity dB 25
Attenuation range per wavelength dB 0–15
≤ 1 (0–10 dB)
Attenuation precision per wavelength dB
≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Degree - 20
OA Boards
TNG2DAP Super C-band dual-channel pluggable OA base board
TNG2DAPXF Super C-band dual-channel pluggable OA base board (with XFIU)
TNG3DAPXF Extended C-band dual-channel pluggable OA base board (with XFIU)
TNG2SRAPXF Super C-band enhanced backward Raman and pluggable erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) base board
TNG3SRAPXF Extended C-band enhanced backward Raman and pluggable EDFA base board
TNG2WDAPXF Pluggable C-band OA and L-band OA base board (with C-band/L-band XFIU)
G2DAPXF Board and Its Application
DAPXF
MUX
OA
XFIU
AST2
DMUX
OA
• The DAPXF board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex
the optical supervisory channel (OSC) and main optical channel. It can be used at
the transmit end and receive end.
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Inputs the multiplexed signals to be amplified
LIN LC
(including OSC signals).
Outputs the multiplexed signals that are amplified
LOUT LC
Outputs the main optical channel signals to be
TC LC
amplified (excluding OSC signals).
Inputs the main optical channel signals that are
RC LC
amplified (excluding OSC signals).
TM1 LC Transmits OSC signals.
RM1
LC Receives signals of the 1491 nm OSC.
1491
TM2 LC Transmits OSC signals.
RM2
LC Receives signals of the 1511 nm OSC.
1511
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the G2DAPXF
Board
Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
Board Specifications Unregenerated
transmission in different Supported
spans
Item Specifications
Online optical
OSC operating wavelength range Supported
1478–1522 performance monitoring
(nm)
Gain locking technology Supported
Return loss (dB) > 40
Gain locking mode/Power locking mode/APC
IN-TC: < 0.8 Working mode
mode
IN-TM1: < 1.2
Transient control
RM1-IN: < 1.5 Supported
OSC insertion loss (dB) technology
RC-OUT: < 0.8
RM2-OUT: < 1.5 Performance event and
Supported
OUT-TM2: < 1.4 alarm monitoring
Polarization-dependent loss (dB) < 0.15 TNG1OACU21S: 16–21 dB

TNG1OACU25S: 19–25 dB
TNG1OACU32S: 23–32 dB
TN52OACE101: 20–31 dB
Gain adjustment
TN52OACE105: 23–32 dB
TN52OACE106: 13–23 dB
TN52OACE107: 17–25 dB
TN52OACE108: 8–14 dB
OSC Boards
TNG2AST2 2-channel OSC and clock transmission board
Application and Functions of the TNG2AST2 Board
Controls and processes the receive and
Basic functions transmit signals of two OSC signals.
DAPXF
Physical clock/IEEE 1588v2
AST2
Line fiber quality

Supported
monitoring
Maximum span
37.5 dB
transmission
Regeneration Transmits OSC signals by section and has
function the 3R functions.
• As an OSC board, the AST2 board receives and transmits two OSC signals.
Extracts and processes system overheads, and then transmits the processed
information to the system control board. The AST2 board also supports IEEE
1588v2 clock synchronization and line fiber quality monitoring.

Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Transmits OSC signals and line fiber quality

TM1/TM2 LC monitoring signals, and receives the reflection
signals of line fiber quality monitoring signals.
RM1/RM2 LC Receives OSC signals.
Connected to the coverage-hole fiber so that signals

from the TM1/TM2 port can pass through the
TMI1/TMI2 LC coverage-hole fiber to minimize the coverage hole;
transmits the reflection signals of line fiber quality
monitoring signals to the TM1/TM2 port.
Connected to the coverage-hole fiber: transmits the

signals from the coverage-hole fiber to the line side
TMO1/TMO2 LC for monitoring line fiber quality and receives the
reflection signals of line fiber quality monitoring
signals.
Optical Protection Boards

TNG2DCP Dual-channel optical channel protection board (Super C band)
TNG2OLP Optical line protection board (Super C band)
TNG2WOLP Optical line protection board (Super C band and L band)
TNG2OLP Board and Its Application
Optical line protection/OTS Optical line protection/OMS Intra-board 1+1 protection
protection protection
MUX
DAPXF
DAPXF
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DAPXF
OLP
OLP
OLP
MUX
DAPXF
DMUX
DMUX
DAPXF
DMUX
Port Port
Function
Silkscreen Type
Inputs line signals from the FIU board (optical line

SIN LC protection).
Inputs one WDM-side signal (intra-board 1+1 protection).
Outputs line signals to the FIU board (optical line

SOUT LC protection).
Outputs one WDM-side signal (intra-board 1+1 protection).
Functions as a dual-fed optical port to transmit working

and protection optical signals to the line side (optical line
WOUT/ protection).
LC
POUT Functions as a dual-fed optical port and connected to the
input ports of the working and protection multiplexer
boards (intra-board 1+1 protection).
Functions as a selective-receiving optical port to receive the

working or protection optical signals from the line side
(optical line protection).
WIN/PIN LC Functions as a selective-receiving optical port and
connected to the output ports of the working and
protection demultiplexer boards (intra-board 1+1
protection).
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2OLP
Board
Insertion loss at the Provides optical line protection to ensure
dB ≤4
transmit end that services can be normally received
when the optical line is faulty.
Insertion loss at the
dB ≤ 1.5 Basic functions Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to
receive end
protect services on OTU boards that do
Output optical power not support the dual-fed and selective-
dBm –35 to 24
range receiving function.
Operating wavelength Spectrum application Super C band
nm 1504.5–1572.5
range
Protection scheme Dual-fed and selective-receiving
Power difference
threshold for switching of dB 5 Optical power
the optical switch equalization of the
Supported
working and
Range of the alarm
protection channels
threshold for the optical dB 3–8
power difference Optical-layer ASON Supported
Spectrum Analyzer Boards
TNG2OPM8 8-port tunable-bandwidth optical power detection board (Super C band)
TNG3OPM8 8-port tunable-bandwidth optical power detection board (Extended C band)
TNG3WMU Wavelength monitoring board (C band)
TNG2OPM8 Board and Its Application
OPM8
OTU
D40
OA
OTU
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Connect to the "MON" optical ports of other boards
for performance event monitoring. The ports can be
IN1–IN8 LC
connected to eight "MON" optical ports at the same
time.
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2OPM8
board
Item Specifications Function Description

Optical power
Supported
detection
Operating wavelength range (nm) 1524.3 to 1572.5
Wavelength detection Supported
Single-wavelength optical power The OSNR detection function is available
–30 to –10
detection range (dBm) when the Optical Doctor (OD) system
OSNR detection
license is used and the OD functions are
Optical power detection precision configured.
±1.5
(dB)
Supports flexible grid and Super C-band
Spectrum application
wavelength signals.
Channel spacing (GHz) 50 to 400 (step: 12.5)
VOA Boards

TNG2VA2 2-channel VOA board (Super C band)
TNG2VA2 Board and Its Application
VA2 OA VA2 OA
WSMD9
WSMD9
VA2
OA VA2 OA VA2
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Input optical signals that require optical power
IN1–IN2 LC
adjustment.
OUT1–OUT2 LC Output optical signals with optical power adjusted.

Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TNG2VA2
Board
Item Specifications
Queries its preconfigured attenuation
and adjusts the optical power for two
Inherent insertion Basic functions optical signals according to the
≤ 1.5 dB
loss control command sent by the system
control board.
IN-OUT
Dynamic Super C band Supported
20 dB
attenuation range Power-off protection Supported

1 dB (attenuation ≤ 10 dB) The variable attenuation range is
Adjustment precision 1.5 dB (attenuation ≤ 15 dB) between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB, and the
1.8 dB (attenuation > 15 dB) Attenuation range
attenuation is adjusted in increments
of 0.1 dB.
Cross-Connect Boards
TNG1SXCL 80G VC-3/VC-12 universal lower-order cross-connect board
Higher-order cross-connect board

TNG3CXCS As a cross-connect board, the CXCS board grooms and protects ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex)/VC-
4/packet signals in a subrack.
Application and Functions of the TNG3CXCS Board
Performs centralized grooming of ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3,
Basic functions
4, or flex)/VC-4/packet signals in the subrack.
Two cross-connect boards (CXCS) and two system control,
cross-connect, and multi-protocol processing boards (CXP)
Backup mode form a cross-connect resource pool to implement service
grooming. The system can still function properly if one
Tributary board
cross-connect board is faulty.
Line board
Electrical-layer
Supported
CXCS
ASON
Two small slots can be combined into one large slot. A
small slot is 5.5 U high, and a large one is 11 U high.
The ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) cross-connect
capacity of a large-slot board is 1 Tbit/s. The cross-connect
capacity of the subrack is 10 Tbit/s.
Cross-connect
The VC-4 cross-connect capacity of a large-slot board is
capacity
160 Gbit/s. The cross-connect capacity of the subrack is 1.6
Tbit/s.
The packet cross-connect capacity of a large-slot board is
200 Gbit/s. The cross-connect capacity of the subrack is 2
Tbit/s.
• Note:
▫ The tributary board can be a TDM board or a packet service board.
▫ The line board can be a universal line board.

Universal Line Boards
TNV6U210 10 x 10 Gbit/s universal line service processing board
TNV6U220 20 x 10 Gbit/s universal line service processing board
TNU6U402 2 x 100 Gbit/s universal line service processing board
TNU6U501 1 x 100/200 Gbit/s programmable hybrid line service processing board
TNV6U220 Board and Its Application
ODUk
Multiplexer/Demulti
OTN tributary
board
plexer board
Packets OTU2/OTU2e
U220
Packet board
STM-64/
STM-16
TDM board
Service mapping path (10G line mode)
• OTN: 160 x ODU0/160 x ODUflex/80 x ODU1/20 x ODU2 <-> 20 x

OTU2
• OTN: 20 x ODU2e <-> 20 x OTU2e
• Packet: Packet signals providing a maximum cross-connect capacity
of 200 Gbit/s <-> 60 x ODU0/60 x ODUflex/60 x ODU1/20 x ODU2
<-> 20 x OTU2/OTU2e
• SDH: 8 x STM-64 <-> 8 x ODU2 <-> 8 x OTU2
• SDH: 32 x STM-16 <-> 32 x ODU1 <-> 8 x OTU2
• As a universal line board, the TNV6U220 board supports hybrid transmission of

OTN, SDH, and packet services. It can also transmit only one of the three
services.

Functions and Features of the TNV6U220 Board
Function (OTN) Description Function (Packet) Description
PRBS Supported on the WDM side Service type E-Line (VPWS)/E-LAN (VPLS)
FEC encoding compliant with ITU-T G.709 QoS Supported
FEC encoding
AFEC-2 encoding compliant with ITU-T G.975.1
Tunnel APS 1:1 protection
IEEE 1588v2 Supported PW APS 1:1 protection
Physical-layer clock Supported (ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex) Protection Intra-board and inter-board LAG
protection
WDM-side loopback ERPS V1/V2
Loopback
ODUk (k = 0, 1, or flex) channel loopback
Remote network monitoring
ESC Supported Supported
(RMON)
ODUk SNCP/Tributary SNCP MPLS-TP OAM Supported
Protection
Intra-board 1+1 protection
Ethernet service OAM (CFM) Supported
Optical-layer/Electrical-
Supported
layer ASON Ethernet port OAM (EFM) Not supported
Port mirroring Not supported
Function (SDH) Description
LPT function Not supported
Protection SNCP/1+1 single-ended linear MSP/Ring MSP Maximum frame length 9600 bytes
SDH clock synchronization Supported Port flow control Not supported

Inband DCN Supported
Loopback VC channel loopback/Virtual port loopback
Packet service protection
Outband DCN Supported Not supported
against multiple fiber cuts
SCC Boards

TMF1SCC SCC board
TNG3CXP Universal cross-connect, system control, and clock processing board
TMF1AUX System auxiliary communication board with the clock function
TME1CTU System auxiliary communication board with the clock function
TMF1SCC Board
• Manages device configurations and outputs alarms.
Basic functions • Backs up NE data.
• The SATA card can be used to back up SCC data.
Supports mutual backup of the active and standby boards.

The system has two SCC boards that provide 1+1 hot
Active/Standby backup
backup. When the active SCC board is faulty, data is
automatically switched to the standby SCC board.
Subrack cascading Supported
• As a board that requires only one slot, the TMF1SCC board can be installed in
slot IU71 or IU72.
• The SCC board is an SCC board that interoperates with the NMS to manage
boards and achieve communication between devices.
• Principles for configuring system control boards:
▫ For the master subrack, system control boards must be configured.

▫ For slave subracks, no system control boards need to be configured.
Application and Functions of the TNG3CXP Board
Tributary board • Grooms ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex)/VC-
Line board
4/packet signals in the subrack, manages
Basic functions
configurations, and outputs alarms.
CXP
• Backs up NE data.
DCN
Supported
communication
Active/Standby
1+1 hot backup
backup
Clock function Supported
• SCC boards support active/standby protection
(1+1).
Protection • Cross-connect boards support 1+1 load sharing.
• Supports non-revertive automatic switching and
manual switching.
Electrical-layer
Supported
ASON
• The TNG3CXP board can be installed in slot IU71 or IU72 of the E9624 subrack.
• Note:
▫ The tributary board can be a TDM board or a packet service board.
▫ The line board can be a universal line board.

Cross-Connect Capacity of the TNG3CXP Board
Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity

Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity per Subrack
Subrack Working per Slota
Type Mode
ODUk VC-4 Packet ODUk VC-4 Packet
1:1 mode 400 Gbit/s 160 Gbit/s 200 Gbit/s
E9624
1:3 mode 1 Tbit/s 160 Gbit/s 200 Gbit/s 10 Tbit/s 1.6 Tbit/s 2 Tbit/s
• a: Two small slots can be combined into one large slot. A small slot is 5.5 U high
and a large one is 11 U high.
TMF1AUX Board
• Implements inter-board and inter-subrack communication, and intra-
subrack management.
Basic functions
• The AUX board provides clock signals and frame header signals for
service boards.
The board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme. Two AUX boards back up each
other. In normal cases, one AUX board is the active clock board and the
other is the standby clock board. Service boards select the clock source
Active/Standby switching according to the status of the two AUX boards. When the active AUX board
is faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby AUX board
becomes active, and the service boards select the clock from the current
active AUX board according to the status of the two AUX boards.
Traces external clock sources, service clock sources, or local clock sources to
Clock source selection
provide a synchronization clock source for the board itself and the system.
The board synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
Time synchronization
system.
• Provides Ethernet communication ports.
Port • Provides common and emergency inter-subrack communication ports.
• Provides clock and time signal input and output ports.
DCN communication Supports the interconnection and communication between NEs in IP over
DCC or HWECC mode.
• As a board that requires only one slot, the TMF1AUX board can be installed in
slot IU73 or IU74.
TME1CTU Board
• Implements inter-board and inter-subrack communication, and intra-subrack management.

• Provides ITU-T G.813, ITU-T G.823, and ITU-T G.8275.1-compliant clock signals and frame
Basic functions
header signals for service boards and synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the
upstream system. In this manner, it achieves clock/time synchronization for the NE.
The CTU board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme. Two CTU boards back up each other. In normal
cases, one CTU board is the active clock board and the other is the standby clock board. Service
boards select the clock source according to the status of the two CTU boards. When the active
Active/Standby switching
CTU board is faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby CTU board becomes
active, and the service boards select the clock from the current active CTU board according to
the status of the two CTU boards.
Traces external clock sources, service clock sources, or local clock sources to provide a
Clock source selection
synchronization clock source for the board itself and the system.
Time synchronization The board synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system.
• Provides Ethernet communication ports.
Port • Provides common and emergency inter-subrack communication ports.
• Provides clock and time signal input and output ports.
DCN communication Supports the interconnection and communication between NEs in IP over DCC or HWECC
mode.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following statements about line boards

are incorrect?
A. N401: 1 x 100 Gbit/s line service processing board
B. N210: 10 x 10 Gbit/s line service processing board

C. N502: 2 x 200 Gbit/s line service processing board (CFP)
D. N602: 2 x 400 Gbit/s line service processing board
• Answer: CD
Contents
1. Product Overview
3. Boards
◼ Boards of the OptiXtrans E6600
▫ Boards of the OptiXtrans DC908
Barcode
028467104B000085 Y1 LPS-FRM800-PIU
2 BOM code
7 RoHS code
1 Type code
6 Serial number
8 Board name
4 Manufacture year
3 Vendor
5 Manufacture month
• Type code: "02" indicates a manufactured board and "03" indicates a finished
board.
• BOM code: indicates the last four digits of a BOM code on a board.
• Vendor: indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.
• Manufacture year: indicates the last digit of the year when a board is
manufactured. For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is
used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A indicates 2010,
the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.
• Manufacture month: indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The
value is expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B indicates
November.
• Serial number: The value ranges from 000001 to 999999.
• RoHS compliance:
▫ Y indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and its lead
status is not identified.
▫ Y1/Y3 indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and contains
lead.
▫ Y2 indicates that the product satisfies RoHS6 requirements and is lead-free.
▫ N indicates that the product is not environmentally friendly.
• Board name: indicates the name of a board.
Two-dimensional Barcode
1. One-dimensional 2. Item number 7. Two-dimensional

(1D) code (BOM code) (2D) code
PN: 03020KHV-001
TNF1SCC
SN: 101470037480 MADE IN CHINA Y3
3. Serial number 5. Country 4: Model 6. RoHS code

of origin
• One-dimensional barcode: A 1D code contains the serial number of an item,

compliant with ISO/IEC 15417 Code128, and is used for barcode scanning.
• An item number refers to the ID of an item, and is a string of 8 to 17 characters
containing letters, digits, hyphens (-), and equal signs (=). An item number is also
known as a part number (PN). Generally, the item number of a board is a string
of 8 or 12 characters.
• A serial number (SN) is the exclusive identifier of an item. The SN helps after-
sales personnel identify the period of warranty service. The value is a string of 12,
16, or 20 characters containing digits and letters.
• Model: The value can contain digits and letters. For a board, this field contains
information about the version, name, type, and correlation of the board.
• Country of origin: indicates the country in which an item is manufactured.
• RoHS code:
▫ An RoHS code identifies the environmental protection information. Possible
values are as follows:
▪ Y: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and its lead
status is not identified.
▪ Y1/Y3: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5 requirements and
contains lead.
▪ Y2: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS6 requirements and is
lead-free.
▪ N: indicates that the product is not environmentally friendly.
• A 2D code contains information about the serial number, item number, and
manufacturer identifier of an item. Some 2D codes do not contain manufacturer
identifier information due to length limitations.
Optical Transponder Boards
Board Type Board Name Board Description

TNF2ELOM Enhanced 8 x Any-rate service aggregation and OTU board
TNF1LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s OTU board
TNF2LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s OTU board
TNF1LSC 1 x 100GE/OTU4 OTU board
TNF1LTX 10 x High-speed Any-rate service aggregation and OTU board
Optical transponder board TNF1LSX 10 Gbit/s OTU board

TNF2LSX 10 Gbit/s OTU board
TMB1LDCD 4 x 100 Gbit/s to 2 x OTUC2 service convergence and OTU board
TMB1LDC 2 x 100 Gbit/s to 1 x OTUC2/OTU4 service convergence and OTU board
TMB1ELOM Enhanced 8 x Any-rate service aggregation and OTU board
TMB1LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s OTU board
TMB1LDCA 2 x 100 Gbit/s or 10 x 10 Gbit/s high-speed Any-rate service convergence and OTU board
TMB1LTX 12 x High-speed Any-rate service aggregation and OTU board

TNB1ELOM Board and Its Application
Client-side device
ODU1
TX1/RX1
ODU1
ODU2 OTU2
OADM
ELOM
TX2/RX2 ODU1
TX3/RX3 IN1/OUT1
ODU1
...
ODU1
East
ODU1
ODU2 OTU2 IN2/OUT2
ODU1
TX8/RX8
Application modes of the B1ELOM board ELOM ODU1
1 x AP8 general mode:
ODU0 non-convergence mode: 8 x Any (125 Mbit/s to 125 Gbit/s) < -> 2 x
OTU2
ODU1 convergence mode: 8 x Any (125 Mbit/s to 12.5 Gbit/s)/InfiniBand 2.5G • Service between the client side and WDM
< -> 2 x OTU2 side
ODU1 non-convergence mode: 8 x Any (1.5 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s) < -> 2 x (The solid arrowhead represents a
OTU2 working channel, and the dotted
ODUflex non-convergence mode: 8 x Any (2.5 Gbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s) < -> 2 x arrowhead represents a protection
OTU2 channel.)
1 x AP1 ODU2 mode: 1 x Any (4.9 Gbit/s to 10.5 Gbit/s)/InfiniBand 5G < -> 1 x • Pass-through service between the east
(OTU2/OTU2e) and west WDM sides
1 x AP1: 1 x CPRI option6/FC800/FICON 8G/InfiniBand 5G < -> 1 x OTU2
Port Silkscreen Port Type Function
Receives signals from or transmits signals

IN1/OUT1–
LC to the OADM board of the WDM-side
IN2/OUT2
device.
X1/RX1– LC (optical port) or RJ- Transmits/Receives client-side service
TX8/RX8 45 (electrical port) signals.
• Functioning as an enhanced 8 x multi-rate OTU board, the TNB1ELOM board

performs conversion between Any services and OTU2(e) services.
• The B1ELOM board supports the ODUk ADM mode. That is, the ELOM board
supports 10G pass-through capability and 20G service grooming capability, and
supports pass-through of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex services. The preceding
figure shows the pass-through of ODU1 services.
Functions and Features of the TNB1ELOM Board
ALS Supported when non-OTN services are received
The output optical signals on the WDM side are tunable within the C-band 80-wavelength range, and
Tunable wavelength
the channel spacing is 50 GHz.
PRBS Supported
ESC Supported
LPT Supported when GE, FE, and 10GE LAN services are received
FEC Line side: FEC/AFEC-2
IEEE 1588v2 Supported
Physical-layer clock OTU2 physical-layer clock
Protection Intra-board 1+1 protection/Client 1+1 protection/ODUk SNCP (k = 0, 1, 2, or flex)
Synchronous Ethernet Supported
• Dimensions (H x W x D): 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 205.9 mm

TMB1LDC Board and Its Application
OTU mode Regeneration mode
DMUX
MUX
LDC
Client-side device
OADM
LDC
DMUX
MUX
LDC
Working Mode Mapping Path Working Mode Mapping Path
200G line board OTU4/100GE <—> 1 x OTUC2
100G regeneration board 1 x OTU4 <—> 1 x OTU4
100G line board OTU4/100GE <—> 1 x OTU4
• Note: You need to set the LDC board mode to electrical regeneration mode.
Functions and Features of the TMB1LDC Board
Function (OTU Mode) Description
ALS Supported (100GE)
PRBS Supported
LPT Not supported
Protection Intra-board 1+1 protection/Client 1+1 protection
IEEE 1588v2 Supported (100GE)
ITU-T G.8275.1/ITU-T
Supported (100GE)
G.8273.2
Supported when the client-side service type is 100GE and the port
Test frame
service mapping path is MAC transparent mapping
Client service encryption Supports AES-256 encryption for services accessed through ports.
Loopback Supported
LS Supported

Receives signals from or transmits signals to the
OUT1/IN1 LC
OADM board of the WDM-side device.
TX1/RX1–
LC/MPO Transmits/Receives client-side service signals.
TX2/RX2
Boards of the OptiX OSN 1800/OptiXtrans E6600
TMK1TDC 2 x 100 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Tributary board
TMK1TTA 10 x Any-rate tributary service processing board
TMK1UNS5 1 x 200 Gbit/s universal line service processing board
Universal line board
TMK1UNQ2 4 x 10 Gbit/s universal line service processing board
General service processing

TMK1GTA 10 x 10 Gbit/s general service processing board
board
Packet board TMK1EX10 10 x 10GE/GE/FE service processing board

TNF1SL1Q 4 x STM-1 optical interface board
TNF1SL4D 2 x STM-4 optical interface board
TMB1SL16S 1 x STM-16 service processing board
TMB1SL41Q 4 x STM-1/STM-4 service processing board
SDH board
TMB1SL41O 8 x STM-1/STM-4 service processing board
TMK1SLNO 4 x STM-16/8 x STM-4/8 x STM-1 service processing board
TMK1SL16Q 4 x STM-16 service processing board
TMK1SL64S 1 x STM-64 service processing board

TMK1TDC Board and Its Application
Cross-connect
Universal line
100GE/OTU4
board
board
2 x ODU4 2 x ODU4
TDC
100GE/OTU4
Cross-connect
Universal line
100GE ODUflex ODUflex
board
board
(n = 1 to 160) (n = 1 to 160)
TDC
100GE

Functions and Features of the TMK1TDC Board
PRBS Supported when OTU4 services are received
ESC Supported
Protection Tributary SNCP/ODUk SNCP/Client 1+1 protection
Test frame Supported when 100GE services are received on the client side
Service encapsulation
100GE: bit transparent mapping/MAC transparent mapping
mode
FEC Supported when OTU4 services are received
Loopback Client-side inloops and outloops
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
T1/R1–T2/R2 LC/MPO Transmits/Receives client-side service signals.

TMK1UNS5 Board and Its Application (Line Mode)
100G mode
ODU0/ODU1/
MUX/DMUX
ODU2/ODU3/
OTN signal ODU4/ODUflex 1 x OTU4
UNS5
200G mode
ODU0/ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e/
MUX/DMUX
ODU3/ODU4/
OTN signal ODUflex 1 x OTUC2
UNS5

Functions and Features of the TMK1UNS5 Board
Function (OTN) Description

PRBS Supported
FEC type FEC/SDFEC2
G.8273.2 Supported
G.8275.1 Supported
⚫ System-side channel inloops and outloops
Loopback ⚫ WDM-side inloops and outloops
ESC Supported
Protection Line-side 1+1 protection/ODUk SNCP
• The UNS5 board is a universal line board. It supports hybrid transmission of OTN,
SDH, and packet services with a maximum bandwidth of 200 Gbit/s. The UNS5
board processes and converts the received service signals into one OTU4 or
OTUC2 signal carried over an ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelength.
• The board of the current version supports only the OTN feature.
Receives single-wavelength signals from the

IN/OUT LC
optical demultiplexer board or the OADM board.
TMK1GTA Board and Its Application
Tributary mode Line mode
C lient-side device
MUX/DMUX
Backplane
GTA
GTA
Service conversion
10 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 10 x ODU0

10 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals) <-> 10 x ODU1
10 x (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> 1–10 x ODU1
10 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/
FICON 8G/FC1200/FICON 10G/InfiniBand 10G <-> 10 x ODU2/ODU2e
10 x 3G-SDI/InfiniBand 2.5G/10GE LAN <-> 10 x ODUflex
10 x OTU1 <-> 20 x ODU0
• T1/R1 to T10/R10 are the port silkscreens on the front panel, indicating ports
TX1/RX1 to T10/R10.
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Tributary mode: Transmit service signals to or
receive service signals from the client-side
device.
T1/R1–
LC Line mode/Regeneration mode: Transmit single-
T10/R10
wavelength signals to or receive single-
wavelength signals from the optical multiplexer
board or the OADM board.
Functions and Features of the TMK1GTA Board
Function (Line Mode) Description Function (Tributary Mode) Description
FEC FEC/AFEC-2 Supported when the client-side service type is not
ALS
OTN
Optical-layer ASON Not supported
Synchronous Ethernet Supported
ALS Not supported
PRBS Supported
G.8273.2 Supported
Electrical-layer ASON Not supported
G.8275.1 Supported
ESC node Supported
PRBS Supported
LPT function Not supported
Physical-layer clock Supported (ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex)
Tributary SNCP/ODUk SNCP/Intra-
Protection
board 1+1 protection FEC mode FEC
Loopback Supported Supported when the client-side service type is FE,
LPT
GE, or 10GE LAN
Ethernet service mapping mode •GE/10GE LAN
Protection Tributary SNCP/ODUk SNCP/Client 1+1 protection
Service encryption Supported
• GE: GE (TTT-GMP)/GE (GFP-T)
• 10GE LAN: bit transparent mapping (11.1G)/MAC transparent mapping (10.7G)

TMK1EX10 Board and Its Application
MUX/DMUX
10 x 10GE/
GE/FE Packets Packets 10 x OTU2
EX10
• The EX10 board is a packet board that receives and transmits 10GE/GE/FE
services to the cross-connect board for packet data processing and device-level
centralized grooming. On the WDM side, a packet service processing board is
used to transmit the packet services on the WDM network.
Functions and Features of the TMK1EX10 Board
Backplane
100 Gbit/s
bandwidth
Service type E-Line (VPWS)/E-LAN (VPLS)
The maximum frame length ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
Maximum frame
The length of allowed frames ranges from 64 bytes to the maximum
length
frame length plus 72 bytes.
Protection 1:1 tunnel APS/1:1 PW FPS/1:1 PW APS/LAG/ERPS/LPT
QoS Supported
RMON Supported
⚫ PHY inloops and outloops
Loopback ⚫ MAC inloops and outloops
Synchronous
Supported
Ethernet
Inband DCN Supported
HQoS Supported
LLDP Supported
• 10 x 10GE/GE/FE service processing board
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
T1/R1–
LC Transmit/Receive client-side service signals.
T10/R10
TMB1SL41Q Board and Its Application

SL41Q
4 x STM-4/ VC VC
4 x STM-1

Functions and Features of the TMB1SL41Q Board
• Provides standard S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 optical ports.
Optical port • All the optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
specifications • Supports CWDM colored optical ports, which support a transmission distance
of 80 km.
• Supports detection and query of information about optical modules.
• Supports single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical modules.
• Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped.
Optical module
• Supports information query, usage, and monitoring of SFP pluggable optical
specifications
modules, facilitating optical module maintenance.
• Allows setting the on/off state of the laser and supports the automatic laser
shutdown (ALS) function.
Service processing Supports VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Protection Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP/Linear MSP/SNCP
DCN Outband DCN
Port1–Port4 LC Transmit/Receive client-side service signals.

TMB1EMS10 10 x Ethernet EoS switching and processing board
EoS board TMB1EGS4 4 x GE switching and processing board
TMB1EFS8 8 x FE switching and processing board
TNF1PL3T 3 x E3/T3 electrical interface board
TNF1PL4D 2 x E4 service processing board
PDH board
TMB1DMS 32 x E1/T1 electrical interface board
TMB1PD1 32 x E1/T1 service processing board
TNW1AT8 8 x 2-/4-wire audio and E&M processing board
TNW1DIO 10 x input and 4 x output Boolean board
PCM board TNW1DXM DDN service access and convergence board
TNW1FXSO12 12 x FXS/FXO processing board
TNW1PF4E8 4 x 2 Mbit/s optical interface and 8 x E1/T1 electrical interface board

TMB1EMS10 Board and Its Application

1 x 10GE
10 x FE
10 x GE
...
EMS10
VC VC
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
TX1/RX1–
LC or RJ-45 Transmit/Receive client-side service signals.
TX10/RX10
Functions and Features of the TMB1EMS10 Board
Bound bandwidth 16 x VC-4/48 x VC-3/504 x VC-12
Concatenation granularity VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/VC-12-Xv (X ≤ 63)/VC-3-Xv (X ≤ 24)/VC-4-Xv (X ≤ 8)
Auto-negotiation mode (supported only by the first six GE ports)
Port traffic monitoring
Non-auto-negotiation mode (supported only by the first six ports)
Service type EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN
Protection DLAG/LAG/LCAS/LPT/STP/RSTP/MSTP
Synchronous Ethernet Supported (not supported by SFP electrical modules)
ETH-OAM Supported
RMON Supported
QoS Supported
IGMP listening Supported
Flow control IEEE 802.3x-compliant
Traffic monitoring Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.
Ping response Supported

TMB1PD1 & TMB1DMS Application
PD1
cross-connect board
System control and
32 x E1/T1
Electrical signal
...
DMS
PD1
• Two PD1 boards and one DMS board are used together to implement TPS
protection.
• The PD1 board has no independent physical slot and can be used only with the
DMS board. The valid logical slots of the PD1 board are slots 121 to 140. Slots
122, 124, 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136, 138, and 140 can only be used to house
protection boards with TPS protection, and cannot be configured with services.
Functions and Features of the TMB1PD1 & TMB1DMS Boards
TMB1PD1 TMB1DMS
Function Description Function Description

Alarm and Provides a wide variety of alarms and Alarm and Monitors the operating temperature of
performance performance events, which facilitates performance event the boards and reports alarms.
event device management and maintenance.
Works together with two PD1 boards to
Works together with two PD1 boards to TPS protection
TPS protection implement TPS protection.
implement TPS protection.
Tributary clock Supports source selection for E1 and T1
Loopback Inloops and outloops at electrical ports source clocks.
PRBS Supported
Supports warm and cold resets. Warm
Reset
resets do not adversely affect services.
Tributary clock
Supported
source
Hot swap Supported
• Dimensions (H x W x D) of the TMB1PD1 board: 19.8 mm x 96.4 mm x 161.5 mm
• Dimensions (H x W x D) of the TMB1DMS board: 40.1 mm x 193.8 mm x 205.9

mm
PCM Boards
• The DXM board of a WDM device is used to access and aggregate services and to
cross-connect 64 kbit/s E1 signals on the system side.
• The DXM board can access 4 x Framed E1 services, 2 x sub-rate/N x 64 kbit/s
services, 8 x G.703 64 kbit/s codirectional services, 2 x G.703 64 kbit/s reverse
services, 8 x RS-232/RS-485 services, 5 x RS-422 services/8 x RS-232 transparent
transmission services/5 x RS-422 transparent transmission services, multiplexer
group services, and E1 DCN services. In addition, it can process 63 x E1 signals on
the system side, 64 kbit/s cross-connections, and 8 kbit/s cross-connections.
• The FXSO12 board provides 12 FXS/FXO ports to transmit or receive analog voice
signals for voice sessions.
• The AT8 board provides eight 2/4-wire audio or E&M analog regeneration ports
to transparently transmit signaling and voice signals over a long distance.
• It is applicable in two typical networking scenarios.
▫ Application 1: PBXs are connected to the WDM device through 2/4-wire
audio or E&M ports. E&M ports are used to transmit signaling and 2/4-wire
audio ports are used to transmit voice services. The WDM device functions
as a trunk for signaling and voice services.
▫ Application 2: If only E&M ports are available, only one connectivity signal is
transmitted. This applies to scenarios where control signals are remotely
transmitted to implement remote control.
• The PF4E8 board provides four 2 Mbit/s optical ports and eight E1/T1 electrical
ports. The board can be used on the WDM device to support the
upstream/downstream processing of PDH signals, and the access and processing
of eight E1/T1 signals. The board can also transparently transmit 2 Mbit/s optical
signals to the peer device over a long distance. It can also process and transmit
C37.94 optical signals.
FXSO12 Board and Its Application
Z interface extension service
WDM WDM PBX

device device
Hotline service
WDM WDM
device device
• PBX: private branch exchange
• It is applicable in two typical networking scenarios.
▫ Application 1: FXS and FXO ports are configured in pairs, working with a
PBX to provide the Z-interface extension function.
▫ Application 2: FXS ports are configured in pairs to provide the hotline
function.
Functions and Features of the FXSO12 Board
⚫ Provides 12 FXS/FXO ports and supports configuration and query of the FXS/FXO port type.
− Tx gain on an FXS port (dB): –12.0 to 0.0 (step: 0.5)
− Rx gain on an FXS port (dB): –6.0 to 5.0 (step: 0.5)
Basic functions
− Tx gain on an FXO port (dB): –16.5 to 13.5 (step: 0.5)
− Rx gain on an FXO port (dB): –16.5 to 11.0 (step: 0.5)
⚫ Supports the BROSCHT function.
⚫ External port: DDN-1 to DDN-12, identifying 12 external ports. The timeslot of an external port is always 1, and the port number
ranges from 1 to 12.
NMS port ⚫ Internal port: 2M-1 to 2M-12, identifying 12 internal E1 ports. The timeslot of an internal port is 1 to 15 or 17 to 31, and the port
number ranges from 65 to 76.
Service processing Receives and processes 12 x 64 kbit/s signals.
Overhead processing Supports configuration and query of V5/J2 bytes.
Alarm and
Provides alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault locating.
performance event
⚫ Supports warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not adversely affect services.
⚫ Supports query of board manufacturer information.
Maintenance ⚫ Supports board temperature detection and alarm reporting.
⚫ Supports board temperature detection, alarm reporting, and performance statistics collection.
⚫ Supports hot swapping.
• The FXSO12 board supports VC-12 SNCP and E1 SNCP.
• Battery feeding, ringing, overvoltage protection, supervision, coding/decoding,

hybrid circuit, test (BROSCHT)
TNF1EMR4 Enhanced 4 x OADM board
OADM board TNF1EMR8 Enhanced 8 x OADM board
TNF1SBM8 Single-fiber bidirectional 8 x OADM board

A four-in-one board that integrates 20-degree ROADM, optical amplification, optical
ROADM board TMB1DWS20AFS
monitoring, and multiplexing/demultiplexing functions
TNF1DFIU01/02/03/04 Optical fiber line interface board
(East & West) Bidirectional fiber interface board that supports synchronous information
TNF1DSFIU01/02
Optical transmission
multiplexer/demultiplexer
TNF1ITL Interleaver
board
TNF1EX40 Enhanced 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board
TMB1EX40 Enhanced 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board
TNF1BAS1 Transmit/Receive OA board with the OSC
TNF1OBU Optical power amplifier board
OA board TNF2OBU Optical power amplifier board
TNF1OPU Optical preamplifier board
TMB1DAP C-band 2-channel pluggable OA base board

TNF1EMR4 Board and Its Application
Customer Customer Customer Customer

service service service service
OTU OTU OTU OTU

… …
A1 D1 A4 D4 D1 A1 D4 A4
IN OUT
MO MI
EMR4 EMR4
MI MO
OUT IN
• The EMR4 board adds/drops four wavelength signals to/from the multiplexed
signals in a direction.
• Port Silkscreen
Front Port Type
panel dimensions Function
(H x W x D): 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 205.9 mm
IN/OUT LC Inputs/Outputs multiplexed signals.
Receives one optical signal from the OTU or
A1–A4 LC integrated client-side device and couples them to
the multiplexed signals.
Diverts one optical signal from the multiplexed
D1–D4 LC signals and outputs them to the OTU or
integrated client-side device.
Functions as a cascading input/output port to send
MI/MO LC the multiplexed signals to other OADM boards
and to add/drop the other multiplexed signals.
Adds or drops four consecutive wavelengths from multiplexed

signals.
Provides optical ports for cascading with other OADM boards.
Basic functions
Supports PIN optical power detection on the multiplexing
output port.
Supports automatic optical power commissioning.
WDM
Supports DWDM specifications.
specifications
TMB1EX40 Board and Its Application
MD01 MD01
OTU OTU
Client-side
Client-side
service
...
service
EX40
EX40
...
OA OA
MD40 MD40
OTU OTU
MD01 MD01
OTU OTU
Client-side
Client-side
service
...
EX40
service
...
EX40
OA OA
MD40 MD40
OTU OTU
• The preceding figure shows the application of EX40 boards in a two-fiber

bidirectional system.
• The EX40 board can multiplex a maximum of 40 ITU-T G.694.1-compliant
standard-wavelength optical signals into one optical signal, or demultiplex one
optical signal to a maximum of 40 ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard-wavelength
optical signals. When the TMB1EX40 board is used in this application scenario,
optical ports MD01 to MD40 are used for receiving/transmitting optical signals.

Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TMB1EX40
Board
Optical Port Item Unit Specifications Function Description
Operating frequency THz EX4001: 192.10–196.00
- Provides an online monitoring optical port to which
range EX4002: 192.15–196.05
Online optical a spectrum analyzer can be connected to monitor
Adjacent channel GHz 100 power monitoring the spectrum of the main optical path without
-
spacing interrupting services.
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5 Alarm and
Detects optical power and reports the alarms and
performance event
Adjacent channel dB > 25 performance events of the board.
LINE-MDx monitoring
isolation
Non-adjacent dB > 30 WDM specifications Supports DWDM specifications.
channel isolation
- Reflectance dB < –40
Polarization- dB ≤ 0.5
-
dependent loss
- Temperature nm/℃ ≤ 0.002
Maximum insertion dB ≤3
- loss difference
between channels

TMB1DAP Board and Its Application
MUX
DAP
FIU
AST2
DMUX
DAP
• The DAP board is a C-band dual-channel pluggable OA base board that amplifies
optical signals. Configured at the transmit and receive ends of the device
respectively.

IN_1/IN_2 LC Inputs multiplexed signals to be amplified.
OUT_1/OUT_2 LC Outputs amplified multiplexed signals.
Inputs the multiplexed signals for which the
VI_1/VI_2 LC optical power needs to be adjusted by the
VOA.
Outputs the multiplexed signals that have
VO_1/VO_2 LC undergone power adjustment to the EDFA
module.
Connects to an optical spectrum analyzer for
online optical performance monitoring.
The split ratio between the MON port and the
MON_1/MON_2 LC OUT port is 1:99. In other words, the optical
power of the MON port is 20 dB lower than
that of the OUT port, which is calculated using
the following formula: Pout (dBm) – Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB.
Connects to the DCM for dispersion
TDC/RDC LC
compensation.
Functions and Features of the TMB1DAP Board
Amplifies optical signals over C-band wavelengths in the range of 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
Basic functions
Supports unregenerated transmission for various spans.
Unregenerated transmission in
Supported
different spans
Online optical performance
Supported
monitoring
In gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the
Working mode
EDFA.
Performance event and alarm
Supported
monitoring
TN15OAC101: Continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB.
TN15OAC103: Continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB.
Gain adjustment TN15OAC106: Continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 23 dB.
TN15OBC103: The gain cannot be adjusted.
TN15OBC107: The gain cannot be adjusted.
• The board supports gain locking and transient state control.
• The EDFA inside the board has the gain locking function. When one or more
channels are added or reduced or the optical signals in some channels fluctuate,
the signal gain of other channels is not affected.
• The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are
added or deleted, the system can be smoothly upgraded and expanded by
suppressing the optical power fluctuation of the channels.
TMB1SCC System control & Communication board with OSC
System control, switching, and
TMK2UXCL Universal cross-connect, system control, and clock processing board
clock board
TMK5SXCH System control, cross-connect, and clock board
TNF1ST2 Bidirectional OSC and clock transmission board
OSC board TNF1AST4 4-channel OSC and clock transmission board (with advanced OTDR)
TMB1AST2 2-channel OSC and clock transmission board (with advanced OTDR)
TNF1SCS02 Synchronous optical channel separating board
Optical protection board TNF1OLP Optical line protection board
TMB1OLP Optical line protection board
TNF1OPM8 8-port optical power monitoring board
Spectrum analyzer board
TMB1OPM8 8-port optical power monitoring board
TMB1FAN Fan board
TMK2FAN Fan board
TMK5FAN Fan board
PIU/Fan board
TMB1PIU DC power board
TMK5PIU DC power board
TMB1APIU AC power board

Functions and Features of the TMB1SCC Board
⚫ Provides a port between the device and the NMS, and collaborates with the NMS to manage the
boards on the device, implementing device communication.
Basic functions ⚫ Processes overheads.
⚫ It processes two OSCs and receives and transmits optical signals in the OSCs at each site.
⚫ Provides 3-input/1-output Boolean value ports.
DCN Supports the ESC and OSC functions.
Layer 2 switching Supports inter-subrack IP communication.

⚫ Implements clock synchronization on an NE, and provides ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823-compliant
clock signals and frame header signals for service boards.
⚫ Traces external clock sources, service clock sources, or local clock sources to provide a
synchronization clock source for the board itself and the system.
Clock ⚫ Supports IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization.
⚫ Supports one external clock input/output and one external time input/output.
⚫ Supports extraction, insertion, and processing of SSM information and clock IDs.
⚫ Supports G.8273.2/G.8275.1.
Master-slave subrack
Supports master-slave subrack cascading.
cascading
Fan alarm management Adjusts the fan speed, detects faults, provides fan alarms, and manages the fans.
• Power management: provides the in-position detection, over-voltage detection,

and low-voltage shutdown functions for PIU boards.
Functions and Features of the TMK2UXCL Board
⚫ Grooms services, manages configurations, and reports alarms in the subrack.
⚫
Backs up NE data. When the data of an NE changes, the real-time database backup
function can immediately save the changed data to the storage medium. In this
Basic functions manner, the configuration data is not lost when the NE undergoes a cold reset or
power outage, improving NE reliability.
⚫
Supports the interconnection and communication between NEs in IP over DCC or
HWECC mode.
⚫
Supports 1+1 hot backup for the SCC unit.
Protection ⚫
Supports non-revertive manual and automatic switching.
DCN Supports outband DCN, inband DCN, and ESC functions.
Provides 1+1 backup power supply for fans, supports fan speed adjustment and fault
Fan alarm management
detection, and manages fan alarms.
Fan mode configuration Supported
Power management Detects the in-position status of PIU boards.
Master-slave subrack
Not supported
management
• The TMK2UXCL board integrates the cross-connect unit, clock unit, and system
control unit to provide service grooming, clock processing, and communication
control functions.
Functions and Features of the TMK5SXCH Board
⚫
Grooms services, manages configurations, and reports alarms in the subrack.
⚫
Backs up NE data. When the data of an NE changes, the real-time database
backup function can immediately save the changed data to the storage medium. In
Basic functions this manner, the configuration data is not lost when the NE undergoes a cold reset
or power outage, improving NE reliability.
⚫
Supports the interconnection and communication between NEs in IP over DCC or
HWECC mode.
⚫
Supports 1+1 hot backup and warm backup for the SCC unit.
Protection ⚫ Supports non-revertive manual and automatic switching.
DCN Supports outband DCN and ESC.
Fan alarm Provides 1+1 backup power supply for fans, supports fan speed adjustment and fault
management detection, and manages fan alarms.
Fan mode
Supported
configuration
Power management Detects the in-position status of PIU boards.
• The TMK5SXCH board is a cross-connect board that cross-connects ODUk (k = 0,

1, 2, 2e, flex, 3, or 4)/VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 services.
TMB1AST2 Board and Its Application
AST2
DFIU
West East
DFIU
• As an OSC board, the TMB1AST2 board receives, processes, and transmits two
OSC signals in the east and west directions. The TMB1AST2 board also supports
the IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization function, transparent transmission of two
FE signals, and the line fiber quality detection function.
Specifications, Functions, and Features of the TMB1AST2
Board
150-km OSC 80-km OSC Function Description
Item Unit Module with Module with
OTDR OTDR Receives/Transmits and processes two OSC signals.
Basic functions
Supports transparent transmission of two FE signals.
Bit rate Mbit/s 155.52 155.52 Clock Physical-layer clock/IEEE 1588v2
Transmission Maximum span 37.5 dB (excluding the DSFIU/DFIU/FIU loss)

km 150 80
distance
Transmits OSC signals by section and has the 3R
Operating 1504.5–1517.5 1504.5–1517.5 Regeneration
nm functions.
wavelength range 1484.5–1497.5 1484.5–1497.5
Loopback Outloops
Transmit power
dBm 0.5–5 –2 to 3
of signals Line fiber
quality Supported
Receiver monitoring
dBm ≤ –42 ≤ –35
sensitivity
Not supported when the F3SCC01/F3SCC02 system
G.8273.2
Overload point dBm –10 –10 control board is used
G.8275.1 Supported

Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following statements about the UXCL

and SXCH boards are correct?
A. Both provide the cross-connect function to implement intra-subrack service grooming.
B. Both support the inband DCN and outband DCN.

C. Both support NE data backup.
D. Both support master and slave subracks.
• Answer: AC
Contents
1. Product Overview
3. Boards
◼ Boards of the OptiXtrans DC908

Boards of the OptiXtrans DC908
TMN1SCC SCC board
TMN1PANEL Interface panel
2 x 100/200 Gbit/s programmable OTU board that implements the conversion between 100GE/OTU4 signals and OTU4/OTUC2
TMN2MD02
signals
TMN2MD02A OTU board that implements the conversion between 8–100 Gbit/s Any-rate signals and OTU4/OTUC2 signals.
1 x 100/400 Gbit/s programmable OTU board that implements the conversion between 100GE/400GE signals and
TMN2MS04
OTUC2/OTUC4 signals.
TMN1EMD60 60-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 100 GHz, even wavelengths
60-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 100 GHz, odd wavelengths, integrated ITL module. It can be used
TMN1OMD60
together with the TMN1EMD60 board to multiplex/demultiplex 120 optical signals.
TMN1EUMD40 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 150 GHz, even wavelengths
40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 150 GHz, odd wavelengths, integrated ITL module. It can be used
TMN1OUMD40
together with the TMN1EUMD40 board to multiplex/demultiplex 80 optical signals.
TMN1EMR8 Enhanced 8 x OADM line board Five-in-one optical line board that integrates the OA, XFIU, OSC, MR8, and LS functions.
TMN1OL Optical line board (Super C band) Five-in-one optical line board that integrates the OA, XFIU, OSC, MR8, and LS functions.
TMN1OLA Regeneration line board that integrates the OA, XFIU, OPM, and OSC & OTDR functions.
Optical-layer platform board that can be equipped with four pluggable modules. The board supports pluggable OLP and
TMN1OPC
EOMSP modules to function as an OLP or EOMSP board.

SCC Board
Port/Button Silkscreen Description
Reset button
RST
It is used to perform a warm reset on the system control board.
This port is reserved for hardware and does not have any
CLK/CON
function.
Digitron display LED indicator for the master/slave subrack ID
EXT Communication port between the master and slave subracks
Management communication port

ETH
This port is used for device management communication.
SCC
• The functional version of the SCC board is TMN1.
• Front panel dimensions (H x W x D): 81.1 mm x 19.75 mm x 355 mm
• Note:
▫ The EXT port uses two types of dual-channel single-fiber bidirectional

optical modules:
▫ Single-fiber bidirectional module-CSFP-Tx1490/Rx1310 nm-125 Mbit/s to
1.25 Gbit/s--9 dBm--3 dBm--24 dBm-LC-single-mode-10 km--40–85 degC
▫ Single-fiber bidirectional module-CSFP-1310(Tx)/1490(Rx)nm-1.25 Gbit/s--

9 dBm--3 dBm--24 dBm-LC-single-mode-10 km
▫ When the master and slave subracks are connected, only optical modules of
different types can be interconnected.
▫ The channel on the left of the optical module is CH1 and that on the right
is CH2.
Functions and Features of the SCC Board
• Manages chassis configurations and outputs alarms.
Basic functions • Backs up NE data. When the data of an NE changes, the real-time database backup function can
immediately save the changed data to the storage medium. In this manner, the configuration data is
not lost when the NE undergoes a cold reset or power outage, improving NE reliability.
DCN communication Supports the interconnection and communication between NEs in IP over DCC or HWECC mode.
Active/Standby backup 1+1 backup for system control boards and active/standby switching
Hot swap Supported. Services are not interrupted after the system control board is removed.
• Note: You do not need to change the device IP address or ID when replacing the
system control board of the OptiXtrans DC908.
Panel
Port/Button
Description
Silkscreen
Displays the NE IP address, loopback IP address, subrack ID, device name,
LCD
SN, and alarms.
IP button Sets the IP address.
Confirms an NE. You can press this button once to identify the
Maintenance button
corresponding NE on the NMS.
Asset pull-strip Attaches a device information label to the device.
CON: The console port is connected to a console for on-site configuration.

The console cable must be used together with the console port.
Connector type: RJ45
CON Standards compliance: RS232
Working mode: full-duplex universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
(UART)
Baud rate: 9600 bit/s to 115200 bit/s; default value: 9600 bit/s
PANEL Management communication port

ETH
This port is used for device management communication.
• The functional version of the panel is TMN1.
• Panel dimensions (H x W x D): 81 mm x 37 mm x 369 mm
• Note:
▫ The device name can contain only English characters.
▫ The LCD on the panel automatically turns off after a period of inactivity to
prevent the display from being steady on and prolong its service life.
Functions and Features of the Panel
• Displays the NE IP address, loopback IP address, subrack ID, device name and SN, and alarms on the
Basic functions LCD.
• Sets the IP address of an NE.
DCN communication Supports the interconnection and communication between NEs in IP over DCC or HWECC mode.
Hot swap Supported. Services are not interrupted after the panel is removed.
Indicator
Indicator Color Status Description
Silkscreen
The board is running properly and
Green Steady on
no abnormal alarm is generated.
Orang A major or minor alarm is
Steady on
e generated on the board.
Blinking
The board is in the maintenance
Orang (on for 500
state, which facilitates fault
e ms and off
locating.
for 500 ms)
Hardwar A critical alarm is generated on

STAT e status the board.
indicator The STAT indicator on the panel is
Red Steady on
red when the SCC board is offline,
undergoes a cold reset, or is in
BIOS state.
The board is in the inactive state.
For example:
The board is not started.
- Off The board is not created.
The board is not powered on.
The power board has no power
input.
OTU Board Naming Conventions
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
T M x x M D 0 2 x x x
M: indicates the Transponder/

Muxponder OTU board.
This letter indicates the number of WDM-side ports.

D: indicates two WDM-side ports on the board.
The two digits indicate the maximum rate of the services

received by each port on the WDM side of the board.
02: indicates that each port on the WDM side of the board
can receive services at a maximum rate of OTUC2.

MD02 Board
Port Port Optical Supported Service

Description
Silkscreen Type Module Type Type
Client-side optical port:
⚫ Receives the service optical signals
Pluggable
C1–C4 MPO/LC OTU4/100GE output by the client-side device.
QSFP28
⚫ Transmits service optical signals to the
client-side device.
WDM-side optical port:
Receives single-wavelength OTU4/OTUC2
signals from the optical demultiplexer unit
L1–L2 LC Pluggable CFP2 OTU4/OTUC2 or the OADM unit.
Transmits single-wavelength OTU4/OTUC2
signals to the optical multiplexer unit or the
OADM unit.
• The functional versions of the MD02 board are TMN1 and TMN2.
• In line mode, the board implements the conversion between 100GE/OTU4 signals
and 2 x OTU4/OTUC2 signals.
• In regeneration mode, the board implements regeneration of OTU4/OTUC2
signals.
Application Scenario (Line Mode)
2 x OTUC2
C1 C1
1 x ODUC2
1 x OTUC2
1 x OTUC2
1 x ODUC2
2 x ODU4
2 x ODU4
100GE/OTU4 100GE/OTU4
L1
C2 L1
C2
MUX/DMUX
MUX/DMUX
C3 C3
1 x ODUC2
1 x OTUC2
1 x OTUC2
1 x ODUC2
2 x ODU4
2 x ODU4
L2
L2
C4 C4
Service mapping path (200G)
• When the WDM-side port works in 200G_16QAM/200G_e16QAM/200G_16QAM-

H mode, the board can perform mutual conversion between two OTUC2 signals
and 100GE/OTU4 optical signals with a total client-side rate not exceeding 400
Gbit/s.
• For details about other application scenarios, see the product documentation.
Application Scenario (Regeneration Mode)
DMUX
L1(IN) L1(OUT)
MUX
1 x OTU4 1 x OTU4
MUX L2(OUT) L2(IN)
DMUX
1 x OTU4 1 x OTU4
• When the WDM-side port works in 100G_QPSK/100G_wDCM_QPSK mode, the

MD02 board can implement bidirectional regeneration of two OTU4 signals.
Functions and Features
Basic functions Performs the mutual conversion between OTU4/100GE signals and OTU4/OTUC2 signals.
• OTU4: OTN services at a rate of 111.81 Gbit/s
• 100GE: Ethernet services at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s
• Provides OTU4/OTUC2 ports on the WDM side.
• Uses the frame formats and overhead processing methods defined in ITU-T G.709.
OTN functions
• Supports the PM and TCM functions at the ODUk (k = 4 or C2) layer.
• Supports the SM function at the OTUk (k = 4 or C2) layer.
Tunes WDM-side optical signals within the range of 96 wavelengths in Extended C band at a 50 GHz channel spacing and
Tunable wavelength
supports flexible grid.
• Supports RS-FEC coding when the client-side service type is 100GE.
• Supports SDFEC2 coding when the WDM-side port works in 100G_QPSK/100G_wDCM_QPSK mode.
FEC encoding
• Supports SDFEC coding when the WDM-side port works in 200G_16QAM/200G_16QAM-H mode.
• Supports SDFEC2 coding when the WDM-side port works in 200G_e16QAM mode.
• Monitors BIP8 bytes (Bursty mode) to help locate line faults.
Performance event and alarm • Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.
monitoring • Monitors parameters such as the laser bias current, laser operating temperature, and optical power.
• Supports the Ethernet RMON monitoring function.
Regeneration board MD02
Ethernet service encapsulation
The OTU4 service uses the BMP encapsulation mode, and the 100GE service uses the GMP and GFP-F encapsulation modes.
mode
• WDM-side signal spectrum width
▫ 200G_16QAM mode: 50 GHz Flex
▫ 200G_e16QAM mode: 50 GHz Flex
▫ 200G_16QAM-H mode: 50 GHz Flex
▫ 100G_wDCM_QPSK mode: 50 GHz Flex
▫ 100G_QPSK mode: 50 GHz Flex
• Service encryption: supported when the client-side service type is not OTU4
• WDM specifications: supports DWDM specifications.
• The MD02 board supports the following functions: ESC, PRBS (supported on the
WDM side/supported when the client-side service type is OTU4), IPA, LS, ALS
(supported on the client side), test frame, latency measurement, LLDP, and
loopback.
• The MD02 board supports the following protection schemes: optical line
protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client 1+1 protection.
MD02A Board
MD02A Description
The following lists the types of services received through client-side optical ports:
Ethernet services: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, 25GE, 40GE, and 100GE
Client side OTN services: OTU2, OTU2e, and OTU4
SDH/SONET service: STM-64/OC-192
SAN services: FC800, FICON8G, FC1200, FC1600, and FC3200
As a programmable OTU board, the MD02A board provides functions that flexibly change with the port working mode. The
WDM-side port of the MD02A board can be set to work in the following modes as required:
• 100G_QPSK
• 100G_wDCM_QPSK
WDM side • 200G_16QAM
• Common mode
• The single-span OA-free mode is applicable to the scenario where no OA board is configured and the point-to-
point loss is less than 21.5 dB (the fiber insertion loss coefficient is 0.36 dB/km).
• 200G_16QAM-H
• 200G_e16QAM (default)
• The MD02A board is an OTU board. It performs mutual conversion between 8

Gbit/s to 100 Gbit/s Any services and OTU4/OTUC2 signals.
• A indicates that Any services can be received on the client side.
• Front panel dimensions (H x W x D): 39.5 mm x 200 mm x 355 mm

• Note: The WDM-side optical power of the TMN1MD02AT27, TMN2MD02AT29,
and TMN2MD02AT29-R1 boards is adjustable.
• For details about the application scenarios and functions of the MD02A board,
see the product documentation.
MS04 Board
MS04 Description
When the 400G_16QAM mode is used on the WDM side, each of
optical ports C1 to C4 supports access of 100GE services. Only the C1
optical port supports 400GE services.
Client side
When the 200G_QPSK or 200G_wDCM_QPSK mode is used on the
WDM side, only the C1 and C2 optical ports can support access of
100GE services.
As a programmable OTU board, the MS04 board provides functions

that flexibly change with the port working mode. The WDM-side port
of the MS04 board can be set to work in the following modes as
required:
• 200G_QPSK
• 200G_wDCM_QPSK
WDM side
• 400G_16QAM (default)
− Common mode
− Single-span OA-free mode: This mode is applicable to the scenario
where no OA board is configured and the point-to-point loss is
less than 21.5 dB (the fiber insertion loss coefficient is 0.36
dB/km).
• The MS04 board is a 1 x 100/400 Gbit/s programmable OTU board. This board
performs conversion between 100GE/400GE and OTUC2/OTUC4 signals.
• S: indicates one WDM-side port on the board.
• 04: indicates that each port on the WDM side of the board can receive services at
a maximum rate of OTU4.
• Note: The WDM-side optical power of the MS04 board is adjustable.

Application Scenario (Line Mode)
1 x OTUC4
C1 C1
100GE 100GE
1 x OTUC4
1 x ODUC4
4 x ODU4
1 x ODUC4
1 x OTUC4
4 x ODU4
C2 C2
MUX/DMUX
MUX/DMUX
100GE L1 L1 100GE
C3 C3
100GE 100GE
C4 C4
100GE 100GE
Service mapping path (400G)
• In line mode, the board implements the conversion between 100GE/400GE

signals and 1 x OTUC2/OTUC4 signals.
• When the WDM-side port works in 400G_16QAM mode, the board can perform
mutual conversion between four 100GE or one 400GE optical signals and one
OTUC4 signal received on the client side.
• Service mapping path: 4 x 100GE <-> 4 x ODU4 (GMP) <-> 1 x ODUC4 <-> 1 x
OTUC4
• In regeneration mode, the board implements regeneration of OTUC2/OTUC4

signals.
• For details about other application scenarios, see the product documentation.
Functions and Features (Line Mode)
Basic functions Mutual conversion between 100GE/400GE and OTUC2/OTUC4 signals
• 100GE: Ethernet services at a rate of 103.125 Gbit/s
• 400GE: Ethernet services at a rate of 425 Gbit/s
• Provides OTUC2/OTUC4 ports on the WDM side.
• Uses the frame formats and overhead processing methods defined in ITU-T G.709.
OTN functions
• Supports PM and TCM functions at the ODUk (k = flex, 4, or C2) layer.
• Supports the SM function at the OTUk (k = C2 or C4) layer.
• Tunes WDM-side optical signals within the range of 80 wavelengths in Super C band at a 75 GHz
channel spacing and supports flexible grid.
Tunable wavelength
• Tunes WDM-side optical signals within the range of 60 wavelengths in Super C band at a 100 GHz
channel spacing and supports flexible grid.
• Supports SDFEC2 coding on the WDM side.
FEC encoding
• Supports RS-FEC coding when the client-side service type is 100GE/400GE.
• Monitors OTN alarms and performance events.
Performance event and
• Monitors parameters such as the laser bias current, laser operating temperature, and optical power.
alarm monitoring
• Supports the Ethernet RMON monitoring function.
Ethernet service
GMP
encapsulation mode
• The MS04 board supports the following functions: ESC, PRBS (supported on the
WDM side), IPA, LS, ALS (supported on the client side when 100GE/400GE
services are received), test frame, latency measurement, LLDP, and loopback.
• The MS04 board supports the following protection schemes: optical line
protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client 1+1 protection.
• Note:
▫ RS-FEC coding can be enabled or disabled when the client-side service type
is 100GE.
▫ RS-FEC coding is always enabled when the client-side service type is 400GE.
• The following uses the functions and features supported in line mode as an
example. For details about the functions and features supported in regeneration
mode, see the product documentation.
MD60 Board
Front panel of the TMN1EMD60 board
Front panel of the TMN1OMD60 board
Board Model Description

60-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 100 GHz, even
TMN1EMD60
wavelengths
MD60 60-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 100 GHz, odd
TMN1OMD60 wavelengths, integrated ITL module. It can be used together with the
TMN1EMD60 board to multiplex/demultiplex 120 optical signals.
• The MD60 board is a 60-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board. It can

multiplex/demultiplex 60 optical signals and can be expanded to
multiplex/demultiplex 120 optical signals.

MD60 Board and Its Application
01 01
OTU OTU
Client-side
Client-side
M60V
service
service
D60
IN
...
OUT
...
OA OA
60 60
OTU OTU
01 01
OTU OTU
Client-side
Client-side
M60V
D60
service
service
...
...
IN OUT
OA OA
60 60
OTU OTU
TMN1EMD60 TMN1EMD60
Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of 60 optical signals (two-

fiber bidirectional, even wavelengths)
• The MD60 board is a 60-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board. It multiplexes

60 optical signals over an ITU-T-compliant WDM wavelength into one optical
signal and demultiplexes one signal into 60 optical signals over an ITU-T-
compliant WDM wavelength. Two MD60 boards can be used together to
MD60 Board and Its Application
01 01
OTU OTU
Client-side
M60V
Client-side
service
service
IN
D60
...
OUT
...
OA OA
60 60
OTU OTU
ITL
ITL
01 01
Client-side
OTU OTU
M60V
Client-side
service
D60
service
IN
...
...
OUT
OA OA
60 60
OTU OTU
TMN1OMD60 TMN1OMD60
Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of 60 optical signals (two-fiber bidirectional, odd wavelengths)

Functions and Features
Multiplexes a maximum of 60 single-wavelength optical signals into one multiplexed optical signal and adjusts the input optical power
of each channel.
• The M60V module on the TMN1EMD60 board multiplexes a maximum of 60 even-wavelength optical signals into one multiplexed
Basic functions
signal.
M60V module
• The M60V module on the TMN1OMD60 board multiplexes a maximum of 60 odd-wavelength optical signals into one multiplexed
signal.
Optical power
Adjusts the optical power of each single-wavelength optical signal before multiplexing.
adjustment
Demultiplexes one multiplexed signal into a maximum of 60 single-wavelength signals.
• The D60 module on the TMN1EMD60 board demultiplexes one multiplexed optical signal into a maximum of 60 even-wavelength
D60 module Basic functions optical signals.
• The D60 module on the TMN1OMD60 board demultiplexes one multiplexed optical signal into a maximum of 60 odd-wavelength
optical signals.
The ITL module is integrated in the TMN1OMD60 board to multiplex/demultiplex C_ODD and C_EVEN signals. When the TMN1EMD60
ITL module Basic functions
board works with the TMN1OMD60 board, the ITL module can multiplex/demultiplex 120 optical signals.
Spectrum application Supports Super C band.
Provides an online monitoring optical port. Through this optical port, a small number of optical signals can be output to the optical
Online optical power monitoring spectrum analyzer or the optical spectrum analyzer board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical performance of the multipl exed
optical signals can be monitored without interrupting the services.
Alarm and performance event
Detects optical power and reports the alarms and performance events of the board.
monitoring
The intra-station power control (IPC) function is used to detect intra-site fibers. When an intra-site fiber cut occurs, the output optical
IPC
power of the OA board is automatically controlled to be lower than or equal to 21.3 dBm.
• The MD60 board provides functions and features such as multiplexing,

demultiplexing, online optical power monitoring, alarm and performance event
monitoring, and optical power adjustment.
UMD40
Front panel of the TMN1EUMD40 board
Front panel of the TMN1OUMD40 board
Board Model Description

40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 150 GHz, even
TMN1EUMD40
wavelengths
UMD40 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board with the VOA, 150 GHz, odd
TMN1OUMD40 wavelengths, integrated ITL module. It can be used together with the
TMN1EUMD60 board to multiplex/demultiplex 80 optical signals.
• The UMD40 board is a 40-channel multiplexer/demultiplexer board. It can

multiplex/demultiplex 40 optical signals and can be expanded to

• The application of the board is similar to that of the MD60 board. For details
about the functions and features of the board, see the product documentation.
EMR8
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
Receives output signals from the OTU board or integrated client-side
A1–A8 LC
device.
D1–D8 LC Transmits signals to the OTU board or integrated client-side device.
LIN LC Receives multiplexed signals.
LOUT LC Transmits multiplexed signals.
EXPI LC This port is reserved for hardware.
EXPO LC This port is reserved for hardware.
Functions as the signal quality monitoring port to monitor online
optical performance of optical signals input from the LIN port.
MONI LC
Connects to the optical spectrum analyzer board, optical spectrum
analyzer, optical power meter, and so on.
Functions as the signal quality monitoring port to monitor online
optical performance of optical signals output from the LOUT port.
MONO LC
Connects to the optical spectrum analyzer board, optical spectrum
analyzer, optical power meter, and so on.
• The EMR8 board is an enhanced 8-port OADM line board.
• EMR8: five-in-one optical line board that integrates the OA, XFIU, OSC, MR8, and
LS functions.

Functions and Features of the EMR8 Board
MR8
Basic functions Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
module
Basic functions Amplifies optical signals over C-band wavelengths in the range of 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
In the Tx direction: The TN15OAC106 board adjusts the gain based on the input optical power to achieve continuous gain adjustment
in the range from 16 dB to 23 dB.
Gain adjustment
In the Rx direction: The TN15OAC101 board adjusts the gain based on the input optical power to achieve continuous gain adjustment
in the range from 20 dB to 31 dB.
Online optical Provides an online monitoring optical port. Through this optical port, a small number of optical signals can be output to the optical
performance spectrum analyzer or the optical spectrum analyzer board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical performance of the multipl exed
monitoring optical signals can be monitored without interrupting the services.
The EDFA inside the board has the gain locking function. When one or more channels are added or reduced or the optical signals in
Gain locking
some channels fluctuate, the signal gain of other channels is not affected.
OA
module The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or deleted, the system can be smoothly
Transient control
upgraded and expanded by suppressing the optical power fluctuation of the channels.
Supports the gain locking and power locking modes.

• In gain locking mode, the gain of the EDFA is tunable and users can query the actual gain of the EDFA. The gain locking mode is
Working mode
enabled by default.
• The power locking mode applies to the dummy light scenario in which the output optical power of theEDFA needs to be locked.
• Detects and reports optical power.

Performance event and • Controls the temperature of the pump laser.
alarm monitoring • Monitors the pump drive current, back facet current, cooling current, pump laser temperature, and ambient temperature of the
board.
• The EMR8 board provides functions and features such as add/drop multiplexing,
cascading ports, wavelength query, line fiber quality monitoring, and IPA.
• Line fiber quality monitoring: The board supports the line fiber quality monitoring
function on the NMS. The NMS displays monitoring figures and data. In addition,
it supports online and offline line fiber quality monitoring. For details, see the
Fiber Doctor System in the Feature Description. To use this function, you need to
purchase a license for the Fiber Doctor System.
• IPA: When a fiber cut occurs on the line, the intelligent power adjustment (IPA)
function shuts down the upstream OAs to prevent the laser exposure from
hurting the maintenance personnel. After the fiber is repaired, the OAs resume
working.
Functions and Features of the EMR8 Board
Receives/Transmits and processes two OSC signals.
Basic functions
Supports a maximum of 37.5 dB span transmission.
OSC operating
TM1/RM2: 1504.5 nm–1517.5 nm; TM2/RM1: 1484.5 nm–1497.5 nm
wavelength range
OSC
module The distance between two line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The OSC performance is not
Technology features
affected when the line amplifier fails.
The board transmits signals section by section and has the 3R functions. At each OA
Regeneration function regeneration site, the signals can be correctly received and new supervisory signals can be
added.
Loopback Supports outloops.
• XFIU module: Multiplexes the main optical path and OSC signals into the line-
side path and performs the reverse process.
• LS module: Detects and reports multiplexed optical power on the IN and OUT
ports, and detects single wavelengths and single-wavelength optical power on
the OUT port of the OTU board with the LS function at the source end. The
board works with the OD license. After the OD function is configured, the board
supports OSNR detection for single-wavelength signals of an OTU board with the
LS function at the source end.
OL Board
Port
Port Type Function
Silkscreen
LIN LC Inputs the main optical path signals to be amplified (including OSC signals).
Outputs the main optical path signals that are amplified (including OSC
LOUT LC
signals).
SIN LC Inputs the multiplexed signals to be amplified (excluding OSC signals).
SOUT LC Outputs the multiplexed signals that are amplified (excluding OSC signals).
Functions as the signal quality monitoring port to monitor online optical

performance of optical signals input from the LIN port. Connects to the
MONI LC
optical spectrum analyzer board, optical spectrum analyzer, optical power
meter, and so on.
Functions as the signal quality monitoring port to monitor online optical
performance of optical signals output from the LOUT port. Connects to the
MONO LC
optical spectrum analyzer board, optical spectrum analyzer, optical power
meter, and so on.
• The TMN1OL board is an OTM line board. It amplifies optical signals,

demultiplexes and multiplexes the OSC and main optical path signals, and
monitors the optical power. It can be used at the Tx end and Rx end.
• The OL board integrates the OA, XFIU, OPM, and OSC & OTDR functions. It
provides functions and features such as gain adjustment, online optical
performance monitoring, gain locking, and transient control.

OLA Board
Inputs the main optical path signals to be amplified

LIN LC
Outputs the main optical path signals (including OSC
LOUT LC
signals).
SIN LC Inputs the multiplexed signals (excluding OSC signals).
Outputs the multiplexed signals that are amplified (excluding

SOUT LC
OSC signals).
Functions as the signal quality monitoring port to monitor

online optical performance of optical signals input from the
MONI LC
LIN port. Connects to the optical spectrum analyzer board,
optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, and so on.
• The OLA board is a regeneration line board that integrates the OA, XFIU, OPM,
and OSC & OTDR functions.
• The OLA board is a regeneration line board. It amplifies optical signals,
monitors the optical power.
Application of the OLA Board in a WDM System
OSC OSC
OSC_RM1 OSC_TM1 OSC_RM2 OSC_TM2
TM1(1511) RM1(1491) TM2(1491) RM2(1511)
LIN TC R_VI SOUT SIN RC LOUT

LOUT
OA LIN
R_IN R_OUT
OL
OL
XFIU R_OUT XFIU
LOUT RC SIN SOUT TC LIN
OA
LIN R_VI R_IN LOUT
OPM_IN1
MONI RM1(1491) TM1(1511)
RM2(1511) TM2(1491) OPM_IN1
MONI OSC_TM1 OSC_RM1
OSC_TM2 OSC_RM2
OSC OPM OPM OSC
OLA OLA
• The OLA board is a regeneration line board. It amplifies optical signals,

monitors the optical power.
OPC Board
Ports on the EOMSP module
Port Port
Function
Silkscreen Type
Ports on the OLP module IN LC
Inputs line signals from the FIU board (optical
line protection).
Port Port OUT LC
Outputs line signals to the FIU board (optical line
Function protection).
Silkscreen Type
Inputs line signals from the FIU board (optical Functions as a dual-fed optical port. Port D1
IN LC transmits signals to port A1 of the matched
line protection).
D1/D2 LC EOMSP module, and port D2 transmits signals to
Outputs line signals to the FIU board (optical port A2 of the matched EOMSP module (forming
OUT LC
line protection). optical line protection).
Functions as a dual-fed optical port to
Functions as a selective-receiving optical port.
T1/T2 LC transmit working and protection optical signals
Port A1 receives signals from port D1 of the
to the line side (optical line protection).
A1/A2 LC matched EOMSP module, and port A2 receives
Functions as a selective-receiving optical port signals from port D2 of the matched EOMSP
to receive the working or protection optical module (forming optical line protection).
R1/R2 LC
signals from the line side (optical line
Tx LC Transmits optical signals to the line side.
protection).
Rx LC Receives optical signals from the line side.
• The OPC board is an optical-layer platform board. It can be equipped with four
pluggable modules. The board supports pluggable OLP and EOMSP modules to
function as an OLP or EOMSP board.

Application of the OPC Board in a WDM System
T1 O O R1
M D
T1 R1
R1 O O T1
IN OTU OTU OUT D M
IN OUT
OPC
R1 T1
OPC
OPC
OTU
OPC
OTU OTU
OUT T2 R2 IN OUT T2 O O R2 IN
OTU OTU M D
R2 T2
R2 O O T2
D M
Client 1+1 protection Intra-board 1+1 protection

Functions and Features of the OPC Board
• Optical line protection: The dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP or EOMSP
module is used to provide protection for line fibers between adjacent sites using diverse routes.
• Intra-board 1+1 protection: The dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP module is
Basic functions used to protect services against a fault on the working channel.
• Client 1+1 protection: The dual fed and selective receiving function of the OLP module is used
to protect services in case of a fault on the line side of the OTU board, a board fault, or a
subrack fault.
Spectrum application Supports Super C band.
Supports dual fed and selective receiving. (At the Tx end, the protected signals are dual-fed to
Protection scheme the working and protection channels. At the Rx end, the working or protection signals are
selectively received according to the optical power of the received signals.)
Optical power equalization of the Supported
working and protection channels
IPC The IPC function is used to detect intra-site fibers. When an intra-site fiber cut occurs, the output
optical power of the OA board is automatically controlled to be lower than or equal to 21.3 dBm.

Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following statements about the OL, OLA,
and OPC boards is incorrect?
A. All the three boards can amplify optical signals.
B. The OL board is used at the Tx and Rx ends.

C. The OLA board is used at a regeneration site.
D. The OPC board has different functions depending on the inserted module.
• Answer: A
Summary
⚫ Product overview
⚫ Cabinets and subracks
⚫ Boards

intelligent world.


that
NG WDM Equipment Networking
and Applications
Foreword
⚫ Compared with traditional WDM, NG WDM delivers more flexible

topologies and more protection modes.
⚫ This course describes the networking modes and basic elements of Huawei
NG WDM equipment, and the application scenarios of various types of
sites.
Objectives

 List NG WDM site types.
 Describe the signal flows of different types of NG WDM sites.
 Describe the application scenarios of NG WDM sites.
 List the basic elements of NG WDM networking.
Contents
1. Network Layers and System Architecture
2. Site Types
3. Basic Networking Elements
Network Layers
E9600 E9624/9800 U32E
ODUk/VC/Packet ODUk/VC/Packet
E6600 E9600 E9624/

9800 U32E E9624/
9800 U32E
E9600 E9624/
9800 U32E
Edge/Access layer Metro/Aggregation layer Backbone/Core layer
• NG WDM equipment can be used at the backbone/core, metro/aggregation, and

edge/access layers.
• OptiX OSN 9800 is mainly used at the backbone/core layer, OptiXtrans E9600 is
mainly used at the metro/aggregation layer, and OptiXtrans E6600 is mainly used
at metro edge nodes.
• OptiXtrans E9600 and OptiX OSN 9800 can form a complete end-to-end (E2E)
OTN network with OptiXtrans E6600/OptiX OSN 1800, which is then managed in
a unified manner.
OptiXtrans E9600 & OptiX OSN 9800 System Architecture
⚫ Unified optical-layer and
electrical-layer grooming NMS GMPLS
model
L2 L0
Optical-Layer grooming
Flexible optical cross-connection

 Ethernet Packet board
line board
Universal
λ
PKT
◼ L0 optical layer L1
STM-N TDM board VC
OTN line To line fiber
 Electrical-layer ODU board/
OTN tributary general
FC
grooming board/EoO board/
general service
M:N service
processing
processing board Unified electrical board
◼ L1 electrical layer cross-connection
OTUk Optical transponder board WDM
◼ L2 electrical layer
External alarms
-48V/-60V DC Auxiliary
1+1 SCC Sychronization
interface board
• NG WDM uses the L0+L1+L2 architecture. L0 optical layer supports

multiplexing/demultiplexing of optical wavelengths and adding/dropping of
DWDM optical signals. L1 electrical layer supports cross-connections of ODUk/VC
services. L2 implements Ethernet/MPLS-TP–based switching.
• Through the backplane buses, the system implements control of other boards by
the system control board, inter-board communication, service grooming between
boards, and power supply. The backplane buses include the control and
communication bus, electrical cross-connect bus, and clock bus.
• The functions of the modules in the figure are as follows:
▫ Optical-layer boards include optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards,
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards, optical amplifier (OA)
boards, optical supervisory channel boards, optical protection boards,
optical spectrum analyzer boards, variable optical attenuator boards, and
optical power and dispersion equalization boards. They process optical
services and provide wavelength-level service grooming.
▫ Electrical-layer boards include tributary boards, packet boards, and line
boards. They are used to process electrical-layer signals and perform O-E-O
conversion of signals. The centralized cross-connect unit can be used to
implement flexible grooming of electrical-layer signals at various
granularities.
▫ A system control and communication board is the control center of an NE,
and interoperates with the NMS to manage boards and implement
communication between NEs.
▫ The auxiliary interface unit provides functional ports such as clock/time
input/output ports (reserved), alarm output and cascading ports, and alarm
input/output ports.
OptiXtrans E6600 System Architecture
OptiXtrans E6608T OptiXtrans E6608/E6616
• Optical layer boards include optical multiplexer/demultiplexer boards, fixed

optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM) boards, reconfigurable optical add/drop
multiplexer (ROADM) boards, OA boards, and optical protection boards. They
process optical services and provide wavelength-level service grooming.
▫ Optical transponder boards are used to process service signals and perform
O-E-O conversion of signals.
▫ An SCC board (only for E6608T) is the center of the system. It collaborates
with the NMS to manage all boards of the system and implement inter-
equipment communication.
▫ A system control, switching, and timing board (only for E6608 and E6616)
supports the communication control, service grooming, and clock
processing functions. It collaborates with the NMS to manage all boards of
the system and provides system clock signals and frame header signals to
all service boards and synchronizes the NE time to the time of the upstream
NE.
• Power redundancy and fan redundancy are provided to ensure high system
reliability.
• Inter-board communication and service grooming, clock synchronization, and
power supplies are implemented using backplane buses. The backplane buses
include control and communication buses, clock buses, and power supply buses.
Network Topology (1)
⚫ Point-to-point
OTM OTM
⚫ Chain
OTM OADM OTM
• Transport networks support various network topologies: point-to-point, chain,

ring, and mesh. MSTP and NG WDM devices can be deployed together to form a
complete transport network. Different network topologies are applicable to
different scenarios. Select an appropriate network topology according to service
requirements.
• Point-to-point
▫ A point-to-point network is the simplest network topology for end-to-end

service transmission. It is also a basic network, which serves as the
foundation of other network topologies. A point-to-point network is
generally used to transmit voice, data private line, and storage services.
• Chain
▫ When some wavelengths need to be added or dropped locally, but other

wavelengths require pass-through transmission, you need to use OADM
devices to form a chain network. Compared with a point-to-point network,
a chain network has similar service types but is more flexible. A chain
network can transmit point-to-point services as well as convergence and
broadcast services in simple networking mode.
Network Topology (2)
⚫ Ring
 A ring network has the self-healing capability and is the main transport network
topology.
OADM
OADM OADM
OADM
• Ring
▫ The security and reliability of a network are critical for the service quality of
the network. To improve the protection capability, most transport networks
adopt the ring networking. Ring networks have the widest application
range. They are applicable to point-to-point, convergence, and broadcast
services. Many complex networks can be built based on ring networks, for
example, tangent rings, intersecting rings, and ring with chain.
Contents
2. Site Types
◼ OTM
▫ OLA
▫ FOADM
▫ ROADM
▫ Application Scenarios

Site Types and Basic Functions
An optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) site adds/drops
services, multiplexes/demultiplexes wavelengths, amplifies
OTM optical signals, and processes optical supervisory signals.
An optical line amplifier (OLA) site amplifies optical signals

OLA and processes optical supervisory signals.
A FOADM site adds/drops services, statically passes through

FOADM wavelengths, multiplexes/demultiplexes wavelengths,
Site types amplifies signals, and processes optical supervisory signals.
OADM
A ROADM site adds/drops services, dynamically passes
ROADM through wavelengths, multiplexes/demultiplexes
wavelengths, amplifies signals, and processes optical
supervisory signals.
An electrical regeneration (REG) site processes

REG multiplexing/demultiplexing, electrical regeneration, signal
amplification, and optical supervisory signals.
Functional Boards of an OTM Site
⚫ An OTM site requires the following functional boards:
 Optical transponder boards (LTX, LSC, ...)
 Tributary and line boards (TQX, NS4, ...)
 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards (M40V/M48V, D40/D48, ITL, FIU, and SFIU)
 OA boards (OAU1, OBU1, ...)
 OSC boards (SC1 and ST2)
 Dispersion compensation unit (DCU) or dispersion compensation module (DCM)
 System control and communication boards (SCC)
 Spectrum analyzer boards (MCA8, OPM8, ...)
• Principles of configuring the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards:
▫ For an 80-channel OTM site, Interleaver (ITL) boards must be configured if

the M40V/D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.
• Principles of configuring OA boards:

▫ Based on optical power budget principles, OA boards need be configured
according to actual situations.
• Principles of configuring OSC boards:
▫ Both the SC1 and ST2 boards can control the receiving/transmitting of
optical supervisory signals and transmit and extract the overhead
information of the system. The ST2 board is required if IEEE 1588v2
synchronization clock processing, transparent transmission of two channels
of FE signals, and line fiber quality monitoring needs to be provided.
Signal Flow of a 40-Wavelength OTM Site
Rx OUT M01
OTU
OUT VI
M40V
Rx OUT M02
OTU VO OUT
OBU
IN SYS1
OUT M40 LINE1
Rx
TU LU
R M1 OSC2
SFIU
ST2
TM1 OSC1
Tx LINE2
IN D01
OTU IN SYS2
Tx IN D02 IN OUT
OTU VO
D40
OAU
Tx IN D40 R DC VI
TU LU TDC
OUT IN
DCM
Fi xed attenuator
• The OTM equipment is applied at terminal sites.
▫ Receive direction: Line signals received from the west direction are
separated into optical supervisory signals and main channel optical signals.
The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory unit for
processing, and the main channel optical signals are amplified and then
sent to the optical demultiplexing unit. All wavelengths are separated and
transmitted to the corresponding wavelength conversion units, and then are
sent to local client devices.
▫ The signal flow in the transmit direction is the reverse process of that of the
receive direction.
• At OTM sites, the optical power flatness in the transmit direction of the OTU is a
major concern. Therefore, the M40V board is configured.
• In addition, fixed optical attenuators must be added at the receive end of the
client side and WDM side of the OTU board to adjust the optical power to a
value between the receiver sensitivity and the overload point.
Signal Flow of a 48-Wavelength OTM Site
Rx OUT M01
OTU
OUT R _VI
M48V
Rx OUT M02
OTU R _OUT
R _VO
OUT M48 SYS1 LINE1

Rx
TU LU R _IN
R M1 OSC2
SFIU
ST2
DAP
TM1 OSC1
Tx LINE2
IN D01
OTU T_IN SYS2
Tx IN D02 IN T_OUT
OTU D48 T_VO
Tx IN D48
TU LU T_VI
Fi xed attenuator
• The OTM equipment is applied at terminal sites.
sent to the optical demultiplexing unit. All wavelengths are separated and
transmitted to the corresponding wavelength conversion units, and then are
sent to local client devices.
receive direction.
• At OTM sites, the optical power flatness in the transmit direction of the OTU is a
major concern. Therefore, the M48V board is configured.
• In addition, fixed optical attenuators must be added at the receive end of the
client side and WDM side of the OTU board to adjust the optical power to a
value between the receiver sensitivity and the overload point.
Signal Flow of an 80-Wavelength OTM Site
Rx OUT M01
OTU
M40V
OUT RE
Rx OUT M40
OTU OUT VI OUT
VO OBU
OBU1
Rx OUT M01
OTU IN
M40V
OUT RO
SYS1 S LINE1
Rx OUT M40 I
TU LU R M1 OSC2 F
SFIU
ST2
ITL
T TM1 OSC1 LINE2
Tx IN D01 I
OTU IN TE L SYS2
D40
U
Tx IN D40
OTU IN OUT VI
OAU IN
Tx IN D01 R DC VO
OTU
IN TO TDC
D40
Tx IN D40 OUT IN
TU LU Fi xed attenuator
DCM
• In the case of 96 wavelengths, the M48V and D48 boards are used as the
multiplexer and demultiplexer boards, and the DAP or DAPXF board that
supports the extended C band is used as an OA board.
Signal Flow of a Single-Fiber Bidirectional OTM Site
OAU
Rx OUT MD01 TC 1 R C1
OTU
Rx OUT MD02
OTU
Rx OUT MD18
TU LU
LINE LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 LINE1
EX40
MB1
SFIU
Tx MD23
IN
OTU
Tx IN MD24
OTU
Tx IN MD40
TU LU
TC 2 R C2 OSC2 OSC1
OBU R M1 TM1 Fi xed attenuator

ST2
• The EX40 board can multiplex a maximum of 18 channels of ITU-T G.694.1-

compliant standard-wavelength optical signals into one channel of optical signal,
and demultiplex one channel of optical signal to a maximum of 18 channels of
ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard-wavelength optical signals. When the EX40
board is used in this application scenario, optical ports MD01 to MD18 form a
group and optical ports MD23 to MD40 form a group. One group is used for
receiving optical signals and the other is used for transmitting optical signals. The
EX40 board can also work with the TNF1ITL board to multiplex/demultiplex 35
channels of signals (even bands at ports MD01–MD18, MD23–MD40; odd bands
at ports MD01–MD17, MD23–MD39).
Contents
2. Site Types
▫ OTM
◼ OLA
▫ FOADM
▫ ROADM

Functional Boards of an OLA Site
⚫ An OLA site requires the following functional boards:
 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards (FIU and SFIU)
Signal Flow of an OLA Site
DCM
IN OUT
TDC
IN R DC
VO OUT SYS2
SYS1 OAU
VI
LINE1 LINE2
OSC1 TM1 R M2 OSC2

SFIU
SFIU
ST2
OSC2 R M1 TM2 OSC1
LINE2 LINE1
VI SYS1
SYS2 OUT
OAU VO
R DC
IN
TDC
OUT IN
DCM
• The OLA equipment is used on the OA site to amplify the optical signals
transmitted in two directions.
▫ Optical supervisory signals and main channel optical signals are separated
from the received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the
optical supervisory unit for processing. The main channel optical signals are
amplified by the OA unit and are sent to the optical line for transmission
together with the processed optical supervisory signals.
• Optical fiber connections of the OLA site are simple. The OAU1 board is used as
the OA board.
• The OSC board of the OLA site is an ST2 board, which has bidirectional optical
supervisory channels.
Contents
2. Site Types
▫ OTM
▫ OLA
◼ FOADM
▫ ROADM

Functional Boards of an FOADM Site
⚫ An FOADM site requires the following functional boards:
 Optical transponder boards (LTX, LSC, ...)
 Tributary and line boards (TOA, NS4, ...)
 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards (M40V, D40, ITL, FIU, and SFIU)
 FOADM boards (MR2, MR4, MR8, ...)
• FOADM sites can be classified into two types:
▫ Parallel FOADM (or back-to-back OTM) sites that use M40V/D40 boards
▫ Serial FOADM sites that use MR2/MR4/MR8/MR8V boards

Signal Flow of a Parallel FOADM Site (M40V/D40)
⚫ C_EVEN configuration
TM R M1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 R M2 TM
D01 M01
IN OUT
M
M40V
TC IN OUT RC
D40
OA Dn Mn 4 OA
OTU 0
V
FIU
FIU
OUT IN
OTU
M TC
RC
M40V
OUT 4 IN
OA OA
D40
0
V
W est East
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Adjustable attenuator
Fi xed attenuator
• Parallel FOADM sites (back-to-back OTM sites) are deployed as intermediate

sites.
sent to the optical demultiplexing unit.
▫ Some wavelengths are separated and transmitted into the wavelength
conversion unit and then are sent to the local client equipment. Other
wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally, but pass through and then are
multiplexed with the locally added wavelengths through the optical
multiplexing unit, and then the optical signals are amplified. Finally, the
signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals and
transmitted to the line for transmission. That is, when services need to pass
through, taking the pass-through service form the west to the east as an
example, directly connect a fiber patch cord from the west D40 to the east
M40V. When there are multiple directions, route the fiber patch cords using
an ODF. When services need to be added or dropped, the M40V/D40 board
needs to be connected to the OTU board.
receive direction.
• When service regeneration is required, a regeneration OTU board can be
connected in the west-east transmission direction for regeneration.
Signal Flow of a Serial FOADM Site (MRx)
⚫ C_EVEN configuration
TM R M1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 R M2 TM
IN OUT
TC IN MO OUT RC
OA O O OA
MI
FIU
FIU
OADM
A OADM
A
D MI D TC
RC OUT IN
M M OA
OUT OA MO IN
A1 Ax A1 Ax
D1 Dx D1 Dx
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Fi xed attenuator
• An FOADM site that uses TTF boards of the MR2/MR4/MR8/MR8V series is called
a serial FOADM site. The equipment at a serial FOADM site processes the optical
signals in the two transmission directions separately.
• The MR2/MR4/MR8/MR8V boards can add and drop 2, 4, and 8 wavelengths
separately. They can be cascaded.
• A maximum of eight MR2 boards can be cascaded in the even-numbered C-band.
That is, a maximum of 16 wavelengths can be added or dropped.
• If the number of wavelengths is greater than 16, M40V/D40 boards are
recommended.
• Note that a VOA must be added between the pass-through wavelength and the
add wavelength to adjust the power flatness.
• Assume that a FOADM site consists of two MR4 boards. Then:
▫ Receive direction: The FIU board splits optical supervisory signals and main
channel optical signals from the received line signals, and sends the optical
supervisory signals to the optical supervisory unit for processing.
▫ The main channel optical signals are amplified and then sent to the MR4.
Some wavelengths are split into the wavelength conversion unit and then
sent to the local client equipment.
▫ Other wavelengths are not added/dropped or multiplexed locally. After
passing through, the wavelengths are multiplexed with locally added
wavelengths, amplified, multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
signals, and then transmitted to the line for transmission.
receive direction.
Contents
2. Site Types
▫ OTM
▫ OLA
▫ FOADM
◼ ROADM

Basic Concepts - Directioned
⚫ Directioned: A local wavelength carrying services can be transmitted to a specific
direction.
Direction 1
IN OUT
ROADM board
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx
Wavelengths added or dropped locally can

be transmitted only to direction 1.
• In a directioned scenario, the current path on which a service is traversing cannot

be adjusted flexibly. If the current path needs to be adjusted, a site visit is
required to adjust fiber connections for the network.
• A directioned scenario applies to non-ASON networks.

Basic Concepts - Directionless
⚫ Directionless: A wavelength carrying local services can be transmitted to any
direction.
Direction 1 Direction x
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx

ROADM board
IN OUT
Wavelengths added or dropped locally can be

transmitted to any direction.
• In a non-ASON network, the current path on which a service is traversing cannot

be automatically adjusted in the directionless scenario. If the path needs to be
adjusted or the protection path is used in case of a fault on the working path,
optical cross-connections need to be manually configured to achieve flexible
service grooming.
• In an ASON network, the rerouting function can automatically detect a path and
automatically create an optical cross-connection.
Basic Concepts - Colored
⚫ Colored: The M40V and D40 boards are used to add and drop wavelengths. Each
port can only add or drop fixed wavelengths.
ROADM board
M40 D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
• Colored add/drop ports (fixed wavelength) have the advantages of lower

insertion loss and lower cost. To replace the existing wavelengths with new
wavelengths, a site visit is required to adjust the fiber connections between the
OTU board or line board and the add/drop ports of the multiplexer/demultiplexer
board.
• On an ASON network, services can be rerouted on the same wavelength, which
may block the wavelength.
Basic Concepts - Colorless
⚫ Colorless: Any wavelength can be added or dropped through any port on the
ROADM board. The WSM9 and WSD9, WSM9 and RDU9, or TM20 and TD20 boards
can be used to add or drop wavelengths.
ROADM board
WSM9 WSD9
WSM9 WSD9
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
• In the figure, the WSM9 and WSD9 boards are used as an example.
• Colorless add/drop ports (tunable wavelength) allow remote reconfiguration of

the ROADM. However, the OTU or line boards must be installed in the subrack in
order to automatically provision new services. If the OTU or line boards are not
physically present in the subrack, a site visit is required to install boards needed
for provisioning new services.
• On an ASON network, if a wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in the

colorless scenario, service wavelengths can be flexibly tuned during rerouting to
avoid wavelength congestion.
Functional Boards of an ROADM Site
⚫ An ROADM site requires the following functional boards:
 Optical transponder boards (LSX, ...)
 Tributary and line boards (TOA + NS3, TTX + NS4, ...)
 ROADM boards (WSMD2/4/9, WSM9, RDU9, WSD9, ...)
 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards (M40V, D40, ITL, FIU, and SFIU)
• ROADM sites models:
▫ ROADM site consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards (40 or 80 wavelengths)
▫ ROADM site consisting of WSD9 and WSM9 boards (40 or 80 wavelengths)
▫ ROADM site consisting of WSMD2/WSMD4/WSMD9 boards

Signal Flow of a 2-Degree ROADM Site (WSMD9)
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
… …
D40 M40V
DM1 DM8 AM1 AM8
IN TC IN EXPO RC OUT
OUT
OA OA
OA
EXPI
FIU
FIU
WSMD9 W SMD9
WSMD9
RC OUT EXPO IN TC
OA OA
OA
OUT EXPI
IN
AM8 AM1 DM8 DM1
M40V D40
D40
… …
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Fi xed attenuator
• As a ROADM unit, the WSMD9 board is used with optical multiplexer boards,
optical demultiplexer boards, or other OADM boards to perform wavelength
grooming at DWDM network nodes.
• Optical interfaces AM1–AM8, DM1–DM8, EXPI, and EXPO on the WSMD9 board
also can be used to cross-connect boards in other directions.
• The WSMD9 boards can be directly connected to the coherent OTU or line
boards because the coherent OTU or line board supports wavelength selection.
(Applicable only to signals at 50 GHz channel spacing)
Signal Flow of a 4-Degree ROADM Site (RDU9+WSM9)
IN IN
DC M
DC M
FIU
FIU
OUT OUT
DC M
DC M
OSC
IN
DC M IN
DC M
FIU
FIU
OUT OUT
DC M
DC M
OSC
Contents
2. Site Types
▫ OTM
▫ OLA
▫ FOADM
▫ ROADM
◼ Application Scenarios

40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s Coherent Hybrid Transmission
WDM Systems (1)
⚫ Typical Application
40/100 40/100
Gbit/s M M Gbit/s
T N U U N T
X X
Client- / / Client-
side D D side
services M M 40 Gbit/s services
40 Gbit/s
OTU U U OTU
X X
100 Gbit/s 100 Gbit/s
OTU OTU
Coherent Coherent Optical Electrical T: Tributary

N: Line board
board wavelength signal signal board
• This section uses a 40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s coherent hybrid WDM system as an
example to describe the typical applications of a site.
40 Gbit/s and 100 Gbit/s Coherent Hybrid Transmission
WDM Systems (2)
⚫ 100G and 40G integral granularity
100G optical-layer pass-through
services are transmitted at the
40G optical-layer pass-through
Optical
optical layer.
100G sub-wavelength grooming
domain
Electrical ⚫ 100G and 40G services with sub-
wavelength
OTU OTU
grooming
40G sub-
domain
.... granularities are groomed at the

....
OTU OTU
electrical layer.
40G 40G 10G
40G wavelength
100G wavelength
• 100G direct encapsulation technology maps 100G services to OTU4 services for
transmission. 100G services can be transmitted over a single wavelength. The
100G reverse encapsulation technology can also be used to transmit 100G
services on a 10G or 40G WDM network.
NG WDM Terabit OTN – Network Bandwidth Manager
⚫ Generally, the backbone layer uses the 40/80 wavelengths x 40G or 40/80 wavelengths x 100G.
Regional networks use 40 wavelengths x 10G. Sub-wavelength service grooming can be used to cover
the capacity gap between the backbone layer and regional networks.
⚫ Services are transparently transmitted, applicable to private line services such as 10GE/GE/2.5G
services.
Backbone
layer
4 x 10G -> 40G

4 x 2.5G -> 10G
4 x GE + 2 x 2.5G -> 10G
4 x 2.5G - > 10G
R egional/Metro
GE
2.5G
10G
40G
• In general, NG WDM equipment is applicable to the grooming of high-rate

services. It integrates services and perfectly combines the backbone layer and
gigabit routers, providing strong support for evolution to IP networks.
Contents
2. Site Types
Basic Networking Elements
WDM network
Basic Networking Elements
Optical
Optical signal-to- Non-linear
Dispersion
power noise ratio effects
(OSNR)
Optical Power Budget
⚫ Fiber loss (dB) = POUT (dBm) – PIN (dBm)
= Distance (km) x a (dB/km)

⚫ In the1550 nm window, the loss coefficient of G.652 and G.655 fibers is 0.22 dB/km
P OUT P IN
Site A Site B
• Optical power budget is used to determine the regeneration section distance. The
process of the power budget is a process of configuring amplifiers. The optical
power at the transmit end must meet the requirement of incident optical power,
and the optical power at the receive end must be within the working range of the
receiver. In DWDM systems, power loss introduced by line fibers, optical modules,
and optical components can be compensated using optical amplifiers (either
erbium-doped fiber amplifiers or Raman amplifiers). When designing a network,
you need to calculate the fiber loss of the entire link and consider system margin
(a 3 dB margin should be reserved when there is no special requirement for the
project). Then, you need to configure amplifiers first and then adjust them
according to the configuration of dispersion compensation modules.
• The fiber attenuation coefficient is subject to the actual measured value.
• If the attenuation coefficient is accurate, line power margin is generally 3 dB,
which contains the insertion loss of the FIU board.
• According to the ITU-T recommendation, 0.275 dB/km (end-of-life value) is usually
used as the attenuation coefficient of fibers in project designing. The long-haul
transmission of optical signals requires that the signal power be sufficient to cancel
fiber attenuation. The attenuation coefficient of common G.652 and G.655 fibers in
the 1550 nm window is about 0.22 dB/km. Considering factors such as optical
connectors and fiber redundancy, generally, the default fiber attenuation
coefficient is 0.275 dB/km. If there is no special requirement, the default value of
connector loss of fiber jumping sites is 1 dB.
• During network design, if the actual attenuation value of each optical cable line is
known, add system engineering margin based on the actual test value. Generally,
the actual attenuation value is 3 dB. If OSC is used, insertion losses of the fiber line
units need to be considered (generally 1 dB; FIU losses at both ends). If ESC is used
instead of OSC, the introduced attenuation can be ignored.
Dispersion Limit
⚫ Chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) = Distance (km) x Dispersion coefficient (ps/nm.km)
⚫ G.652 fiber: Dispersion coefficient = 17 ps/nm.km
⚫ G.655 fiber: Dispersion coefficient = 4.5 ps/nm.km
⚫ CD is considered in actual projects.
⚫ DCMs are used to implement dispersion compensation for long-haul transmission.
• In the case of no dispersion compensation, each regeneration section should be

shorter than the dispersion limit. If the regeneration section is longer than the
dispersion limit, dispersion compensation is required.
• Dispersion limit (km) = Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)/Dispersion coefficient

(ps/nm.km). Dispersion tolerance depends on the laser (light source). Dispersion
tolerance values of light sources vary according to rates and quality. Dispersion
coefficient depends on fibers.
• Currently, two types of DCM modules are for the G.652 (SMF) fibers and G.655
(LEAF/TRUEWAVE) fibers on the live network.
▫ The typical dispersion coefficient of a G.652 SMF is 17 ps/nm.km. However,
when you convert the dispersion tolerance of an OTU to dispersion limit,
the dispersion value of 20 ps/nm.km should be used.
▫ The typical dispersion coefficient of a G.655 SMF is 4.5 ps/nm.km. However,
when you convert the dispersion tolerance of an OTU to dispersion limit,
the dispersion value of 6 ps/nm.km should be used.
OSNR (1)
⚫ OSNR (dB) = 10 x lg [Psignal (mW)/Pnoise (mW)]
= Psignal (dBm) – Pnoise (dBm)

⚫ OSNR: Optical Signal to Noise Ratio
⚫ ASE: Amplified Spontaneous Emission
• OSNR is the most important indicator for measuring the performance of a

DWDM system. OSNR refers to the ratio of signal optical power and noise power
in a transmission link.
• OSNR (dB) = 10 x lg [Psignal (mW)/Pnoise (mW)] = Psignal (dBm) – Pnoise (dBm)

• When OSNR decreases to a certain threshold, the performance of a system is
adversely affected to a great extent. For a DWDM system with multiple cascaded
line OAs, when OAs are used to compensate for line loss, the radiated noise of
amplifiers is introduced. The optical power of the noise mainly comes from the
accumulation of the spontaneous radiated noise of amplifiers. As a result, the
OSNR decreases, and the transmission performance deteriorates.
• According to the definition of ITU-T: The signal power used for calculating the
OSNR is the total signal power (40-wavelength system) in a 0.8 nm bandwidth,
and the noise power is the total noise power in a 0.1 nm bandwidth.
OSNR (2)
OTU OTU
M
M40
D40
4 OA OA OA OA OA OA
0 OTS 1 OTS 2 OTS 3 OTS 4 OTS 5
OTU OTU
Optical power
(dBm) P signal
P noise (ASE)
Distance (km)
OSNR
(dB)
Distance (km)
• In a WDM system, the decrease of OSNR is caused by the introduction of ASE

noise by each OA unit. The noise introduced on the lines can be ignored during
planning.
• On an optical line, the optical powers of signals and noise decrease with the
attenuation of optical fibers.
• As shown in the figure, the noise introduced by each OA board is the same, but
the OSNR decrease introduced by the first-level OA board is the largest.
Non-linear Effects
⚫ Methods for suppressing non-linear effects
 Use fibers with large effective areas as transmission media.
 Control optical power of signals.
 Manage dispersion properly.
 Use advanced light source technologies.
SRS SPM FWM ...
Non-linear effects
SPM ...
• Non-linear effects refer to the effects caused by the nonlinear polarization of

medium under strong light, including optical harmonic, frequency multiplication,
stimulated Raman scattering (SRS), dual-photon absorption, saturation
absorption, self-focusing, and self-defocusing. All media are non-linear actually,
but too insignificant to be noticed in general conditions. When the incident
optical power of a fiber is low, the fiber appears to be linear. It becomes more
non-linear after OAs and high-power lasers are used in the optical fiber
communication system. This is because in SMFs, optical signals are confined in a
mode field and the effective areas of SMFs are small (for example, the effective
area of a G.652 fiber is about 80 μm2). Therefore, the power density is high,
which allows long-haul transmission with low attenuation.
• Therefore, non-linearity is closely related to the optical power. To avoid non-

linear effects, the total optical power on a fiber should be less than 20 dBm (with
single-wavelength optical powers < 4 dBm).
• The Super WDM technology can suppress non-linear effects in a transmission
system.
intelligent world.


that
Optical- and Electrical-Layer Grooming
Solutions of NG WDM Devices
Foreword
⚫ Flexible optical- and electrical-layer grooming is an advantage that sets NG

WDM devices apart from traditional WDM devices.
⚫ This course describes the optical- and electrical-layer grooming solutions of
OptiX NG WDM devices, focuses on the site models, application scenarios,
and electrical-layer grooming models of the ROADM grooming solution,
and analyzes common application scenarios of electrical-layer grooming.
Objectives

 Describe the ROADM features of NG WDM devices.
 Describe the ROADM boards of NG WDM devices, including their application scenarios.
 Distinguish the electrical-layer cross-connection functions of various boards on NG WDM
devices.
 Understand the electrical-layer cross-connect and grooming models of NG WDM devices.
 Describe the typical application scenarios of electrical-layer cross-connect and grooming
of NG WDM devices.
Contents
1. Optical-Layer Grooming Solutions of NG WDM Devices

◼ OADM Types and Features
▫ ROADM Site Models and Grooming Solutions
2. Electrical-Layer Grooming Solutions of NG WDM Devices
FOADM Definition
⚫ A FOADM node adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from multiplexed signals.
 Parallel FOADM node: consists of an optical multiplexer (MUX) unit and an optical
demultiplexer (DMUX) unit.
 Serial FOADM node: consists of optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) units.
• FOADM nodes can be classified into two types: serial and parallel.
▫ A parallel FOADM node typically consists of M40V+D40 boards, which is

also known as a back-to-back OTM solution.
▫ A serial FOADM node typically consists of MR2+MR2, MR4+MR4, or

MR8+MR8 boards. This course does not cover the CWDM serial solution
and single-fiber bidirectional CWDM solution.
Parallel FOADM Node: DMUX+MUX Units
⚫ DMUX and MUX units are installed in a back-to-back manner. They can drop any wavelength and support full-
wavelength adding/dropping. They need to work with OA units to address intra-site optical power budget issues.
SC 2
West line-side ODF
East line-side ODF

F D
0
M F
M
OA M
4
U4 OA
U
M
OTU X0
I X I
U U
D
M
M M
OA 4 OA
U OTU U0
X X
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
• An OADM built in back-to-back OTM mode demultiplexes all wavelengths locally

by using a DMUX unit, and then passes through certain wavelengths directly
according to the wavelength planning, drops certain wavelengths locally, and
passes through certain wavelengths after regenerating these wavelengths locally.
• An OADM built in back-to-back OTM mode has a flexible networking mode. It

allows each wavelength to be configured separately. Therefore, the expansion of
local add/drop wavelengths does not interrupt the services of any other
wavelengths. This ensures hitless capacity expansion.
• Compared with other OADM modes, an OADM built in back-to-back OTM mode
has a more sufficient power budget during full-wavelength adding or dropping.
• When an OADM built in back-to-back OTM mode is used on a ring network, it
blocks extra noise generated by an EDFA, avoiding the amplifier spontaneous
emission (ASE) caused by the EDFA noise loop.
• An OADM built in back-to-back OTM mode has a number of disadvantages. For
example, MUX and DMUX units need to be deployed at the early stage of
network construction when there are a few services, leading to high cost and
large optical power budget. Therefore, an OADM built in back-to-back OTM
mode is suitable for central nodes where a large number of services need to be
added or dropped at the early stage.
Serial FOADM Node: OADM Units
⚫ East and west OADM units add and drop services in the east and west directions,
respectively. They need to work with OA units to address intra-site optical power
budget issues.
SC 2
West line-side ODF
East line-side ODF

F OA O O OA F
A A
D D
M M
OA OA
I I
O O O O
U T T T T
U U U U U
West client side East client side
• MR2+MR2 is a typical serial FOADM solution. The east and west MR2 boards add
and drop services in the east and west directions, respectively. An MR2 board
consists of two thin film filters (TFFs) that correspond to different wavelengths
and are connected in series. After multiplex section (MS) signals pass through the
TFFs, the wavelength corresponding to the TFF center wavelength is filtered out
and dropped, and other wavelengths are reflected by the TFFs and further
transmitted to other units. The two MR2 boards in the east and west directions
are placed symmetrically so that the services in the east and west directions can
be added and dropped locally. The MR2+MR2 solution features low cost and easy
configuration. You can flexibly configure a TFF combination depending on the
wavelength to be added or dropped.
• The MR4, MR8, and MR8V boards are similar to MR2 boards. If more than two
wavelengths need to be added or dropped, you can use MR4, MR8, or MR8V
boards. If one or two wavelengths need to be added or dropped at the initial
stage, you can use MR2 boards. In future, more MR2 boards can be connected in
series to expand the capacity, which however causes the insertion loss, leading to
a change in the intra-site power budget while also interrupting pass-through
services.
FOADM Disadvantages
⚫ A FOADM node cannot flexibly adjust wavelengths to meet service growth demands.
 Wavelength allocation is based on planning. Once wavelength allocation is completed,
changing wavelengths is difficult and network flexibility is poor.
 Wavelength services cannot be provisioned in a timely manner.
 Site visits are required for node capacity expansion and service adjustment.
 Power budget must be adjusted manually onsite instead of remotely and automatically
during node capacity expansion.
ROADM emerges to eliminate the poor

flexibility of traditional FOADM.
ROADM Definition
⚫ By adjusting the pass-through and blocking states of any wavelength, the ROADM
can flexibly and dynamically adjust the added/dropped wavelengths of nodes on the
network without affecting service transmission on the main optical path. In this way,
wavelengths can be flexibly allocated between the nodes on the network.
⚫ ROADM features:
 Existing services are not adversely affected during service upgrade.
 During network maintenance, wavelengths can be efficiently modified, reducing
maintenance costs.
 The power equalization function enables channel-level power equalization.
• The ROADM technology adjusts the wavelength status (add/drop or pass-

through) by delivering configurations on the NMS. In this way, the status of
wavelengths can be dynamically adjusted remotely, and the optical power of
pass-through and added wavelengths can be equalized.
• With the ROADM technology, pass-through wavelengths and locally

added/dropped wavelengths are reconfigurable. In this way, any wavelength can
be added and dropped on any port.
• A WSS-based ROADM site on a network can change the status of any

wavelength (add/drop or pass-through), without interrupting services. The WSS
allows any wavelength to be output from any port. Each port of the WSS can
add/drop wavelengths locally or function as a multi-directional MS port. A WSS
can work with another WSS or be combined with a coupler to form an ROADM.
The WSS can implement colorless wavelength adding/dropping. You can set the
wavelength status (add/drop or pass-through) on the NMS to dynamically adjust
the wavelength status remotely and provision services quickly. Additionally, the
WSS supports wavelength grooming in multiple directions and multi-degree
ROADM structure. With the WSS, the wavelengths of multi-directional nodes
such as rings with chains and intersecting rings are configurable.
Core Component of ROADM – WSS
⚫ WSS: wavelength selective switching.
⚫ The WSS-based ROADM supports intra-ring and inter-ring grooming.
M 1
1 U
X
2
D 3 M 2
U
M 4 X
U Optical switch
…
…
X
40
M 9
U
X
VOA array
• Wavelength selective cross-connections mean that any wavelength received on

any input port can be switched to any output port.
• Inside the WSS, after a multiplexed-wavelength signal is input through an input
port, the signal is demultiplexed into multiple single wavelengths first. Each
single wavelength is transmitted to an optical switch, which works based on the
micro-electro-mechanical system (MEMS) or liquid crystal technology. The
optical switch switches a single wavelength to the multiplexer corresponding to
the specified output port according to wavelength routing information. The
multiplexer then multiplexes multiple single wavelengths that are switched to the
port into one multiplexed-wavelength signal for output. This is the wavelength
selective switching process.
• Each wavelength path of the WSS is equipped with a variable optical attenuator
(VOA), which controls the power of optical signals. Therefore, the optical power
of wavelengths is also controlled.
Concept of Degree
⚫ A degree is a transmission direction.
 Two-degree grooming refers to wavelength grooming in two transmission directions.
 Multi-degree grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multiple transmission
directions.
Contents

▫ OADM Types and Features
◼ ROADM Site Models and Grooming Solutions
ROADM Boards of NG WDM Devices
Board Function
MCS0816 Transceiver multicast switching board (extended C-band).
RDU9 Broadcasts service signals in nine directions.

Adds eight optical signals. Each wavelength add port on the board can connect to a tunable-
RMU9
wavelength OTU board to flexibly receive eight optical signals.
Broadcasts 20 coherent service signals carried over different wavelengths and contained in
TD20
one multiplexed signal in 20 directions.
Adds 20 coherent optical signals carried over different wavelengths and couples the signals
TM20
into one multiplexed signal.
WSD9 Demultiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port.
WSM9 Multiplexes wavelengths and routes any wavelength to any port.

Broadcasts the signals received on the main optical path to two, four, or nine directions and
WSMD2/4/9
adds any wavelength.
DWSS20 Implements multi-wavelength optical-layer service grooming.
• Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) boards add/drop any

single or multi-wavelength signals to/from a multiplexed signal, and route the
signals to any port in any order, achieving flexible wavelength grooming in
multiple directions. These boards apply to DWDM systems.
ROADM Node: WSM9+RDU9
Client
客户侧 side Client
客户侧 side
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U
分波
DMUX 分波
DMUX MUX
合波
DCM
8 8
DM1 DM8 AM1 AM8
OA RDU9 WSM9 OA
IN EXPO EXPI OUT
OUT EXPI EXPO IN

OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
AM8 AM1 DM8 DM1

8 8 DCM
合波
MUX 分波
DMUX 分波
DMUX
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U
客户侧
Client side 客户侧side
Client
• A ROADM node consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards can dynamically add and
drop wavelengths on a ring, and supports inter-ring extension to a maximum of
eight degrees. An RDU9 board demultiplexes wavelengths. Each wavelength drop
port can be connected to the DMUX unit, which demultiplexes the broadcast
signals and then transmits them to an OTU board for output. A WSM9 board
multiplexes any wavelengths and transmits the multiplexed wavelength to any
port. The multiplexing is dynamic and configurable. On any node of a ring or
chain network, this board can combine any wavelengths and then transmit the
multiplexed wavelength to any port. This implements dynamic wavelength
grooming. A ROADM node consisting of RDU9 and WSM9 boards applies to both
central and edge sites. A ROADM node supports flexible and easy expansion
without interrupting existing services and has low OPEX. For an ROADM node,
you can dynamically configure the wavelength status (add/drop or pass-through)
remotely by using the NMS.
ROADM Node: WSM9+WSD9
客户侧side
Client Client
客户侧 side
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
分波
DMUX MUX
合波
DCM
8 8
DM1 DM8 AM1 AM8
OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
IN EXPO EXPI OUT
OUT EXPI EXPO IN

OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
AM8 AM1 DM8 DM1

8 8 DCM
合波
MUX 分波
DMUX
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Client
客户侧 side Client
客户侧 side
• A WSS-based multi-degree ROADM node can dynamically add/drop wavelengths

on a ring network. Additionally, it supports inter-ring extension to implement
wavelength grooming of up to eight degrees. A WSD9 board demultiplexes any
wavelengths and transmits the demultiplexed wavelengths to any port. The
demultiplexing is dynamic and configurable. On any node of a ring or chain
network, this board can combine any wavelengths and then transmit the
demultiplexed wavelengths to any port. This implements dynamic wavelength
grooming. A WSM9 board multiplexes any wavelengths and transmits the
multiplexed wavelength to any port. The multiplexing is dynamic and
configurable. On any node of a ring or chain network, this board can combine
any wavelengths and then transmit the multiplexed wavelength to any port. This
implements dynamic wavelength grooming. A ROADM node consisting of WSD9
and WSM9 boards applies to both central and edge sites. A ROADM node
supports flexible and easy expansion without interrupting existing services and
has low OPEX. For an ROADM node, you can dynamically configure the
wavelength status (add/drop or pass-through) remotely by using the NMS.
ROADM Node: WSD9+RMU9
Client
客户侧side Client
客户侧 side
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
分波
DMUX 合波
MUX
DCM
8 8
DM1 DM8 AM1 AM8
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
IN EXPO EXPI OUT
OUT EXPI EXPO IN

OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
AM8 AM1 DM8 DM1

8 8 DCM
合波
MUX 分波
DMUX
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
客户侧
Client side 客户侧
Client side
ROADM Node: WSMD4+WSMD4
西向客户侧
West client side 东向客户侧
East client side
TC DM 1 AM1 RC
IN DM 2 AM2 OUT F OUT
IN F DM 3 AM3
West
西向 I DM 4 AM4 I East
东向
line WSMD 4 WSMD 4 line
U AM1 DM1 U
side
线路侧 side
线路侧
AM2 DM2
OUT OUT AM3 IN IN
RC DM3 TC
AM4 DM4
TC DM4 AM4 RC
IN IN OUT OUT
DM3 AM3
South
南向 North
北向
line DM2 AM2 line
线路侧 F DM1 AM1 F
side side
线路侧
I WSMD 4 WSMD4 I
OUT OUT AM4 IN IN
U RC DM4 U
AM3 DM3 TC
AM2 DM2
AM1 DM1
南向客户侧
South client side North client side
北向客户侧
• A multi-degree ROADM node based on WSMD4 boards can dynamically

add/drop wavelengths on a ring network. Additionally, it supports inter-ring
extension to implement wavelength grooming of up to four degrees. A WSMD4
board multiplexes and demultiplexes any wavelengths, and transmits the
wavelengths to any port. The multiplexing and demultiplexing are dynamic and
configurable. On any node of a ring or chain network, this board can receive any
locally added wavelength from any port, and transmit any locally dropped
wavelength to any port. This implements dynamic wavelength grooming.
WSMD4 boards on a ROADM node add and drop services over all channels of
odd and even wavelengths in the C band. A ROADM node consisting of WSMD4
boards applies to both central and edge sites. A ROADM node supports flexible
and easy expansion without interrupting existing services and has low OPEX. For
an ROADM node, you can dynamically configure the wavelength status
(add/drop or pass-through) remotely by using the NMS.
Basic Concepts - Directioned
⚫ Directioned: A wavelength carrying local services can be transmitted to a specific
direction.
方向1
Direction 1
IN OUT
ROADM board
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx
从本地上下的波长只能传送到方向1
Locally added/dropped wavelengths can be transmitted only in direction 1.
• In a directioned scenario, the current path on which a service is traversing cannot

be adjusted flexibly. If the current path needs to be adjusted, a site visit is
required to adjust fiber connections on the network.
• A directioned scenario applies to non-ASON networks.

Basic Concepts - Directionless
⚫ Directionless: A wavelength carrying local services can be transmitted to any
direction.
方向1
Direction 1 方向x
Direction x
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx

ROADM board
IN OUT
Locally added/dropped wavelengths can be transmitted only in any direction.

从本地上下的波长可以传递到任意方向
• On a non-ASON network, the current path on which a service is traversing

cannot be automatically adjusted in a directionless scenario. If the path needs to
be adjusted or the protection path is used because the working path fails, you
need to manually configure optical cross-connections to achieve flexible service
grooming.
• On an ASON network, the rerouting function can automatically detect paths and
create optical cross-connections.
Basic Concepts - Colored
⚫ Colored: M40V and D40 boards are used to add and drop wavelengths. Each port can only
add or drop fixed wavelengths.
ROADM board
M40 D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
• Colored wavelength add/drop ports (fixed wavelengths) feature low insertion

loss and cost. To replace the existing wavelengths with new wavelengths, a site
visit is required to adjust the fiber connections between the OTU board (or line
board) and the wavelength add/drop ports on the multiplexer/demultiplexer
board.
• On an ASON network, services can be rerouted on the same wavelength, which
may cause wavelength congestion.
Basic Concepts - Colorless
⚫ Colorless: Any wavelength can be added or dropped through any port on a ROADM
node (WSM9+WSD9, WSM9+RDU9, or TM20+TD20 boards)
ROADM board
WSM9 WSD9
WSM9 WSD9
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
• In the figure above, WSM9 and WSD9 boards are used as an example.
• Colorless wavelength add/drop ports (tunable wavelength) allow for remote

ROADM reconfiguration. The prerequisite for this is that OTU or line boards
required for provisioning new services have been installed in the subrack. If there
are no OTU or line boards in the subrack, a site visit is required to install the
boards required for provisioning new services.
• On an ASON network, if wavelength-tunable OTU or line boards are used in a

colorless scenario, wavelengths can be flexibly tuned during service rerouting to
Basic Concepts - Flexible Grid
⚫ A spectrum is divided into 322 slices, and each slice is 12.5 GHz. A flexible grid signal
determines how many slices are required for itself and thus occupies bandwidth
different from other signals. By changing the slice positions for a signal, the flexible
grid technology can flexibly adjust the center frequency of a wavelength.
f=192.11875 f=192.18125 f=192.25 f=192.3125
通道1
Path 1 通道2
Path 2 通道3
Path 3 通道4
Path 4
n xFlexible Grid实现的n
12.5 GHz paths x 12.5GHz通道（n可配置）
(n is configurable) implemented by flexible grid technology
• The flexible grid technology is compatible with existing fixed spectra: For a 40-
wavelength system, the channel spacing is 100 GHz and each channel occupies 8
slices. For an 80-wavelength system, the channel spacing is 50 GHz and each
channel occupies 4 slices.
• Compared with the fixed grid technology, the flexible grid technology improves
spectrum utilization. 400 Gbit/s signals need to occupy a bandwidth of 75 GHz.
When the fixed grid mode is used, a bandwidth of 100 GHz (50 GHz x 2) is
required. When the flexible grid technology is used, only a bandwidth of 75 GHz
(12.5 GHz x 6) is required, saving 25 GHz bandwidth.
ROADM Grooming Solutions
⚫ 1-Degree ROADM
⚫ 2-Degree ROADM
⚫ 3-Degree ROADM
⚫ 4-Degree ROADM
⚫ 9-Degree ROADM
⚫ 20-Degree ROADM
• The ROADM supports intra-ring and inter-ring grooming. The WSS+RMU/RDU

and WSS+WSS solutions support a gradual upgrade from a 2-degree node to a
20-degree ROADM node, and also support optical-layer grooming of C-band 80
wavelengths.
• The ROADM implements wavelength reconfiguration by blocking or cross-

connecting wavelengths. This changes wavelength grooming from static to
flexible and dynamic. The ROADM technology, in conjunction with NCE,
dynamically adjusts the status (add/drop or pass-through) of up to 80
wavelengths remotely and supports flexible optical-layer grooming of 1 to 20
degrees.
1-Degree ROADM
⚫ 1-degree ROADM generally applies to terminal stations. Services are not interrupted
during capacity expansion.
AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM3 DM3
OA IN
WSMD4
OA OUT AM4 DM4

NE1 NE2
M40V D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Directioned XX Colored Locally added/dropped signals

本地上波/下波信号
• 1-degree ROADM generally applies to terminal stations. Services are not

interrupted during capacity expansion.
• The WSMD4 boards shown in the figure above can be replaced with
RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD2, WSMD4, and WSMD9 boards.
2-Degree ROADM (1)
⚫ On a 2-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in two directions. To
smoothly upgrade a network to one with over four degrees, you can configure
RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD4, or WSMD9 boards.
⚫ Application scenarios
 Colored & directioned scenario
 Colored & directionless scenario
2-Degree ROADM (2)
⚫ Colored & directioned scenario
NE2
NE1
E IN AM3 DM3 AM3 DM3

OA DM4 AM4 OUT OA
W WSMD4 WSMD4
NE1 AM4 DM4 IN E
OA OUT OA
AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2
NE3
M40V D40 M40V D40
W
O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U U U U U
NE4
Directioned XX Colored Pass-through

穿通信号西向信号
West signals 东向信号
East signals
signals
• This slide uses a service from the west as an example to describe the signal flow.
A local service is added to the west WSMD4 board through the AM1 port and
then transmitted to the west through the OUT port. The service from the east
passes through the AM4 port on the west WSMD4 board and heads west.
• In a colored & directioned scenario, to ensure that the local services on NE1 are
transmitted in the west and east directions, you need to configure one group of
M40V+D40 boards for each direction.
2-Degree ROADM (3)
⚫ Colored & directionless scenario
NE1
AM4 DM4
DM4 AM4
NE2
WSMD4
WSMD4 IN OA
OA IN
W E
E OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
NE1 DM1 AM1
NE3
W WSMD4
IN OUT
NE4 M40V D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Locally added/ 东向信号

Directionless XX Colored 本地上/下波信号 West
西向信号signals East signals
dropped signals
• The services on NE1 can be transmitted in the west or east direction.
▫ To adjust the current path (for example, because the services are adjusted
or switched from the working path to the protection path), you can
manually configure optical cross-connections to implement flexible service
grooming.
▫ On an ASON network, the rerouting function automatically selects a path
and creates an optical cross-connection to ensure that the services on NE1
are properly transmitted. In a colored scenario, only the same wavelength
can be used for service rerouting.
• In a colored & directionless scenario, to ensure that local services on NE1 are
transmitted in the west and east directions, you need to configure only one group
of M40V+D40 boards.
3-Degree ROADM (1)
⚫ On a 3-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in three directions. To
RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD4, or WSMD9 boards.
 Colorless & directionless scenario
3-Degree ROADM (2)
NE1
NE3 AM4 DM3 DM3 AM4

AM3 DM4
DM4 AM3
DM3 DM3
NE2 AM3 AM3
WSMD4
OA
WSMD4
OA IN IN
W E
NE4 OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1
W NE1 E

WSMD4
S IN OUT AM4 DM4
NE5
OA M40V D40
OA
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
S
XX
Pass- West pass- South East pass-through
Directioned Colored 穿通信号西向穿通信号南向信号东向穿通信号
through through signals signals
signals signals
• WSMD4 boards are used as an example to describe how a three-degree ROADM

works. The WSMD4 boards shown in the figure above can be replaced with
RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, or WSMD9 boards.
• Colored & directioned scenario: Local services are added to a WSMD4 board
through the AM4 port and then transmitted to the south through the OUT port.
Services from the west and east pass through the AM1 and AM3 ports on the
WSMD4 board respectively and head south. In this scenario, to ensure that local
services on NE1 are transmitted in the west, east, and south directions, you need
to configure a group of M40V+D40 boards for each direction.
3-Degree ROADM (3)
NE1
NE3
N
NE2 OA
NE4 OA
AM4 DM4
DM4 AM4
IN OUT WSMD4
WSMD4 WSMD4 IN OA
OA IN DM1 AM1 DM4 AM4
N NE1 E E
W
OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
W DM1 AM1
AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM3DM3 AM4 DM4

WSMD4
IN OUT
NE5
M40V D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Directionless XX Colored Locally added/ West

西向信号signals North
北向信号 East
东向信号 signals
本地上/下波信号
dropped signals signals
• Services on NE1 can be transmitted in the west, north, or east direction.
grooming.
• In this scenario, to ensure that local services on NE1 are transmitted in the west,
north, and east directions, you need to configure only one group of M40V+D40
boards.
3-Degree ROADM (4)
⚫ Non-coherent colorless & directionless scenario
NE1
N
NE3 OA
OA
AM4 DM4
DM4 AM4
NE2
NE4 IN OUT WSMD4
WSMD4 WSMD4 IN OA
W E
OA OUT OUT OA
N NE1 E AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1

W
WSMD4
IN OUT
NE5 WSM9 WSD9
WSM9 WSD9
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Locally added/ West North

Directionless XX Colorless 本地上/下波信号西向信号北向信号 East signals
东向信号
dropped signals signals signals
• Services on NE1 can be transmitted in the west, north, or east direction.
grooming.
are properly transmitted. If wavelength-tunable OTU or line boards are
used in a colorless scenario, wavelengths can be flexibly tuned during
service rerouting to avoid wavelength congestion.
• A group of WSM9+WSD9 boards can be used in a non-coherent colorless &
directionless scenario, as shown in the figure above.
3-Degree ROADM (5)
⚫ Coherent colorless & directionless scenario
NE1
N
NE3 OA
OA
AM4 DM4
DM4 AM4
NE2
NE4 IN OUT WSMD4
WSMD4 WSMD4 IN OA
W E
OUT OA
OA OUT
N NE1 E AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1

W
WSMD4
IN OUT
NE5 WSM9 WSD9
TM20 TD20
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Coherent Locally added/ West North

Directionless XX Colorless OTU 相干OTU单板本地上/下波信号西向信号北向信号东向信号
East signals
OTU board dropped signals signals signals
• In a coherent colorless & directionless scenario, when WSMD4, WSMD9, RDU9, or

TD20 boards are used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a DMUX
board. Coherent OTU boards use coherent receiver technology and therefore can
correctly select the wavelength to be locally dropped among the multiplexed
signals.
4-Degree ROADM (1)
⚫ On a 4-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in four directions. To
RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, or WSMD9 boards.
4-Degree ROADM (2)
NE3 NE1
N
OA
OA
AM4 DM3 DM3 AM4
NE2
DM4 AM3 OUT DM3 AM3
IN AM3 DM4
NE4 WSMD4
DM3 DM3
AM3 DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 AM3
WSMD4
WSMD4
OA IN IN OA
W E
OA OUT OUT OA
W NE1 N AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1
S
WSMD4
NE5 E
IN OUT AM4 DM4
OA M40V D40
OA
NE7 O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
NE6 S
Locally added/ West North South

Directioned XX Colored 本地上/下波信号西向信号北向信号南向信号 East
东向信号 signals
signals
• Local services are added to the WSMD4 board through the AM4 port and then
transmitted to the south through the OUT port. Services from the west, north,
and east pass through the AM1, AM2, and AM3 ports on the WSMD4 board, and
head south.
north, east, and south directions, you need to configure a group of M40V+D40
boards for each direction.
4-Degree ROADM (3)
NE3 NE1
N S
OA OA
OA OA
AM4 DM4
NE2 DM4 AM4
IN OUT IN OUT
WSMD4 WSMD4 WSMD4 WSMD4
NE4 DM1 AM1 DM4 AM4 DM1 AM1 DM4 AM4 IN OA
OA IN
E
W
OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
W
N DM1 AM1
S AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM3 DM3 AM4 DM4
NE1 WSMD4
E IN OUT
NE5
M40V D40
NE7 O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
NE6
Locally added/ West North South
Directionless XX Colored 本地上/下波信号西向信号北向信号南向信号 East signals
东向信号
signals
• Services on NE1 can be transmitted in the west, north, east, or south direction.
grooming.
north, east, and south directions, you need to configure only one group of
M40V+D40 boards.
4-Degree ROADM (4)
NE3
NE1
N S
OA OA
OA OA
NE4 NE2 AM4 DM4
DM4 AM4
IN OUT IN OUT
DM1 AM1 DM4 AM4 DM1 AM1 DM4 AM4 IN OA
OA IN
W E
W N OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1
S
NE1 AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM3 DM3 AM4 DM4
WSMD4
NE5 E
IN OUT
WSM9 WSD9
NE7
TM20 TD20
NE6
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Directionless XX OTU Coherent

相干OTU单板 Locally added/
本地上/下波信号
West
西向信号 North
北向信号 East
东向信号 South
南向信号
Colorless
OTU board dropped signals signals signals signals
signals

signals. The figure above shows the network diagram in a coherent colorless &
directionless scenario when TM20+TD20 boards are used.
9-Degree ROADM (1)
⚫ On a 9-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in nine directions. To
achieve this, you need to configure RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, or WSMD9 boards
for each node.
9-Degree ROADM (2)
NE1
D2 D8
OA OA
OA OA
D7 D8 D9 AM8 DM8
DM8 AM8
IN OUT IN OUT
D1 DM1 AM1 DM8 AM8 DM1 AM1 DM8 AM8 IN OA
OA IN
D6
D9
D1
OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
NE1
DM1 AM1
D2
AM1DM1AM2 DM2 EXPI EXPO AM7 DM7 AM8 DM8
WSMD9
IN OUT
D5 D4 D3
M40V D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
AM1DM1 EXPI EXPO AM8DM8 DM1 DM8 EXPO EXPI AM1 AM8 DM1 DM8 EXPO EXPI AM1 AM8
IN
WSMD9 OUT
= WSD9 WSM9 = RDU9 WSM9
IN OUT IN OUT
Locally added/
Directionless XX Colored 本地上/下波信号
dropped Signals in D1 Signals in D2 Signals in D3 Signals in D4
D1方向信号 D2方向信号 D3方向信号 D4方向信号
signals
Signals
D5方向信号 in D5 Signals
D9方向信号 in D9
• Services on NE1 can be transmitted in nine directions.
grooming.
• In this scenario, to ensure that local services on NE1 are transmitted in nine
directions, you need to configure only one group of M40V+D40 boards.
9-Degree ROADM (3)
NE1
D2 D8
OA OA
OA OA
AM8 DM8
D7 D8 D9 DM8 AM8
IN OUT IN OUT
OA IN
D1 D9
D1
D6 OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1
NE1
AM1DM1 AM2 DM2 EXPI EXPO AM7 DM7 AM8 DM8
D2
WSMD9
IN OUT
D5 D4 D3
WSM9 WSD9
TM20 TD20
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Locally added/ Coherent

Directionless XX Colorless 本地上/下波信号
dropped signals OTU 相干OTU单板
OTU board

signals. The figure above shows the network diagram in a coherent colorless &
directionless scenario when TM20+TD20 boards are used.
20-Degree ROADM (1)
⚫ On a 20-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in 20 directions. To
achieve this, you need to configure a group of DWSS20+DWSS20 boards for each
direction.
20-Degree ROADM (2)
NE1
D2 D19
OA OA
OA OA
AM20 DM20
D7 D19 D20
DM20 AM20
IN OUT IN OUT
DWSS20 DWSS20 DWSS20 WSMD9
D1 OA IN
D20
D6 D1
OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1
NE1
D2 AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM19 DM19 AM20 DM20
DWSS20
IN OUT
D5 D4 D3
M40V D40
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Locally added/
Directionless XX Colored 本地上/下波信号
dropped Signals
D1方向信号in D1 Signals
D4方向信号 in D4
signals
Signals in D5
D5方向信号 Signals
D7方向信号 in D7 Signals in D19
D19方向信号 Signals in D20
D20方向信号
• Services on NE1 can be transmitted in 20 directions.
grooming.
• In this scenario, to ensure that local services on NE1 are transmitted in 20
directions, you need to configure only one group of M40V+D40 boards.
20-Degree ROADM (3)
NE1
D2 D19
OA OA
OA OA
AM20 DM20
DM20 AM20
IN OUT IN OUT
D7 D19 D20 DWSS20 WSMD9
DWSS20 DWSS20
OA IN
D20
D1 D1
D6 OA OUT OUT OA
AM1 DM1
DM1 AM1
NE1 AM1 DM1 AM2 DM2 AM19 DM19 AM20 DM20
D2 DWSS20
IN OUT
D5 D4 D3 WSD9
WSM9
TM20 TD20
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Locally added/ Coherent

Directionless XX Colorless 本地上/下波信号 OTU 相干OTU单板
dropped signals OTU board
• In a coherent colorless & directionless scenario, when WSD9 or TD20 boards are
used to drop services, it is not necessary to configure a DMUX board. Coherent
OTU boards use coherent receiver technology and therefore can correctly select
the wavelength to be locally dropped among the multiplexed signals. The figure
above shows the network diagram in a coherent colorless & directionless scenario
when TM20+TD20 boards are used.
Flexible ROADM
⚫ The existing ROADM technology is based on a fixed spectrum with a fixed
bandwidth of 50 GHz or 100 GHz. Flexible grid technology supports flexible
bandwidth configuration, allocation, and grooming.
⚫ A flexible ROADM uses flexible grid technology to allocate different bandwidths to
different types of signals, improving spectrum utilization while satisfying flexible
grooming requirements in the beyond 100G era.
⚫ A flexible ROADM is compatible with existing networks and supports a fixed
bandwidth of 50 GHz or 100 GHz defined in ITU-T Recommendations.
• The following boards support flexible grid wavelengths: TN13TM20, TN15TM20,

TN97TM20, TN16WSD9, TN96WSD9, TN16WSM9, TN96WSM9, TN12WSMD4,
TN13WSMD4, TN12WSMD9, TN15WSMD9, and DWSS20.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following statements about optical-layer grooming

is incorrect?
A. An FOADM site consisting of MUX and DMUX units supports a maximum of two directions.
B. The core component of a ROADM is WSS, which controls the optical power of optical signals.
C. Directioned indicates that the locally added/dropped wavelengths can be transmitted only to a
specific direction.
D. Colorless indicates that any wavelength can be added or dropped through any port on a ROADM
board. During service rerouting on an ASON network, wavelengths can be flexibly adjusted to
• Answer: A
Contents

◼ Concepts and Boards of Electrical-Layer Cross-Connections
▫ Electrical-Layer Service Grooming Scenarios
Basic Concepts - Port Types
Port Description Example
For example, 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where

Client-side logical port on a
ClientLP-n 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) is a port number and -1 is
board in compatible mode
a channel ID.
For example, 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where

Internal ODUk logical port on a
ODUkLP-n 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) is a port number and -2 is
board in compatible mode
a channel ID.
Client-side logical port on a For example, RX2/TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 is a port

RX/TX-n
board in standard mode number and -2 is a channel ID.
Logical port on a board in

For example, 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH1:-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
n (INn/OUTn)-OCH:1- standard mode, which is also
indicates the first ODU1 signal in the first ODU2
ODUk:m-ODUp:q known as a service mapping
signal on the first optical port.
path
• ClientLP-n: Client-side logical port on a board in compatible mode. For example,

201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1, where 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) is a port number and
-1 is a channel ID.
• ODUkLP-n: Internal ODUk logical port on a board in compatible mode. For
example, 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2, where 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1) is a port
number and -2 is a channel ID.
• RX/TX-n: Client-side logical port on a board in standard mode. For example,
RX2/TX2-2, where RX2/TX2 is a port number and -2 is a channel ID.
• N (INn/OUTn)-OCH:1-ODUk:m-ODUp:q: Logical port on a board in standard
mode, which is also known as a service mapping path. For example,
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH1:-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 indicates the first ODU1 signal in the first
ODU2 signal on the first optical port.
▫ In Assign consecutive mode, level-by-level service mapping is performed
from a lower rate to a higher rate, for example, ODU0 -> ODU1 -> ODU2.
The corresponding service mapping path is 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-
ODU1:2-ODU0:1, indicating the first ODU0 signal in the second ODU1
signal of the first ODU2 signal on the first optical port.
▫ In Assign random mode, cross-level service mapping is performed from a
lower rate to a higher rate, for example, ODU0 -> ODU2. The
corresponding service mapping path is 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-
ODU0:1, indicating the first ODU0 signal in the first ODU2 signal on the
first optical port.
Basic Concepts - Inter-Board Cross-Connection (1)
⚫ Inter-board cross-connections refer to the cross-connections configured between
different boards. Inter-board cross-connections groom ODUk and GE services
between boards in a subrack through the backplane and centralized cross-connect
boards. You need to configure cross-connections on the NMS.
 Cross-connections between OTN tributary boards and line boards
 Cross-connections between line boards
• When the ODUk levels are the same, a tributary board (in standard or
compatible mode) and a line board (in standard or compatible mode) can be
interconnected.
• When the ODUk levels and line rates are the same, line boards (in standard or
compatible mode) can be interconnected with each other.
Basic Concepts - Inter-Board Cross-Connection (2)
OTN tributary board OTN line board
(compatible mode) (compatible mode)
201(ClientP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
203(ClientP3/ClientLP3)-1
168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
OTN tributary board OTN line board

(standard mode) (standard mode)
3(TX1/RX1)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
Basic Concepts - Intra-Board Cross-Connection (1)
⚫ Intra-board cross-connections refer to the cross-connections configured between
different ports on the same board.
⚫ Intra-board cross-connections flexibly groom services inside a board. For example, to
converge multiple client-side service signals into one ODU1 signal, you must create
intra-board cross-connections to groom the services to the port for transmitting one
ODUk signal.
⚫ You need to configure cross-connections on the NMS.
Basic Concepts - Intra-Board Cross-Connection (2)
⚫ Here, a TTA board is used as an example to describe intra-board cross-connections. Three
client-side Any services can be converged into one ODU1 signal. WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1) 201(ClientP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientP1/ClientLP1)-1

4(TX2/RX2)
5(TX3/RX3)
6(TX4/RX4) 201(ClientP1/ClientLP1)-8
7(TX5/RX5)
8(TX6/RX6) 207(ClientP1/ClientLP1)-8
9(TX7/RX7)
10(TX8/RX8)
Cross-connect module Multiplexer module
Tributary Board - TTA
⚫ The maximum bandwidth of the backplane is 200 Gbit/s.
Maximum Output
Scenario Maximum Input Capacity Mapping Path
Capacity
ODU0 non-convergence 10 x FE/FDDI/GE/STM-1/STM-4/OC-3/OC-12/FC100/FICON/DVB-
Any <-> ODU0 10 x ODU0
mode ASI/ESCON/SDI
ODU1 non-convergence 10 x HD-SDI/STM–16/OC-48/FC200
Any <-> ODU1 10 x ODU1
mode FICON Express/OTU1
10 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-
ODU2 non-convergence
192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FICON 8G/FC1200/FICON Any <-> ODU2 10 x ODU2
mode
10G/Infiniband 10G
10 x FE/FDDI/STM-1/OC-3/DVB-ASI/SDI/ESCON/STM-4/OC-
12/STM-16
ODU1 convergence mode Any <-> ODU1 (1–10) x ODU1
GE/FC100/FC200/FICON Express
HD-SDI/HD-SDIRBR/GE(GFP-T)
OTU1 <-> ODU1
ODU1_ODU0 mode 10 x OTU1 20 x ODU0
<-> ODU0
3G-SDI/Infiniband 2.5G <->
ODUflex non-convergence 10 x 3G-SDI/Infiniband 2.5G 10 x ODUflex
ODUflex
mode
4 x FC3200 FC3200 <-> ODUflex 4 x ODUflex
• Working modes of ports on the TTA board
▫ ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any -> ODU1)
▫ ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1 -> ODU1 -> ODU0)
▫ ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any -> ODUflex)
• Signal conversion functions:
▫ 10 x (125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s signals) <-> 10 x ODU0
▫ 10 x (1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s signals) <-> 10 x ODU1
▫ 10 x (125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s signals) <-> (1–10) x ODU1

▫ 10xOTU1 <-> 20xODU0
▫ 10x3G-SDI <-> 10xODUflex
▫ 4xFC3200 <-> 4xODUflex

Tributary Board - TDC
⚫ A TDC board is a tributary board that converts two 40GE, 50GE, 100GE, or OTU4
optical signals into ODU3, ODU4, or ODUflex electrical signals and vice versa.
2 x ODU3/2 x ODU4/n x ODUflex (n = (1–160))
1(TX1/RX1)-1
2(TX2/RX2)-1
• Signal conversion functions:
▫ 2 x 40GE <-> 2 x ODU3/n x ODUflex (n = (1–160))
▫ 2 x 50GE <-> n x ODUflex (n = (1–160))
▫ 2 x 100GE (Bit transparent mapping/MAC transparent mapping) <-> 2 x

ODU4/n x ODUflex (n = (1–160))
▫ 2 x OTU4 <-> 2 x ODU4
• Mapping path:
▫ 40GE (TTT+GMP) <-> ODU3

▫ 40GE (GFP-F) <-> ODUflex
▫ 50GE (BMP/GFP-F) <-> ODUflex
▫ 100GE (GMP/GFP-F) <-> ODU4
▫ 100GE (GFP-F) <-> ODUflex

▫ OTU4 <-> ODU4
Line Board - UNS5
⚫ A UNS5 board is a universal line board that can transmit OTN services with a
maximum bandwidth of 200 Gbit/s. The UNS5 board processes and converts the
received service signals into one OTU4 or OTUC2 signal carried over a standard
DWDM wavelength defined in Recommendation ITU-T G.694.1.
⚫ The UNS5 board can transmit OTN signals with a maximum bandwidth of 200
Gbit/s.
• Basic functions in line mode:
▫ 100G mode: 80 x ODU0 <-> 1 x ODU4 <-> OTU4; 40 x ODU1 <-> 1 x ODU4
<-> OTU4; 10 x ODU2 <-> 1 x ODU4 <-> OTU4; 10 x ODU2e <-> 1 x ODU4
<-> OTU4; 2 x ODU3 <-> 1 x ODU4 <-> OTU4; ODU4 <-> OTU4; ODUflex
(n=1, 80) <-> 1 x ODU4 <-> OTU4
▫ 200G mode: 160 x ODU0 <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 1 x ODUC2 <-> OTUC2; 80 x
ODU1 <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 1 x ODUC2 <-> OTUC2; 20 x ODU2 <-> 2 x ODU4
<-> 1 x ODUC2 <-> OTUC2; 20 x ODU2e <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 1 x ODUC2 <->
OTUC2; 4 x ODU3 <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 1 x ODUC2 <-> OTUC2; 2 x ODU4 <->
ODUC2 <-> OTUC2; ODUflex (n = 1, 160) <-> 1 x ODUC2 <-> OTUC2;
ODUflex (n = 1, 160) <-> 2 x ODU4 <-> 1 x ODUC2 <-> OTUC2
• Basic functions in regeneration mode:

▫ 1 x OTU4 <-> 1 x OTU4; 1 x OTUC2 <-> 1 x OTUC2
• Line modulation format:
▫ 200G mode: 200G ePDM-16QAM, 200G ePDM-16QAM-H, and 200G ePDM-
e16QAM
▫ 100G mode: 100G ePDM-QPSK wDCM and 100G ePDM-QPSK
Contents

▫ Concepts and Boards of Electrical-Layer Cross-Connections
◼ Electrical-Layer Service Grooming Scenarios
ODU4 Electrical-Layer Grooming Model
⚫ UNS5 and TDC boards are used as an example. They support cross-connections of
ODU4 signals. To groom ODU4 services, an NS4 line board works with a TSC
tributary board through the centralized cross-connect bus.
OTU4 WDM WDM 100GE
OTU4
TMK1UNS5 TMK1TDC
• A TMK1UNS5 board can be used in the OptiXtrans E6608 and OptiXtrans E6616
chassis, and supports the line mode (100G and 200G) and regeneration mode.
• A TMK1TDC board can be used in the OptiXtrans E6608 and OptiXtrans E6616
chassis. This board can encrypt and decrypt OPUk payloads using the AES-256
CTR algorithm.
ODU1 Electrical-Layer Grooming Model
⚫ UNQ2 and TTA boards are used as an example. They support cross-connections of
ODU1 signals. To groom ODU1 services, a UNQ2 line board works with a TTA
tributary board through the centralized cross-connect bus.
H D-SDI
STM–16
ODU1 ↔ ODU2 OC -48
FC 200
OTU2 WDM OTU2 ↔ ODU2 ODU1 encapsulation FICON Express
OTU1
TMK1UNQ2 TMK1TTA
Client-Side Service Adding/Dropping (1)
⚫ Adding/Dropping ODU4 services
IN/OUT
Encapsulation module
TMK1TDC
Backplane bus
Cross-connect chip
Fixed cross-connection
TMK1UNS5 Configured cross-connection
TX1/RX1
Client-Side Service Adding/Dropping (2)
⚫ Adding/Dropping ODU2/ODU1/ODU0 services
IN/OUT
TTA
Backplane bus
Cross-connect chip
UNQ2 Configured cross-connection
TX1/RX1 TX10/RX10
Service Pass-Through on the Line Side of the Local Site
⚫ ODU2 service pass-through at the local site
IN/OUT IN/OUT
Backplane bus
Cross-connect chip
UNQ2 UNQ2 Configured cross-connection
Multi-Service Hybrid Transmission
FOADM(D) FOADM(C) FOADM/ROADM

STM-16
UNQ2 STM-16 UNQ2
10G C B
ODU1/GE XC STM-16 A ODU1/ODU2 XC
STM-16
TQS 2.5G TTA TTA TTA TTATTA

D DWDM
E
GE STM-16 STM-1
GE STM-16 GE
DWDM M STM-16 FE
L STM-16 FE
F
G DWDM
GE CWDM K
CWDM J
ANY H
GE
GE STM-1
GE GE
I
FE
FE
• NG WDM devices support centralized and distributed cross-connections, and

separate tributary boards from line boards. Therefore, line channels and tributary
ports can be configured as required to flexibly construct NEs and networks. NG
WDM devices can be combined to build a large-granularity service transport
network that provides full coverage from the regional backbone layer to the
access layer.
• Signals at any granularities can be multiplexed into one ODUk, and different
types of services from multiple sites can be multiplexed into one ODUk, achieving
flexible service grooming and high bandwidth usage.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following statements about electrical-layer
grooming is incorrect?
A. Inter-board cross-connections refer to the cross-connections configured between different boards.
Inter-board cross-connections groom ODUk services between boards in a subrack through the
backplane and centralized cross-connect boards.
B. Intra-board cross-connections refer to the cross-connections configured between different ports on

the same board.
C. TTA and TDC boards support the convergence and non-convergence modes.
D. In convergence mode, configure intra-board cross-connections before inter-board cross-

connections.
E. You need to configure all cross-connections on the NMS.
• Answer: C
Summary
⚫ Optical-Layer Grooming Solutions of NG WDM Devices

 OADM Types and Features
 ROADM Site Models and Grooming Solutions
⚫ Electrical-Layer Grooming Solutions of NG WDM Devices
 Concepts and Boards of Electrical-Layer Cross-Connections
 Electrical-Layer Service Grooming Scenarios
intelligent world.


that
NG WDM Device Commissioning
Foreword
⚫ Equipment commissioning or system commissioning is a necessary skill for

WDM network deployment and O&M.
⚫ This chapter describes the optical power calculation method, basic
principles of equipment commissioning, and system commissioning
processes in several typical scenarios.
Objectives

 Master the optical power calculation method.
 Understand the general commissioning process.
 Get familiar with the commissioning procedures in different scenarios.
Contents
1. NG WDM Device Commissioning Basics
2. NG WDM Device Commissioning Process and Procedure
Transmission Channel Reference Points
f1
Tx1 R x1
S1 R1
RM 1 SD 1
f2 OA/
Tx2 OM/ OA R x2
S 2 RM 2 OA MPI-S R' S' MPI-R OD SD R2
2
RM n SD n
fn
TxN R xN
Sn Rn
• To standardize optical interface parameters, ITU-T G.692 defines all reference

points in the WDM optical transmission system, as shown in the figure above.
Tx1, Tx2, and TxN are generally terminal transmitters of the system, and an
optical multiplexer is used at the transmit end to combine the optical carriers of
signals over different wavelengths and send them to an optical fiber for
transmission. At the receive end, an optical demultiplexer separates the optical
carriers that carry different signals over different wavelengths.
• The figure above shows the following reference points of a WDM system:
▫ S1…Sn: reference points of channels 1 to n on the optical fibers at the
optical output connectors of transmitters.
▫ RM1…RMn: reference points of channels 1 to n on the optical fibers at
optical input connectors of OM/OAs.
▫ MPI-S: reference point on the optical fiber behind the optical output
connector of an OM/OA
▫ S': reference point on the optical fiber behind the optical output connector
of a line OA.
▫ R': reference point on the optical fiber before the optical input connector of
a line OA.
▫ MPI-R: reference point on the optical fiber before the optical input
connector of an OA/OD.
▫ SD1…SDn: reference points at the optical output connectors of OA/ODs.
▫ R1…Rn: reference points at the optical input connectors of receivers.
• MPI: main path interface.
Typical Signal Flows (1)
⚫ P2P network
OTM1 OLA OTM2
OTU E ME OTU
X 4X
OA OA OA
4 04
OTU OTU
0 D D D D 0
F F F F
ST2 I I ST2 I I ST2
U U U U
M M
OTU E
4E OA OA OA 4 OTU
X
0X 0
OTU 4 4 OTU
0 0
FOA
• A point-to-point (P2P) network is the simplest network topology for end-to-end

(E2E) service transmission. It consists of OTM and OLA sites. It is also a basic
network, which serves as the foundation of other network topologies.
• OTM signal flow

▫ In the transmit direction, an optical transponder unit (OTU)
aggregates/converts multiple signals to DWDM standard wavelengths defined
in Recommendation ITU-T G.694.1. An optical multiplexer unit (EX40)
multiplexes these wavelengths to main optical path signals. Then the main
optical path signals are amplified by an OA and coupled with optical
supervisory channel (OSC) signals for transmission on the line side.
▫ In the receive direction, line signals are separated into main optical path
signals and OSC signals. The OSC signals are transmitted to an optical
supervisory unit (ST2) for processing. The main optical path signals are
amplified by an OA and then demultiplexed by an optical demultiplexer unit
(EX40) to optical signals of multiple wavelengths. Afterward, the optical
signals are converted by an OTU and transmitted to client devices.
• OLA signal flow

▫ Received line signals are separated into main optical path signals and OSC
signals. The OSC signals are transmitted to an optical supervisory unit (ST2)
for processing. The main optical path signals are amplified by an OA and then
coupled with the processed OSC signals for transmission on the line side.
⚫ Parallel FOADM (EX40+EX40)
TM RM1 TM2 RM
ST2
D RM TM1 RM2 TM D
IN 0 D01 M01 OUT
EX M
EX
F F
4
OA Mn OA
40
M Dn
OTU 4
40
0
OUT IN
I I
0
EX
4 M
EX
OA OTU 4
40 OA
40
M
U 0 U
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U FOA
• The figure above shows a parallel FOADM site, also known as a back-to-back
OTM site. A FOADM node adds/drops and multiplexes fixed wavelengths to/from
multiplexed signals. Back-to-back OTM sites are generally deployed as
intermediate sites.
▫ In the receive direction, line signals received from the west are separated
into main optical path signals and OSC signals. The OSC signals are
transmitted to an optical supervisory unit for processing. The main optical
path signals are amplified by an OA and then transmitted to an optical
demultiplexer unit. Some wavelengths are separated and transmitted to an
OTU and then transmitted to the local client device. Other wavelengths are
not demultiplexed locally, but pass through the FOADM site or are
electrically regenerated by an OTU and then multiplexed with locally added
wavelengths by an optical multiplexer unit. Afterward, the optical signals
are amplified by an OA and then coupled with the processed OSC signals
for transmission on the line side.
▫ The signal flow in the transmit direction is reverse to that in the receive
direction.
⚫ ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9)
O O O O O O O O
T T … T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
EX40 … EX40
IN D DM1 AM1 AM8
DM9 D OUT
IN
F OA RDU9 OA
AM9 OUT F
I WSMD9 WSMD9
OUT DM9 IN I
OUT
U OA OA IN
AM9 U
AM8 AM1 DM1
EX40 EX40
…
O O O O O O… O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U FOA
• A ROADM node consisting of WSMD9 boards can dynamically add and drop
wavelengths on a ring, and supports inter-ring extension to a maximum of nine
degrees.
• A ROADM node consisting of WSMD9 boards applies to both central and edge
sites. A ROADM node supports flexible and easy expansion without interrupting
existing services and has low OPEX. For an ROADM node, you can dynamically
configure the wavelength status (add/drop or pass-through) remotely by using
the NMS.
• The signal flow of a ROADM node consisting of WSSs is as follows:
▫ A ROADM node processes optical signals in two transmission directions.
Received line signals are separated into main optical path signals and OSC
signals. The OSC signals are transmitted to the optical supervisory unit of
an ST2 board for processing, and the main optical path signals are
amplified by an OA and then transmitted to the RDU module of a WSMD9
board for broadcast.
▫ The wavelengths to be dropped locally are output through the
corresponding wavelength drop ports (DM1–DM9). If the dropped signals
are multiplexed signals, the signals are first demultiplexed by a
demultiplexer unit (EX40) or an OADM unit (MRx). Afterward, the
demultiplexed signals are transmitted to an OTU for processing and then
transmitted to client devices.
▫ Other wavelengths are not added or dropped locally but pass through a
WSMD9 board for wavelength selection. Then these wavelengths are
multiplexed with the wavelengths input from wavelength add ports. The
multiplexed signals are amplified and coupled with OSC signals for
transmission on the line side.
Optical Power Units
⚫ mW and dBm are two common optical power units. mW is linear whereas dBm is
not.
⚫ Conversion formula: P (dBm) = 10lgP′ (mW)
⚫ The decibel (dB) is not a unit of optical power unit, but a differential value. It refers
to the difference between two optical power values expressed in dBm.
• Examples:
▫ –10 dBm = 0.1 mW
▫ 0 dBm = 1 mW
▫ 10 dBm = 10 mW
▫ 20 dBm = 100 mW
▫ 20 dBm – 10 dB = 10 dBm
Insertion Loss
⚫ Insertion loss is an important counter of passive optical components. It refers to the
loss of optical power when the light passes a passive optical component.
⚫ Insertion loss is usually expressed in dB.
Passive optical
component
Pi n P out
Insertion loss (dB) = Pin (dBm) – Pout (dBm)
Optical Power Calculation Formula
P1
Ptotal
P2
Ptotal (mW) = P1 (mW) + P2 (mW)
Assume: P1 = P2 = Psingle
Ptotal (dBm) = Psingle (dBm) + 10lg2 (dB)
In the case of N wavelengths, assume:

P1 = P2 = … = PN = Psingle
Ptotal (dBm) = Psingle (dBm) + 10lgN (dB)
• Ptotal indicates the total optical power of the multiplexed wavelength, and P 1 and
P2 indicate the optical power of a single wavelength.
OA
⚫ Total input optical power range and single-channel input optical power range
⚫ Nominal single-wavelength input optical power
⚫ Nominal single-wavelength output optical power
P in P out
OA
Gain (dB) = Pout (dBm) – Pin (dBm)
• An OA is an active optical component that amplifies the power of optical signals

to extend the signal transmission distance. As shown in the figure above, when
one wavelength is input, the wavelength is amplified; when three wavelengths
are input, the three wavelengths are amplified.
• Gain is an important counter of an OA, expressed in dB.

OA Specifications (40-Wavelength System Used as an
Example)
Nominal Single- Nominal Single-
Total Input Optical Nominal
Board Wavelength Input Optical Wavelength Output Gain Range
Power Range Gain
Power Optical Power
–24 dBm to –4 dBm –16 dBm 20 dB
DAP (TN15OAC101) –29 dBm to –9 dBm –22 dBm 4 dBm 26 dB 20–31 dB
–20 dBm to 0 dBm –20 dBm 24 dB
DAP (TN15OAC103) –26 dBm to –6 dBm –25 dBm 4 dBm 29 dB 24–36 dB
–16 dBm to +4 dBm –12 dBm 16 dB
DAP (TN15OAC106) –19 dBm to +1 dBm –15 dBm 4 dBm 19 dB 16–23 dB
DAP (TN15OBC103) –32 dBm to –3 dBm –12 dBm 4 dBm 23 dB 23 dB
–15 dBm to +7 dBm –9 dBm 7 dBm

DAP (TN15OBC107) –15 dBm to +6 dBm –10 dBm 6 dBm 16 dB 16 dB
–15 dBm to +5 dBm –11 dBm 5 dBm
Transmit and Receive Optical Power Ranges
⚫ Mean transmit optical power (about 0 dBm for most OTU boards)
⚫ Receiver types
 PIN: photodiode
 APD: avalanche photo diode
⚫ Receiver sensitivity: A
⚫ Receiver overload: B
⚫ Recommended receive optical power range: A+3 (dBm) to B–5 (dBm)
• PIN sensitivity: –16 dBm; overload: 0 dBm
• APD sensitivity: –26 dBm; overload: –9 dBm

Contents
1. NG WDM Device Commissioning Basics
2. NG WDM Device Commissioning Process and Procedure
Preparations for Typical Signal Flow Manual Optical Power
C ommissioning Analysis Commissioning
Preparations
⚫ Instruments and tools required for commissioning
⚫ Engineering design information
⚫ Device commissioning conditions
⚫ Description of test connection points
⚫ General commissioning process
⚫ Commissioning item list
Instruments and Tools Required for Commissioning

⚫ The following instruments and tools are required for commissioning:
 Portable computer, where the Web LCT is installed
 Optical power meter, optical spectrum analyzer, multimeter, and SDH analyzer
 Fiber patch cords, fiber cleaning tissues or cassette cleaners, ring flanges, fixed optical
attenuators (FOAs), etc.
• Other test instruments and meters:

▫ GE tester: used to test GE service counters.
▫ 10GE tester: used to test 10GE service counters.
▫ 100GE tester: used to test 100GE service counters.
▫ OTN tester: used to test OTN service counters.
▫ SmartBits analyzer: used to test data service counters.
▫ ESCON tester: used to test ESCON service counters.
▫ FICON/FC tester: used to test FICON/FC service counters.
▫ Phillips screwdriver: used to remove and install screws.
▫ Compressed gas cleaner: used to clean optical ports on boards.
• In a WDM system, an optical spectrum analyzer is required for testing the optical
power of single wavelengths in a multiplexed signal, to obtain accurate values
regardless of noise impact.
• You need to calibrate an optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the
optical power. You can verify the calibration as follows:
▫ Use the optical spectrum analyzer to measure the optical power at the OUT
port of an OTU board. Then, compare the measured value with the output
optical power of the OTU board measured by using the optical power
meter. If the difference between them is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is
acceptable. Otherwise, perform the calibration again.
Engineering Design Information

⚫ Engineering survey documents (including survey reports and survey guides)
⚫ Engineering design documents
 Network diagrams (including the network-wide networking diagram, basic topology diagram, and network
management diagram)
 Cabinet layout
 Wavelength allocation diagram
 Fiber connection diagram of each cabinet
 OA configuration diagram
 Fiber connection diagram
 Optical attenuator statistical table
 Design description file
General Commissioning Process

⚫ General commissioning process of an NG WDM device
Prepare for commissioning
Create NEs.
Set manually extended Check network-

Install Check the Power on and Create optical ECC communication. wide software
Set up an OSC. NEs.
devices. installation. check the devices. versions.
Check device commissioning conditions Configure NEs Upload NE Configure Create fiber
and the network. data. performance connections.
monitoring of the NEs.
Commission the Set NE IDs Synchronize the NE Configure
Create OCh trails.
optical power. and IP time with the NMS. the
addresses. ROADM.
Configure board Configure

ports. services. Perform system tests
Configure WDM
protection.
Mandatory Configure WDM Commission the Test bit errors. Back up the NE
features. system. data.
Optional
• You can use the Web LCT or NCE for commissioning and configuration during
site deployment. All functions supported by the Web LCT are available on NCE.
Compared with NCE, the Web LCT has lower requirements on computer
hardware and can be started within a shorter period of time.
Device Commissioning Conditions (1)

⚫ Check after hardware installation
 Check cabinet installation (focus on installation specifications, fastening, and grounding).
 Check cabinet fastening.
 Check subracks (focus on the pins on the backplane, whether there are foreign objects inside the
subrack, and whether boards are properly inserted).
 Check boards.
 Check cable routing.
 Check fiber routing.
 Check the installation of dispersion compensation modules (DCMs) (check whether the DCMs in
different directions are in accordance with the design file).
 Check cabinet door installation.
• Check cabinet fastening.

▫ Cabinet fasteners are correctly installed, and all bolts are installed.
▫ After cabinet fasteners are installed, bolts are tightened.
• Check boards.
▫ All boards are securely inserted, and the front panels of the boards are
properly fastened.
▫ The labels on the front panels of boards are correct and clear.
• Check cabinet door installation.
▫ The front door and side panels of the cabinet are correctly installed.
▫ The installed front door of the cabinet can be smoothly opened and closed.
• Check cable routing.
▫ The bending radius of optical fibers is greater than or equal to 40 mm.
▫ Power cables, ground cables, and signal cables outside the cabinet are
routed separately, with a spacing larger than 30 mm.
▫ Cables are bent with a bending radius greater than 60 mm and are not
bound at corners.
▫ The distributed –48 V power cable is the blue one, ground cable is the black
one, and the protection ground (PGND) cable is the yellow-green one or
yellow one.

⚫ Power on and check the device.
 Power on the cabinet.
Check Item Reference Value
Check the fuse capacity of the power

The fuse capacity is generally 32 A, 63 A, or 125 A.
output terminal in the equipment room.
If the switch is set to OFF, the resistance between power input terminals A and B of
the PDB is ∞.
Test the resistance between the power
input terminals of the PDB.
If the switch is set to ON, the resistance between power input terminals A and B of the
PDB is greater than 20 kilohms.
Test the voltage between the power The voltage between NEG(–) and RTN(+) is within the range of –48 V±20% (or –60
input terminals of the PDB. V±20%).

⚫ Power on and check the device.
 Power on and check the subrack or chassis.
◼ Power on the subrack or chassis. (The cabinet power indicator is steady green.)
◼ Check the fans inside the subrack or chassis. (The FAN indicator is steady green.)
 Check the fiber attenuation, including:

◼
Fiber connection between the client-side optical port of the OTU and the ODF
◼ Fiber connection between the line-side optical port of the DDFIU and the ODF
◼ Fiber connection between two cabinets
• Note
▫ The indicators on the top of an NG WDM cabinet are driven by the LAMP
port in the subrack. Therefore, these indicators light on only after the
subrack or chassis is powered on.
• Check the fans inside the subrack or chassis.
▫ After the subrack is powered on, check air flows to verify that the fans are
working properly.
▫ Check the FAN indicator on the fan tray assembly and ensure that the
indicator is steady green. If the indicator is steady red, two or more fans are
faulty. If the indicator is steady yellow, only one fan is faulty. Rectify the
faults before proceeding with the commissioning.
• Check fiber attenuation.

▫ For each site, check all fiber connections onsite, including:
▪ Fiber connection between the client-side optical port of the OTU and
the ODF
▪ Fiber connection between the line-side optical port of the DDFIU and
the ODF
▪ Fiber connection between two cabinets

Commissioning an OSC
⚫ Commissioning requirements
OSC Board Transmit Optical Power Range Receive Optical Power Range
SC1/ST2 board –4 dBm to 0 dBm –45 dBm to –8 dBm
ST2/AST2 (150 km eOTDR OSC module) 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm –42 dBm to –10 dBm
ST2/AST2 (80 km eOTDR OSC module) –3 dBm to –2 dBm –35 dBm to –10 dBm
F F
SC1 I I SC1
U 40 km (12 dB) U
IL: 1.5 dB IL: 1.5 dB IL: insertion loss
• FOA configuration principles for OSC boards:
▫ An FOA is configured on the TM1/TM2 port of the OSC board.
▫ If the wavelength is 1310 nm and the transmission distance is within 15 km,

no FOA is required.
▫ In the same OMS, if XFIU boards work with DFIU boards, the XFIU boards
must all function as DFIU boards; if XFIU boards work with DSFIU boards,
the XFIU boards must all function as DSFIU boards. After the OSC is
commissioned and inter-NE communication is normal, you can use NCE to
complete the basic configurations of the NEs and network, preparing for
optical power commissioning.
NE and Network Configuration Process
Start
7. Upload NE data.
1. Connect to the NMS computer.
8. Configure WDM interface attributes for boards.

2. Start NCE.
9. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS.

3. Create optical NEs.
10. Configure performance monitoring of the NEs.

4. Create NEs.
11. Set manually extended ECC communication.

5. Log in to each NE.
12. Create fiber connections in graphical mode.

6. Change the NE IDs and IP addresses.
End
• Connect to the NMS computer.
▫ Check the network cable. Ensure that one end of the network cable is
connected to the network port of the NMS computer and the other end is
connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 or NM port of an NE.
• Change NE IDs and IP addresses.
▫ The ECC protocol identifies NEs by NE ID. NCE also identifies NEs by NE ID
and uses NE IDs as a keyword for search on the GUI and in the database.
During network planning, a unique NE ID must be allocated to each NE. If
an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision occurs. As a
result, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion
process, you can change NE IDs using NCE if the original network plan
needs to be modified.
• Set manually extended ECC communication.
▫ When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports
of the NEs can be used to achieve extended ECC communication. If the
number of Huawei NEs using extended ECC communication exceeds 4,
manually extended ECC communication must be used.
Commissioning Analysis Commissioning
Signal Flow Division of Wavelength Links (1)
Site A Site B
D D
O O
EX F F EX
T OA OA T
40 I I 40
U U
U U
1 2 3
OTU-EX40-OA OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA OA-EX40-OTU
• Using the OAs as reference points, the OCh signal flow from site A to site B can
be divided into three sections: OTU-EX40-OA, OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA, and OA-EX40-
OTU. The OCh signal flow from site B to site A can also be divided into three
sections: OTU-EX40-OA, OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA, and OA-EX40-OTU. According to the
analysis of the signal flows, three signal flow models can be extracted: OTU-
EX40-OA, OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA, and OA-EX40-OUT. (Note: The OAs here can be
OBUs, OAUs, HBAs, DAPs, and other types of OAs.)
Site A Site B Site C
O D D D D O
EX F F F F EX
T OA OA OA T
40 I I I I 40
U U
U U U U
1 2 3 4
OTU-EX40-OA OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA OA-EX40-OTU
• Although the signal flow shown in the figure above is divided into four sections,
it is easy to find that the models of the second and third sections are similar.
Therefore, three signal flow models can be extracted: OTU-EX40-OA, OA-DFIU-
DFIU-OA, and OA-EX40-OTU.
O D D D D O
EX F F EX EX F F EX
T OA OA OA OA T
40 I I 40 40 I I 40
U U
U U U U
1 2 3 4 5
OTU-EX40-OA OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA OA-EX40-EX40-OA OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA OA-EX40-OTU
• According to the analysis of the signal flow, four models can be extracted: OTU-
EX40-OA, OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA, OA-EX40-EX40-OA, and OA-EX40-OTU.
Signal Flow Model Analysis

Model 1: OTU-EX40-OA Model 2: OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA
D D
O EX F F
T 40 OA OA OA
I I
U U U
Model 3: OA-EX40-EX40-OA Model 4: OA-EX40-OTU
EX EX EX O
OA OA OA T
40 40 40
U
• To sum up, four models can be extracted: OTU-EX40-OA, OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA,

OA-EX40-EX40-OA, and OA-EX40-OTU.
Commissioning Procedure (Model 1: OTU-EX40-OA)

1
3 4
2 E
O OUT M01 X OUT 6 OUT
T OA
4 VI
U 0 OPM8
7 MON
5
① On the NMS, turn on the laser of the corresponding OCh port on the OTU board.
② Check whether the optical power of the output port is within the normal range. (For details about the optical power range, see the product documentation.)
③ Query the manufacturer information of the OA and calculate as follows: POUT, MAX = A.
④ According to the position of the OA and the number of wavelengths in the system, calculate as follows: Psingle = Ptotal – 10lgN, Psingle, typica l = B. (In the case of
full-wavelength output, the output optical power of the OA can reach the maximum value. In this case, Ptotal = POUT, MAX = A. Then Psingle, typical = A – 10lgN. N
indicates the number of wavelengths in the system. 10lg40 = 16; 10lg80 = 19).
⑤ Use a spectrum analyzer board (for example, an OPM8 board) to test the actual single-wavelength optical power of the OA: Psingle = C.
⑥ The difference between optical power B and optical power C is the VOA value to be adjusted. In this scenario, you can adjust the VOA inside the OA
repeatedly and check the output optical power of the wavelength corresponding to the OPM8 board. Ensure that the single-wavelength output optical
power of this wavelength is equal to or close to the typical value.
⑦ In this scenario, only one wavelength is analyzed. In the case of multiple wavelengths, you also need to consider the flatness of different wavelengths
traversing the EX40 board.
Commissioning Procedure (Model 2: OA-DFIU-DFIU-OA)

2 3
1 D D
5 OUT
RC F OUT IN F TC
OA OA
OUT I I VI
U U MON OPM8
4
① The commissioning of the first OA is complete in model 1. Therefore, the output optical power of the first OA should be the nominal output optical power.
② Query the manufacturer information of the second OA and calculate as follows: POUT, MAX = A.
③ According to the position of the second OA and the number of wavelengths in the system, calculate as follows: Psingle = Ptota l – 10lgN, Psingle, typical = B. (In the
case of full-wavelength output, the output optical power of the OA can reach the maximum value. In this case, Ptotal = POUT, MAX = A. Then Psingle, typica l = A –
10lgN. N indicates the number of wavelengths in the system. 10lg40 = 16; 10lg80 = 19).
④ Use a spectrum analyzer board (for example, an OPM8 board) to test the actual single-wavelength optical power of the second OA through the MON port:
Psingle = C.
⑤ The difference between optical power B and optical power C is the VOA value to be adjusted. In this scenario, you can adjust only the VOA inside the OA
power of this wavelength is equal to or close to the typical value. If the OA is an OAU board and this optical power requirement is still not met after the
VOA value is adjusted, you can try to adjust the gain to adjust the output optical power.
Commissioning Procedure (Model 3: OA-EX40-EX40-OA)

6
2 3
1
IN EX EX 5 OUT
OUT
OA OA
OUT 40 40 VI
MON OPM8
4
① The commissioning of the first OA is complete in model 2. Therefore, the output optical power of the first OA should be the nominal output optical power.
② Query the manufacturer information of the second OA and calculate as follows: POUT, MAX = A.
③ According to the position of the second OA and the number of wavelengths in the system, calculate as follows: Psingle = Ptota l – 10lgN, Psingle, typical = B. (In the
case of full-wavelength output, the output optical power of the OA can reach the maximum value. In this case, Ptotal = POUT, MAX = A. Then Psingle, typical = A –
10lgN. N indicates the number of wavelengths in the system. 10lg40 = 16; 10lg80 = 19).
④ Use a spectrum analyzer board (for example, an OPM8 board) to test the actual single-wavelength optical power of the second OA through the MON port:
Psingle = C.
⑤ The difference between optical power B and optical power C is the VOA value to be adjusted. In this scenario, you can adjust the VOA inside the OA
power of this wavelength is equal to or close to the typical value.
⑥ In this scenario, only one wavelength is analyzed. In the case of multiple wavelengths, you also need to consider the flatness of different wavelengths
traversing the EX40 board.
Commissioning Procedure (Model 4: OA-EX40-EX40-OA)

1 2
EX O
IN IN
OA 40 T
OUT
U
① The commissioning of the OA is complete in model 3. Therefore, the output optical power of the OA should be the
nominal output optical power.
② Test the optical power at the receive end of the OTU board onsite or remotely using the NMS. Generally, the receive
optical power of the OTU board ranges from –16 dBm to 0 dBm. Given the fluctuation of the laser, it is
recommended that the actual receive optical power range from (sensitivity + 3) to (overload – 5), that is, from –13
dBm to –5 dBm. If the actual receive optical power is within the range, the commissioning is complete. If the actual
receive optical power is relatively high, add an appropriate FOA to the IN port at the receive end. If the actual
receive optical power is relatively low, check whether the fiber is bent, the optical port is contaminated or the
insertion loss of the EX40 board is excessively high, and rectify the fault.
Commissioning Analysis C ommissioning
Commissioning Principles
⚫ This section describes the differences in incident optical power commissioning
between a beyond 100G coherent system and a non-coherent system as well as the
overall commissioning principles.
⚫ For a hybrid transmission system, follow the non-coherent commissioning principles
first.
Requirements on Incident Optical Power of a Coherent

System (1)
⚫ Incident optical power specifications of the C band (for OBUs and OPUs)
Applicable Channel
S pe ctrum W idth of Each G . 652 L EAF G . 653 TW R S
Modulation Format
(High) (High) (High) (High)

Mainstream (Low) Special Mainstream (Low) Special Mainstream (Low) Special Mainstream (Low) Special
Special Special Special Special
Modulation Number of Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident
Incident Incident Incident Incident
Format Wavelengths Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical
Optical Optical Optical Optical
Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm)
Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm) Power (dBm)
40 (OBU) 3.5 – – – – – – – – – – –
40 (OPU) 0.5 – – 0.5 – – –5.0 – – – – –
2.5G SFP
16 (OPU) 4.5 – – 4.5 – – –4.0 – – – – –
8 (OPU) 7.5 – – – – – – – – – – –
80 (OBU) 0.5 – – – – – –7.0 – – – – –
40 (OBU) 3.5 – – – – – –5.0 – – – – –
10G NRZ
40 (OPU) 0.5 – – 0.5 – – –5.0 – – – – –
16 (OPU) 4.5 – – 4.5 – – –4.0 – – – – –
100G QPSK 80 (OBU) 0.5 – – 0.5 – –1.0 – – – – – –
(hybrid
transmission) 40 (OBU) 3.5 – – 3.5 – 2 – – – – – –
100G QPSK 80 (OBU) 0.5 – – –1.0 0.5 – – – – – – –

(coherent) 40 (OBU) 3.5 – – 2 – – – – – – – –
80 (OBU) 0.5 – – –1.0 0.5 – – – – – – –
200G 16QAM
40 (OBU) 3.5 – – 2 – – – – – – – –
• In an optical transmission system, after the output optical power of the transmit-
end OA is adjusted to the nominal value, you also need to check and commission
the incident optical power, which includes the mainstream and special incident
optical power.
Requirements on Incident Optical Power of a Coherent

System (2)
⚫ Incident optical power specifications in the C band (only for DAPs)
Applicable Channel
Spectrum Width of Each G . 652 LE AF G . 653 T W RS
Modulation Format
(High) (Low) (Low) (High) (Low) (High) (Low)

Mainstream Mainstream (High) Mainstream Mainstream
Special Special Special Special Special Special Special
Incident Incident Special Incident Incident
Modulation Number of Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident Incident
Optical Optical Incident Optical Optical
Format Wavelengths Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical
Power Power Optical Power Power
Power Power Power Power Power Power Power
(dBm) (dBm) Power (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
(dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
80 0.5 3.5 – –1.0 0.5 –3.0 –7.0 –5.0 –10.0 –2.0 0.5 –4.0
40 3.5 6.5 0.5 2.0 3.5 0.0 –7.0 –5.0 –10.0 1.0 3.5 –1.0
100G QPSK
200 (5 x 37.5
–0.5 2.5 – –2.0 –0.5 –4.0 – – – – – –
subcarriers)
80 0.5 3.5 – –1.0 0.5 –3.0 – – – – – –
40 3.5 6.5 0.5 2.0 3.5 0.0 – – – – – –

200G
16QAM
200 (5 x 37.5
–0.5 2.5 – –2.0 –0.5 –4.0 – – – – –
subcarriers)
• The low special incident optical power is lower than the mainstream incident
optical power, and is generally configured to reduce the nonlinear effect.
• The high special incident optical power is higher than the mainstream incident
optical power, and is generally configured to increase the OSNR.
Process of Commissioning the Optical Power in a Coherent

System Start
Query the single-wavelength nominal output

Query the incident
optical power of the transmit-end OA (a).
optical power based
on the OA and line
fiber types in use.
Query the incident optical power (b).
It is a non-standard fiber access N It is a standard fiber

scenario. a > (b + 0.5)? access scenario.
The minimum EVOA attenuation is Calculate and set the EVOA attenuation [(a –
the attenuation value that reaches 0.5) – b] at the incident optical power
the designed incident optical commissioning point.
power.
Adjust the upstream EVOA attenuation to
ensure that the output optical power of the
downstream OA reaches the nominal value.
End
Commissioning Differences Between Coherent and

Non-Coherent Systems
Transmission System Non-standard Fiber Access Standard Fiber Access
Coherent system
Non-coherent
system
: incident optical power reference point : incident optical power adjustment point
: input optical power adjustment point of the downstream receive-end OA
• a: In a coherent system, the EVOA at the input optical power adjustment point of
the receive-end OA can be placed based on the actual network design. If the
EVOA is placed at the receive end of the site, its commissioning method is the
same as that in a non-coherent system.
• The figures above show the signal flows in one direction, and the signal flows in
the reverse direction are similar.
Non-standard and Standard Fiber Access Scenarios

Non-standard fiber access scenario Standard fiber access scenario
Example: 80-wavelength system@G.653 fiber Example: 80-wavelength system@G.652 fiber

2
The incident optical
1 2 1 power (b) is +0.5
The nominal single- The nominal single- dBm.
The incident optical
wavelength output wavelength output
power (b) is –5
optical power (a) is optical power (a) is
dBm.
+4 dBm. +1 dBm.
F F F F
OA I OA I I OA I
U U U U
Set the attenuation a > b + 0.5

value of the EVOA It is a non-standard
to 8.5 dB [4 – 0.5 – fiber access a = b + 0.5
(–5)]. scenario. It is a standard fiber
access scenario. 3
4 3
• Commissioning objective in a non-standard fiber access scenario: Actual single-

wavelength incident optical power at the incident optical power reference point
<= Incident optical power.
• After being configured in the commissioning tool, the incident optical power
reference point is moved to a position behind an FIU board. Attenuation value of
the EVOA at the incident optical power adjustment point = Single-wavelength
nominal output optical power – 0.5 (FIU insertion loss) – Incident optical power.
• The inherent insertion loss of the EVOA is the minimum value, which can be
queried on the NMS.
Commissioning Rules for Incident Optical Power

⚫ Comply with the following rules when you commission the incident optical power:
 You are advised to adjust the incident optical power counters based on the network design.
 Incident optical power counters refer to the mainstream incident optical power of each fiber by
default.

High special incident optical power and low special incident optical power are used in special
network scenarios. Adjust the special incident optical power based on the network design.
 When adjusting incident optical power counters and optical power of the downstream OA, ensure
that the incident optical power counters meet the requirement.
◼ If the output optical power of the downstream OA meets the requirement in the case of the minimum gain,
the upstream incident optical power can be lower than the incident optical power counters.
◼ If the output optical power of the downstream OA does not meet the requirement in the case of the
minimum gain, reduce the attenuation value of the upstream EVOA first to a value within the range
required by incident optical power counters.
◼ If the output optical power of the downstream OA still does not meet the requirement, increase the gain of
the downstream OA.
Commissioning Rules for a Coherent System

⚫ Comply with the following rules when you commission a coherent system:
 Adjust the optical power based on the nominal value of an OA board. Do not attempt to improve transmission
performance by increasing the transmit optical power in the initial phase of a project.
 The receive optical power on the WDM side of an OTU board should range from –12 dBm to –5 dBm.
 The objective of system commissioning is to ensure the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. If there is a
minor difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness, you can maintain the optical power
flatness to ensure the OSNR flatness.
 During coherent system commissioning, based on the optical power of each wavelength detected by the OPM8
board or optical spectrum analyzer, adjust the optical power difference of each wavelength to be within ±1 dB
at equalization sites (including ROADM and back-to-back OTM sites) where optical power equalization can be
performed.
 If the intermediate flatness method is used, the objective of single-wavelength optical power adjustment at the
transmit and receive ends is to ensure that the flatness of the single-wavelength input optical power is within
the range of the nominal single-wavelength input optical power (±3 dB).
 In an 80-wavelength system, if G.653 optical fibers are used and the number of wavelengths does not exceed
40, you can use 40 wavelengths in the range of 192.100 THz to 193.050 THz and 195.100 THz to 196.050 THz
to increase the transmission distance.
• The involved boards include FIU, DFIU, and DSFIU. To enable the 40-wavelength
function on NCE, open the NE Explorer and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. In the right pane, set Configure Working Band
Parity to ecldmid40.
Commissioning Rules for Hybrid Transmission of Beyond

100G and 100G Coherent Systems
⚫ Wavelength configuration rules:

If there is only one type of channel spacing, long wavelengths are first allocated automatically based on the default channel spacing.

If there are multiple types of channel spacing, wavelengths are allocated to channels based on the default channel spacing fi rst.

For hybrid transmission of the 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and 75 GHz channel spacing, it is recommended that short wavele ngths
be first allocated for the 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and long wavelengths be first allocated for the 75 GHz channel spac ing.
Wavelength allocation based on the 50 GHz channel spacing is prior to that based on the 100 GHz channel spacing.

For hybrid transmission of the 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and 62.5 GHz channel spacing, it is recommended that short wave lengths
be first allocated for the 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and long wavelengths be first allocated for the 62.5 GHz channel sp acing.
Wavelength allocation based on the 50 GHz channel spacing is prior to that based on the 100 GHz channel spacing.

For hybrid transmission of the 62.5 GHz channel spacing and 75 GHz channel spacing, it is recommended that short wavelengths be first
allocated for the 62.5 GHz channel spacing and long wavelengths be first allocated for the 75 GHz channel spacing.

For hybrid transmission of the 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, 62.5 GHz channel spacing, and 75 GHz channel spacing, it is
recommended that short wavelengths be first allocated for the 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, intermediate wavelengths be fir st
allocated for the 62.5 GHz channel spacing, and long wavelengths be first allocated for the 75 GHz channel spacing. Wavelength
allocation based on the 50 GHz channel spacing is prior to that based on the 100 GHz channel spacing.

It is recommended that long wavelengths be first allocated to superchannels.
• The guard band configuration principles (for G.652 and LEAF fiber systems) are
as follows: No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of beyond 100G
and 100G coherent services.
Commissioning Rules for a Coherent and Non-Coherent

Hybrid Transmission System
⚫ In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid transmission system, comply with non-coherent commissioning rules first. In a special
scenario where non-coherent commissioning rules are not applicable, commission the system based on the actual planning and
design.
⚫
For a hybrid transmission system with dispersion compensation, the requirements for incident optical power are the same as those
for a non-coherent system.
⚫ For hybrid transmission of beyond 100G/100G signals and 10G signals, it is recommended that the optical power of beyond
100G/100G signals be higher than that of 10G signals but not higher than the single-wavelength nominal value of the OA board.
⚫
Note that the spectra for hybrid transmission of beyond 100G and 100G signals are wide and seem to be narrower than the spectra
of 10G signals, but the actual optical power values of these signals are approximate. Therefore, you need to accurately measure the
optical power of beyond 100G/100G wavelengths.
⚫
In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid transmission system, comply with the following rules when you configure guard bands in
G.652 and LEAF fiber systems:
 For hybrid transmission of beyond 100G and 10G signals, you need to configure guard bands.
 For hybrid transmission of 100G and 10G signals, you need to configure guard bands.
• The guard band configuration varies according to network. You can contact
Huawei engineers to design guard bands in practical applications.
Commissioning the Optical Power of an OA-Free System

⚫ When commissioning the optical power of an OA-free system, pay attention to the
receive optical power of OTU, tributary, and line boards.
⚫ General requirements
 The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.
 A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that the optical power
fluctuation in a certain range does not affect the existing services.
Requirements for the Optical Power of OTU, Tributary, and

Line Boards
⚫ The output optical power of OTU, tributary, and line boards must meet board specifications.
⚫ After commissioning, the receive optical power of OTU, tributary, and line boards must meet the
following requirement: Lower threshold of the receive optical power ≤ Receive optical power of OTU,
tributary, and line boards ≤ Upper threshold of the receive optical power. It is recommended that the
receive optical power of OTU, tributary, and line boards after commissioning be equal to the average
value of the upper and lower thresholds in practical applications.
⚫ For a line board or the WDM side of an OTU board:
 Lower threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver sensitivity of the optical module + 3 dB
 Upper threshold of the receive optical power = Receiver overload of the optical module – 3 dB
⚫ For a tributary board or the client side of an OTU board:
General Commissioning Methods

⚫ In general, commission the optical power of an OA-free system along the signal flow, that is, from
upstream devices to downstream ones, according to the requirements for the optical power of OTU,
tributary, and line boards.
⚫ You can measure the receive and transmit optical power of an OTU board using an optical power
meter, or query the receive and transmit optical power of an OTU board on the Web LCT or NCE.
⚫ In the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either the WDM
or client side) is lower than the overload to avoid damaging the receiver optical module or affecting
service performance. Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver optical module is used because
its overload is only –9 dBm. Therefore, loosely connect or do not connect a fiber to the input optical
port on the OTU board before measuring the actual input optical power.
Example of OA-Free System Commissioning
A
O O
T T
U U
B
A D D
OTU M M B OTU
M M
U U
U U
A OTU X
X
X B OTU
X
• If the receive optical power (P1) on the WDM side of an OTU board does not
meet the requirement, do as follows:
▫ If P1 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, add an
appropriate FOA to the receive-end optical port (B shown in the figure) on
the WDM side of the OTU board to ensure that P1 meets the requirement.
▫ If P1 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, remove
the FOA from the receive-end optical port (B shown in the figure) on the
WDM side of the OTU board or replace it with an FOA with lower
attenuation. If P1 still does not meet the requirement after the FOA is
removed, check whether the fiber attenuation on the line is proper and
whether network design data is correct.
• If the receive optical power (P2) on the client side of an OTU board does not
meet the requirement, do as follows:
▫ If P2 is higher than the upper threshold of the receive optical power, add an
appropriate FOA to the receive-end optical port (A shown in the figure) on
the client side of the OTU board to ensure that P2 meets the requirement.
▫ If P2 is lower than the lower threshold of the receive optical power, remove
the FOA from the receive-end optical port (A shown in the figure) on the
client side of the OTU board or replace it with an FOA with lower
attenuation. If P2 still does not meet the requirement after the FOA is
removed, check whether the transmit optical power of the upstream device
is within in the permitted range, whether the fiber attenuation is proper,
and whether network design data is correct.
• If the output optical power of the OTU board does not meet the requirement,
replace the corresponding optical module.
Commissioning the Optical Power of a System with OAs

⚫ When commissioning the optical power of a system configured with OA boards, pay
attention to the output optical power of the OA boards, receive optical power of
OTU, tributary, and line boards, and input optical power of DCMs.
⚫ General requirements
 The optical power after commissioning must be within the permitted range.
 A certain optical power margin must be reserved to ensure that the optical power
fluctuation in a certain range does not affect the existing services.
 The optical power after commissioning must meet the requirements for system capacity
expansion.

Line Boards (1)
⚫ The output optical power of OTU, tributary, and line boards must meet board specifications.
⚫ After commissioning, the receive optical power of OTU, tributary, and line boards must meet
the following requirement: Lower threshold of the receive optical power ≤ Receive optical
power of OTU, tributary, and line boards ≤ Upper threshold of the receive optical power. In
practical applications, it is recommended that the receive optical power of OTU, tributary,
and line boards be adjusted to the following value: Average value of the upper and lower
thresholds of the receive optical power + 2 dB
⚫ For a line board or the WDM side of an OTU board (PIN receiver optical module):

Line Boards (2)
⚫ For a line board or the WDM side of an OTU board (APD receiver optical module):
⚫ For a tributary board or the client side of an OTU board:
Requirements for the Optical Power of Multiplexer Boards

⚫ The single-wavelength optical power (input optical power of the multiplexer board)
before multiplexing should be commissioned to the following range: Average single-
wavelength optical power – 2 dB ≤ Single-wavelength optical power ≤ Average
single-wavelength optical power + 2 dB.
Requirements for the Optical Power of OA Boards

⚫ The average single-wavelength output optical power of an OA board must be equal
to the nominal value.
 To measure the average single-wavelength output optical power, connect an optical
spectrum analyzer to the OUT port of the corresponding OA board.
 Nominal single-wavelength output optical power = Maximum total output optical power
of the OA board – 10lgN (N indicates the maximum number of wavelengths permitted by
the system). For example, the maximum total output optical power of the OA board is 17
dBm. If the system is designed as a 40-wavelength system, the nominal single-wavelength
output optical power is 1 dBm (17 – 10lg40).
⚫ The single-wavelength output optical power of the OA board should be equal to or
close to the nominal value.
Requirements for DCM Optical Power

⚫ If a DCM is configured in a system, the input single-wavelength optical power of the
DCM must be lower than or equal to –3 dBm.
General Commissioning Methods

⚫ In general, commission the optical power of a system with OAs along the signal flow, that is,
from upstream devices to downstream ones, according to the requirements for the optical
power of OA, OTU, tributary, and line boards as well as DCMs.
⚫ The optical power of an OTU board is commissioned in the same way regardless of whether
the system is equipped with OAs or not. For details about the commissioning method, see
the previous slides regarding the commissioning of an OA-free system.
⚫ In the commissioning process, ensure that the input optical power of an OTU board (either
the WDM or client side) is lower than the overload to avoid damaging the receiver optical
module or affecting service performance. Exercise caution especially when an APD receiver
optical module is used because its overload is only –9 dBm. Therefore, loosely connect or do
not connect a fiber to the input optical port on the OTU board before measuring the actual
input optical power.
Example of the Commissioning of a System with OAs

A
O O
T T
U U
B G
D M D
B OTU
M M
E OA2 U F OA3
U U
X
X X B OTU
1 2 2
A OTU C M
U D OA1
X
A OTU C 1
• To measure the average single-wavelength output optical power of an OA board

and the output optical power of each single wavelength, you need to connect an
optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the OA board. If the single-
wavelength output optical power of the OA board does not meet the requirement,
adjust the optical attenuator on the WDM-side output optical port of the upstream
OTU board or on the input optical port of the OA board to ensure that the output
optical power of the OA board meets the requirement.
• As shown in the figure above, for OA1, do as follows:
▫ If the average single-wavelength output optical power of the OA board is
higher than the nominal value, increase the attenuation of the optical
attenuator on the input optical port (D shown in the figure) of the OA board
to ensure that the average single-wavelength output optical power is equal to
the nominal value.
▫ If the average single-wavelength output optical power of the OA board is
lower than the nominal value, reduce the attenuation of the optical
attenuator on the input optical port (D shown in the figure) of the OA board
to ensure that the average single-wavelength output optical power is equal to
the nominal value.
▫ For the output optical power of a specific wavelength of the OA board, adjust
the optical attenuator on the output optical port (C shown in the figure) of
the corresponding OTU board to ensure that the output optical power of this
wavelength is equal to or close to the nominal value.
• For OA2, adjust the optical attenuator on port E to ensure that the average single-
wavelength output optical power is equal to the nominal value. If the average
single-wavelength output optical power is still not equal to the nominal value after
the attenuation of the optical attenuator is adjusted to 0 dB, remove the optical
attenuator. If the requirement still cannot be met after the attenuator is removed,
check whether network design data is correct.
• For OA3, commission the input optical power of the multiplexer board (MUX2) at
the upstream site and then adjust the optical attenuator on port F to ensure that
the average single-wavelength output optical power of the OA board is equal to
the nominal value. To commission the input optical power of the MUX2 board,
do as follows:
▫ Measure the optical power of each pass-through wavelength on the input
optical port of the MUX2 board, and then calculate the average single-
wavelength optical power. For a multiplexed pass-through wavelength,
measure the average single-wavelength optical power using an optical
spectrum analyzer. For a single pass-through wavelength, measure its
optical power using an optical power meter.
▫ Measure the single-wavelength optical power of each added wavelength on
the input optical port of the MUX2 board, and calculate the average single-
wavelength optical power of added wavelengths.
▫ To adjust the optical power of wavelengths, do as follows:
▪ If the average single-wavelength optical power of pass-through
wavelengths is lower than that of added wavelengths, adjust the
optical attenuator on port G to ensure that the single-wavelength
optical power of the added wavelengths meets the following
requirement: Average single-wavelength optical power of pass-
through wavelengths – 2 dB ≤ Single-wavelength optical power of
added wavelengths ≤ Average single-wavelength optical power of the
pass-through wavelengths + 2 dB.
▪ If the average single-wavelength optical power of pass-through
wavelengths is higher than that of added wavelengths, add an optical
attenuator between the output optical port of the DMUX1 board and
the input optical port of the MUX2 board to ensure that the average
single-wavelength optical power of pass-through wavelengths is
equal to the average single-wavelength optical power of added
wavelengths. Additionally, adjust the attenuation of the optical
attenuators on the output optical ports of other OTU boards for
adding wavelengths. This ensures that the single-wavelength optical
power of added wavelengths meets the following requirement:
Average single-wavelength optical power of pass-through
wavelengths – 2 dB ≤ Single-wavelength optical power of added
wavelengths ≤ Average single-wavelength optical power of the pass-
through wavelengths + 2 dB.
• If an FOA is added between the output optical port of the DMUX1 board and the
input optical port of the MUX2 board, ensure that the average single-wavelength
optical power of pass-through wavelengths is lower than or equal to the average
single-wavelength optical power of added wavelengths. In this case, select an
FOA with the minimum attenuation to minimize the loss of pass-through
wavelengths. In this case, the single-wavelength optical power of added
wavelengths must meet the following requirement: Average single-wavelength
optical power of pass-through wavelengths – 2 dB ≤ Single-wavelength optical
power of added wavelengths ≤ Average single-wavelength optical power of pass-
through wavelengths + 2 dB.
• If an OPU or OBU board is equipped with an SFP EVOA, you can adjust the EVOA
attenuation on the NMS.
• If a DCM is configured in the system, you can measure the total input optical
power of the DCM using an optical power meter, calculate the single-wavelength
input optical power of the DCM, and ensure that the optical power is lower than
or equal to –3 dBm.
Check Items After Optical Power Commissioning

⚫ The input and output optical power of each line board meets the requirements.
⚫ The input and output optical power of each tributary board meets the requirements.
⚫ The input and output optical power of each OTU board meets the requirements.
⚫
The gain and input optical power of each OA board meets the requirements.
 The gain of each OA board is equal to or close to the minimum nominal gain.
 The input optical power of each OA board is equal to or close to the nominal value.
⚫ The single-wavelength optical power flatness is within the following range: nominal single-wavelength
optical power ± 3 dB.
⚫ There is no pre-FEC bit error rate (BER) threshold-crossing alarm (BEFFEC_EXC alarm).
⚫
The post-FEC BER (specified by FEC_AFT_COR_ER) is 0.
⚫ The number of frames that cannot be corrected by FEC (specified by FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT) is 0.
intelligent world.


that
MS-OTN Features
Foreword
⚫ Throughout the information era, large enterprises have consistently

increased their demand for higher bandwidth since packet services are
surging. To avoid wasting existing investments, many enterprises start by
implementing NG WDM devices, as they support both packet transmission
and circuit transmission with MPLS/PWE3.
⚫ This course describes the packet technology, packet services, and
maintenance features of MS-OTN.
Objectives

 Design IP addresses and masks for devices in a private network.
 Describe MPLS and PWE3 technologies.
 List the types of MS-OTN packet Ethernet services and describe their features.
 List maintenance features of MS-OTN packet services.
Contents
1. IP Basics
2. MPLS & PWE3
3. Packet Services
4. Maintenance Features
TCP/IP and OSI Model
Application layer
Presentation layer Application layer
Session layer
Transport layer Transport layer
Network layer Network layer
Data link layer Data link layer
Physical layer Physical layer

OSI reference model TCP/IP reference model
• Open Systems Interconnection (OSI): is a conceptual model created by the

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) which enables diverse
communication systems to communicate using standard protocols. The
communication process consists of seven different layers that are arranged
hierarchically based on the relationship with users. Each layer uses the
environment provided by a lower layer and provides services for an upper layer.
Layers 7 to 4 process end-to-end communication between message sources and
destinations, and Layers 3 to 1 process network functions. All data
communication protocols can correspond to the OSI model.
• Functions of each layer of the Open System Interconnection Reference Model
(OSI RM) are as follows:
▫ Physical layer: This layer is responsible for the communication of raw bits
over a transmission medium and provides an electrical, mechanical,
functional, and procedural interface to the transmission medium. The
voltages, cables, data transmission rate, and interfaces are specified by this
layer. The main network devices used at this layer are repeaters and hubs.
▫ Data link layer: The main task of this layer is to control the physical layer,
detect and correct errors that may occur, and perform traffic control
(optional). Traffic control can be implemented either at the data link layer
or transport layer. The data link layer is concerned with the physical
address, network topology, cable planning, error check, and traffic control.
The main devices used at this layer are Ethernet switches.
▫ Network layer: This layer checks the network topology to determine an
optimal route for transmitting datagrams. As for how to select a route for
transmitting datagrams from the source to the destination, the network
layer uses a routing protocol to calculate routes. The main devices used at
this layer are routers and Layer 3 switches.
TCP/IP Stack
Application HTTP, Telnet, FTP, Provides network interfaces

layer TFTP, ping ... for applications.
Establishes E2E connections

Transport TCP/UDP for hosts.
layer
ICMP Performs addressing and
Network IP routing.
layer ARP/RARP
Data link Ethernet, 802.3, PPP, Assesses physical media.

HDLC, FR …
layer
Transmits binary bit
Physical Physical interfaces and cables streams.
layer
• The TCP/IP protocol stack is similar to the OSI model. The physical layer and data
link layer involve the communication of raw bits over a transmission medium,
provide an electrical, mechanical, functional, and procedural interface to the
transmission medium, provide measures such as error detection, error correction,
and synchronization, and perform traffic control.
• The network layer checks the network topology to determine the optimal route
for transmitting datagrams and forwards datagrams. The key problem is to select
a route from the source to the destination for datagrams. The main network-
layer protocols include Internet Protocol (IP), Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP), Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP), and Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP).
• The transport layer mainly provides host-to-host communication services for

applications. This layer receives data from the application layer, divides the data
into smaller units if necessary, and then transmits the data to the network layer
correctly. The main transport-layer protocols include Transfer Control Protocol
(TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
• The application layer concerns the networking processes at the application level.
This layer receives information directly from users, sends incoming data to a
lower layer, and provides network interfaces for applications. This layer also
contains many common protocols, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP),
Telnet, File Transfer Protocol (FTP), and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).
IP Header
32 bits
8 8 8 8
Version Header Type of Service Total Length
(4 bits) Length (8 bits) (16 bits)
Identifier Flags
Fragment Offset
(16 bits) (3 bits)
Time to Live Protocol Header Checksum

(8 bits) (8 bits) (16 bits)
Source IP Address (32 bits)
Destination IP Address (32 bits)
Options (Variable Length)
• Version: 4 bits. It indicates the format of the IP header. This document describes
version 4. The next-generation IP version is 6.
• Header Length: 4 bits. It indicates the length of the IP header.
• Type of Service: 8 bits. It is usually used for QoS. This field can be further divided
into two parts: Precedence (3 bits) and TOS (5 bits).
• Total Length: 16 bits. It indicates the length of a datagram, including the IP
header and data.
• Identifier: 16 bits. It is used to identify the fragments of one datagram from those
of another.
Flags: 3 bits. It is used to control the fragmentation of a datagram.
Fragment Offset: 13 bits. It is used to direct the reassembly of a fragmented
datagram.
• Time to Live (TTL): 8 bits. Each time a datagram arrives at a network device, the
value is reduced by one before it is routed onward. When the TTL field is
decremented down to zero, the datagram is discarded.
• Protocol: 8 bits. This field specifies the next encapsulated protocol. For example,
value 6 indicates a TCP protocol.
• Header Checksum: 16 bits. It is a checksum on the header only and is used for
error detection.
• Source/Destination IP Addresses: IP address of the sender/receiver.
• Options: variable length, optional.
IP Address
⚫ The IP address is a 32-bit number that uniquely identifies a network device.
⚫ The bytes of an IP address are further classified into two parts: the network part and
the host part.
 Network part: This part specifies the unique numbers assigned to devices connected to
the same physical or logical link.
 Host part: This part specifies the unique number assigned to a specific device connected
to a link.
⚫ IP addresses are normally expressed in dotted-decimal format.
 For example, 10.1.1.1 and 192.168.1.1.
• The IP protocol defines a unique IP address for each computer and other devices
on the Internet. With this unique address, we can easily select the desired objects
from tens of millions of computers connected to the Internet.
• An IP address is a 32-bit number (in binary notation). Theoretically, 2 32 (4.3

billion) IP addresses can be used. On the Internet, if a Layer 3 network device, for
example, a router, saves IP addresses of all nodes, it needs to maintain a huge
routing table. Actually, such a routing table is too large for a router to maintain.
To reduce entries in the routing table, implement effective routing, and clearly
distinguish network segments, the IP address should be structured.
• An IP address is classified into a network part and a host part, which is similar to
a telephone number. The telephone number is also globally unique. For example,
for telephone number 010-82882484, 010 stands for the area code of Beijing,
and 82882484 stands for a telephone number in Beijing. The same is true for IP
addresses. The network part indicates a network segment, and the host part
indicates a device on this network segment.
• As the layer design is adopted, a Layer 3 network device only needs to save the
network addresses of all network segments instead of IP addresses of all hosts
because a network address represents all hosts on this network segment, which
significantly reduces routing entries and improves routing flexibility.
Binary-to-Decimal Conversion
8 bits
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
128 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 255
• An IP address is usually expressed in dotted decimal notation. This 32-bit address

is subdivided into four 8-bit segments. Each segment is expressed in decimal
notation.
• For each segment, the minimum value is 0 (in this case, the eight bits are all 0s),
and the maximum value is 255 (in this case, the eight bits are all 1s).
IP Address Classification
1.0.0.0– Network
0 Host (24 bits) Class A
126.255.255.255 (7 bits)
128.0.0.0–
191.255.255.255 1 0 Network (14 bits) Host (16 bits) Class B
192.0.0.0–
1 1 0 Network (21 bits) Host (8 bits) Class C
223.255.255.255
224.0.0.0–
1 1 1 0 Multicast address
239.255.255.255 Class D
240.0.0.0–
255.255.255.255 1 1 1 1 0 Reserved Class E
• The network part of an IP address is called a network address, which uniquely

identifies one or more network segments. Network devices in the same network
segment have the same network address. The host part of an IP address is called a
host address, which uniquely identifies a network device on the same network
segment.
• Based on the network scale, IP addresses are classified into five classes: A, B, C, D,
and E.
▫ The network address of a Class A IP address is the first octet starting with 0.
Therefore, the number of valid bits of a Class A network address is 7 (8 – 1)
bits. The values assigned to the first octet of a Class A network address fall
within the range 1–126 (127 is reserved). For example, 10.1.1.1 and
126.2.4.78 are Class A IP addresses. The host address of a Class A address is
the rest three octets of 24 bits. Class A IP addresses range from 1.0.0.0 to
126.255.255.255. Each Class A network has 224 Class A IP addresses. The
subnet mask of a Class A IP address is 8 bits, that is, 255.0.0.0.
▫ The network address of a Class B IP address is the first two octets starting
with 10. Therefore, the number of valid bits of a Class B network address is
14 bits (16 – 2). The values assigned to the first octet of a Class B network
address fall within the range 128–191. For example, 128.1.1.1 and 168.2.4.78
are Class B addresses. The host address of a Class B address is the rest two
octets of 16 bits. Class B IP addresses range from 128.0.0.0 to
191.255.255.255. Each Class B network has 216 Class B IP addresses. The
subnet mask of a Class B IP address is 16 bits, that is, 255.255.0.0.
▫ The network address of a Class C IP address is the first three octets starting
with 110. Therefore, the number of valid bits of a Class C network address is
21 (24 – 3). The values assigned to the first octet of a Class C network
address fall within the range 192–223. For example, 192.1.1.1 and 220.2.4.78
are Class C IP addresses. The host address of a Class C address is the rest one
octet of 8 digits. Class C IP addresses range from 192.0.0.0 to
223.255.255.255. Each Class C network has 256 (2 8) Class C IP addresses. The
subnet mask of a Class C IP address is 24 bits, that is, 255.255.255.0.
▫ A Class D address begins with binary 1110 in the first octet. Therefore, the
first octet range for a Class D address is 224 to 239. Class D addresses are
also called multicast addresses.
▫ The first octet range for a Class E address is 240 to 255. Class E addresses are
reserved for experimental purposes.
Special IP Address
Network Part Host Part Address Type Description
Any All 0s Network address A network segment
Any All 1s Broadcast address All nodes in the specified network segment
127 Any Loopback address Loopback test
Huawei VRP routers specify the default

All 0s All networks
route by using this address.
All 1s Broadcast address All nodes in the network segment
• An IP address is used to uniquely identify a network device, but not every IP

address is available. Some special IP addresses are used for various purposes and
cannot be used to identify network devices.
▫ An IP address with all 0s in the host part is called a network address, which
is used to identify a network segment. For example, Class A IP address
1.0.0.0, private address 10.0.0.0 or 192.168.1.0.
▫ An IP address with all 1s in the host part is called a broadcast address,
which is used to identify all hosts in a network. For example, 10.255.255.255
and 192.168.1.255. A router can forward broadcast packets on the network
segment such as 10.0.0.0 or 192.168.1.0. The broadcast address is used for
sending data packets to all nodes on this network segment.
▫ An IP address with the network part of 127 is a loopback address, for
example, 127.0.0.1, which is used for loopback tests.
▫ The IP address 0, 0.0.0.0 represents all hosts. Huawei VRP routers specify
the default route by using this address.
▫ The IP address 255.255.255.255 is also a broadcast address which is used
for sending data packets to all nodes in a network. Such broadcast packets
cannot be forwarded by routers.
• The number of available IP host addresses on a network segment is calculated as
follows: For example, on the Class B network segment 172.16.0.0, there are 16
host bits and 216 IP addresses. The network address 172.16.0.0 and broadcast
address 172.16.255.255 cannot be used to identify hosts. Therefore, there are 216
– 2 available host addresses in total. For example, on the Class C network
segment 192.168.1.0, there are 8 host bits and 256 (28) IP addresses. The network
address 192.168.1.0 and broadcast address 192.168.1.255 are excluded.
Therefore, there are 254 (256 – 2) available host addresses in total.
• The number of available host addresses on each network segment can be
expressed in the following formula: 2n – 2 (Assume that the number of bits of the
host part on a network segment is n).
• Network-layer devices (such as routers) use network addresses to represent hosts
on a network segment, significantly reducing routing entries.
Private IP Address
⚫ The InterNIC reserves the following network segments as private IP addresses:
 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
• Classes A, B, and C addresses are frequently used. IP addresses are assigned by

the International Network Information Center (InterNIC) according to the size of
a company. Generally, the IP addresses of Class A are allocated to governments,
Class B to medium-sized companies, and Class C to small-sized companies.
However, the rapid development of the Internet and waste of IP addresses have
resulted in scarcity of IP addresses.
• Private IP addresses are usually used in the internal network of a company during
IP address planning. Using private IP addresses not only reduces investments in
public IP addresses but also saves IP address resources.
• Private IP addresses, reserved by the InterNIC, can be freely used by companies.
Network devices with private IP addresses cannot directly access the Internet
because IP address conflict occurs when a private IP address is used on the public
network which has no route for the private IP address. When a network device
with a private IP address accesses the Internet, the private IP address needs to be
converted to a valid public IP address by using Network Address Translation
(NAT).
▫ NAT is a standard developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
It allows an organization to access the Internet with far fewer IP addresses
than the nodes on its internal network. The NAT technology, which is
implemented in a router, firewall, or PC, converts private IP addresses (such
as in the 192.168.0.0 range) of the machines on the internal private
network to one or more public IP addresses for accessing the Internet. It
changes packet headers to new addresses and keeps track of them via
internal tables that it creates. When the packets come back from the
Internet, NAT uses the tables to perform the reverse conversion on the IP
addresses of user terminals.
Mask
⚫ A mask is used to show what part of the address is the network portion and what
part of the address is the host portion.
 Mask of a Class A IP address: 255.0.0.0
 Mask of a Class B IP address: 255.255.0.0
 Mask of a Class C IP address: 255.255.255.0
IP address 192 168 1 1

AND
192 168 1 0
Mask 255 255 255 0 Network address
• An IP address consists of two parts. One part identifies the host, while the other
part identifies the network to which it belongs. How do we identify the two
parts?
• To identify the network part and host part of an IP address, the mask must be
used together with the IP address. The length of a mask is 32 bits, which is the
same as that of an IP address. The mask corresponding to the network part of an
IP address is all "1"s, and the mask corresponding to the host part of an IP
address is all "0"s. Class A networks use a default mask of 255.0.0.0, Class B
networks use a default mask of 255.255.0.0, and Class C networks use a default
mask of 255.255.255.0.
• With the mask, an IP address is expressed as follows:
▫ Example: 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0 or 192.168.1.1/24 (24 indicates the

number of consecutive 1s in the mask)
Subnet and Subnet Mask
192 168 1 17
11000000 10101000 00000001 00010001
11111111 11111111 11111111 11110000
Network part Subnet part Host part

(n bits) (m bits)
⚫ IP subnet: 192.168.1.16/255.255.255.240 or 192.168.1.16/28

⚫ Number of subnets: 2n (n = 4, 24 = 16)
⚫ Number of hosts: 2m – 2 (m = 4, 24 – 2 = 14)
• We have learned that an IP address consists of two parts: network part and host
part. The network part uniquely identifies a data link, while the host part
identifies different hosts connected to the same data link. To construct a
network, we need to plan a network address for each link on the network. If
Class A, Class B, and Class C addresses are allocated to different links, about
17,000,000 links can be identified by the three classes of addresses. That is, there
are 224 hosts connected to a link using Class A addresses, 216 hosts connected to
a link using Class B addresses, and 28 hosts connected to a link using Class C
addresses.
• To fully and efficiently utilize IP addresses, we can divide a large network into
smaller subnets. That is, some host bits are used as network bits. After
subnetting, an IP address can be divided into three parts: network part, subnet
part, and host part. The mask bit corresponding to the network part and subnet
part is 1. Subnets facilitate efficient use of IP addresses.
• For example, when a default mask (no subnetting) is used for a Class C IP
address 192.168.1.17, the network segment is 192.168.1.0/24. In the case of
subnetting, for example, the first four bits of the host part may be used as subnet
bits. In this way, for this address, the network part contains 24 bits, the subnet
part contains 4 bits, and the host part contains 4 bits. In short, a Class C network
segment can be divided into 16 (24) subnets to identify 16 data links. Each data
link can connect a maximum of 14 hosts (24 – 2 = 14). 192.168.1.17/28 belongs
to subnet 192.168.1.16/28.
IP Address Configuration
⚫ Interconnection IP address
 Point-to-point link: two host addresses with a 30-bit mask, for example, 10.1.1.0/30
 Broadcast link: determined by the number of hosts connected to the link
⚫ Device identifier
 32-bit mask, for example, 1.1.1.1/32
• A point-to-point link requires two IP addresses with a 30-bit mask, that is,
255.255.255.252.
• For a broadcast link, the mask length is related to the number of hosts on the
broadcast network. If there are 60 hosts on the network, the mask length can be
26 bits. In this case, the number of host addresses is 2(32 – 26) = 26 = 64, which is
larger than 60. If there are 120 hosts on the network, the mask can be 25 bits. In
this case, the number of host addresses is 2(32 – 25) = 27 = 128, which is larger than
120. For example, 192.168.1.0/26 and 172.16.1.0/25.
• The IP address can be used to identify a device.

Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following IP addresses is not a private IP

address?
A. 10.157.175.20
B. 127.0.0.10
C. 172.28.192.1
D. 192.168.1.1
• Answer: B
Contents
1. IP Basics
2. MPLS & PWE3
3. Packet Services
Definition of MPLS
⚫ MPLS: Multi-Protocol Label Switching
 Multi-Protocol: supports multiple Layer 3 protocols, such as IPv4, IPv6, IPX, and SNA.
 Label switching: labels packets and switches the labels instead of forwarding IP packets.
 MPLS is designed to address issues such as network speed, scalability, quality of service
(QoS) management, and traffic engineering.
IP MPLS ATM
Connectionless- Connectionless- Connection-

oriented control oriented control oriented control
plane plane plane
Connectionless- Connection- Connection-

oriented oriented oriented
forwarding plane forwarding plane forwarding plane
• MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology that supports various

higher-layer protocols and services. Below are several basic concepts concerning
MPLS:
▫ Multi-Protocol: MPLS supports multiple Layer 3 protocols, such as IP, IPv6,
and IPX, and is located between Layer 2 and Layer 3.
▫ Label: MPLS adds short fixed-length labels that can be easily processed to
packets and forwards packets based on labels. The labels do not contain
topology information and are meaningful only in MPLS networks.
▫ Switching: MPLS switches and forwards packets based on labels. After data
packets enter an MPLS network, they are analyzed and labeled by the
ingress routers of the MPLS network, and then encapsulated and
transmitted as new MPLS data packets over the MPLS network. All nodes
on the MPLS network forward the data packets based on the labels. Before
the data packets leave the MPLS network, the labels are stripped off by the
egress edge routers of the MPLS network.
• MPLS has two planes: control plane and forwarding plane.
▫ The control plane is connectionless, featuring powerful and flexible routing
functions to meet network requirements for a variety of new applications.
This plane is mainly responsible for label distribution, setup of label
forwarding tables, and setup and removal of label switched paths (LSPs).
▫ The forwarding plane is also called the data plane. It is connection-oriented
and supports Layer 2 networks such as ATM and Ethernet networks. The
forwarding plane adds or deletes IP packet labels, and forwards the packets
according to the label forwarding table.
Basic Concept: MPLS Network Architecture
⚫ LSR: label switching router
⚫ LER: label edge router LER
⚫ LSP: label switched path
IP
LSR
LER
LSP LSR
Other MPLS
devices
LSR
LER
LER Other MPLS

devices
• An MPLS network, also called an MPLS domain, is a network area that consists of
interconnected label switching routers (LSRs). An LSR, also called an MPLS node,
is a network device that performs MPLS label switching and packet forwarding.
• The figure above shows the MPLS network architecture. On an MPLS network,
LSRs on the network edge are called label edge routers (LERs), and LSRs within
the network range are called core LSRs. An LER may have one or more adjacent
non-LSR nodes, but all the adjacent nodes of a core LSR are LSRs.
• An LSR ID uniquely identifies an LSR on an MPLS network. An LSR ID can be 4-

byte long or 16-byte long. A 4-byte LSR ID is based on an IPv4 address, and a 16-
byte LSR ID is based on an IPv6 address.
Basic Concept: Label Switched Path (LSP)
MPLS domain
Ingress Transit Transit Egress

Other Other
MILS MPLS
networks networks
LER LSR LSR LER
LSP
• On an MPLS network, an LSR adopts the same label switching mechanism to

forward packets with the same characteristics. The packets with the same
features are called a forwarding equivalence class (FEC). The path along which
an FEC travels through the MPLS network is called an LSP, or a tunnel.
• To provide a unified interface for upper-level applications of an LSP, the system

needs to assign an ID to the LSP. This ID is called an LSP ID or tunnel ID. An LSP
ID is 4-byte long, and is valid for only the local LSR.
• An LSP is unidirectional. As shown in the figure above, LSRs on an LSP can be

classified into the following types:
▫ Ingress node: An LSP ingress node pushes a label onto the packet for MPLS
packet encapsulation and forwarding. One LSP has only one ingress node.
▫ Transit node: An LSP transit node switches labels and forwards MPLS
packets according to the label forwarding table. One LSP may have one or
more transit nodes.
▫ Egress node: An LSP egress node pops the labels and recovers the packets
for forwarding. One LSP has only one egress node.
Basic Concept: Bearer Mode of MPLS Packets
⚫ OptiX NG WDM devices use Ethernet frames to bear MPLS packets.
Ethernet header MPLS packet FCS (CRC-32)
Destination Source 802.1q Length/

address address header Type
• Destination address: It is the MAC address of the opposite interface, learned

through the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). It changes at each hop.
• Source address: It always takes the MAC address of the transmit port and
changes at each hop.
• 802.1q header: The device determines whether an Ethernet frame at the egress
port carries the 802.1q header based on the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. If
the TAG attribute is Access, the Ethernet frame will not carry the 802.1q header.
If the TAG attribute is Tag aware, the VLAN ID of the 802.1q header in an MPLS
packet is the tunnel VLAN ID that is set on the NMS; if the tunnel VLAN ID is
absent, the VLAN ID of the 802.1q header is the default VLAN ID (that is, 1) at
the NNI port transmitting MPLS packets.
• Length/Type: It is always set to 0x8847. After detecting the value, the device
considers the packet as the Ethernet frame carrying MPLS packet. The NE will not
detect MPLS packets at the ingress port based on the TAG attribute and VLAN ID
of an LSP.
• MPLS packet: It consists of the MPLS label and Layer 3 user packet. For details
about its format, see MPLS Label.
• Frame check sequence (FCS): It is used to check whether the Ethernet frame is
correct.
Basic Concept: MPLS Label
⚫ MPLS uses short and fixed-length labels at different link layers to encapsulate
packets.
MPLS label L3 payload
Label EXP S Time-to-live (TTL)
0 19 22 23 31
• Label: This 20-bit field indicates the actual label value.
• EXP: This 3-bit field is reserved for experimental use. On a device, the EXP is used
to identify the priority of an MPLS packet, similar to the VLAN priority specified in
IEEE 802.1q.
• S: This 1-bit field identifies the bottom of a label stack. MPLS supports multiple
labels, which are stacked. This bit is set to 1 for the bottom label in the label
stack.
• Time to live (TTL): This 8-bit field has the same meaning as the TTL specified for
IP packets.
Basic Concept: MPLS Label Stack
⚫ A label stack refers to an ordered set of labels.
Ethernet header/
Outer Label Inner Label Layer 3 payload
PPP header
Label Stack
• The value range for label distribution is called a label space.
▫ Per-Platform Label Space: An LSR uses one label space; that is, the labels
are unique per LSR.
▫ Per-Interface Label Space: Each interface on an LSR uses a label space; that
is, the labels are unique per interface, but can be repeated on different
interfaces.
• The device supports only the per-platform label space. Ingress labels and egress
labels must be unique per NE.
MPLS Packet Processing
FTN->NHLFE ILM->NHLFE ILM->NHLFE

Push Swap Pop
Label 20 Label 21 LSP

Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4
NE A NE B NE C
LER, Ingress LSR, Transit LSR, Egress
• Basic concepts of packet forwarding
▫ Next Hop Label Forwarding Entry (NHLFE): The NHLFE is fundamental to

packet forwarding implemented by an LSR. An NHLFE contains the
following information: the next hop address, interface address, operation
type for labels, and the data link layer protocol to use. The operations to
perform on the label may be Push, Pop, Swap, and Null (retaining a label).
▫ FEC to NHLFE (FTN): The FTN maps each FEC to a set of NHLFEs. Only an
ingress node supports this operation.
▫ Incoming Label Map (ILM): The ILM maps each incoming label to a set of
NHLFEs. Only transit and egress nodes support this operation.
• NE A process an MPLS packet as follows:
▫ Receives a packet, and finds the LSP ID based on the FEC of the packet.
▫ Finds the NHLFE based on the LSP ID and then obtains the information
such as outgoing interface, next hop, outgoing label, and operation. The
label operation for an ingress node is Push.
▫ Pushes an MPLS label to the packet, and forwards the encapsulated MPLS
packet to the next hop.
Definition of PWE3
⚫ Pseudowire Emulation Edge to Edge (PWE3) is a Layer 2 service bearer technology that
emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of services such as Ethernet or SDH on a
packet switched network (PSN).
PE1 PE2
CE1 CE3
Forwarder PSN Forwarder

CE2 CE4
Tunnel label AC MPLS Tunnel

PW label and control word
PW PW signaling
Emulation service
• Aided by the PWE3 technology, conventional networks can be connected by a

PSN to achieve resource sharing and network scaling. PWE3 aims to transmit
various services such as Ethernet over a PSN.
Basic Concept: Network Reference Model
⚫ In the PWE3 network model, a pseudo wire (PW) connects two provider edges (PEs), and an
attachment circuit (AC) connects a PE and a customer edge (CE).
Emulated service
PW
Native PSN Tunnel Native

service service
PE1 PE2
PW1
CE1 CE2
PW2
AC AC
• In the PWE3 network reference model shown above, one or more PWs are
created between PE1 and PE2 based on the service access requirements at CEs.
Several PWs can be carried in one or multiple PSN tunnels. In this manner, native
services can be transmitted over a PSN.
• A CE is a device where one end of a service originates and/or terminates. The CE
is not aware that it is using an emulated service rather than a native service.
• A PE is a device that provides PWE3 to a CE. Located at the edge of a network, a
PE is connected to a CE through an AC. In the PWE3 network reference model,
the mapping relationship between an AC and a PW is determined once a PW is
created between two PEs. As a result, Layer 2 services on CEs can be transmitted
over a PSN.
• An AC is a physical or virtual circuit attaching a CE to a PE. An AC can be, for
example, an Ethernet port, a VLAN, or a TDM link.
• A PW is a mechanism that carries emulated services from one PE to another PE
over a PSN. By means of PWE3, point-to-point channels are created, separated
from each other. Users' Layer 2 packets are transparently transmitted on a PW.
PWs are available in two types depending on whether signaling protocols are
used or not. Specifically, a PW that does use signaling protocols is called a
dynamic PW, whereas a PW that does not use signaling protocols is called a
static PW.
• A tunnel provides a mechanism that transparently transmits information over a
network. In a tunnel, one or more PWs can be carried. A tunnel connects a local
PE and a remote PE for transparently transmitting data.
Basic Concept: Protocol Reference Model
⚫ In the PWE3 protocol reference model, pre-processing involves the native service processing
layer and forwarder layer, whereas protocol processing involves the encapsulation layer and
demultiplexer layer.
Forwarder Pre-processing
Native Service
Processing Emulated Service
Emulated Service
(Ethernet)
Payload
Pseudo Wire
Encapsulation
Service
Interface PW
(Ethernet) Demultiplexer
PSN Tunnel, PSN Tunnel
PSN& Physical
Headers
CE side Physical Physical PSN side
• In the PWE3 protocol reference model, pre-processing involves the native service
processing layer and forwarder layer, whereas protocol processing involves the
encapsulation layer and demultiplexer layer. The main functions of these layers
are described as follows.
▫ Native service processing refers to the processing of service payloads (such

as QoS processing) before emulation of the native services received on an
AC.
▫ A forwarder maps the service payloads received on an AC to the

corresponding PW. The mapping relationships can be specified in the service
configuration, or implemented through certain types of dynamically
configured information.
▫ The payload encapsulation layer provides support for real-time processing

and encapsulates the data transmitted on a PW into PWE3 packets in
standard format. This layer also provides support for adding and extracting
timing information, in addition to sequencing packets.
▫ The PW demultiplexer layer enables one or more PWs to be carried in a

single PSN tunnel.
Basic Concept: Encapsulation Format
⚫ Tunnel label: identifies a tunnel.
⚫ PW label: identifies a PW.
⚫ Control word: checks the packet sequence, fragments packets, and reassembles packets.
⚫ Payload: payload of a service in a PWE3 packet.
Tunnel label EXP S TTL
PW label EXP S TTL
Control word
Payload
• The specific PWE3 encapsulation format varies slightly according to the types of
emulated services, but a generic encapsulation format is also available.
• The figure above shows the generic PWE3 encapsulation format. A PWE3 packet
contains the MPLS label, control word (optional), and payload.
▫ MPLS label: MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels in the same
format, which are used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively.
▫ Control word: The 4-byte control word is a header used to carry packet
information over an MPLS PSN. The control word is used to check the
packet sequence, fragment packets, and reassemble packets.
▫ Payload indicates the payload of a service in a PWE3 packet.
SS-PW Packet Forwarding Process
⚫ A PW that is carried in a tunnel is called a single-segment PW (SS-PW).
PSN
Tunnel
AC AC
PW1 PW1
CE1 PE1 P PE2 CE2

A B
Payload
PW Label
A Tunnel label A
B Tunnel label B
• The PWs are invisible to the P device on a PSN. The P device can forward packets
only based on tunnel labels.
▫ The local PE (PE1) forwards packets as follows:
▪ Extracts the local service packets that are transmitted by CE1 from the
AC.
▪ Pre-processes the service payloads before PWE3 emulation.
▪ Uses the forwarder to map service payloads to the corresponding PW.
▪ Encapsulates the data transmitted on a PW into PWE3 packets in
standard format. The process involves generation of the control word,
and adding of the PW label and tunnel label (tunnel label A) to the
data.
▪ Maps the PW into the tunnel for transmission.
▫ The P device forwards packets as follows:
▪ When PWE3 packets traverse the P device, the tunnel label in the
packets is swapped. That is, tunnel label A is changed to tunnel label
B.
▫ The remote PE (PE2) forwards packets as follows:
▪ Demultiplexes the PW from the tunnel.
▪ Decapsulates the PW, and removes the tunnel label (tunnel label B),
PW label, and control word.
▪ Extracts service payloads from the PW.
▪ Restores service payloads to the local service packets.
▪ Selects an AC by using the forwarder, and forwards the packets to
CE2 at the remote end over the AC.
MS-PW Packet Forwarding Process
⚫ A PW that is segmented and carried in multiple tunnels is called a multi-segment
PW (MS-PW).
PSN
Tunnel 1 Tunnel 2
AC AC
PW1 PW2
PW1
CE1 T-PE1 S-PE T-PE2 CE2

A B
A B
Payload
A PW Label A
B PW Label B
A Tunnel label A
B Tunnel label B
• Through static PW segments, the MS-PW realizes end-to-end virtual connections.
• An MS-PW is extended from one terminating provider edge (T-PE) to another T-

PE, with a switching provider edge (S-PE) in between. The S-PE implements PW
label switching. In other words, the MS-PW is divided into two or more PW
segments, each being a point-to-point PW.
• Compared with the SS-PW, the MS-PW traverses different PSNs, saves tunnel
resources, and provides segment-based protection for tunnels.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following statements about MPLS and

PWE3 are true?
A. An LSP contains different nodes, including the ingress, transit, and egress. Each LSP
must contain the preceding three nodes.
B. A label stack refers to an ordered set of labels. Theoretically, an unlimited number of
MPLS labels can be stacked.
C. Multiple PWs can be carried in one or more PSN tunnels.
D. An MS-PW is carried in a PSN tunnel, and an SS-PW is carried in multiple PSN tunnels.
• Answer: BC
Contents
1. IP Basics
2. MPLS & PWE3
3. Packet Services
◼ ETH PWE3
▫ TDM PWE3
Definition of ETH PWE3
⚫ The ETH PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of Ethernet
services on a PSN by using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated Ethernet services can
be transmitted on a PSN.
PSN
PW
AC AC
CE1 PE1 LSP PE2 CE2
Native Native
Ethernet Ethernet
service Ethernet PWE3 service
Ethernet Frame ETH PWE3 packet

• After an Ethernet frame is encapsulated into a PWE3 packet, the PWE3 packet
▫ MPLS label: MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels, which are
used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively.
▫ Control word: The 4-byte control word within an ETH PWE3 packet is
optional and contains the following fields:
▪ 0000: This field indicates the first 4 bits and they must be set to 0.
▪ Reserved: This field has a length of 16 bits and is reserved.
▪ Sequence number: This field has a length of 16 bits and indicates the
delivery sequence number of an ETH PWE3 packet. Its initial value is
random, and is incremented by one with each data packet sent.
▫ Payload: The payload refers to the Ethernet frame that is encapsulated into
an ETH PWE3 packet. One ETH PWE3 packet can encapsulate only one
Ethernet frame.
E-Line Services Carried on PWs (1)
⚫ Service 1 (Ethernet service) is present between User A1 and User B1, and service 2 (Ethernet service) is
present between User A2 and User B1. The two services have different VLAN IDs and need to be
transmitted over the PSN.
Service 1
Port 1 (802.1Q)
Service 1
VLAN: 100
Port 1 (802.1Q)
VLAN: 100
User A1 PSN
AC AC
PW1
PW2 AC
NE1 NE2 User B1
LSP
User A2 UNI NNI NNI UNI

Service 2
Port 2 (802.1Q)
Service 2 VLAN: 200
Port 2 (802.1Q)
VLAN: 200
• On the UNI side of NE1, service 1 is transmitted to port 1 and service 2 is

transmitted to port 2. On the NNI side of NE1, service 1 and service 2 are
transmitted on different PWs. In this manner, the two services are separately
transmitted.
• NE2 processes the two services in the same manner as NE1.

⚫ Service 1 (QinQ service) is present between User A1 and User B1, and service 2 (QinQ service) is
present between User A2 and User B1. The two services have different S-VLAN IDs and need to be
transmitted over the PSN.
Service 1
Port 1 (QinQ)
Service 1
S-VLAN: 100
Port 1 (QinQ)
S-VLAN: 100
User A1 PSN
AC AC
PW1
PW2 AC
NE1 NE2 User B1
LSP

Service 2
Service 2 Port 2 (QinQ)
Port 2 (QinQ) S-VLAN: 200
S-VLAN: 200
⚫ Service 1 (Ethernet service) is present between User A1 and User B1, and service 2 (QinQ
service) is present between User A2 and User B1. Service 1 carries various C-VLAN IDs, while
service 2 carries various S-VLAN IDs. The two services need to be transmitted over the PSN.
Service 1
Port 1 (802.1Q) Service 1
Port 1 (802.1Q)
User A1 PSN
AC AC
PW1
PW2 AC
NE1 NE2 User B1
LSP

Service 2
Port 2 (QinQ)
Service 2
Port 2 (QinQ)
E-LAN Services Carried on PWs (1)
⚫ The transmission network needs to carry the A services received by NE2 and NE3. The two A services
are aggregated at the convergence node NE1. On NE1, no service isolation is required and a Tag-
Transparent VSI is created to connect VSIs at other locations using PWs.
NE 2
PW1 Port 1
NE 1 User A2
PSN
PW1 E-Line
Port 1
User A1 NE 3
VSI PW2 PSN

Port 1
User A3
PW2
E-Line
• VSI indicates a virtual switching instance.

⚫ The transmission network needs to carry G and H services received by NE2 and NE3. The two
services are aggregated on NE1. Services G and H carry different VLAN IDs, so C-Aware VSIs
need to be separately created for different VLANs on NE1. NE 2
Port 1 VLAN 100
PW1 User G2
NE 1 PW2 Port 2 VLAN 200

PW1 PSN User H2
Port 1 VLAN 100
PW2 E-Line
User G1
Port 2 VLAN 200 PW3 NE 3

PW4 PW3 Port 1 VLAN 100
User H1 User G3
PSN
VSI
PW4 Port 2 VLAN 200
User H3
E-Line
⚫ The transmission network needs to carry G and H services received by NE2 and NE3. The two services
use the same C-VLAN tag to identify their Ethernet service types. Therefore, E-Line services need to be
configured on NE2 and NE3. After that, NE2 and NE3 add S-VLAN tags to the E-Line services. NE1
needs to be configured with an S-Aware VSI to forward packets.
NE 2
Request 300 Port 1 VLAN 100
PW1
User G2
Request 400 Port 2 VLAN 100
NE 1 PW2
PW1 PSN User H2
Port 1 S-VLAN 300 E-Line
PW2
User G1 Tagged mode
Raw mode NE 3
PW3 PW3 Request 300 Port 1 VLAN 100
Port 2 S-VLAN 400
PSN User G3
User H1 PW4 PW4 Request 400
Port 2 VLAN 100
VSI
User H3
E-Line
Format of an ETH PWE3 Packet
⚫ After an Ethernet frame is encapsulated into a PWE3 packet, the PWE3 packet
0 20 23 24 31bit
PW label EXP S TTL
0000 Reserved Sequence number
Payload (Ethernet frame)
• MPLS label: MPLS labels include tunnel labels and PW labels in the same format,
which are used to identify tunnels and PWs respectively.
• Control word: The 4-byte control word in an ETH PWE3 packet is optional and
contains the following fields:
▫ 0000: This field indicates the first 4 bits and they must be set to 0.
▫ Reserved: This field has a length of 16 bits and is reserved.

▫ Sequence number: This field has a length of 16 bits and indicates the
delivery sequence number of an ETH PWE3 packet. Its initial value is
random, and is incremented by one with each data packet sent.
• Payload: The payload refers to the Ethernet frame that is encapsulated into an
ETH PWE3 packet. One ETH PWE3 packet can encapsulate only one Ethernet
frame. During the encapsulation, the preset encapsulation mode is adopted.
Service-Delimiting Tag
⚫ User
 If the service-delimiting tag is User, the user access mode is Ethernet. In this case, the
Ethernet frame that the CE sends to the PE does not carry a tag. If the frame header
contains the VLAN tag, the VLAN tag is the inner VLAN tag of the user packet, which is
called user-tag (U-Tag). The PE does not identify or process a U-Tag.
⚫ Service
 If the service-delimiting tag is Service, the user access mode is VLAN. In this case, the
Ethernet frame that the CE sends to the PE carries a tag, which is provided for the carrier
to differentiate users. The PE identifies and processes the tag based on the PW
encapsulation mode.
PW Encapsulation Mode
PW Encapsulation
Raw Tag
Mode
Service-Delimiting
Entering a PW Leaving a PW Entering a PW Leaving a PW
Tag
The PE adds a P-Tag
The PE directly and encapsulates the
The PE decapsulates
encapsulates the The PE decapsulates Ethernet frame into a
the Ethernet frame
Ethernet frame into a the Ethernet frame PW packet after
User and strips the P-Tag
PW packet after before transmitting it receiving it from the
before transmitting it
receiving it from the to the AC. AC (the added P-Tag
to the AC.
AC is called request
VLAN).
The PE strips the The PE swaps a P-Tag
The PE decapsulates
outer tag (P-Tag) of The PE decapsulates for a U-Tag and
the Ethernet frame
the Ethernet frame the Ethernet frame encapsulates the
and swaps a U-Tag
Service and encapsulates it and adds a P-Tag Ethernet frame into a
for a P-Tag before
into a PW packet before transmitting it PW packet after
transmitting it to the
after receiving it from to the AC. receiving it from the
AC.
the AC. AC.
• Raw mode
▫ When the service-delimiting tag is User, in the direction that an Ethernet
frame enters the PW, the PE directly encapsulates the Ethernet frame into a
PW packet after receiving it from the AC; in the direction that an Ethernet
frame leaves the PW, the PE decapsulates the Ethernet frame before
transmitting it to the AC.
▫ When the service-delimiting tag is Service, in the direction where an
Ethernet frame enters the PW, the PE strips the outer tag (P-Tag) of the
Ethernet frame and encapsulates it into a PW packet after receiving it from
the AC; in the direction where the Ethernet frame leaves the PW, the PE
decapsulates the Ethernet frame and adds a P-Tag before transmitting it to
the AC.
• Tag mode
▫ When the service-delimiting tag is User, in the direction where an Ethernet
frame enters the PW, the PE adds a P-Tag and encapsulates the Ethernet
frame into a PW packet after receiving it from the AC (the added P-Tag is
called request VLAN); in the direction where an Ethernet frame leaves the
PW, the PE decapsulates the Ethernet frame and strips the P-Tag before
transmitting it to the AC.
▫ When the service-delimiting tag is Service, in the direction where an
Ethernet frame enters the PW, the PE replaces the U-tag with a P-tag and
encapsulates the Ethernet frame into a PW packet after receiving it from
the AC; in the direction where the Ethernet frame leaves the PW, the PE
decapsulates the Ethernet frame and replaces the P-tag with a U-tag
before transmitting it to the AC.
Contents
1. IP Basics
2. MPLS & PWE3
3. Packet Services
▫ ETH PWE3
◼ TDM PWE3
TDM PWE3
⚫ The TDM PWE3 technology emulates the basic behaviors and characteristics of TDM services on a
packet switched network (PSN) by using the PWE3 mechanism, so that the emulated TDM services can
be transmitted on a PSN.
XXX PSN
UNI XXX
CE1 AC
AC
UNI PE1 NNI PE2 CE2
XXX
CE3
AC PW Tunnel XXX Native TDM service (Framed E1)
Remote service Local service TDM PWE3 packet (without idle timeslots)
• CES/CEP services are classified into remote services (UNI-NNI) and local services
(UNI-UNI).
▫ Remote service (UNI-NNI): The native TDM services between NodeB and
RNC are transmitted over a PSN. PE1 emulates the native TDM services
from NodeB into CES/CEP services (CESoPSN mode is used as an example in
the above figure). Then, CES/CEP services are transmitted to PE2 over the
PSN. Finally, PE2 restores CES/CEP services to native TDM services, which
are then transmitted to RNC.
▫ Local service (UNI-UNI): NodeB and RNC are interconnected using PE1. PE1
receives native TDM services from NodeB and transparently transmits the
services to RNC on the UNI side.
• TDM PWE3 services are also called CES/CEP services, which are carried by PWE3.
They support the following emulation modes:
▫ Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet (SAToP): In this mode, SAToP
emulation is performed for SDH VC-12 signals. Emulation services in this
mode are also called CES services.
▫ Structure-aware TDM Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched
Network (CESoPSN): In this mode, CESoPSN emulation is performed for
SDH VC-12 signals. Emulation services in this mode are also called CES
services. Compared with the SAToP mode, the CESoPSN mode is more
bandwidth-efficient because it supports idle timeslot compression.
▫ Circuit Emulation over Packet (CEP): In this mode, CEP emulation is
performed for SDH VC-4 signals. Emulation services in this mode are also
called CEP services.
Emulation Mode: SAToP
⚫ Structure Agnostic TDM over Packet Switched Network (SAToP) is a method for
encapsulating TDM serial bit streams as pseudo wires.
0 20 23 24 31 bits
PW label EXP S TTL
Sequence
0000 L R RSV FRG LEN number
Reservrd
RTP header (optional)
TDM data
• Features of SAToP:
▫ A provider edge (PE) device processes TDM signals as serial data bit
streams, without identifying the E1 frame structure of the TDM signals,
divides the TDM signals into TDM bit streams by integer multiple of the E1
frame length, and then encapsulates them into PWE3 packets for
transmission. Therefore, SAToP can meet the transmission needs when a
user needs E1 services only.
▫ Overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted. In
addition, alarms can be transparently transmitted.
▫ Packet Loading Time and Jitter Compensation Buffering Time can be
flexibly set.
• A control word is a 4-byte encapsulated packet header, which can be used to
identify the packet sequence, or fragment and reassemble packets. Control words
are mandatory for SAToP packets. They consist of the following:
▫ 0000: The 4 bits are generally set to all 0s.
▫ L: This bit indicates whether the TDM data carried in a packet is valid. If it is
set to 1, the TDM data is omitted in order to conserve bandwidth.
▫ R: This bit indicates whether its local CE-side interworking function (IWF) is
in the packet loss state. If it is set to 0, a number of consecutive packets are
received.
▫ RSV: The 2 bits are reserved.
▫ FRG: The 2 bits indicate the fragmentation status with the following values:
▪ 00: indicates that the entire TDM data is encapsulated in the packet.
▪ 01: indicates that the first fragment of the TDM data is encapsulated
in the packet.
▪ 10: indicates that the last fragment of the TDM data is encapsulated
in the packet.
▪ 11: indicates that the middle fragment of the TDM data is
encapsulated in the packet.
Emulation Mode: CESoPSN
⚫ Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN) is a method for
encapsulating TDM frames as pseudo wires.
0 20 23 24 31bit
PW label EXP S TTL

Sequence
0000 L R M REG LEN number
Reservrd
Timeslot 1 Timeslot 2 Timeslot 3 Timeslot 4
Timeslot n (frame 1#)
Timeslot 1 Timeslot 2 Timeslot 3 Timeslot 4
Timeslot n (frame 2#)
......
Timeslot n (frame n#)
• M: The 2 bits are used for alarm transparent transmission, indicating that the CE
end or AC side of the uplink PE detects a critical alarm.
• The amount of E1 frames that are encapsulated in a CESoPSN packet is
determined by Packet Loading Time. The period of a TDM frame is 125 μs. As a
result, if the packet loading time is 1 ms, each PW packet loads eight TDM
frames.
Emulation Mode: CEP
⚫ Circuit Emulation over Packet (CEP) is a service emulation mode based on SDH VC-4
signals.
0 20 23 24 31bit
PW label EXP S TTL
Sequence
0000 L R N P REG LEN number
Reservrd Structure Pointer
SDH fragment
• N and P: optional. They are used to identify the pointer position.
• SDH fragment: Data payloads in CEP packets are also known as SDH fragments.
To allow VC-4 data packets to be transmitted over PWs, VC-4 data packets need
to be segmented by fragment of a fixed size, packaged into CEP packets, and
then encapsulated into PWs.
Quiz
1. (True or false) Both ETH PWE3 and TDM PWE3 services support point-to-point and point-
to-multipoint scenarios.
2. (Single-answer question) Which of the following statements about the service-delimiting
tag and PW encapsulation mode is incorrect?
A. When the service-delimiting tag is User, the PE does not identify or process the U-TAG.
B. When the service-delimiting tag is Service, the PE identifies and processes the tag according to the
PW encapsulation mode.
C. You can set a request VLAN value for each PW whose encapsulation mode is Tag mode, and the T-
PID value in the request VLAN can be duplicate on the NE.
D. The PW encapsulation mode can be Raw or Tag.
• Answer
▫ 1: False
▫ 2: C
Contents
1. IP Basics
2. MPLS & PWE3
3. Packet Services
◼ MPLS OAM
▫ MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS OAM
⚫ MPLS OAM is used for O&M management of the MPLS network. It can effectively detect,
identify, and locate MPLS network defects. After a defect or fault occurs, MPLS OAM can
trigger protection switching, therefore enhancing network reliability and reducing network
maintenance costs.
Tunnel OAM
PW OAM
• MPLS OAM includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM applies to the
tunnel layer and PW OAM applies to the PW layer. They have similar
implementation mechanisms but different detection objects.
• MPLS OAM provides end-to-end detection of faults for the MPLS network. It can
effectively detect, confirm, and locate MPLS-layer defects and faults. In case of a
link defect or fault, MPLS OAM can immediately trigger protection switching. In
addition, it can monitor network performance events such as packet loss, delay,
and jitter in a timely manner.
CV/FFD
⚫ CV/FFD checks tunnel or PW connectivity by periodically sending CV/FFD packets
over the target tunnel or PW.
CV/FFD CV/FFD
Ingress BDI Transit BDI Egress
• CV detection and FFD detection use the same mechanism. The difference lies in
the transmission interval of detection packets. CV packets are transmitted at a
fixed interval of 1s (relatively long), while FFD packets are transmitted at a short
interval and the interval can be adjustable.
• In CV/FFD detection, the ingress node transmits detection packets at a specific
interval, and the egress node checks the number and content of the detection
packets received, at an interval three times of the detection packet transmission
interval. Both CV and FFD packets can be used to check and diagnose all types of
defects of a tunnel/PW.
▫ The ingress node sends CV/FFD packets which are then transparently
transmitted by the transit node and arrive at the egress node.
▫ After receiving the CV/FFD packets, the egress node checks the data of the
received packet against the local record. The checked packet data includes
the packet type, transmission interval, and trail termination source identifier
(TTSI). In addition, the egress node counts the number of correct packets and
incorrect packets received in the detection interval. Based on the packet
content and number, the egress node monitors the connectivity status of the
tunnel. A tunnel defect is asserted only when the packet content and the
number of correct packets are inconsistent with the local record.
▫ When detecting a defect in the tunnel, the egress node analyzes the defect
type, and then transmits the backward defect indication (BDI) packets that
carry the defect information to the ingress node through a reverse channel
so that the ingress node can learn the defect status in time. If a protection
group is correctly configured, protection switching is also triggered by the
defect.
• Trail termination source identifier (TTSI): A TTSI consists of the LSR ID and LSP ID
of the ingress node. A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP.
FDI
⚫ FDI packets are mainly used to suppress non-FDI alarms at the egress node and
locate the fault point.
⚫ Tunnel FDI Tunnel FDI
Port
fault
Ingress Transit Egress
PW FDI
⚫ PW FDI
Tunnel
fault
T-PE S-PE T-PE
• Tunnel FDI: After being enabled with FDI detection, the transit node sends an FDI
packet to all tunnels traversing a port when the link to the port is faulty. After
the egress node receives an FDI packet, it reports the FDI alarm and suppresses
other alarms. When this occurs, protection switching will be triggered if
automatic protection switching (APS) protection has been properly configured.
• PW FDI: when FDI is enabled for the S-PE node in the MS-PW scenario, if a fault
occurs on a tunnel, a PW FDI packet will be inserted to the T-PE node. After
receiving the PW FDI packet, the T-PE node will report an FDI alarm to suppress
other alarms. When this occurs, protection switching will be triggered if
automatic protection switching (APS) protection has been properly configured.
Ping
⚫ With the ping function, the ingress node and egress node exchange MPLS echo
request packets and MPLS echo replay packets in between to check the bidirectional
connectivity of a tunnel or PW.
......
NE 1 NE 2 NE N-1 NE N
MPLS echo request
MPLS echo reply
Forward tunnel
Reverse tunnel
• The ping function is classified into tunnel ping and PW ping. The two ping sub-
functions are implemented in similar ways, but detect different objects at
different layers. A PW ping packet uses one more PW label than a tunnel ping
packet. The following uses tunnel ping as an example to describe the working
principle of the ping function.
• MPLS echo request and MPLS echo reply packets, with timestamps and Time To
Live (TTL) contained, are sent in User Datagram Protocol (UDP) format.
▫ The timestamp contains the time when the packet is sent and received. A
timestamp tells the tunnel delay.
▫ The TTL value in the IP packet header is set to 1 to ensure that the test
packet is not transmitted beyond the sink end of the monitored tunnel.
• Detection principle:
▫ The ingress node structures the MPLS echo request packet in UDP format
based on tunnel ping parameters, and pushes the tunnel label. Then, the
ingress node transmits the packet based on the preset packet quantity and
transmit interval. The packet carries the transmission timestamp.
▫ Each transit node forwards the MPLS echo request packet in the same
manner as it forwards a common MPLS packet.
▫ After receiving the MPLS echo request packet, the egress node structures
the MPLS echo reply packet, and pushes the reception timestamp. Then, the
egress node transmits the MPLS echo reply packet through the preset
reverse tunnel.
▫ After the ingress node successfully receives the MPLS echo reply packet
returned from the egress node, the request packet is no longer transmitted
and the bidirectional connectivity check is completed. In addition, the
ingress node determines the packet loss ratio and delay based on the
information carried by the reply packet.
Traceroute
⚫ Similar to the ping function, the traceroute function can also be used to accurately locate faulty nodes.
......
NE 1 NE 2 NE N-1 NE N
MPLS echo request
TTL=1
MPLS echo reply
... ...
MPLS echo reply
MPLS echo request
TTL=N-2 MPLS echo reply
MPLS echo request
TTL=N-1 MPLS echo reply
• Detection principle:
▫ The ingress node structures the MPLS echo request packet in UDP format
based on tunnel traceroute parameters, and pushes the tunnel label. Then,
the ingress node transmits the packet based on the preset packet quantity
and transmit interval. The packet carries the transmission timestamp. The
destination node of the MPLS echo request packet is determined by the TTL
value in the tunnel label. The TTL value N indicates that the destination
node of the request packet is the N+1 node along the tunnel. When the
first request packet is transmitted, the TTL value of the tunnel label is set to
1, indicating that the next hop (Transit or Egress) of the ingress node is the
destination node of the request packet.
▫ If the destination node of the request packet is Transit, after receiving the
MPLS echo request packet, the transit node finds the information about the
next hop of the tunnel, structures an MPLS echo reply packet, and pushes
the reception timestamp. Then, the transit node transmits the MPLS echo
reply packet through the preset reverse tunnel.
▫ On reception of the MPLS echo reply packet returned from the transit node
each time, the ingress node adds 1 to the TTL value in the tunnel label and
retransmits the MPLS echo request packet.
▫ After receiving the MPLS echo request packet, the egress node structures
the MPLS echo reply packet, and pushes the reception timestamp. Then, the
egress node transmits the MPLS echo reply packet through the preset
reverse tunnel.
▫ After the ingress node successfully receives the MPLS echo reply packet
returned from the egress node, the request packet is no longer transmitted
and the bidirectional connectivity check is completed.
LM
⚫ In the LM detection mode, the local node, within a specified period of time,
periodically sends LMMs to the peer node, and receives LMRs from the peer node.
Information carried in a packet

1. Send an LMM.
TxFCf
2. Send an LMR. TxFCf RxFCf TxFCb
• LM is implemented between the ingress and egress nodes, with the transit nodes
transparently transmitting LMM and LMR packets. LM measures the following
data: Number of local lost packets (Near-End): number of lost packets in the
receive direction of the local node. Number of remote lost packets (Far-End):
number of lost packets in the transmit direction of the local node.
• During the LM detection, a node counts lost packets, and records the total
number of transmitted packets. Then the local packet loss ratio (Near-End) and
remote packet loss ratio (Far-End) are calculated as follows. Local packet loss
ratio (Near-End): Number of lost packets in the receive direction of the local
node/Total number of sent packets. Remote packet loss ratio (Far-End): Number
of lost packets in the transmit direction of the local node/Total number of sent
packets.
• To calculate the number of lost packets in the receive and transmit directions,
each node needs to maintain two basic counters: TxFCl: counts packets sent to
the remote node. RxFCl: counts packets received from the remote node.
• LM detection process
▫ A local node periodically transmits an LMM to its remote node. An LMM
contains the following values:
▪ TxFCf: value of local counter TxFCl upon transmission of an LMM
▫ When receiving an LMM, the remote node transmits an LMR. An LMR
▪ TxFCf: value of TxFCf copied from the LMM
▪ RxFCf: value of local counter RxFCl upon reception of an LMM
▪ TxFCb: value of local counter TxFCl upon transmission of an LMR
▫ Upon receiving an LMR, the local node uses the following formulas to make
near-end and far-end loss measurements:
▪ Frame Lossfar-end = |TxFCf[tc] – TxFCf[tp]| – |RxFCf[tc] – RxFCf[tp]|
▪ Frame Lossnear-end = |TxFCb[tc] – TxFCb[tp]| – |RxFCl[tc] – RxFCl[tp]|
• During the LM detection, a local node counts lost packets, and records the total
number of transmitted packets. The formula for calculating the frame lost ratio
(FLR) is as follows: FLR = Number of lost packets/Total number of sent packets.
DM
⚫ In the DM detection mode, the local node, within a specified period of time,
periodically sends DMMs to the peer node, and receives DMRs from the peer node.

1. Send a DMM.
TxTimeStampf
2. Send a DMR.
TxTimeStampf RxTimeStampf TxTimeStampb
• Delay measurement (DM) measures the jitter and delay of a service packet
within a specified period of time. DM is implemented between the ingress and
egress nodes of a PW or tunnel. DM measures the delay between the two nodes,
and monitors the packet delay variation over the path based on the measured
delay. DM supports two modes: one-way DM and two-way DM. Currently, MPLS
OAM supports only two-way DM.
• DM detection process
▫ A local node periodically transmits a DMM to its remote node. A DMM
▪ TxTimeStampf: time when a DMM is sent
▫ When receiving a valid DMM, the remote node transmits a DMR. A DMR
▪ TxTimeStampf: value of TxTimeStampf copied from the DMM
▪ RxTimeStampf: time when a DMM is received
▪ TxTimeStampb: time when a DMR is sent
▫ Upon receiving a DMR, the local node uses the following formulas to
calculate the frame delay:
▪ Frame delay = RxTimeb (time when the local node receives a DMR) –
TxTimeStampf
▪ Because the frame delay includes the time consumed by the remote
node to process DM packets, the preceding formula can be optimized
as follows:
▪ Frame delay = (RxTimeb – TxTimeStampf) – (TxTimeStampb –
RxTimeStampf)
• Based on the calculation result according to the preceding formula, frame delay
variation (FDV) can be derived. FDV is a measurement of delay variations of
service frames. Within the DM detection period, a local node detects and records
frame delay. FDV is the difference between the delay values of two consecutive
frames. FDV is calculated as follows: FDV = ∣Frame delay (current) – Frame delay
(previous)∣.
Contents
1. IP Basics
2. MPLS & PWE3
3. Packet Services
▫ MPLS OAM
◼ MPLS-TP OAM
MPLS-TP OAM
⚫ IETF and ITU-T have standardized the Multiprotocol Label Switching Transport
Profile (MPLS-TP) for how MPLS applies to transmission of packet services on
transmission networks. MPLS-TP complies with existing MPLS standards and focuses
on the particularity of transmission networks.
⚫ MPLS can be deployed on existing transmission networks and operated or
maintained in the same way as longstanding transmission network technologies.
Paths for transmitting packet services can be predicted.
 Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD)
 Techniques specified in ITU-T G.8113.1
• A variety of data communication products and transmission products have

already supported MPLS-TP OAM. The wide support for MPLS-TP OAM facilitates
provisioning of end-to-end OAM on packet switched networks consisting of
packet transmission devices and data communication devices. Devices with
MPLS-TP OAM functionality can meet carrier-class data transmission
requirements. MPLS-TP OAM and ETH-OAM together provide hierarchical OAMs,
achieving fast and hierarchical fault detection and locating, and therefore
improving network reliability.
MPLS-TP OAM Functions
⚫ Proactive OAM: After the MPLS-TP OAM function is enabled, the OAM operation is
continuously performed unless a network fault occurs.
 CC: continuity check

RDI: remote defect indication
 AIS: alarm indication signal
⚫ On-demand OAM: After MPLS-TP OAM is enabled, OAM operations do not proceed until
they are activated separately.
 LB: loopback
 LT: linktrace
 LM: loss measurement
 DM: delay measurement
CC
⚫ Continuity check (CC) tests the unidirectional connectivity between two MEPs in an
MEG.
LOCV
CCM
MEP1 MEP2
MPLS-TP
• Schematic diagram of CC detection
▫ After being enabled with the CC function, the source MEP periodically
transmits continuity check messages (CCMs) to the destination MEP.
▫ If the destination MEP does not receive any CCMs within the interval equal
to 3.5 times the message transmission period, it considers that the
connectivity between the source and destination MEPs is lost, and therefore
reports an alarm to the NMS Automatic protection switching (APS) will be
triggered if it is configured.
▫ The LOCV alarm is cleared after the destination MEP receives the CCMs
from the source MEP.
• The CC function only detects connectivity of two MEPs in the same MEG. A
maintenance intermediate point (MIP) is transparent to CCMs, and therefore
does not respond to CCMs.
RDI
⚫ Upon detecting a fault, a local MEP notifies its remote MEP of this fault. Upon
receiving the notification, the remote MEP reports a remote defect indicator (RDI)
alarm.
LOCV
RDI
CCM
MEP1 MEP2
RDI MPLS-TP
• RDI is a flag in a continuity check message (CCM). It is sent to the remote MEP
through the reverse channel. The working principles are as follows:
▫ When the local MEP detects a link fault using the CC function, it sets the
RDI flag in a CCM to 1 and notifies the remote MEP of the link fault.
▫ After the link fault is rectified, the local MEP sets the RDI flag in a CCM to 0
and notifies the remote MEP of the link fault rectification.
• The local MEP transmits RDI packets to the remote MEP in the following
scenarios:
▫ The local MEP detects OAM alarms such as LOCV, UNEXPMEG, or

UNEXPMEP.
▫ The local MEP receives AIS packets.
• As shown in the figure above, MEP2 detects an LOCV alarm and transmits an RDI
packet to MEP1 through the reverse channel. After receiving the RDI packet,
MEP1 reports an RDI alarm.
AIS (1)
⚫ After detecting a fault, the server layer inserts AIS packets to the client-layer ME to
suppress alarms detected by the OAM packets from the client layer. After receiving
AIS packets, the client-layer MEP generates an AIS alarm.
⚫ Insert an AIS packet to tunnels in case of a tunnel or section fault.
MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI ETH_LOS
MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS
Tunnel AIS Tunnel AIS
MEP1 MIP2 MIP3 MEP4
LSR A LSR B LSR C Tunnel RDI LSR D

Tunnel RDI Tunnel RDI
• Port or section fault:
▫ LSR A periodically sends tunnel OAM detection packets.
▫ If a port or section on LSR A is faulty.
▫ LSR B then detects an ETH_LOS alarm and transmits tunnel AIS packets
downstream according to the preset AIS sending period. The AIS packets
are terminated at LSR D.
▫ Upon receiving an AIS packet, LSR D terminates the AIS packet, reports the
MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS alarm, and suppresses the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV alarm.
▫ LSR D transmits tunnel OAM CCM packets with the RDI field being 1, and
reports the MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI alarm to LSR C and finally to LSR A.
• Port or section restoration:
▫ After the port or section restores, the ETH_LOS alarm at LSR B clears and
LSR B stops transmitting AIS packets downstream.
▫ If no AIS packet is received within an interval of 3.5 times the AIS sending
period, LSR D stops reporting the MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS alarm.
▫ LSR D transmits tunnel OAM CCM packets with the RDI field being 0
upstream.
▫ Upon receiving the CCM packets with the RDI field being 0, LSR A stops
reporting the MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI alarm.
AIS (2)
⚫ Insert an AIS packet to PWs in case of a tunnel fault.
MPLS_PW_RDI MPLS_PW_AIS
PW AIS MEP3
MEP1 MIP2
LSR A LSR B LSR C

PW RDI PW RDI
• When the tunnel failure occurs, PW AIS is implemented as follows:
▫ LSR A sends OAM detection packets.
▫ The link between LSR A and LSR B is faulty, and the tunnel is interrupted.
▫ LSR B detects the MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG,

MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP or MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS alarm and transmits PW
AIS packets within the AIS transmission period in PW.
▫ Upon receiving PW AIS packets, LSR C terminates the PW AIS packets,
reports the MPLS_PW_AIS alarm, and suppresses the MPLS_PW_LOCV
alarm.
▫ LSR C transmits CCM packets with the RDI field being 1, and reports the
MPLS_PW_RDI alarm to LSR B and finally to LSR A.
• When the tunnel recovers, PW AIS is cleared as follows:

▫ After the tunnel between LSR A and LSR B recovers, the
MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG,
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP or MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS alarm at LSR B is cleared
and LSR B stops transmitting the PW AIS packets in PW.
▫ If no PW AIS packet is received within an interval of 3.5 times the PW AIS
sending period, LSR C stops reporting the MPLS_PW_AIS alarm.
LB
⚫ A loopback (LB) test is used to check bidirectional connectivity of links between a
MEP and a MIP or between a pair of MEPs.
LBM TTL=2 LBM TTL=1

MEP1 MIP2 MIP3 MEP4
LSR A LSR B LSR C LSR D

LBR LBR
• LSR A initiates an LB test to intermediate node LSR C. MEP1 is the source MEP
node and MIP3 is the destination MIP node.
▫ LSR A transmits a loopback message (LBM). If the destination node is an
MIP, the TTL value must be specified. If the destination node is an MEP, the
TTL value must be larger than or equal to the number of hops between LSR
A and the destination node. In this example, the destination node is MIP3,
and therefore the TTL value is 2 and MIP ID is the MIP ID of LSR C.
▫ After the LBM packet reaches LSR B, LSR B decrements the TTL value in the
LBM packet by one and forwards the LBM packet to LSR C as a service
packet because the TTL value after decrement is not 0.
▫ After the LBM reaches LSR C, LSR C decrements the TTL value in the LBM
by one and the TTL value after decrement becomes 0. At this time, LSR C
processes the LBM by comparing the MIP ID in the LBM with its local MIP
ID. If the two MIP IDs are the same, LSR C transmits an LBR back to LSR A
through the reverse channel. If the two MIP IDs are different, LSR C directly
discards the received LBM. In this example, the destination MIP ID carried
by the LBM is the same as the MIP ID of MIP3.
▫ If LSR A receives the LBR transmitted from LSR C within the specified period
of time, it considers that LSR C is reachable and the LB test is successful.
• If both the TTL value and MIP ID or MEP ID are correctly set but the source MEP
does not receive the LBR packet within the specified period of time, the link is
faulty and you can locate the faulty node with reference to LT.
LT
⚫ A linktrace (LT) test is achieved by a series of LB tests that are implemented from near to far. It is used to obtain
the adjacency relationship between a MEP and a MIP or between a pair of MEPs and to locate faults between the
two.
MEP1 MIP2 MIP3 MEP4
LSR A LSR B LSR C LSR D

LBM TTL=1
1 LBR
LBM TTL=2 LBM TTL=1
2
LBR LBR
LBM TTL=3 LBM TTL=2 LBM TTL=1
3 LBR LBR LBR
• LSR A starts an LT test destined for LSR D. Details on the test are as follows.
▫ LSR A first initiates an LB test to its most nearest node LSR B by

transmitting an LBM with TTL being 1. If LSR A receives an LBR from LSR B,
LSR A considers that the link between it and LSR B is normal. If LSR A does
not receive an LBR from LSR B, LSR A considers that the link between it and
LSR B is faulty.
▫ LSR A then initiates an LB test to its second nearest node LSR C by

transmitting an LBM with TTL being 2. If LSR A receives an LBR from LSR C,
LSR A considers that the link between LSR B and LSR C is normal. If LSR A
does not receive an LBR from LSR C, LSR A considers that the link between
LSR B and LSR C is faulty.
▫ LSR A finally initiates an LB test to LSR D by transmitting an LBM with TTL

being 3. If LSR A receives an LBR from LSR D, LSR A considers that the link
between LSR C and LSR D is normal. If LSR A does not receive an LBR from
LSR D, LSR A considers that the link between LSR C and LSR D is faulty.
• LSR A lists the reachable nodes from near to far to obtain the path to LSR D.
LM (1)
⚫ The loss measurement (LM) function can be used to collect statistics on the number
of lost packets on PWs, tunnels, or ports in a specific period.
⚫ Dual-ended LM
Transmission
network
CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2
Send CCMs to each other. Information carried in a packet

TxFCf RxFCf TxFCb
• Dual-ended LM detection process
▫ The MEPs at both ends periodically transmit CCMs, which contain the
following information:
▪ TxFCf: value of local counter TxFCl at the time of CCM transmission

▪ RxFCf: value of local counter RxFCl at the time of reception of the
previous CCM from the opposite MEP
▪ TxFCb: value of TxFCf carried in the previous CCM received from the
opposite MEP
▫ Upon receiving CCMs carrying count information from the opposite MEP, an
MEP uses the following formulas to make near-end and far-end loss
measurements:

▪ Frame Lossnear-end = |TxFCb[tc] – TxFCb[tp]| – |RxFCl[tc] –
RxFCl[tp]|
LM (2)
⚫ Single-ended LM
Transmission
network
CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2

1: Send an ETH_LMM.
TxFCf
2. Send an ETH_LMR.
TxFCf RxFCf TxFCb
• Single-ended LM process
▫ A local MEP periodically transmits an LMM to its opposite MEP. An LMM

▪ TxFCf: value of local counter TxFCl upon transmission of an LMM

▫ When receiving an LMM, the opposite MEP transmits an LMR. An LMR
▪ TxFCf: value of TxFCf copied from the LMM
▪ RxFCf: value of local counter RxFCl upon reception of an LMM

▪ TxFCb: value of local counter TxFCl upon transmission of an LMR
▫ Upon receiving an LMR, a local MEP uses the following formulas to make
near-end and far-end loss measurements:
▪ Frame Lossnear-end = |TxFCb[tc] – TxFCb[tp]| – |RxFCl[tc] –

RxFCl[tp]|
DM (1)
⚫ The delay measurement (DM) function can be used to measure the frame delay and
frame delay variation between a pair of MEPs in a specific period.
⚫ One-way DM
Transmission
network
CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2

Send an 1DM packet.
TxTimeStampf
• In one-way DM detection mode, the local node periodically sends 1DM packets
carrying transmission time information to the peer node within the preset specific
duration.
• One-way DM detection process

▫ A local MEP periodically sends 1DM packets to the opposite MEP. A 1DM
packet contains the following field:
▪ TxTimeStampf: time when the 1DM packet is sent

▫ Upon receiving an 1DM packet, the opposite MEP records the reception
time, RxTimef.
▫ The opposite MEP compares the reception time with the timestamp in the
received packet and calculates the frame delay using the following formula:
▪ Frame delay = RxTimef (time when PE2 receives the 1DM packet) –
TxTimeStampf
DM (2)
⚫ Two-way DM
Transmission
network
CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2

1: Send an ETH_DMM.
TxTimeStampf
2. Send an ETH_DMR.
TxTimeStampf RxTimeStampf TxTimeStampb
• Two-way DM detection process

▫ A local MEP periodically sends a DMM to its opposite MEP. A DMM
▪ TxTimeStampf: time when a DMM is sent
▫ When receiving a DMM, the opposite MEP transmits a DMR. A DMR
▪ TxTimeStampf: value of TxTimeStampf copied from the DMM
▪ RxTimeStampf: time when a DMM is received
▪ TxTimeStampb: time when a DMR is sent
▫ Upon receiving a DMR packet, a local MEP uses the following formulas to
make frame delay measurements:
▪ Frame delay = RxTimeb (time when the local MEP receives the DMR)
– TxTimeStampf
▪ This value contains the time the opposite node handles the DM
packet, and serves as the input for frame delay variation
measurement.
▪ Frame delay = (RxTimeb – TxTimeStampf) – (TxTimeStampb –
RxTimeStampf)
▪ This value does not contain the time the opposite node handles the
DM packet, and is more accurate.
CSF
⚫ Client signal fail (CSF) enables a local MEP to notify the remote MEP of an
attachment circuit (AC) failure so that the remote MEP can generate the CSF alarm.
MPLS_PW_CSF
MEP1 PW CSF MEP2

Fault
LSR A LSR B
• After the CSF function of the PW OAM is enabled at a local MEP, the local MEP
transmits CSF packets to the remote MEP when detecting a local AC failure. The
remote MEP reports the MPLS_PW_CSF alarm after receiving the CSF packets.
• A local AC failure may result in:

▫ ETH_LOS
▫ ETH_LINK_DOWN
▫ BD_STATUS
• MEP1 is the local MEP and MEP2 is the peer MEP.

▫ When the AC link between the client-side device and MEP1 is faulty:
▪ MEP1 detects an ETH_LOS/ETH_LINK_DOWN/BD_STATUS alarm, and

therefore starts periodically transmitting PW CSF packets to MEP2.
▪ MEP2 reports the MPLS_PW_CSF alarm after receiving the PW CSF

packets.
▫ When the AC link between the client-side device and MEP1 recovers:
▪ MEP1 stops transmitting PW CSF packets.
▪ If no PW CSF packet is received within an interval of 3.5 times the PW

CSF sending period, MEP2 clears the MPLS_PW_CSF alarm.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following is not a proactive OAM

signal?
A. RDI
B. AIS
C. LT
D. CC
• Answer: C
Summary
⚫ IP basics
⚫ MPLS & PWE3
⚫ ETH PWE3 and TDM PWE3 services
⚫ MPLS OAM and MPLS-TP OAM maintenance features
intelligent world.


that
OTN Protocol
Foreword
⚫ With the rapid development of IP-based networks, transmission networks evolve from point-to-point
and ring topologies to mesh topologies, the transmission and service networks are increasingly
converged at network edges, and the vertical structure of networks tends to be flattened.
⚫ Against this backdrop, the disadvantages of conventional WDM+SDH transmission have gradually
become known. Luckily, the optical transport network (OTN) provides a way out. OTN is a technology
that integrates the ultra-large bandwidth feature of WDM and various overheads of SDH. These
overheads help us locate and handle faults.
⚫ This course describes the functions of OTN overheads, relationships between overheads and alarms,
and alarm generation mechanisms, helping us learn how to locate and rectify faults.
Objectives

 Understand positions and functions of different overheads at each OTN layer.
 Understand basic functions of OTN electrical-layer overheads.
 Understand how OTN electrical-layer alarms are generated and learn how to
use electrical-layer overheads to analyze and locate faults.
Contents
1. OTN Overview
2. OTN Interface Structures and Multiplexing/Mapping Principles
3. OTN Frame Structure
4. Frame Structure and Meaning of OTN Electrical-Layer Overheads
5. Evolution to Liquid OTN
OTN Definition
⚫ An optical transport network (OTN) consists of optical NEs connected by optical
fiber links. It enables transmission, multiplexing, routing, management, supervisory,
and protection (survivability) of client services based on optical channels.
⚫ A main feature of the OTN is client-irrelevant functionality. That is, the transmission
and configuration of any digital signals are irrelevant to clients’ customized features.
• OTN, which is not a new concept, uses optical-electrical integration network

technologies. Over the years, ITU-T has formulated a series of OTN-related
industry standards (G.709, G.805, G.806, G.798, G.874, G.693, and G.872) to
replace conventional WDM+SDH networking with OTN, laying a solid foundation
for the convergence and promotion of IP networks. OTN is developed based on
SDH and WDM technologies and has combined the advantages of the two
technologies.
OTN Features
⚫ OTN is developed by ITU-T based on the idea of "standards first, implementation
later". Therefore, OTN effectively avoids disputes caused by differences in
implementation between different vendors, and makes the theoretical architecture
more reasonable and clear. Compared with SDH and conventional WDM, OTN has
the following advantages:
 Large-granularity service transmission
 Multi-service transmission
 OAM
 Flexible networking
 Low cost in network construction and operation
• A single wavelength of OTN equipment supports 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s, and 200
Gbit/s transmission rates, achieving large-capacity transmission and meeting the
development trend of large-granularity IP networks.
• OTN equipment supports the access of services that are separated on the
tributary and line sides. This improves the flexibility of service access and
supports the access of more services, such as SDH, Ethernet, IP/MPLS, and SAN
services.
• OTN has its own frame structure and various overheads to operate, manage, and
maintain signals during transmission. For example, overheads such as SM, PM,
and TCMi monitor service signals layer by layer.
• Compared with the conventional WDM technology, the OTN technology provides
multiple network topologies, such as multi-ring, mesh, and star topologies, which
are commonly required by metro networks. The OTN technology is applicable to
the development of new services and frequent service adjustment on metro
networks.
• Currently, most service networks are in convergence mode. A large number of
ROADM devices are used on transmission networks, because their wavelength
blocking technologies can reduce O-E-O conversion without service nodes, reduce
transmission costs, transmit services transparently, and reduce network
construction costs. In addition, the ROADM technology supports the remote
configuration function. When developing the wavelength leasing service and
adjusting the network, you do not need to manually connect fiber patch cords on
site. This reduces the workload of system maintenance and saves the O&M cost.
OTN Standards
Management G.874 Management aspects of optical transport network elements
aspects G.874.1 OTN protocol-neutral management information model for the network element view
Ji tter & G.8251 Control of jitter and wander within the OTN
wander
performance G.8201 Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator international paths within the OTN
Protection G.873.1 OTN - linear protection

switching G.873.2 ODUk shared ring protection
G.798 Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy equipment functional blocks

OTN G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment – Description methodology and generic functionality
Structures &
G.709 Interfaces for the OTN
mapping
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) for virtual concatenated signals
Physical- G.959.1 OTN physical layer interfaces

layer G.693 Optical interfaces for intra-office systems
aspects G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transmission systems
G.872 Architecture of OTNs

Architecture
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON)
• OTN standards include a series of Recommendations, involving device

management, jitter and wander performance, protection switching, structures
and mapping, and physical-layer features and architecture.
▫ [G.874: Management aspects of optical transport network elements] It
describes OTN NEs at one or more network layers of an OTN network and
the management features of transport functions.
▫ [G.798: Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy equipment
functional blocks] It specifies the functional requirements of OTN in NEs.
▫ [G.709: Interfaces for the optical transport network] It defines the

requirements for the n-level optical transport module (OTM-n) signals of
the OTN, including optical transport hierarchy (OTH), overhead functions of
a multi-wavelength optical network, frame structures, bit rates, and
formats for mapping client signals.
▫ [G.872: Architecture of optical transport networks] It describes the
relationships between OTN hierarchies, features, and client/service layer, as
well as topology functions and layered network functions.
• This course mainly involves G.709 and G.798 Recommendations.

Contents
1. OTN Overview
OTN Electrical-Layer Structure
Client (such as STM-N, FC, IB, IP, Ethernet, and MPLS)
OPUk LO
ODUk LO
OTUk, OTUk-v OTUkV OPUk HO
OTLk.n ODUk HO
OTUk, OTUk-v OTUkV OPUCn
OTLk.n ODUCn
OTUCn
G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-1
• OPUk/Cn: optical payload unit-k/Cn; ODUk/Cn: optical data unit-k/Cn; OTUk/Cn:

completely standardized optical transport unit-k; OTUkV: functionally standardized
optical transport unit-k; OTUk-v: optical transport unit-k with vendor specific OTU
FEC; OTLk.n: group of n optical transport lanes that carry one OTUk; OTLC.n: group
of n optical transport lanes that carry one OTUC of an OTUCn; ODUk LO: lower-
order ODUk signal; ODUk HO: higher-order ODUk signal.
• The OTUk signal consists of a 4080 column by 4 row frame, which includes 256
columns allocated to contain a forward error correction code (FEC) and is operated
at various bit rates that are represented by the value of k. The value of k can be 1,
2, 3, or 4, indicating 2.5G, 10G, 40G, and 100G respectively.
• The OTUCn signal consists of n interleaved 3824 column by 4 row frames, which do
not include an FEC area. The value of n can be 2 or 4, indicating 200G and 400G
respectively. FEC for the OTUCn signal is interface specific and not included in the
OTUCn definition.
• The OTUk contains an optical data unit (ODUk) and the ODUk contains an optical
payload unit (OPUk). The OTUk and its ODUk perform digital section and path
layer roles.
• The OTUCn contains an optical data unit (ODUCn) and the ODUCn contains an
optical payload unit (OPUCn). The OTUCn and its ODUCn perform digital section
layer roles only.
• The completely standardized OTUk or functionally standardized OTUk-v and
OTUkV provide supervision and condition the signal for transmission between 3R
regeneration points in the OTN. (Note that the OTUk section monitoring overhead
is optional if the ODUk network connection is comprised of a single link connection
supported by an OTUk trail.)
• The ODUk provides:
▫ Tandem connection monitoring (ODUkT)
▫ End-to-end path monitoring (ODUkP)
▫ Adaptation of client signals via the OPUk
▫ Adaptation of client ODUk signals via the OPUk
OTN Optical-Layer Structure
OTUCn OTUk, OTUk-v, OTUkV OTUk
OTSiG OCh-P OCh-O OTSiG-O OCh-P OCh-O

OMS-P OMS-O
OTS-O OPS
OTS-P
OSC OCC
MOTUm SOTUm
OTU OTLk.n OTU
OTSiG OTSiG OTSiG

OPS OPS OPS
MOTU SOTU SOTU G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-2

• The OTN optical structure consists of two classes of optical interfaces: the single
optical transport unit interfaces (SOTU, SOTUm) and the multi optical transport
unit interfaces (MOTU, MOTUm).
• These interfaces may support optical layer overheads. Such overheads may be
transported within the optical supervisory channel (OSC), the overhead
communication channel (OCC) that is provided by the overhead communication
network (OCN) or an alternative communication channel. Interfaces that support
OCh-O and/or OTSiG-O support switching in the optical layer of the OCh and/or
OTSiA signals which carry one optical transport unit signal between 3R
regeneration points. Interfaces that support OTS-O and OMS-O also support
deployment of in-line optical amplifiers between optical layer switching points.
• OTSi: Optical Tributary Signal
• OTSiA: Optical Tributary Signal Assembly
• OTSiG: Optical Tributary Signal Group
• OTSiG-O: Optical Tributary Signal Group - Overhead
• OCC: Overhead Communication Channel
• SOTU: Single-OTU
• SOTUm: Single-OTU with management
• MOTU: Multi-OTU
• MOTUm: Multi-OTU with management
• OSC: Optical Supervisory Channel
• OPS: Optical Physical Section
• OMS: Optical Multiplex Section
• OTS: Optical Transmission Section
• OCh: Optical Channel
Information Structure for OTN Interfaces (1)
⚫ MOTUm interface principal information containment relationships:
Client
OPUk OPUk
OPUk OH payload ODUk
ODUk TC L1
TCMOH
ODUk
ODUk path OPUk
OH TCM1–TCM6
ODUk TC Ln
ODUk ODUk
ODUk tandem connection TCMOH TCMOH
OTUk OTUk
OTUk section OH FEC
OCh-O OCh-P
OCh
OTS COMMS
OMS OMS-O
Media
OTS OTS-O element
OSC G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-3
• For supervision purposes in OTN interfaces with optical layer overheads, the
OTUk/OTUk-v/OTUkV signal is terminated whenever the OCh signal is
terminated and the OTUCn signal may be terminated when the OTSiA signal is
terminated. For supervision purposes in OTN interfaces without optical layer
overheads, the OTUk/OTUk-v/OTUkV and OTUCn signals are terminated
whenever the interface signal is terminated.
⚫ Beyond-100G MOTUm interface principal information containment relationships:
Client
OPUCn OPUCn
OPUCn OH payload ODUCn
TCMOH
ODUCn
ODUCn multiplex section OPUCn ODUCn TC L1
PMOH TCM1–TCM6
ODUCn TC Ln
ODUCn ODUCn
ODUCn tandem connection TCMOH TCMOH
OTUCn
OTUCn regenerator section OH
FEC frame
OTSiG-O OTSiG
OTSiA
OTS COMMS
OMS OMS-O
Media element
OTS OTS-O
OSC G.709-Y.1331(16)-Cor.2(19)_F6-4
⚫ SOTU interface principal information containment relationships:
Client
OPUk
OPUk OH OPUk payload
ODUk
ODUk path OPUk
OH
ODUk
ODUk TC L1 TCMOH
ODUk
ODUk tandem connection TCMOH TCM1–TCM6
ODUk TC Ln
ODUk
TCMOH
OTUk OTUk
OTUk section OH FEC
OTSi
Media element
G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-5
• n OTSi are aggregated into n frequency slots in an OPS-P using wavelength

division multiplexing for transmission over a multi-lane SOTU interface.
⚫ MOTU interface principal information containment relationships:
Client
OPUk
OPUk OPUk payload
OH
ODUk
ODUk path OH
OPUk
ODUk
ODUk TC L1 TCMOH
ODUk
ODUk tandem connection TCMOH TCM1–TCM6
ODUk TC Ln
ODUk
TCMOH
OTUk OTUk
OTUk section
OH FEC
OTSi
Media element
G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-6
• For the MOTUm interface, the OSC is multiplexed to the MOTUm interface using
wavelength division multiplexing.
• Up to n (n ≥ 1) OCh-P/OTSiG are multiplexed into an OMS-P or OPS using
wavelength division multiplexing for transmission over a MOTUm interface or
MOTU interface.
⚫ Multi-lane SOTU interface principal information containment relationships:
Client
OPUk
OPUk OPUk payload
OH
ODUk
ODUk path OH
OPUk
ODUk
ODUk TC L1 TCMOH
ODUk
ODUk tandem connection TCMOH
TCM1–TCM6
ODUk TC Ln
ODUk
TCMOH
OTUk OTUk
OTUk section OH FEC
OTLk.n OTLk.n OTLk.n

OTLs #0 lane #1 lane #n-1 lane
OTSiG OTSi OTSi OTSi
Media element G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-7

• The client signal or an optical data tributary unit group (ODTUG) is mapped into
the OPU. The OPU is mapped into an ODU and the ODU is mapped into an OTU.
The OTU is mapped into an OCh-P or OTSiG. The OTUk may also be mapped
into an OTLk.n and an OTLk.n is then mapped into an OTSiG.
⚫ SOTUm interface principal information containment relationships:
Client
OPUk OPUk
OPUk OH payload
ODUk
ODUk path OPUk
OH
ODUk
ODUk TC L1 TCMOH
ODUk
ODUk tandem connection TCMOH
TCM1–TCM6
ODUk TC Ln
ODUk
TCMOH
OTUk OTUk
OTUk section OH FEC
OCh OCh-O OCh-P
OCC Media element G.709-Y.1331(16)_F6-8

OTN Mapping/Multiplexing Principles (1)
x1 Client signal
To ODU2, 3, 4, ODUCn ODU0 OPU0
ODUflex
x1 OPUflex
Client signal
To ODU2, 3, 4, ODUCn
To ODU2, 3, 4, ODUCn x1 Client signal

ODU1 OPU1
ODU1
x1 x1 x2
ODU1 OPU1 ODTUG1 ODTU01 ODU0
To ODU2, 3, 4, ODUCn PT=20
Multiplexing Mapping G.709-Y.1331(16)_Cor.2(19)_F7.1

• ODTU01: (1904 + 1/8)/3824 x ODU1 bit rate

To ODU3, 4, ODUCn x1 Client signal

x1 ODU2 OPU2
OTU2[V]
x4
x1 x1 x1 ODTU12 ODU1
ODU2 OPU2
To ODU3, 4, ODUCn ODTUG2 x8 ODU0
ODTU2.1
PT = 21
x[8/ts]
ODTU2.ts ODUflex
x1
ODTUG2 x4 ODTU1.2 ODU1
PT = 20
x1 Client signal
To ODU3, 4, ODUCn ODU2e OPU2e
Multiplexing Mapping G.709-Y.1331(16)_Cor.2(19)_F7.1

To ODU4, ODUCn x1 Client signal

x1 ODU3 OPU3
OTU3[V]
x16
x1 x1 x1 ODTU13 ODU2
ODU3 OPU3
To ODU4, ODUCn
x4 ODU1
ODTU23
ODTUG3 x32 ODTU3.1 ODU0
PT = 21
x1 x3 ODU2e
ODTU3.9
x[32/ts]
ODTU3.ts ODUflex
x16 ODTU13 ODU1

ODTUG3
PT = 20 x4 ODTU23 ODU1
Multiplexing Mapping
G.709-Y.1331(16)_Cor.2(19)_F7.1

To ODU4, ODUCn x1 x1 Client signal

x1 ODU4 OPU4
OTU4[V] x80
x1 x1 ODTU4.1 ODU0
x1 ODU4 OPU4
To ODU4, ODUCn x40 ODTU4.2 ODU1
ODUG4
x10 ODTU4.8 ODU2
PT=21 x2 ODU2e
ODTU4.31 ODU3
x[80/ts]
ODTU4.ts ODUflex
x1 Null PRBS proprietary use

OPUCn
x1 ≤ 10n (note)
OTUCn ODUCn
x10n ODU0
x1 OPUCn x1 ODTUCn.1 ODU1
x10n ODTUCn.2 ODU2
ODTUGCn ODU2e
x[2.5n] ODTUCn.8
PT=22 ODU3
xn ODTUCn.20 ODU4
ODTUCn.ts ODUflex
xMIN([20n/ts],10n)
• NOTE – Implementations should support the multiplexing of up to 10n ODUk (k

= 0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, or flex) signals into an OPUCn.
Bit Rates and Capacity (1)
OTU Type OTU Nominal Bit Rate OTU Bit-Rate Tolerance
OTU1 255/238 x 2,488,320 kbit/s
OTU2 255/237 x 9,953,280 kbit/s
OTU3 255/236 x 39,813,120 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OTU4 255/227 x 99,532,800 kbit/s
OTUCn n x 239/226 x 99,532,800 kbit/s
⚫ The nominal OTU rates are approximately: 2,666,057.143 kbit/s (OTU1), 10,709,225.316 kbit/s (OTU2),
43,018,413.559 kbit/s (OTU3), 111,809,973.568 kbit/s (OTU4), and n x 105,258,138.053 kbit/s (OTUCn), where n
indicates the wavelength number.
⚫ OTU0, OTU2e and OTUflex are not specified in this Recommendation. ODU0 signals are to be transmitted over
ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODU4 or ODUCn signals, ODU2e signals are to be transmitted over ODU3, ODU4 and
ODUCn signals, and ODUflex signals are to be transmitted over ODU2, ODU3, ODU4 and ODUCn signals.
⚫ The OTUk (k = 1, 2, 3, 4) signal bit rates include an FEC overhead area. The OTUCn signal bit rates do not include
an FEC overhead area.
• OTUk rate calculation method:
▫ The length of an OTUk (k = 1, 2, or 4) frame is fixed at 4 rows and 4080

columns. For an OTU1 frame, columns 1 to 16 are OTU1, ODU1, and OPU1
overheads, columns 17 to 3824 (3808 columns in total) are client signals,
and columns 3825 to 4080 (256 columns in total) are an FEC area. Assume
that the OTU1 is loaded with SDH of STM-16 and its rate is 2,488,320
kbit/s. Using this in the following equation gives as the nominal OTU1 bit
rate: Client signal size/OTU frame size = Client signal rate/Nominal OTU bit
rate. 3808/4080 = 2,488,320/Nominal OTU1 bit rate. That is, nominal OTU1
bit rate = 255/238 x 2,488,320 kbit/s.
▫ For an OTU2 frame, four ODU1 signals are time division multiplexed into
the ODTUG2 and four ODU1 signals function as the OPU2 payload with
3808 columns, and the 16 columns of the OPU2 payload are OTU1, ODU1,
and OPU1 overheads. Therefore, client signals occupy 3792 columns in
total. You can obtain the nominal OTU2 bit rate using this formula:
3792/4080 = 2,488,320 x 4/Nominal OTU2 bit rate. That is, Nominal OTU2
bit rate = 255/237 x 9,953,280 kbit/s.
▫ Similarly, the nominal OTU3 bit rate is 255/236 x 39,813,120 kbit/s.
▫ Based on the OTU1/2/3 bit rates, the following conclusion can be drawn:
OTUk bit rate = 255/(239 – k) x STM-N bit rate.
Bit Rate and Capacity (2)
ODU Type ODU Nominal Bit Rate ODU Bit-Rate Tolerance
ODU0 1,244,160 kbit/s
ODU1 239/238 x 2,488,320 kbit/s
ODU2 239/237 x 9,953,280 kbit/s

±20 ppm
ODU3 239/236 x 39,813,120 kbit/s
ODU4 239/227 x 99,532,800 kbit/s
ODUCn n x 239/226 x 99,532,800 kbit/s
ODU2e 239/237 x 10,312,500 kbit/s
ODUflex (CBR) 239/238 x Client signal bit rate
ODUflex (GFP-F) Configured bit rate (see notes) ±100 ppm
ODUflex (IMP) s x 239/238 x 5,156,250 kbit/s, s = 2, 8, or n x 5 (n ≥ 1)
ODUflex (FlexE-aware) 103,125,000 x 240/238 x n/20 kbit/s (n = n1 + n2 + … + np)
• The nominal ODUk rates are approximately: 2,498,775.126 kbit/s (ODU1),

10,037,273.924 kbit/s (ODU2), 40,319,218.983 kbit/s (ODU3), 10,399,525.316
kbit/s (ODU2e), 104,794,445.815 kbit/s (ODU4), and n x 105,258,138.053 kbit/s
(ODUCn).
• ODUk bit rate = 239/(239 – k) x STM-N bit rate.

• Compared with an OTUk frame, an ODUk frame has an FEC area with 256
columns less. The above table lists the ODUk bit rates calculated using the OTUk
bit rate equation. The definition of the ODUflex (GFP-F) signal rates is special.
The rates vary according to application scenarios, which will not be detailed here.
In addition, the bit-rate tolerance of ODU2e and ODUflex (CBR) is ±100 ppm.
Bit Rate and Capacity (3)
OPU type OPU payload nominal bit rate OPU payload bit-rate tolerance
OPU0 238/239 × 1 244 160 kbit/s
OPU1 2 488 320 kbit/s
OPU2 238/237 × 9 953 280 kbit/s
OPU3 238/236 × 39 813 120 kbit/s 20 ppm
OPU4 238/227 × 99 532 800 kbit/s
OPUCn n × 238/226 × 99 532 800 kbit/s
OPU2e 238/237 × 10 312 500 kbit/s 100 ppm
OPUflex for CBR client signal bit-rate tolerance,

client signal bit rate
client signals with a maximum of 100 ppm
OPUflex for GFP-F mapped client

238/239 × ODUflex signal rate 100 ppm
signals
OPUflex for IMP mapped client s × 5 156 250 kbit/s
100 ppm
signals s = 2, 8, n × 5 with n ≥ 1 (Note 2)
OPUflex for FlexE-aware client 103 125 000 × 240/239 × n/20 kbit/s
± 100 ppm
signals (n = n1 + n2 + .. + np)
• The nominal OPUk payload rates are approximately: 1,238,954.310 kbit/s (OPU0
payload), 2,488,320.000 kbit/s (OPU1 payload), 9,995,276.962 kbit/s (OPU2
payload), 40,150,519.322 kbit/s (OPU3 payload), 104,355,975.330 (OPU4
payload), and 10,356,012.658 kbit/s (OPU2e payload). The OPUCn rate
approximates to 104,817,727.434 kbit/s.
• OPUk-Xv is the OPUk virtual concatenation with X ranging from 1 to 256. The
OPUk-Xv rate is X x OPUk bit rate. The bit-rate tolerance of OPU2e and OPUflex
(CBR) is ±100 ppm, which is different from that of other signals.
OTU/ODU/OPU Frame Period
OTU/ODU/OPU type Period (Note)
ODU0/OPU0 98.354 μs
OTU1/ODU1/OPU1 48.971 μs
ODU2e/OPU2e 11.767 μs
OTUCn/ODUCn/OPUCn 1.163 μs
CBR client signals: 121856/client_signal_bit_rate
GFP-F mapped client signals: 122368/ODUflex_bit_rate

ODUflex/OPUflex
IMP mapped client signals: 122368/ODUflex_bit_rate
FlexE-aware client signals: 122368/ODUflex_bit_rate

NOTE – The period is an approximated value, rounded to 3 decimal places.
• The length of an OTUk (k = 1, 2, 3, or 4) frame is fixed at 4 rows and 4080

columns. For different signal levels, the OTN signal frame period changes. With
the known signal bit rates, the frame period can be calculated for the signals
with different rate levels, using the following formula: Signal byte count/Signal
bit rate = Signal frame period. However, the method for calculating the frame
period for ODUflex and OPUflex signals is different from the method for
calculating the frame period for other signals.
Multiplexing ODU1 Signals into ODU2 Signals
ODU1
ODU1 payload ODU1
OH
ODTU12
ODU1 ODTU12
JOH
ODTU12 ODTU12
ODU1 ODU1 ODTUG2
JOH JOH
ODTUG2
OPU2
OPU2 payload OPU2
OH
ODU2
ODU2 payload ODU2
OH G.709-Y.1331(12)_F7-2
• The above figure presents the multiplexing of up to 4 ODU1 signals into the
OPU2 signal via the ODTUG2 (PT = 20). An ODU1 signal is extended with a
frame alignment overhead and asynchronously mapped into the optical data
tributary unit 1 into 2 (ODTU12) using the AMP justification overhead (JOH). 4
ODTU12 signals are time division multiplexed into the optical data tributary unit
group 2 (ODTUG2) with payload type 20, after which this signal is mapped into
the OPU2.
Multiplexing ODU0–ODU4 and ODUflex Signals into ODUCn
Signals ODU ODU payload ODU OH
ODTUCn.ts ODU ODTUCn.ts

JOH (0, 1, 2, 2e, 3, 4, flex)
ODTUCn.ts ODTUCn.ts ODTUGCn.ts

ODU ODU
JOH JOH PT=22
ODTUGCn.ts(PT=22)
OPUCn
OPUCn payload OPUCn
OH
OPUCn ODUCn
OH
G.709-Y.1331(16)_Cor.2(19)_F7-8
• The above figure presents the multiplexing of up to 10n ODU0 signals and/or up
to 10n ODU1 signals and/or up to 10n ODU2 signals and/or up to 10n ODU2e
signals and/or up to 10n ODU3 signals and/or up to 10n ODU4 signals and/or up
to 10n ODUflex signals into the OPUCn signal via ODTUGCn (PT = 22).
• An ODUk signal is extended with a frame alignment overhead and

asynchronously mapped into the ODTUCn.ts (<k,ts> = <0,1>,<1,1>,<2,2>, <2e,2>,
<3,8>, <4,20>, <flex,ts>) using the GMP justification overhead (JOH). Up to 10n
ODTUCn.1 signals, up to 10n ODTUCn.2 signals, up to 2.5n ODTUCn.8 signals, up
to n ODTUCn.10 signals, and up to10n ODTUCn.ts signals are time division
multiplexed into the optical data tributary unit group Cn (ODTUGCn) with
payload type 22, after which this signal is mapped into the OPUCn.
Contents
1. OTN Overview
OTU Signal Frame Structure
⚫ The OTUk (k = 1, 2, 3, or 4) frame is a byte-based block frame structure with 4 rows
and 4080 columns.
3825
3824
4080
15
14
16
17
8
7
1
FA OTUk
1 overhead
OPUk overhead
2 OTUk
Client signal FEC
ODUk (4 x 256 bytes)
3
overhead
Frame alignment overhead OTUk: optical channel Client signal k:

transport unit k 1: 2.5G
ODUk: optical channel OPUk: optical channel 2: 10G
data unit k payload unit k 3: 40G
4: 100G
• As shown in the above figure, columns 15 to 3824 are dedicated to an OPUk

area, columns 15 to 16 are dedicated to an OPUk overhead area, columns 17 to
3824 are dedicated to an OPUk payload area where client signals are located.
• ODUk is a block frame structure with four rows and 3824 columns and consists
of the ODUk overhead and OPUk. Columns 1 to 14 of rows 2 to 4 in the lower-
left part are dedicated to an ODUk overhead area, columns 1 to 7 of row 1 are
reserved for a frame alignment, and columns 8 to 14 of row 1 are all "0"s.
• Columns 8 to 14 of row 1 are dedicated to an OTUk overhead area and columns

3825 to 4080 are dedicated to an FEC area.
• Columns 1 to 7 of row 1 are dedicated to a frame alignment overhead area,
which is the frame header.
• The client signal rate corresponding to OTU1/2/3/4/ is 2.5/10/40/100 Gbit/s. The

OTUk frame structures at different levels are the same. The higher the level is,
the faster the frame frequency and rate.
OTUCn Frame Structure
3824
15
14
16
17
8
7
1
FA OTU
1 OH OH
Frame alignment overhead OTU overhead Client signal
• The OTUCn frame structure is based on the ODUCn frame structure and deploys
the reserved overhead bytes in row 1, columns 8 to 14 of each ODU frame
structure in the ODUCn overhead for an OTUCn specific overhead, resulting in an
octet-based block frame structure with n four rows and 3824 columns. The most
significant bit in each octet is bit 1, and the least significant bit is bit 8.
Contents
1. OTN Overview
OPU
Fra me Alignment Overhead OTU Overhead ODU Overhead
Overhead
Frame Alignment Signal (FAS)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 FAS MFAS SM GCC0 RES RES JC
TCM
2 RES TCM6 TCM5 TCM4 FTFL RES JC
ACT
3 TCM3 TCM2 TCM1 PM EXP RES JC
4 GCC1 GCC2 APS/PCC RES PSI NJO PJO
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OA1 OA1 OA1 OA2 OA2 OA2
• Frame Alignment Signal.

• FAS is used for frame alignment. The length is 6 bytes. The FAS area is located in
columns 1 to 6 of row 1.
FAS
• The byte contains three OA1s and three OA2s. OA1 is 1111 0110 and OA2 is 0010 1000.
• When an FAS abnormality is detected, an OTUk_LOF or ODUk_LOFLOM alarm is
reported.
• FAS is used to align signal frames. It consists of six bytes: OA1, OA1, OA1, OA2,
OA2, and OA2. OA1 is fixed to 1111 0110 and OA2 is fixed to 0010 1000.
• OTN equipment supports FAS detection and insertion. When an FAS abnormality
is detected, an OTUk_LOF or ODUk_LOFLOM alarm is reported.
OPU
Fra me Alignment Overhead OTU Overhead ODU Overhead
Overhead
Multi-frame Alignment Signal (MFAS)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TCM
ACT
MFAS OH byte
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
..
MFAS
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MFAS sequence
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 • MFAS is used for multi-frame alignment. The length is one byte. The
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 MFAS area is located in column 7 of row 1.
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
.. • The value of the MFAS byte will be incremented each OTUk/ODUk
..
frame and provides as such a 256-frame multi-frame.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • When an MFAS abnormality is detected, an OTUk_LOM or
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
..
0 0 0 1 ODUk_LOFLOM alarm is reported.
• MFAS is used for multi-frame alignment. Some of the OTUk and ODUk overhead
signals will span multiple OTUk/ODUk frames. Examples are the TTI and TCM-
ACT overhead signals. These and other multi-frame structured overhead signals
require multi-frame alignment processing to be performed, in addition to the
OTUk/ODUk frame alignment. MFAS supports a 256-frame multi-frame.
• OTN equipment supports MFAS detection and insertion. When an MFAS
abnormality is detected, an OTUk_LOM or ODUk_LOFLOM alarm is reported.
OPU
Frame Alignment Overhead OTU Overhead ODU Overhead
Overhead
OTUk Section Monitoring (SM) Overhead (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TCM
ACT
1 2 3
TTI BIP-8
Trail Trace Identifier (TTI)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SAPI • The TTI signal is aligned with the OTUk multi-frame and
BDI
IAE
BEI/BIAE RES
15
16 transmitted four times per multi-frame. TTI is a 64-byte
DAPI character string with byte 0 to be present at OTUk multi-
31
32 frame positions 0000 0000, 0100 0000, 1000 0000, and
1100 0000.
Operator
specific • When a TTI abnormality is detected, an OTUk_TIM alarm is
reported.
63
• Trail trace identifier: The TTI signal is aligned with the OTUk multi-frame and
transmitted four times per multi-frame. TTI is a 64-byte character string with
byte 0 to be present at OTUk multi-frame positions 0000 0000 (0x00), 0100 0000
(0x40), 1000 0000 (0x80), and 1100 0000 (0xC0).
• OTN equipment supports TTI setting, detection, and insertion. The TIM mode can
be set to Only SAPI, Only DAPI, SAPI&DAPI, or No Detection. When the TIM
mode is set to Only SAPI, Only DAPI, SAPI&DAPI, and a TTI abnormality is
detected, an OTUk_TIM alarm is reported.
OPU
Overhead

⚫ BIP-8 (bit interleaved parity-8)
 It is an error-detection code signal used for section monitoring. The OTUk BIP-8 is computed over the bits in the
OPUk (columns 15 to 3824) area of OTUk frame i and inserted in the OTUk BIP-8 overhead location in OTUk
frame i+2.
 The OTUk bit error performance monitoring, and reporting of the OTUk_DEG and OTUk_EXC alarms are
provided.
1 14 15 3824
BIP8
Frame i OPUk
1 14 15 3824
Frame i+1 OPUk

1 14 15 3824
Frame i+2 OPUk
• BIP-8 is an error-detection code signal used for section monitoring.
• BIP-8 detection and insertion are supported. The OTUk bit error performance
monitoring, and reporting of the OTUk_DEG and OTUk_EXC alarms are provided.
• The transmit end uses the BIP-8 method to compute the bits in the OPUk
(columns 15 to 3824) area of OTUk frame i, and inserts the computation result
into the OTUk BIP-8 overhead location in OTUk frame i+2.
• The receive end uses the BIP method to re-compute the bits in the OPUk
(columns 15 to 3824) area of OTUk frame i. Then, an exclusive OR operation is
performed on the computation result and a value in the BIP 8 overhead location
of OTUk frame i+2, to obtain the number of bit error blocks, so as to determine
the bit error rate.
OPU
Overhead

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
2 RES# TCM6 TCM5 TCM4 FTFL # RES JC
ACT #
1 2 3
TTI BIP-8 Overhead Spelling
BEI Backward Error Indication
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Backward Incoming Alignment
BDI
IAE
BEI/BIAE RES BIAE

Error
BDI Backward Defect Indication
IAE Incoming Alignment Error
• BEI/BIAE: backward error indication and backward incoming alignment error. This
signal is used to convey in the upstream direction the count of interleaved-bit
blocks that have been detected in error by the corresponding OTUk section
monitoring sink. It is also used to convey in the upstream direction an incoming
alignment error (IAE) condition that is detected in the corresponding OTUk
section monitoring sink in the IAE overhead. Codes 0000 to 1000 indicate an
errored interleaved-bit block condition. Code 1011 indicates an IAE condition.
OTN equipment supports BEI/BIAE detection and insertion, OTUk bit error
performance monitoring, and OTUk_BIAES performance monitoring.
• BDI: backward defect indication. For path monitoring, a single-bit BDI signal is
defined to convey the signal failure status detected in a path termination sink
function in the upstream direction. BDI is set to 1 to indicate an OTUk backward
defect. Otherwise, it is set to 0. OTN equipment supports BDI detection and
insertion. When a BDI abnormality is detected, an OTUk_BDI alarm is reported.
• IAE: incoming alignment error. This signal is defined to allow the S-CMEP ingress
point to inform its peer S-CMEP egress point that an alignment error in the
incoming signal has been detected. An alignment error occurs as a result of a
frame phase change of the OTUk at the ingress point of a section. IAE is set to 1
to indicate a frame alignment error. Otherwise, it is set to 0. OTN equipment
supports IAE detection and insertion, and OTUk_IAES performance monitoring.
OPU
Overhead
OTUk GCC0/RES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 FAS MFAS SM GCC0 RES# RES JC
# TCM #
ACT #
1 2 1 2
GCC0 RES
Overhead Spelling
General Communications
GCC0
Channel 0
RES Reserved
• GCC0: general communication channel 0. Two bytes are allocated in the OTUk
overhead to support a general communications channel between OTUk
termination points. OTN equipment supports GCC0 for DCN communication.
• RES: reserved bytes.

OPU
Frame Alignment Overhead OTU Overhead OD U Overhead
Overhead
ODUk Path Monitoring (PM) Overhead (1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
ACT #
1 2 3
TTI BIP-8
TTI/BIP-8/BEI/BDI
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• The definitions and functions of TTI, BIP-8, BEI, and BDI are are similar
BDI
SAPI BEI STAT

15
16 to those of their counterparts in the OTUk SM overhead, but the
DAPI monitoring level is different. In addition, the BEI field does not support
31
32 the BIAE overhead function in the SM.
Operator • TTI-related alarm: ODUk_PM_TIM
specific
• BIP8-related alarms: ODUk_PM_DEG and ODUk_PM_EXC
63
OPU
Overhead
ODUk Path Monitoring (PM) Overhead (2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
ACT #
1 2 3
TTI BIP-8 STAT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 • Status bits indicate the presence of a maintenance signal.

BDI
SAPI BEI STAT

15 • 001 indicates a normal path signal.
16
DAPI • 101 indicates the maintenance signal ODUk-LCK (ODUk is locked).
31
32 • 110 indicates the maintenance signal ODUk-OCI (ODUk open connection
Operator indication).
specific
• 111 indicates the maintenance signal ODUk-AIS (ODUk all 1).
63
• Compared with the SM overhead, the PM overhead contains the new STAT field,
which is used for ODUk path-level maintenance signals.
OPU
Overhead
ODUk Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) Overhead

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
ACT #
TCM ACT TCM

• TCM activation/deactivation coordination • The six TCM fields are numbered TCM1, TCM2, ..., TCM6.
protocol. • Each TCM overhead is allocated three bytes. The six TCM
• Occupies one byte and is not used currently. overheads are defined in the same way and their usages
are similar to PM overheads.
• The six TCM overheads support cascading, overlapping,
and nesting.
OPU
Overhead
Other ODUk Overheads: APS/PCC/FTFL/EXP/GCC1/GCC2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
ACT #
APS/PCC FTFL EXP GCC1/GCC2

• Automatic protection switching • Fault type and fault • Experimental channel. • Each channel is allocated two bytes
and protection communication location reporting in the ODUk overhead to support
• Used for experimental
channel. communication channel. the general communication
purposes. The usage is
• Provides information transfer • Supports queries of signal not subject to the channels between any two NEs with
for protection switching. (Not failure and signal standards. access to the ODUk frame structure
used currently) deterioration statuses. (that is, at the 3R regeneration
• Coherent boards use EXP
points).
bytes.
• Used for DCN communication.
• FTFL: Used to transmit a 256-byte fault type and fault location (FTFL) message.
The 256-byte FTFL message is aligned with 256 ODUk multi-frames with bytes 0
to 127 in the forward field and bytes 128 to 255 in the backward field. Byte[0]
and Byte[128] indicate the fault type (different values indicate different faults).
For example, 0000 0000 indicates no fault, 0000 0001 indicates signal failure, and
0000 0010 indicates signal deterioration.
OPU
Overhead
OPUk Payload Structure Identifier (PSI)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
ACT #
0 PT
PSI
1 PT
• Payload Structure Identifier.
Mapping specific
• Identifies different OPUk signals.
• Different values indicate different payload types.
• The 256-byte PSI signal is aligned with the ODU 255

multi-frame.
OPU
Overhead
OPUk Payload Type (PT)

Higher Lower Hexadecimal Higher Lower Hexadecimal
Description Description
Four Bits Four Bits Code Four Bits Four Bits Code
Experimental ODU multiplexing
0000 0001 01 0010 0000 20
mapping structure
Asynchronous 0101 0101 55 Not available
0000 0010 02
CBR mapping
Bit-synchronous 0110 0110 66 Not available
0000 0011 03
CBR mapping
Reserved codes
0000 0100 04 ATM mapping 1000 xxxx 80-8F for proprietary
use
0000 0101 05 GFP mapping NULL test signal
1111 1101 FD
mapping
Virtual
0000 0110 06 concatenation PRBS test signal
1111 1110 FE
signal mapping
Bit stream with 1111 1111 FF Not available
0001 0000 10 octet timing
mapping
Bit stream
0001 0001 11 without octet
timing mapping
Evolution of OTN Overhead Bytes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
#
TCM
ACT #
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 FAS MFAS SM GCC0 OSMC RES RES JC
PM&
2 RES TC M
EXP TCM6 TCM5 TCM4 EXP RES JC
• In the ITU-T Recommendation G.709 compiled in 2019, some frame structures

are redefined.
▫ In columns 13 and 14 of row 1, the original byte is RES, and the newly
defined bytes are OSMC and RES, each of which occupies one byte. OSMC is
short for OTN synchronization message channel. To achieve
synchronization, a byte is defined in the OTU overhead as an OTN
synchronization message channel to transmit SSM, eSSM, and PTP
messages between the SOTU and MOTU interfaces.
▫ In columns 1 to 3 of row 2, the original byte is RES, and the newly defined
bytes are RES and PM and TCM, which occupy two bytes and one byte
respectively. PM and TCM occupies eight bits, including DMt1 to DMt6,
DMp, and RES. DM is used for delay measurement. For ODU path
monitoring, a one-bit path delay measurement (DMp) signal is defined to
convey the start of the delay measurement test. The DMp signal consists of
a constant value (0 or 1) that is inverted at the beginning of a two-way
delay measurement test. The transition from 0->1->0000011111… or the
transition from 1->0->1111100000... represents the path delay
measurement start point. The new value of the DMp signal is maintained
until the start of the next delay measurement test.
▫ In column 14 of row 2, the original byte is FTFL, and the newly defined byte
is EXP.
Quiz
1. (Single Choice) Which of the following alarm will be reported when the TTI over
OTUk layer was detected abnormal?
A. OTUk_TIM
B. OTUk_SM_TIM
C. OTUk_PM_TIM
D. OTUk_TTI
• Answer: A
Contents
1. OTN Overview
Characteristics of Conventional OTN Networks
Advantages Disadvantages
1. Inelastic pipes: minimum pipe bandwidth (1.25 Gbit/s),
1. Physical isolation for integrated service transmission small number of connections
VC1/ODU0 100G 100G

OTN OTN
OTUCn VC2/ODU1
cell
A 100G line supports a maximum of 80 ODU0s,
VC3/ODU2 N x 1.25G
and the number of connections is small.
2. Low resource utilization: 100M over ODU0, only 10%
utilization
2. Assured latency: manageable, controllable, predictable, 100M
and marketable 1.25G
3. Unsatisfactory latency: multi-level encapsulation and
mapping, no latency difference
OTN latency Line
1.25G: 10G: 100G:
bandwidth Deterministic
OTUCn
OTUCn
ODU4
@ 100G line < 50 µs < 40 µs < 30 µs
ODU
VC12
ODU0
VC4
ODU4
VC12
VC4
latency,
0
not low enough
Service
Multi-level encapsulation
bandwidth
and mapping
• Conventional OTN networks have the following advantages in carrying

integrated services: high bandwidth, hard pipe isolation between services, and no
impact between services. The latency is assured, manageable, controllable, and
predictable.
• However, conventional OTN networks also have some disadvantages, such as

lack of elasticity. The minimum channel is ODU0 (1.25G). When services with
smaller granularities are accessed, the resource utilization is low. Multi-level
encapsulation and mapping are performed, so the latency is not low enough.
Liquid OTN: Next-Generation OTN Technology
Terminal
All-optical base Industry cloud
Multi-purpose network
Security
Security Massive connection: cloud
surveillance 10 3 /km 2 Wavelength λ slice 1
L1 sub-channel slice 1
Massive L1 sub-channel slice 2
connections L1 sub-channel slice 3
Video cloud
UHD video High rate: 1 Gbps
High rate Wavelength λ slice 2
Low latency Wavelength λ slice 3
Financial
Financial cloud
Low latency: 1–3 ms
private line
Optical and electrical slicing and physical isolation

Different SLA requirements of different services for
ensure different service SLAs
vertical industry applications
• Four characteristics of the next-generation OTN technology:
▫ Simplified architecture: SDH/ETH/OTN; 3-in-1; space ↓ 70%; power

consumption ↓ 50%
▫ Ubiquitous connectivity: 2M–100G per service; 480,000 hard slices per fiber
▫ Ultra-low latency: 5 layers → 2 layers; encapsulation simplified by 60%;
single-site latency ↓ 70%
▫ Flexible and efficient: no loss during bandwidth adjustment; 100%
bandwidth utilization
OSUflex Mapping
⚫ Optical Service Unit (OSU) container:
 Provides more flexible pipe bandwidth (N x 2.4 CBR Packet
Mbit/s). 1 2
 Transmits small-granularity signals more ODUflex
OSU
efficiently. ODUk
 Defines the mode in which OSUs are carried over
ODUflex to ensure that the OSU can coexist with MS ODUCn
RS OTUCn
and interwork with the OTN on the live network.
 Defines the mode in which OSUs are carried over OCh|OTSiA
FlexO (Group)
ODUCn.
OMS
OCC
OPS
OTS
OSUflex Frame Structure
⚫ The OPUk payload area is divided
into multiple payload blocks (PB). 14 16
1 3824
⚫ OSUflex uses a fixed-length frame FAS OTU OH 1 2
1
OPU OH
structure, including the overhead 2
and payload. 3 ODU OH
4 n
⚫ When multiple OSUflex channels are
PB
multiplexed into an OPUk channel,
an index number is added to each Payload block
TPN OSUflex
OSUflex channel as the unique
OSUflex fixed-length frame
channel identifier at the service Channel ID Overhead Payload
layer.
Li quid OTN uses fixed-length frames and flexible timeslot multiplexing to divide
the ODU i nto smaller bandwidth granularities.
• Liquid OTN optimizes multiplexing and mapping paths. OSUs can be directly
mapped to higher-order channels to flexibly meet various service bandwidth
requirements.
From OTN to Liquid OTN, Leading the Evolution of Optical
Transmission Networks
Conventional OTN MS-OTN Liquid OTN
All over OTN Unified bearing Unified grooming

SDH PKT ODU Universal
OTN
line board Liquid OTN
SDH OSU
OTN line line board
PKT
board
2C
2H FMC Elastic hard pipe
2B All over OTN
MS-OTN Liquid OTN
2005 2009 2020
✓ Optical fiber multiplexing; ultra- ✓ Multi-service grooming; unified ✓ Unified grooming; technology
high bandwidth bearing unification
✓ Physical isolation; secure and ✓ Multiple encapsulation modes; ✓ Smaller granularity; higher
reliable hard and soft pipes flexibility and efficiency
Smooth Evolution from OTN to Liquid OTN
C onventional OTN Li quid OTN and OTN coexistence (Underlay) New Liquid OTN (overlay)
Capacity expansion of Liquid

OTN tributary boards Both tributary and line
Capacity expansion of external boards support Liquid
Bri dging cross- OTN.
bridging cross-connect boards
connect board ETH
ETH ETH ETH ETH
ETH /STM-N
/STM-N /STM-N /STM-N /STM-N
/STM-N
OTN line
board
OTN line
board
board
board
tributary
tributary
line board
line board
OTN
OTN
OTN
OTN
line board
line board
line board
Li quid Li quid Li quidLi quidLi quidLi quid Li quid Li quid
OTN line
board
OTN
OTN
OTN
OTN OTN OTN OTN OTN OTN OTN OTN
tributary tributar tributar li ne li ne li ne li ne tributar
board y board y boardboard boardboard boardy board
C BR Packet CBR Packet

CBR Packet
OPUk/OPUflex DTU (1 x TCM)
OSU
OSU
ODUk/ODUflex (6 x TCM) ODUk/ODUflex (6 x TCM)
ODUk/ODUCn ODUk/ODUCn ODUk/ODUCn
OTUk/OTUCn FlexO (Group) OTUk/OTUCn FlexO (Group) OTUk/OTUCn FlexO (Group)
OC h|OTSiA OC h|OTSiA OC h|OTSiA
Summary
⚫ OTN Overview
⚫ OTN Interface Structures and Multiplexing/Mapping Principles
⚫ OTN Frame Structure
⚫ Frame Structure and Meaning of OTN Electrical-Layer Overheads
⚫ Evolution to Liquid OTN
intelligent world.


that
MS-OTN Protection Principles
Foreword
⚫ MS-OTN products support multiple protection schemes to provide reliable

data channels for services. This course uses Huawei OptiXtrans E6616 as an
example to describe OTN protection and packet protection in device- and
network-level protection, including the working principles, protection
scopes, and application scenarios of various protection schemes.
• Before learning this course, you are assumed to:
▫ Get familiar with the principles, networking, and signal flows of WDM,
OTN, and MS-OTN products.
▫ Understand the OptiXtrans E6616 basics.

Objectives

 Explain the principles of protection schemes provided by MS-OTN products.
 Describe the features and application scenarios of protection schemes provided
by MS-OTN products.
Contents
1. Device-Level Protection
2. Network-Level Protection (OTN)
3. Network-Level Protection (Packet)
Power Board Protection
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 7 Slot 8 APIU boards (AC chassis): 1+1 hot standby
PIU (slot 18) Slot 16 (system control, Slot 13 Slot 14
PIU (slot 17) switching, and timing board) FAN
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 15 (system control,
switching, and timing board) Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 18 Slot 16 (system control,

switching, and timing board) FAN
Slot 1 Slot 2
Slot 17 Slot 15 (system control,
PIU boards (DC chassis): 1+1 hot standby switching, and timing board)
Slot 5 Slot 6
APIU (slots 1 & 3) APIU (slots 2 & 4)
• Here, the OptiXtrans E6616 DC chassis is used as an example.
• The input working power supply to the DC chassis supports 1+1 backup.
▫ Two PIU boards in hot standby mode simultaneously supply power to one
chassis. If one PIU board fails, the other board will continue to supply
power to ensure that the subrack remains fully functional.
• The input working power supply to the AC chassis supports 1+1 backup.
▫ Two APIU boards in hot standby mode simultaneously supply power to one
chassis. If one APIU board fails, the other board will continue to supply
power to ensure that the subrack remains fully functional.
• Additionally, power modules support single-module input and output protection.
▫ Single-module input protection: input overvoltage protection, input

undervoltage protection, input overcurrent protection, HVDC overvoltage
protection, HVDC undervoltage protection, and automatic recovery
▫ Single-module output protection: output current limiting protection, output
short-circuit protection, overtemperature protection, and automatic
recovery
1+1 Board Protection
⚫ In normal mode, the cross-connect modules
Slot 13 Slot 14 support only 1+1 hot standby. That is, the
Slot 11 Slot 12 active and standby modules are in the working
Slot 9 Slot 10 state at the same time, and data is consistent
Slot 7 Slot 8
between them. As a result, an active/standby
PIU (slot 18) Slot 16 (system control,
PIU (slot 17) switching, and timing board) FAN switchover takes a short time.
Slot 15 (system control, ⚫ In enhanced energy-saving mode, warm
switching, and timing board)
backup is supported. That is, the active and
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4 standby modules do not need to be started
Slot 1 Slot 2 simultaneously, but full data synchronization is
required. However, the switchover may take a
The system control, switching, and timing boards
and fan boards support redundancy protection. long time. Therefore, warm backup is
generally not recommended.
• MS-OTN devices support 1+1 board protection.
• The system control, switching, and timing boards of the OptiXtrans E6616
support 1+1 redundancy. The active and standby cross-connect modules back up
each other. That is, the active and standby cross-connect modules connect to
service boards through a backplane bus to protect cross-connection services.
• You can set the energy-saving mode on the NMS to precisely manage power
consumption.
• Each fan board of the OptiXtrans E6616 consists of four independent fans. Even
when any fan is faulty, the system can run properly for 96 consecutive hours at
an ambient temperature of –5℃ to +40℃.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following modules on the OptiXtrans

E6616 support 1+1 hot standby?
A. PIU
B. APIU
C. Cross-connect module
D. FAN
• Answers:
▫ 1. ABC
Contents

◼ Optical-Layer Protection
▫ Electrical-Layer Protection
Intra-Board 1+1 Client 1+1
OLP
Protection Protection
Principles of 1+1 OLP

⚫ Optical line protection (OLP) protects line fibers between adjacent sites using
diverse routes. According to the position of OLP boards on a network, 1+1 OLP can
be classified into 1+1 OMS path protection and 1+1 OTS path protection.
OLP
TO1
TO1/RI1 TI
Dual fed TO2
Selective
receiving
RI1
TO2/RI2 RO
TI/RO RI2
Optical splitter Optical switch
• MS-OTN devices provide 1+1 OLP. 1+1 OLP is implemented by using the dual fed
and selective receiving function of OLP boards.
• 1+1 OLP: Switching time ≤ 50 ms, excluding the detection time.
• On an OLP board, the RI1 and TO1 optical ports indicate the working path, and
the RI2 and TO2 optical ports indicate the protection path. Switching is
performed based on the optical power.
Panel Port Used To...

RO Transmit selectively received optical signals.
TI Receive optical signals to be protected.
TO1 Transmit optical signals to the working path.
TO2 Transmit optical signals to the protection path.
RI1 Receive optical signals from the working path.
RI2 Receive optical signals from the protection path.

OLP
1+1 OTS Path Protection - Two-Fiber Bidirectional OSC

Signals ST2 ST2
Working line fiber
OTU TO1 RI1 OTU

E E
X RI1 TO1 X
OA OA
4 4
TI RO
0 0
OTU OTU
D D
O O
F F
L L
I I
P P
U U
RO TI
OTU E E OTU
X TO2 RI2 X
OA OA
4 RI2 TO2 4
OTU 0 0 OTU
Protection line fiber
• In the case of 1+1 OTS path protection, the OLP board at the local site transmits
OSC signals to the OLP board at the peer site over both the working and
protection line fibers. This protection scheme protects fiber links between sites.
OLP
1+1 OTS Path Protection - Single-Fiber Bidirectional OSC

Signals
ST2 ST2
Working
OTU D line fiber D OTU
E E
X TI TO1 S S RI1 RO X
OA OA
4 RI1 F F TO1 4
0 I I 0
OTU U U OTU
O O
L L
P P
D D
OTU E TO2 S S RI2 E OTU
X RO F F TI X
OA I I OA
4 RI2 U TO2 4
U
OTU 0 Protection 0 OTU
line fiber
ST2 ST2
• In this scenario, OLP boards must work with two DSFIU subboards to implement
optical line protection. Otherwise, OLP switching may fail.
OLP
1+1 OMS Path Protection
Working line fiber

TO1 RI1
OTU TI OA OA RO E OTU
E
D D
X X
F F
4 4
I I
0 RI1 TO1 0
OTU OA U U OA OTU
O O
L L
P P
TO2 RI2
OA RO OA
D D
OTU E E OTU
F F
X RO TI X
I I
4
4 RI2 U U TO2
OTU OA OA 0 OTU
0
Protection line fiber
• The principles of 1+1 OMS path protection are similar to those of 1+1 OTS path
protection. The difference is that in 1+1 OMS path protection, working and
protection signals are separated by OLP boards before passing through OA
boards, and OLP boards are not directly connected to the fiber lines. In 1+1 OMS
path protection, protection can also be provided when DFIU and OA boards in a
fiber line are faulty.
• Additionally, 1+1 OMS path protection requires more DFIU and OA boards than
1+1 OTS path protection, and therefore is more expensive.
OLP
1+1 OLP Networking Application

⚫ Networking application:
 1+1 OLP generally applies to point-to-point (P2P) and chain networks.
 OLP boards protect line fibers.

1+1 OLP protects multiplexed optical signals by section, and uses diverse routes between sites.
 OLP boards are configured before the egress fiber of each site or between OA boards and
multiplexer/demultiplexer boards.
A B C D
Working fiber Working fiber Working fiber
Protection fiber Protection fiber Protection fiber
• On a ring network, services between sites can be protected by using different

routes. Therefore, OLP is generally not used.
• OLP is implemented by section. For example, if a fiber cut occurs between sites A
and B, OLP switching is triggered only between sites A and B and is not triggered
between sites B and C or between sites C and D.
• For OLP (1+1 OTS path protection), OLP boards are generally configured before
the egress fiber, that is, behind DFIU (OSC) or OA (ESC) boards. In theory, OLP
boards can also be configured between OA boards and multiplexer/demultiplexer
boards (for 1+1 OMS path protection). However, two OA boards are required in
this scenario, which is therefore not recommended. If sites B and C are pure
optical line amplifier (OLA) sites, OLP boards can be used only at sites A and D in
theory. However, this will incur two problems:
▫ Two OA boards are required at sites B and C.
▫ This configuration relies on the automatic shutdown function of OA boards.
This function, however, has a certain delay, which prolongs the switching
time.
OLP
1+1 OLP Switching and Revertive Switching

⚫ Protection switching and revertive switching:
 Switching mode: unidirectional switching
 Revertive mode: revertive or non-revertive (default)
 APS protocol: not required
 Switching condition: signal fail (SF) or signal degrade (SD)
OLP OLP
• There are two revertive modes: revertive and non-revertive. Revertive indicates
that services are automatically switched back to the working path after the
working path is recovered. Non-revertive indicates that services are not
automatically switched back to the working path after the working path is
recovered.
• OLP switching is non-revertive by default, and its revertive mode can be set on
the NMS.
• An OLP board can work properly only after it is configured with a protection
group. Different protection groups report different protection switching alarms.
• When configuring a protection group for an OLP board, you must set the first
port (TO1/RI1) as the working port in the transmit/receive direction, and set the
second port (TO2/RI2) as the protection port.
• The trigger conditions of automatic switching in 1+1 OLP are as follows:
▫ MUT_LOS: indicates that the input optical power loss exceeds the specified
threshold. When an OLP board fails to detect the optical power, protection
switching is triggered. The threshold can be set, and the default threshold is
–35 dBm.
▫ POWER_DIFF_OVER: indicates that the relative optical power difference
between the working and protection paths exceeds the specified threshold.
The threshold is specified by Variance Threshold Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power (dB) on the NMS. This parameter can be set to a
value ranging from 3 dB to 8 dB, and the default value is 5 dB. Initial
Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) needs to
be manually set, and the value ranges from –10 dB to +10 dB.
OLP
Switching Conditions of 1+1 OLP

⚫ Switching condition:
TO1 Threshold: 5 dB
TI
TO2
Working path: 1 dBm Working path: –3 dBm
RI1
Protection path: 2 dBm Protection path: 2 dBm
RO
RI2
Difference 1 between Difference 2 between

Optical splitter Optical switch the working and the working and
protection paths: protection paths:
–1 dB –5 dB
Relative difference between the working
and protection paths:
(–1 dB) – (–5 dB) = 4 dB < 5 dB Switching is not performed.
• Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) specifies
the reference value of the optical power difference between the working and
protection paths of a board.
• Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) specifies
the threshold for the relative optical power difference between the working and
protection paths of a board. When the specified threshold is reached, an SF event
occurs. When the relative optical power difference between the working and
protection paths exceeds the specified threshold, the optical switch switches
services to the path with higher optical power. The threshold can be queried. The
recommended value is 5.0.
• If the relative optical power difference between the working and protection paths
exceeds the specified threshold, protection switching is triggered.
• You can set SD Switching on the NMS as required to specify whether to use an
SD alarm as a trigger condition of protection switching. The value can be Enabled
or Disabled.
▫ If the input optical power difference between the working and protection
paths is between 3 dB and 5 dB, the OLP boards will report a
POWER_DIFF_DEFECT alarm. When this occurs, automatic protection
switching will be triggered if SD Switching is set to Enabled.
OLP
1+1 OLP Summary
Protection Protection Switching Switching Revertive

Switching Alarm
Principle Protocol Mode Mode
OLP_PS
Dual fed and Revertive
The APS protocol is Unidirectional (Reported by OLP
selective Non-revertive
not required. switching boards)
receiving
OLP
Working Principles of Intra-Board 1+1 Protection

⚫ Intra-board 1+1 protection is available in two modes:
Mode 1: Dual fed and selective receiving are performed on the WDM side of an OTU board.
Mode 2: The WDM side of an OTU board works with an OLP board to implement dual fed
and selective receiving.
Mode 1 Mode 2
OUT1
RX1 TO1
OUT2 O TO2
O
L
OTU OTU LP
IN1 P RI1
TX1 RI2
IN2
• Intra-board 1+1 protection is available in two modes:

Mode 1: Dual fed and selective receiving are performed on the WDM side of an
OTU board.
Mode 2: The WDM side of an OTU board works with an OLP board to implement
dual fed and selective receiving.
• You can set the working and protection paths using software. Generally, the path
with a short trail and low line attenuation is selected as the working path.
• In protection mode 1, you can set the revertive or non-revertive mode, and the
default mode is non-revertive. In protection mode 2, the revertive mode must be
non-revertive.
• When services are switched from the working path to the protection path, the
system control, switching, and timing board reports an OPS_PS_INDI alarm.
• Intra-board 1+1 protection protects all fibers on OCh trails, that is, all fibers
between the dual fed of the source OTU board and the selective receiving of the
sink OTU board. The OTU boards cannot be protected.
• Intra-board 1+1 protection generally applies to a ring network. This protection
scheme uses diverse routes on the ring for protection. That is, services are
transmitted in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction on the ring, and finally
transmitted to the destination node.
• Services are selectively received from the working path in normal cases, and the
status of the protection path is displayed as NORMAL even if bit errors occur.
OLP
Networking Application of Intra-Board 1+1 Protection

⚫ Intra-board 1+1 protection generally applies to chain and ring networks.
B
A C
O Working path O
T T
U U
Protection path
• Intra-board 1+1 protection generally applies to chain and ring networks.
▫ On a chain network, intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP are similar. In this
case, diverse routes between adjacent nodes need to be provided.
▫ On a ring network, intra-board 1+1 protection uses diverse routes for

protection. That is, services are transmitted in the clockwise or
counterclockwise direction on the ring, and finally transmitted to the
destination node.
• Intra-board 1+1 protection protects all fibers on OCh trails, that is, all fibers
between the dual fed of the source OTU board and the selective receiving of the
sink OTU board. The OTU boards cannot be protected.
OLP
Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching and Revertive

Switching
⚫ Protection switching and revertive switching:
 Dual fed and selective receiving and unidirectional switching: The APS protocol is not required.
 Dual fed and selective receiving and bidirectional switching: The APS protocol is required.
 Switching condition: SF/SD.
A B
OTU OTU
• Protection switching is triggered if an R_LOS alarm is detected. You can set the
R_LOS alarm threshold on the NMS as required, which is –35 dBm by default.
• The protocol types of intra-board 1+1 protection are as follows:
▫ Common: software-based protection switching

▫ Enhanced: hardware-based protection switching, which is faster
▫ Default value: common
OLP
Switching Conditions of Intra-Board 1+1 Protection

SF Switching Condition SD Switching Condition
∙ An OTU board detects one of the following alarms ∙ An OTU board detects one of the following alarms
(both modes support this condition): (both modes support this condition):
▫ R_LOS ▫ B1_SD
▫ OTUk_AIS ▫ B1_EXC
▫ R_LOF ▫ ODUk_PM_DEG
▫ OTUk_LOF ▫ ODUk_PM_EXC
▫ ODUk_PM_AIS ▫ OTUk_DEG
▫ ODUk_PM_OCI ▫ OTUk_EXC
▫ ODUk_PM_LCK
∙ An OLP board detects one of the following alarms (an

OTU board works with an OLP board):
▫ R_LOS and POWER_DIFF_OVER
• Protection switching is triggered if an R_LOS alarm is detected. You can set the
R_LOS alarm threshold on the NMS as required, which is –35 dBm by default.
• Protection switching is triggered when a POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is detected. A
POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is reported when the optical power difference between
the working and protection paths exceeds the specified threshold.
▫ You can specify whether to use the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm as a trigger
condition of protection switching and set the alarm threshold on the NMS
as required.
▫ The alarm threshold is specified by Variance Threshold Between Primary

and Secondary Input Power (dB) on the NMS. The default value is 5 dB.
▪ For the OptiXtrans E6616, the alarm threshold can be set to 0 dB or a

value from 3 dB to 8 dB.
OLP
Summary of Intra-Board 1+1 Protection

Function/Feature Description
Protection principles Dual fed and selective receiving
Protection switching 1. SF
condition 2. SD
The APS protocol is not required for unidirectional switching, but is required for
Protocol bidirectional switching.
1. Mode 2: INTRA_OTU_PS (reported by an OLP board)

Switching alarm
2. Mode 1: INTRA_OTU_PS (reported by an OTU board)
OLP
Client 1+1 Protection Principles

⚫ The dual fed and selective receiving function provided by an OLP board is used to
protect services against an OTU line-side fault, board fault, or subrack fault.
OLP OTU1 No centralized cross-connection configured
OTU2 Working fiber

Centralized cross-
connection configured Protection fiber
Active
TU1 SXCH
LU1 Client-side fiber
OLP
Working backplane bus

Standby
TU2 SXCH
LU1 Protection backplane bus
• When OLP boards are used for client 1+1 protection, the client-side lasers of both
the working and protection OTU boards are turned on. The system controls the
OLP boards through the system control, switching, and timing board to
selectively receive signals.
• Client 1+1 protection applies to data services (such as GE, FE, 10GE LAN, and
100GE services) and other services.
OLP
Client 1+1 Protection Networking Application

⚫ Client 1+1 protection applies to any network topology to protect OTU boards and
client-side services.
Working Working
Client-side Working fiber
OTU1 OTU1
fiber Dual-fed Switch
module module
OTU2 OTU2
Protection fiber
Client-side OLP Protection Protection OLP Client-side signals
signals
Working Working
OTU1 OTU1
Switch Dual-fed
module module
OTU2 OTU2
• Client 1+1 protection applies to the following scenarios:
▫ Intra-subrack client 1+1 protection: The working and protection OTU

boards are in the same subrack.
▫ Inter-subrack client 1+1 protection: The working and protection OTU boards
are in different subracks of an NE.
▫ Inter-NE client 1+1 protection: The working and protection OTU boards are
in different subracks of different NEs.
▫ Multi-vendor protection: The working and protection OTU boards are from
Huawei and a third party, respectively.
OLP
Client 1+1 Protection Switching and Revertive Switching

⚫ Protection mode: unidirectional switching or bidirectional switching
⚫ Revertive mode: revertive or non-revertive (default)
⚫ Switching condition: POWER_DIFF_OVER
A B
Working fiber
TO1 RI1
TU1 LU1 LU1 TU1
TI TU2 LU2 LU2 TU2 RO

TO2 RI2
OLP OLP
RI1 TO1
TU1 LU1 LU1 TU1
RO TU2 LU2 LU2 TU2 TI
RI2 TO2
Protection fiber TU1 Working tributary board
TU2 Protection tributary board
LU1 Working line board
LU2 Protection line board
• Client 1+1 protection uses SCS or OLP boards to implement dual fed and
selective receiving of services. The protection principle varies according to the
service type. The following uses OLP boards as an example to describe the
switching and revertive switching of this type of protection.
• If the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is set as a trigger condition, the switching

process is shown in the figure above, regardless of the type of protected services:
▫ When data services are received and the switching status is idle, the OLP
board at the local site sends signals to both the TU1 and TU2 boards, and
the client-side lasers on both the TU1 and TU2 boards are turned on. The
OLP board at the peer site selectively receives signals only from the TU1
board and then transmits the signals to the corresponding client-side
device.
▫ When the optical power difference between the working and protection
paths exceeds the specified threshold, for example, the OLP (B) board
detects a POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm, it performs switching. Only the signals
from the TU2 (B) board are transmitted to the client-side device. The OLP
(A) board, however, does not perform switching and still selectively receives
signals from the working path. In short, this protection switching is
unidirectional.
OLP
Client 1+1 Protection Switching Conditions
SF Switching Condition SD Switching Condition

∙ A board cannot be detected, for ∙ An OTU board detects one of the
example, a board is removed or following alarms:
undergoes a cold reset. ▫ B1_SD
∙ An OTU board detects one of the ▫ B1_EXC
▫ ODUk_PM_DEG
following alarms:
▫ ODUk_PM_EXC
▫ R_LOS
▫ OTUk_DEG
▫ OTUk_AIS
▫ OTUk_EXC
▫ R_LOF
▫ OTUk_LOF
▫ ODUk_PM_AIS
▫ ODUk_PM_OCI
▫ ODUk_PM_LCK
OLP
Summary of Client 1+1 Protection

Protection principles Dual fed and selective receiving
1. SF
Protection switching condition
2. SD
Protocol The APS protocol is not required.
Switching alarm CLIENT_PORT_PS
OLP
Summary of Three Optical-Layer Protection Schemes

Item OLP Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Client 1+1 Protection
Client-side services, OTU boards, and OCh
Protection scope Line-side fibers OCh trails
trails
Applicable
Chain or P2P Chain or ring Any network topology
networking
Switching control
OLP OLP, SCS, or some OTU boards OLP
board
1. 1+1 OLP, dual fed 1. Dual fed and selective receiving at the
1. Dual fed at the OTU line-side
and selective OTU client-side optical layer
optical layer and selective receiving
receiving 2. Uses one working wavelength and one
at the OTU line-side electrical layer
Protection feature 2. Protects line fibers protection wavelength, and transmits
2. Protects OCh fibers by backing up
and supports section- signals over different routes to protect
lines
based protection OTU boards and OCh fibers
3. Simple and stable 3. Wide protection scope
External OLP intra-board 1+1
protection: INTRA_OTU_PS (reported
OLP_PS (reported by OLP by SCS/OLP boards)
Switching alarm CLIENT_PORT_PS
boards) Built-in intra-board 1+1 protection:
INTRA_OTU_PS (reported by OTU
boards)
Client 1+1 Protection LPT
LPT Concepts and Types

⚫ Link-state pass through (LPT) enables link status information to be transmitted over
OTN overhead bytes. It applies to scenarios in which devices receive and transmit FE,
GE, and 10GE LAN services. There are four types of LPT:
 LPT triggered by an access node fault (laser shutdown on the client-side port)
 LPT triggered by a service network fault (laser shutdown on the client-side port)
 LPT triggered by an access node fault (signal insertion on the client-side port)
 LPT triggered by a service network fault (signal insertion on the client-side port)
• You can set the LPT fault transparent transmission mode to Insert Code or Laser
Shutdown on the NMS.
LPT Triggered by an Access Node Fault (Laser Shutdown on

the Client-Side Port)
Backup network Protection
link
LPT signal
transmission
An LPT_ACTIVE alarm is path
reported, and the laser is
turned off or is alternately
turned on and off.
Access node 1 Service

network
Local user A B Remote user
network network
Router1 Router2
Tributary/ Tributary/
An LPT_ACTIVE alarm is OTU board OTU board
alternately turned on and off.
• If a fault occurs at access node 1 after the LPT function is enabled, the client-side
port of the MS-OTN device that connects to access node 1 detects the link fault.
Then the LPT function is triggered, and the laser on port A is alternately turned
on and off. Additionally, the laser on port B is turned off or alternately turned on
and off depending on the type of client-side service. In this manner, Router1 and
Router2 can detect the link fault simultaneously and therefore trigger service
protection. The service is switched to the protection link for transmission. By
doing so, the LPT function ensures normal communication between Router1 and
Router2. The figure above shows this scenario.
• If GE/FE services are received, the laser on port B is turned off. If 10GE LAN
services are received, the laser on port B is turned off or alternately turned on
and off. For the OptiXtrans E6616, the laser is alternately on for 1.5s and off for
1s.
• Fault trigger conditions: R_LOS, LINK_ERR, L_SYNC, LOCAL_FAULT,
REMOTE_FAULT, and PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
LPT Triggered by a Service Network Fault (Laser Shutdown

on the Client-Side Port)
Backup network
Protection
link
LPT signal
transmission
An LPT_ACTIVE alarm is path
turned off or is alternately
turned on and off.
Service
network
network network
Router1 Router2
An LPT_ACTIVE alarm is OTU board OTU board
turned off.
• If a fault occurs on the service network, the WDM-side port of the MS-OTN
device detects the link fault. Then the LPT function is triggered, and the laser on
port A is turned off. Additionally, the laser on port B is turned off or alternately
turned on and off depending on the type of client-side service. In this manner,
Router1 and Router2 can detect the link fault simultaneously and therefore
trigger service protection. The service is switched to the protection link for
transmission. By doing so, the LPT function ensures normal communication
between Router1 and Router2. The figure above shows this scenario.
• If GE/FE services are received, the laser on port B is turned off. If 10GE LAN
services are received, the laser on port B is turned off or alternately turned on
and off. For the OptiXtrans E6616, the laser is alternately on for 1.5s and off for
1s.
LPT Triggered by an Access Node Fault (Signal Insertion on

the Client-Side Port)
link
LPT signal
transmission
path
Inserting
10B_ERR/5B_ERR/
PN-11/LF signals
Access node 1 Service

network
network network
Router1 Router2
Intermittently insert OTU board OTU board
10B_ERR/5B_ERR/PN
-11/LF signals
• If a fault occurs on access node 1, the client-side port of the MS-OTN device that
connects to access node 1 detects the link fault after the LPT function is enabled.
Then the LPT function is triggered, signals are intermittently inserted on port A,
and signals are inserted on port B. In this manner, Router1 and Router2 can
detect the link fault simultaneously and therefore trigger service protection. The
service is switched to the protection link for transmission. By doing so, the LPT
function ensures normal communication between Router1 and Router2. The
figure above shows this scenario.
LPT Triggered by a Service Network Fault (Signal Insertion

on the Client-Side Port)
link
LPT signal
transmission
path
Inserting
10B_ERR/5B_ERR/
PN-11/LF signals
Service
network

network network
Router1 Router2
Inserting OTU board OTU board
10B_ERR/5B_ERR/PN
-11/LF signals
• If a fault occurs on the service network, the WDM side of the MS-OTN device
detects the link fault. Then, the LPT function is triggered and signals are inserted
on ports A and B. In this manner, Router1 and Router2 can detect the link fault
simultaneously and therefore trigger service protection. The service is switched to
the protection link for transmission. By doing so, the LPT function ensures normal
communication between Router1 and Router2. The figure above shows this
scenario.
Contents

▫ Optical-Layer Protection
◼ Electrical-Layer Protection
ODUk SNCP Tributary SNCP
Working Principles of ODUk SNCP

⚫ ODUk SNCP provides protection using the dual fed and selective receiving function
implemented by ODUk electrical cross-connections.
⚫ It protects services transmitted on line boards over OCh fibers.
No centralized cross-connection configured Centralized cross-connection configured
Working fiber Working fiber

TU1 LU1 TU1 Active SXCH LU1
Client-side fiber Client-side fiber

LU2 Standby SXCH LU2
Protection fiber Protection fiber
Working service flow Protection service flow
• ODUk SNCP applies to various network topologies and has high flexibility.
• APS protocol: not required

ODUk SNCP Switching - Idle State

Cross-connect Cross-connect
board board
• Here, T indicates a tributary board, N1 indicates a working line board, and N2

indicates a protection line board. A or B enclosed in parentheses following a
board name indicates site A or B where the board is located. For example, N1 (A)
indicates the N1 board at site A and N1 (B) indicates the N1 board at site B.
• The figure above shows the signal flow when the switching status is idle.
▫ The tributary boards at sites A and B send signals to both the N1 and N2
boards.
▫ The cross-connect board at site A creates an electrical cross-connection

from the N1 board to the tributary board, and disconnects the electrical
cross-connection from the N2 board to the tributary board. The cross-
connect board at site B performs the same operation. In this way, only
signals from the N1 boards are transmitted to the client-side devices
through the tributary boards.
ODUk SNCP Switching - Switching Status
Cross-connect
board
Cross-connect
board
• The figure above shows how protection switching is performed after the fiber
connecting to the input port on the N1 (B) board is faulty.
▫ When the N1 (B) board detects the fiber fault, it reports the path status to
the system control board at site B.
▫ The cross-connect board at site B switches the electrical cross-connection.
To be specific, the cross-connect board at site B creates an electrical cross-
connection from the N2 (B) board to the T (B) board and deletes the
electrical cross-connection from the N1 (B) board to the T (B) board. In this
way, only signals from the N2 (B) board are transmitted to the client-side
device through the T (B) board.
• Trigger condition: The board cannot be detected or the SF/SD condition is met.
ODUk SNCP Protection Types

⚫ Services between sites A and I can traverse multiple paths, which are configured with different types of protection:

SNC/I (inherent monitoring): The trigger condition is the status of SM overheads (for example, between sites B and F).

SNC/S (sub-layer monitoring): The trigger condition is the status of SM and TCM overheads (for example, between sites D and
H).

SNC/N (non-intrusive monitoring): The trigger condition is the status of SM, TCM, and PM overheads (for example, between
sites A and I).
SM terminated, PM transparently transmitted, and TCM1-

A D G 6 not activated (between sites B and F)
SM and TCM1 terminated, PM transparently transmitted, and TCM2-6 not
activated (between sites D, G, E, and H)
B E H
SM and PM terminated, and TCM1-6 not activated
(between sites A and I)
C F I Optical regeneration site, SM and PM transparently
transmitted, and TCM1-6 not activated (site C)
Working path between Protection path between

sites A and I sites D and H SNC/S (TCM1) SNC/I
Protection path between Protection path between
sites A and I sites B and F
• SNC/I: sub-network connection with inherent monitoring
• SNC/S: sub-network connection with sub-layer monitoring
• SNC/N: sub-network connection with non-intrusive monitoring
• ODUk SNCP is classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/S, and SNC/N. The
difference is that the status of different OTN overheads is used as the trigger
condition of protection switching. Therefore, the application scenarios of the
three protection types vary from each other.
Application Scenario Signal Type Protection Type
Ring network without OTUk signals SNC/I and SNC/S

electrical regeneration SNC/I, SNC/S, and
sites Non-OTUk signals
SNC/N
Ring network with OTUk signals SNC/S
electrical regeneration
sites Non-OTUk signals SNC/S and SNC/N
ODUk SNCP Summary

Protection principles Dual fed and selective receiving, unidirectional switching, non-revertive by default
1. A board cannot be detected, for example, a board is removed or undergoes a
cold reset.
Protection switching 2. SF
3. SD
condition
Note: ODUk SNCP can be classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/S, and SNC/N. The
three protection types differ in the monitoring capability and trigger condition.
Switching alarm ODUk_SNCP_PS (reported by line boards)
• Table 1 Alarms triggering SF

ODUk
SNCP SM Alarm PM Alarm TCM Alarm Others
Type
SNC/I Not supported
ODUk_PM_AIS, R_LOF,
SNC/S OTUk_LOF, ODUk_TCMn_AIS,
ODUk_PM_LCK, R_LOS,
OTUk_LOM, ODUk_TCMn_LCK,
ODUk_PM_OCI, HARD_BAD,
OTUk_AIS, ODUk_TCMn_OCI,
ODUk_PM_TIM, and
and ODUk_TCMn_TIM,
SNC/N and EXT_MODU
OTUk_TIM and
ODUk_LOFLOM LE_OFFLINE
ODUk_TCMn_LTC
• Table 2 Alarms triggering SD

ODUk SNCP
SM Alarm PM Alarm TCM Alarm
Type
OTUk_DEG and ODUk_PM_EXC and
SNC/I Not supported
OTUk_EXC ODUk_PM_DEG
ODUk_TCMn_EXC and
SNC/S Not supported Not supported
ODUk_TCMn_DEG
ODUk_PM_EXC and ODUk_TCMn_EXC and
SNC/N Not supported
ODUk_PM_DEG ODUk_TCMn_DEG
• At the ODUflex layer, SNC/N (non-intrusive monitoring) of PM overheads is

supported.
Tributary SNCP Principles

⚫ Tributary SNCP provides protection using the dual fed and selective receiving
function implemented by ODUk electrical cross-connections.
⚫ It protects client-side SDH/SONET or OTN services from tributary boards.
No centralized cross-connection configured Centralized cross-connection configured
Active
TU1 LU1 TU1 LU1
SXCH
Standby
TU2 TU2 SXCH
Working ODUk Protection ODUk Working fiber

backplane bus backplane bus
Client-side fiber
• Tributary SNCP uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of electrical
cross-connections to protect client-side services from tributary boards on the
OTN network.
• APS protocol: not required

Tributary SNCP Switching - Idle State
T1 T1
Cross- Cross-
connect connect
board N Subnet N board
OTN OTN
T2 T2
service service
Site A Site B
Working signal flow Protection signal flow Electrical cross-connection not created
• Tributary SNCP is similar to ODUk SNCP. They differ in the protection scope. In
case of tributary SNCP, two tributary boards transmit signals to one line board on
both the working and protection paths and the line board selectively receives
signals on the working path, therefore protecting tributary devices.
• The figure above shows the signal flow when the switching status is idle.
▫ The client-side device sends signals to both the T1 and T2 boards.
▫ The cross-connect board at site A creates an electrical cross-connection

from the N board to the T1 board and disconnects the electrical cross-
connection from the N board to the T2 board. The cross-connect board at
site B performs the same operation. The N boards selectively receive signals
from the working path.
Tributary SNCP Switching - Switching State
Cross-
connect
board
• The figure above shows how protection switching is performed after the fiber
connecting to the input port on the T1 (A) board is faulty.
▫ When the T1 (A) board detects the fiber fault, it reports the path status to
the system control board at site A.
▫ The cross-connect board at site A switches the electrical cross-connection.
To be specific, the cross-connect board at site A creates an electrical cross-
connection from the T2 (A) board to the N (A) board and deletes the
electrical cross-connection from the T1 (A) board to the N (A) board. The N
(A) board selectively receives signals from the protection path.
• Protection principle: dual fed and selective receiving, unidirectional switching,
non-revertive by default.
• Trigger condition: The board cannot be detected or the SF/SD condition is met.
Protection Types of Tributary SNCP

⚫ Tributary SNCP can be classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/S, and SNC/N.
 SNC/I (inherent monitoring): The trigger condition is the status of SM overheads. You can
choose SNC/I if neither end-to-end ODU protection nor TCM subnets are required.
 SNC/S (sub-layer monitoring): The trigger condition is the status of SM and TCM
overheads. You can choose SNC/S if end-to-end ODU protection is not required but TCM
subnets are required.
 SNC/N (non-intrusive monitoring): The trigger condition is the status of SM, TCM, and PM
overheads. You can choose SNC/N if end-to-end ODU protection is required.
• Tributary SNCP can be classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S. The
three protection types differ in the capability of monitoring SM, PM, and TCM
overheads and therefore have different trigger conditions.
• The protection type varies according to the type of services received by tributary
boards:
▫ SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S are supported if tributary boards receive OTN
services.
▫ Only SNC/I is supported if tributary boards receive STM-16, OC-48, or

higher-level SDH or SONET services.
▫ The form of board ports varies according to the protection type.
Tributary SNCP Summary
Protection principles Dual fed and selective receiving, and unidirectional switching
1. A board cannot be detected.

2. SF
Protection switching 3. SD
condition Note: Tributary SNCP can be classified into the following types: SNC/I, SNC/S, and
SNC/N. The three protection types differ in the monitoring capability and trigger
condition.
Switching alarm ODUk_SNCP_PS (reported by tributary boards)
• Alarms triggering protection switching
Alarm
Triggering
SM Alarm PM Alarm TCM Alarm Others
Protection
Switching
ODUk_PM_AIS,
ODUk_TCMn_AIS,
OTUk_LOF ODUk_PM_LCKOD R_LOF,
ODUk_TCMn_LCK,
OTUk_LOMO Uk_PM_OCI, R_LOS,
SF ODUk_TCMn_OCI,
TUk_AIS ODUk_PM_TIM, R_LOC, and
ODUk_TCMn_TIM,
OTUk_TIM and HARD_BAD
and ODUk_TCMn_LTC
ODUk_LOFLOM
OTUk_DEGOT ODUk_PM_EXCOD ODUk_TCMn_EXC and
SD B1_EXC
Uk_EXC Uk_PM_DEG ODUk_TCMn_DEG
• For the three protection types, protection switching can be triggered by alarms in
different sections:
• SNC/I: Protection switching can be triggered by SM alarms.
• SNC/S: Protection switching can be triggered by SM and TCM alarms.
• SNC/N: For TCM-layer protection, protection switching can be triggered by
SM and TCM alarms. For PM-layer protection, protection switching can be
triggered by SM and PM alarms.
• For the three protection types, protection switching can also be triggered by other
alarms.
Summary of Electrical-Layer Protection

Item ODUk SNCP Tributary SNCP
Dual fed and selective receiving, Dual fed and selective receiving, and unidirectional
Working principles
and unidirectional switching switching
Cross-connect granularity ODUk ODUk
Protects services transmitted on line Protects client-side SDH/SONET or OTN services
Protection scope
boards over fibers. from tributary boards.
Switching alarm ODUk_SNCP_PS ODUk_SNCP_PS
Protection type SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S
APS protocol Not required Not required

Centralized cross-
Supported Supported
connections
Inter-board cross-
Supported Supported
connections
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following alarms can trigger client 1+1
protection?
A. OTUk_LOF
B. ODUk_PM_AIS
C. ODUk_PM_OCI
D. ODUk_PM_LCK
2. (True or False) Unidirectional switching of 1+1 OLP is faster than bidirectional switching of
1+1 OLP.
A. True
B. False
• Answers:
▫ 1. ABCD
▫ 2. A
Section Summary
⚫ This chapter describes the principles of OTN protection:

 Optical-layer protection: 1+1 OLP, intra-board 1+1 protection, client 1+1
protection, and LPT
 Electrical-layer protection: ODUk SNCP and tributary SNCP
Contents
LAG MC-LAG Tunnel APS
Basic Concepts of LAG

⚫ With no need for hardware upgrades, link aggregation binds several Ethernet ports
as a logical port for higher link bandwidth and link reliability.
Ethernet port Ethernet port

Ethernet packets Ethernet packets
LAG
• As Ethernet technology is widely used in the Metropolitan Area Network (MAN)

and Wide Area Network (WAN), users raise higher requirements on the
bandwidth and reliability of access links that use Ethernet technology.
Traditionally, hardware upgrades can increase Ethernet link bandwidth but also
incur high costs. Additionally, hardware upgrades are less flexible than software
upgrades. To increase bandwidth more flexibly at a low cost, the link aggregation
technology is developed.
• Link aggregation has the following features:
▫ With no need for hardware upgrades, link aggregation binds several
physical ports of the same type as a higher-bandwidth logical port.
▫ The link backup mechanism of the link aggregation technology delivers
higher link reliability.
▫ Link aggregation functions between adjacent NEs and is easy to apply,
regardless of the network topology.
• A logical link formed by binding several physical links is called link aggregation
group (LAG).
• Link aggregation is also known as port aggregation because each link
corresponds to two specific ports at two ends in Ethernet transmission.
• As shown in the preceding figure, two adjacent NEs are interconnected through
three pairs of Ethernet ports, which are bounded to form a logical port. Three
physical Ethernet links are bound as a logical link, which is called LAG.
Link Aggregation Types

⚫ MS-OSN devices support manual and static link aggregation.
Link Aggregation
Definition Application Scenario
Type
During manual aggregation, a user creates a LAG, and Link
An MS-OSN device is
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) does not need to run
interconnected with an LACP-
Manual aggregation when a user adds or deletes a member port. The system
disabled device.
determines whether to aggregate a port according to its
physical status, working mode, and rate.
During static aggregation, a user creates a LAG, and LACP
must run when a user adds or deletes a member port. With
LACP, the devices at both ends exchange aggregation An MS-OSN device is
Static aggregation information and reach an agreement about aggregation interconnected with an LACP-
information to form a LAG. Static aggregation provides more enabled device.
accurate and effective aggregation control than manual
aggregation.
• LACP aggregates and deaggregates Ethernet links dynamically.

• Developed based on IEEE 802.3ad, LACP offers a standard negotiation mode for
data exchange devices. After LACP is enabled, the system automatically
aggregates multiple links according to its configuration to form an aggregation
link and enables the aggregation link to transmit and receive data. LACP
maintains the status of the aggregation link. When the aggregation conditions
change, LACP automatically adjusts or releases the link aggregation.
• After member ports are added to a LAG, each end of the LAG sends LACPDUs to
inform the peer end of its system priority, MAC address, member port priorities,
port numbers, and operational keys.
• After being informed, the peer end compares the received information with that
saved on itself, and selects ports that can be aggregated. Then, LACP negotiation
is performed to select active ports and links for carrying service traffic.
• LACPDUs can be transmitted in either of the following modes:
▫ Event-triggered: When the status or configuration of the local NE changes,
the system triggers the generation and transmission of a new LACPDU.
▫ Periodical sending: When an aggregation link works stably, the system
periodically sends the status information to maintain the link aggregation.
• Static aggregation has the following advantages over manual aggregation:
▫ Incorrect port connections can be detected.
▫ Port loopback can be detected.
▫ Single-fiber faults can be detected.
• Static aggregation is recommended when the interconnected devices at both
ends have LACP enabled.
Load Sharing Type - Load Sharing

⚫ Services are evenly distributed to all members in a LAG for transmission.
• Each member link in a LAG carries traffic.
• To ensure that the packets on the member links are successfully received by the
peer NE and to implement load balancing among the member links, hash
algorithms are used to evenly allocate packets to each member link.
• The hash algorithms allocate traffic based on:
▫ MAC addresses, including source MAC addresses, destination MAC

addresses, and source and destination MAC addresses
▫ IP addresses, including source IP addresses, destination IP addresses, and

source and destination IP addresses
▫ MPLS labels
• When a member in a LAG changes or a link fails, the system re-allocates traffic
automatically.
• Each LAG on the OptiXtrans E6616 supports a maximum of 16 members. Each
LAG on the OptiXtrans E6608 supports a maximum of eight members.
Load Sharing Type: Non-Load-Sharing

⚫ In normal cases, services are transmitted only through working ports and are not
transmitted through protection ports.
• Only one member link (known as active link) in a LAG carries traffic, and the
other links are in the standby state.
• Once the active link fails, the system selects a link from the standby links to take
over.
• A non-load-sharing LAG can be set to revertive or non-revertive.
▫ When it is set to revertive, services are switched back to the original active
link after this link is restored.
▫ When it is set to non-revertive, services are not switched back to the

original active link after this link is recovered, but are still transmitted on
the selected standby link.
• The revertive mode is available only for a non-load-sharing LAG.
• The wait to restore (WTR) time ranges from 0 to 30 minutes, and the default
value is 10 minutes.
Process of Creating a Static LAG
The received
The received
system priority
system priority of
of NE2 is
NE1 is 32768.
32767. Port priority Port priority
NE with a higher NE with a lower
system priority LACPDU system priority
1 Active link 2
Actor 2 1
LAG1
LAG2
NE1 NE2
• The process of creating a static LAG is as follows:
▫ 1. Exchanging LACPDUs: A user creates a static LAG on NE1 and NE2, and
adds member ports to the LAG. Then LACP is automatically enabled on the
member ports, and NE1 and NE2 send LACPDUs to each other.
▫ 2. Determining the actor: Both NE1 and NE2 receive LACPDUs from the
peer NE. Here, NE2 is used as an example. When NE2 receives LACPDUs
from NE1, NE2 checks and records information about NE1 and compares
their system priorities. If the system priority of NE1 is higher than that of
NE2, NE1 acts as the actor.
▪ If the system priority of NE1 is the same as that of NE2, NE2

compares its system ID with that of NE1 and the NE with a smaller
system ID acts as the actor. (The system ID of an NE is generated
based on the MAC address of the primary port.)
▫ 3. Selecting active ports: After the actor is determined, NE1 and NE2 select
active ports based on the priorities of ports on the actor. After both NEs
select the active ports of the same priority, an active link group is created
and data can be transmitted on the active link.
LAG Link Switching and Revertive Switching
Port priority: 9
Port 1 Port 1
Port 2 LAG Port 2
NE1 Port priority: 10 NE2
Working link Protection link
• If a trigger condition is met, link switching is performed on a static LAG as

follows:
▫ For a non-load-sharing LAG:
▪ The faulty link is shut down.
▪ The backup link with the highest priority is selected to take over
traffic from the faulty active link.
▪ The backup link with the highest priority becomes the active link and
transmits data. The switching is complete.
▫ For a load-sharing LAG:
▪ The faulty link is shut down.
▪ Traffic is re-allocated among all other member links based on the
load sharing algorithm.
• The revertive switching process is as follows:
▫ For a non-load-sharing static LAG that works in revertive mode, if the
original active port fails and becomes inactive, it will work as an active port
again after it is recovered.
▪ Ports 1 and 2 are the member ports in a static LAG, their priorities are
9 and 10 respectively, and port 1 is the active port. After port 1 fails,
port 2 works as the active port. After port 1 is recovered, port 1 works
as the active port again and port 2 works as the inactive port.
▪ Services are not switched back to the original active link immediately
after this link is recovered, but until the WTR time expires. The WTR
time prevents frequent link status changes, ensuring stable data
transmission in the LAG.
▫ For a load-sharing static LAG, if an active port fails and becomes inactive, it
will work as an active port again after it is recovered. Traffic is re-allocated
to member links based on the load sharing algorithm.
• The figure above uses a non-load-sharing static LAG as an example to show how
LAG link switching and revertive switching are performed.
Trigger Conditions of LAG Protection Switching

⚫ Manual aggregation:
 An active port fails.
 The working mode of an active port is changed.
⚫ Static aggregation:
 An active port fails.
 The working mode of an active port is changed.
 The priority of an active port is changed.
 The system priority of an NE is changed.
Introduction to MC-LAG
⚫ A multi-chassis LAG (MC-LAG), an extension to a single-chassis LAG (SC-LAG), aggregates
links on multiple devices. When a link or device in the MC-LAG fails, data services are
automatically switched to other available links in the MC-LAG, enhancing link reliability.
Network side AC side

MC-LAG
Working
PW NE1 Active
DSLAM NE3 Router
PW
APS MC- LAG1
LAG
LAG3
Protection Standby
PW
LAG2
MCSP
NE2
• The MC-LAG protection scheme consists of the following parts:

▫ SC-LAGs: LAG1 on NE1 and LAG2 on NE2
▫ MC-LAG between NE1 and NE2
▫ LAG on the router: LAG3
• NE1 and NE2 communicate with each other over the Multi-Chassis
Synchronization Protocol (MCSP). To be specific, NE1 and NE2 periodically
exchange the status of SC-LAGs (LAG1 and LAG2), and negotiate the status
(active or standby) of the two LAGs if a link fault occurs.
• MCSP is a protocol for synchronizing the status of LAGs in an MC-LAG based on
a bidirectional tunnel. In this manner, the LAGs on the two NEs can be switched
like member ports in an SC-LAG.
• Once the MCSP path is interrupted, the MC-LAG will fail and can no longer
provide active/standby protection if no link protection is provided for the MCSP
path. If this happens, NE1 and NE2 negotiate their respective working modes
with the router and work independently based on the negotiation results. That is,
NE1 and NE2 will work in common LAG mode. To improve MC-LAG reliability,
you are advised to provide link protection (for example, tunnel APS) for the
MCSP path.
• An MC-LAG can work only in non-load-sharing mode. An SC-LAG can work in
load-sharing or non-load-sharing mode. The SC-LAGs (LAG1 and LAG2) on NE1
and NE2 must work in the same mode.
Creating an MC-LAG in Static Aggregation Mode

⚫ The local MC-LAG exchanges MC-LAG packets with the peer MC-LAG, and compares the
local LAG information with the peer LAG information to select the links for carrying services.
If the system ID of either LAG1 or LAG2 is smaller than that of LAG3, the MC-LAG performs
the following processing:
◼ Compares the total bandwidth of LAG1 with that of LAG2, and allocates the smaller system ID between the
system IDs of LAG1 and LAG2 to the LAG with higher bandwidth. By doing so, the LAG with higher
bandwidth works in active state and the LAG with lower bandwidth works in standby state. Compares the
system IDs of LAG1 and LAG2 if LAG1 and LAG2 have the same total bandwidth. The LAG with a smaller
system ID works in active state and the LAG with a larger system ID works in standby state.
◼ The selected LAG determines the member links for carrying services based on the priorities and status of its
member ports as well as the negotiation results with LAG3.
• If the system IDs (system priorities + device MAC addresses) of both LAG1 and
LAG2 are larger than that of LAG3, LAG3 conducts common LAG negotiation and
the MC-LAG does not work.
• The process of creating an MC-LAG in manual aggregation mode is as follows:

▫ The local MC-LAG exchanges MC-LAG packets with the peer MC-LAG, and
compares the local LAG information with the peer LAG information:
▪ Compares the total bandwidth of LAG1 with that of LAG2. Ports in

the LAG with high bandwidth work in active state and ports in the
LAG with lower bandwidth work in standby state.
▪ Compares the device MAC addresses if LAG1 and LAG2 have the same
total bandwidth. Ports in the LAG with a smaller MAC address work in
active state and ports in the LAG with a larger MAC address work in
standby state.
MC-LAG Protection Switching and Revertive Switching

⚫ After an MC-LAG is created, the active link (LAG1) carries Ethernet services whereas
the standby link (LAG2) does not. When LAG1 is faulty, the MC-LAG sends MC-LAG
packets to instruct NE1 and NE2 to switch services to LAG2. If LAG1 and LAG2 work
in load sharing mode:
 If the working bandwidth of LAG1 is higher than that of LAG2, the MC-LAG does not
perform switching and keeps using LAG1 to forward Ethernet services.
 If the working bandwidth of LAG1 is lower than that of LAG2, the MC-LAG allocates the
smaller system ID between the system IDs of LAG1 and LAG2 to LAG2 to trigger MC-LAG
switching and switches Ethernet services to LAG2 for forwarding.
• If LAG1 and LAG2 work in non-load-sharing mode:
▫ Because only one link can be configured for each SC-LAG in manual
aggregation mode, MC-LAG switching is triggered once LAG1 is faulty.
▫ After LAG1 is recovered from the link fault, the MC-LAG determines
whether LAG1 can become active again based on the following conditions:
▪ If the working bandwidth of LAG1 is higher than that of LAG2, MC-

LAG switching is triggered and LAG1 becomes active again.
▪ If the working bandwidth of LAG1 is the same as that of LAG2, the

MC-LAG determines whether LAG1 can become active again based on
the specified revertive mode.
Trigger Conditions of MC-LAG Protection Switching

⚫ The trigger conditions of MC-LAG protection switching are as follows:
 If SC-LAGs work in non-load-sharing mode, services are switched to the protection LAG
only after all links in the working LAG are faulty.
 If SC-LAGs work in load-sharing mode, once one link is faulty in the working LAG, services
are switched to the protection LAG if the protection LAG has more available ports than
the working LAG.
MC-LAG Tunnel APS PW APS
Tunnel APS Definition

⚫ Tunnel APS protects tunnels using the automatic protection switching (APS)
protocol. If the working tunnel is faulty, tunnel APS switches services to the
preconfigured protection tunnel, improving the reliability of service transmission
over tunnels.
Transit
Working tunnel
Ingress Egress
Protection tunnel
Transit Service
• Introduction to tunnel APS:
▫ As a network protection scheme, tunnel APS switches services to the

preconfigured protection tunnel if the working tunnel is faulty.
• Purpose and significance:

▫ Tunnel APS protects tunnels using the APS protocol. If the working tunnel is
faulty, tunnel APS switches services to the preconfigured protection tunnel,
improving the reliability of service transmission over tunnels.
• Tunnel APS has the following features:
▫ Tunnel APS provides end-to-end protection for tunnels.

▫ Tunnel APS determines whether to perform switching based on the
detection results at the physical and link layers.
▪ At the physical layer, the loss of signals is detected in microseconds. A

fault at the physical layer will cause a fault at the link layer.
▪ At the link layer, faults are detected through Multiprotocol Label

Switching Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) operation, administration, and
maintenance (OAM). After faults are detected, the ingress and egress
nodes exchange APS packets for protection switching.
Tunnel APS 1+1 Protection

⚫ Dual fed and selective receiving
⚫ Switching mode: unidirectional switching (The OptiXtrans E6616 and E6608 support
only 1+1 unidirectional switching.)
⚫ Revertive mode: revertive or non-revertive
Ingress Egress
Forward working tunnel
Forward protection tunnel
Reverse working tunnel
Reverse protection tunnel
Node 1 Node 2
• Tunnel APS 1+1 protection
▫ In normal cases, the transmit end sends the protected service over both the
working and protection tunnels, and the receive end selectively receives the
service over the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty, the
receive end selectively receives the service from the protection tunnel.
• Revertive
▫ In revertive mode, the service is automatically switched back to the working

tunnel after the working tunnel is recovered from a fault and stays stable
for a specified period.
▫ In non-revertive mode, the service is not automatically switched back to the
working tunnel even if the working tunnel is recovered. However, the
service will be switched back only if the protection tunnel fails or an
external command triggers protection switching.
• Before switching
▫ The ingress and egress nodes send service packets over both the working
and protection tunnels.
▫ Both the ingress and egress nodes receive service packets over the working
tunnel.
▫ The connectivity of each tunnel is detected through tunnel OAM.

Principles of Tunnel APS 1+1 Unidirectional Switching

⚫ Unidirectional switching means that if an SF alarm is reported for the tunnel in one
direction, only services in this direction are switched while services in the other
direction are not.
Ingress Egress
Node 1 Node 2
• Switching mode:
▫ With unidirectional switching, if a fault is detected at one end, switching

occurs only at this end and not at the peer end. Unidirectional switching
does not require the APS protocol for negotiation and therefore is fast and
stable.
▫ With bidirectional switching, if a fault is detected at one end, switching
occurs at both this end and the peer end. Bidirectional switching requires
the APS protocol for negotiation, ensuring that the forward and reverse
paths of a service are consistent and facilitating service management. (The
OptiXtrans E6616 and E6608 support only 1+1 unidirectional switching.)
• Switching process:
▫ When the egress node detects a fault, it receives service packets over the
forward protection tunnel, instead of the forward working tunnel.
▫ The status of the reverse working and protection tunnels remains
unchanged.
Tunnel APS 1:1 Protection

⚫ Switching mode: bidirectional switching
Ingress Egress
Node 1 Node 2
• Tunnel APS 1:1 protection:
▫ In normal cases, the protected service is transmitted over the working

tunnel, and the protection tunnel is idle. When the working tunnel is faulty,
the service is switched to the protection tunnel for transmission.
▫ The ingress and egress nodes exchange APS packets over the protection
tunnel to obtain the status of each other. When the working tunnel is
faulty, the ingress and egress nodes can work together to perform
protection switching, switching hold-off, and WTR functions. Before
switching, the request state contained in APS packets is No Request.
▫ The connectivity of each tunnel is detected through MPLS-TP OAM.
• Revertive mode:
▫ In revertive mode, the service is automatically switched back to the working

tunnel after the working tunnel is recovered from a fault and stays stable
for a specified period.
▫ In non-revertive mode, the service is not automatically switched back to the
working tunnel even if the working tunnel is recovered. However, the
service will be switched back only if the protection tunnel fails or an
external command triggers protection switching.
Principles of Tunnel APS 1:1 Bidirectional Switching

⚫ The APS controller controls tunnel switching.
Node 2 performs bridging and

switching after detecting the
trigger condition.
Ingress Egress

APS packet
Node 1
performs
Reverse protection tunnel carrying bridging
bridging and and switching
switching. Node 1 Node 2 information
• Bridging means that a node transmits services over the protection tunnel instead
of the working tunnel.
• Switching means that a node receives services over the protection tunnel instead
of the working tunnel.
• The switching process is as follows:
▫ When detecting a fault in the forward working tunnel, the egress node
performs bridging and switching as follows:
▪ The egress node receives services from the forward protection tunnel
instead of the forward working tunnel. Additionally, the egress node
sends a bridging request to the ingress node over APS.
▪ The egress node switches the tunnel that the forwarding equivalence
class (FEC) traverses. To be specific, the tunnel that the FEC traverses
is switched from the reverse working tunnel to the reverse protection
tunnel. In this case, the MPLS label of the reverse protection tunnel is
encapsulated into packets in the FEC so that the service can be
bridged to the reverse protection tunnel. Additionally, the egress node
sends a switching request to the ingress node over APS.
▫ Upon receiving the switching request, the ingress node processes it.
▫ The switching process is complete. The services are transmitted over the
forward and reverse protection tunnels.
• After switching:
▫ If tunnel APS 1:1 bidirectional switching is in revertive mode, the service is
switched back to the forward and reverse working tunnels after the
working tunnels are recovered and the WTR time elapses.
Tunnel APS Switching Conditions

⚫ Switching conditions:
 External switching: switching clearing, protection tunnel lockout, forced switching, manual
switching, and exercise switching
 Automatic switching: signal fail for protection (SF-P), SF switching, and revertive
switching (available only in revertive mode)
⚫ SF trigger conditions of tunnel APS:
 Default conditions: MPLS_TUNNEL_LOCV, MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEG,
MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP, MPLS_TUNNEL_UNEXPMEP, MPLS_TUNNEL_SF,
MPLS_TUNNEL_AIS, MPLS_TUNNEL_RDI, MPLS_TUNNEL_SD, and
MPLS_TUNNEL_OAMFAIL (not supported by the OptiXtrans E6608)
• Switching clearing: clears all other external switching operations.

• Protection tunnel lockout: The service is locked on the working tunnel regardless of
the current switching status. Therefore, if protection switching is triggered,
protection tunnel lockout may interrupt the service.
• SF-P: The protection tunnel fails. If the protection tunnel fails, the service carried
over the protection tunnel is automatically switched back to the working tunnel.
• Forced switching: If the protection tunnel lockout or SF-P condition exists, forced
switching does not occur. Forced switching forcibly switches the service from the
working tunnel to the protection tunnel. Afterward, the service will not be switched
back to the working tunnel even if the working tunnel is recovered. However, if a
higher-priority switching condition exists, forced switching is preempted.
• Manual switching: If the protection tunnel lockout, SF-P, forced switching, or SF
switching condition exists, manual switching does not occur. Manual switching can
be classified into two types: manual switching to protection and manual switching
to working.
▫ For manual switching to protection, the service is switched from the working
tunnel to the protection tunnel.
▫ For manual switching to working, the service is switched from the protection
tunnel to the working tunnel.
• Revertive switching (available only in revertive mode): If SF switching occurs, the
service is switched from the working tunnel to the protection tunnel. If the working
tunnel is recovered and stays stable until the WTR time elapses, the service is
switched back to the working tunnel. Switching is in the WTR state between the
time when the working tunnel is recovered and the time when revertive switching
occurs. After revertive switching, the switching status changes to normal.
• The switching priorities are as follows: switching clearing > protection tunnel
lockout > SF-P > forced switching > SF switching > manual switching > revertive
switching > exercise switching.
Tunnel APS Summary

Switching Condition
Protection Type Switching Mode Revertive Mode
(In descending order of priority)
Switching clearing
Unidirectional
Tunnel APS 1+1 Protection tunnel lockout
Bidirectional SF-P
Revertive Forced switching
Non-revertive SF switching
Manual switching
Tunnel APS 1:1 Bidirectional
Revertive switching
Exercise switching
• The OptiXtrans E6616 and E6608 support only 1+1 unidirectional switching.
Tunnel APS PW APS PW FPS
PW APS Definition
⚫ PW APS protects a working PW using a protection PW. When the working PW is
faulty, the services on the working PW are switched to the protection PW, improving
service reliability.
Transit
Working PW
Ingress Egress
Protection PW
Transit Service
• PW APS is a function that protects PWs over the APS protocol. This function
enables services to be switched to the preconfigured protection PW when the
working PW is faulty, improving service reliability.
Tunnel APS PW APS PW FPS
PW APS 1:1 Protection Principles

⚫ Switching mode: bidirectional switching
Node 2 performs bridging
and switching after
detecting the trigger
condition.
Ingress Egress
Forward working PW
Forward protection PW
Reverse working PW
Reverse protection PW APS packet

Node 1 performs
bridging and carrying bridging
switching. Node 1 Node 2 and switching
information
• PW APS 1:1 protection:
▫ In normal cases, services are singly fed over the working PW at the source
end and are singly received over the working PW at the sink end. When the
working PW is faulty, services are singly fed over the protection PW at the
source end and are singly received over the protection PW at the sink end
to achieve service switching from the working PW to the protection PW.
• Status after switching:
▫ The remote PE receives services from the forward protection PW instead of

the forward working PW. The remote PE sends a bridging request to the
local PE using APS packets.
▫ The remote PE encapsulates the label specific to the reverse protection PW
into the service packets transmitted over the reverse working PW. Then the
service packets are bridged to the reverse protection PW. Additionally, the
remote PE sends a switching request to the local PE using APS packets.
▫ After receiving the bridging request, the local PE encapsulates the label
specific to the forward protection PW into the service packets transmitted
over the forward working PW. Then the service packets are bridged to the
forward protection PW.
▫ The local PE receives the service packets over the reverse protection PW
instead of the reverse working PW.
PW APS PW FPS MC-PW APS
PW FPS Definition
⚫ PW FPS is a function that protects PWs. This function enables services to be switched
to the preconfigured protection PW when the working PW is faulty, improving
service reliability.
PE2
PE1 is configured with FPS
Working PW protection.
PE2, PE3, and PE4 are configured

PE1 Other PE4 with other protection schemes,
protection such as MC-LAG and ERPS.
schemes
Protection
PW
PE3
• PW FPS stands for PW fast protection switching.
• The principles of PW FPS are similar to those of PW APS. To implement fast

protection switching, the switching condition depends only on the OAM status of
the working and protection PWs instead of the APS protocol status. Therefore,
you can configure FPS at only one end.
• PW FPS applies to the scenario where the working and protection PWs have the
same source but different sinks. Protection is configured at the source end. To be
specific, the working and protection PWs have the same local PE but different
peer PEs.
PW FPS Principles
⚫ Switching mode: unidirectional switching
Fault
detection A fault is detected
or an RDI alarm is PE2
received.
Forward working
Forward protection
Reverse working
Reverse protection
PE1 PE3
• Normal state: PW FPS is configured on PE1 (local PE). PE1 transmits and receives
service packets over the working PW. Service packets are transmitted over the
forward and reverse working PWs to the peer PEs. During the transmission of
service packets, PE1 triggers protection switching upon detecting a fault or
receiving an RDI alarm. The connectivity of each PW is detected through MPLS-
TP PW OAM.
• Protection switching:
▫ The link between PE1 and PE2 (remote PE) is faulty. After detecting a fault
on the working PW or receiving an RDI alarm, PE1 triggers PW FPS to
transmit services to PE3 (remote PE) over the protection PW.
▫ PE1 performs SF switching.
▪ Here, an SF alarm is set as the trigger condition. For other trigger
conditions, the switching processes are similar.
▫ PE1 transmits services over the forward protection PW instead of the
forward working PW.
▫ PE1 receives services over the reverse protection PW instead of the reverse
working PW.
▫ The switching process is complete. Service packets are transmitted over the
forward and reverse protection PWs to PE3.
• Revertive or non-revertive switching:
▫ If PW FPS is in non-revertive mode, the signal flow between the local and
remote PEs remains unchanged (the same as that after protection
switching).
▫ If PW FPS is in revertive mode, the signal flow between the local and
remote PEs is reverted to the original state (that before protection
switching) after the specified WTR time elapses.
Trigger Conditions of PW APS/PW FPS

⚫ Switching conditions
 External switching: switching clearing, protection PW lockout, forced switching, manual switching,
and exercise switching
 Automatic switching: SF-P, SF switching, and revertive switching (available only in revertive mode)
⚫ PW APS SF trigger conditions:
 MPLS_PW_LOCV, MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG, MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP, MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER,
MPLS_PW_RDI, MPLS_PW_SF, MPLS_PW_SD, and MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL (not supported by the
OptiXtrans E6608)
⚫ The trigger conditions of PW APS are similar to those of PW FPS. The only difference is that
PW FPS does not support exercise switching.
• Protection PW lockout: If the protection PW is locked, services cannot be switched

from the working PW to the protection PW. If services are already switched to
the protection PW, the protection PW lockout command forcibly switches the
services back to the working PW even if the working PW is not recovered.
• SF-P means that the protection PW fails. If the protection PW fails, services
carried over the protection PW are automatically switched back to the working
PW.
• Forced switching: If switching is in the protection PW lockout or SF-P state, forced

switching does not occur. Forced switching forcibly switches services from the
working PW to the protection PW. Afterward, the services will not be switched
back to the working PW even if the working PW is recovered. However, if a
higher-priority switching condition exists, forced switching is preempted.
• SF switching: If the protection PW lockout, SF-P, or forced switching condition
exists, SF switching does not occur.
PW APS/PW FPS Summary

Switching Condition
Protection Type Switching Mode Revertive Mode Switching Protocol (In descending order of
priority)
Switching clearing
Unidirectional
PW APS APS protocol Protection PW lockout
Bidirectional SF-P
Revertive Forced switching
Non-revertive SF switching
The APS protocol is Manual switching
PW FPS Unidirectional
not supported.
Revertive switching
Exercise switching
PW FPS MC-PW APS ERPS
Introduction to MC-PW APS

⚫ A common PW APS protection group usually has the same source and sink.
⚫ As shown in the figure below, the router is configured with dual-homing protection. Therefore, the
working and protection PWs are terminated on PE1 and PE2 respectively, with the same source but
different sinks.
Network side AC side
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
PW
APS MC-
MC-
PW
LAG
APS
LAG
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• Services between the DSLAM and the router cannot be protected by only PW APS
and LAG. PE1 and PE2 cannot detect faults on each other because no
communication channel exists between them. If PE1 or PE2 fails, the other PE
cannot detect the fault and therefore services will not be switched. To resolve this
issue, configure both MC-PW APS and MC-LAG.
• MC-PW APS and MC-LAG work together to form a complete multi-chassis
protection scheme. MC-PW APS enables PE1 and PE2 to exchange status
information through the dual node interconnection PW (DNI PW), and MC-LAG
enables PE1 and PE2 to exchange status information over MCSP. If one NE (PE1
or PE2) is faulty, the other NE can detect the fault and services are switched to
the protection path.
• MC-PW APS detects the status of the working PW, protection PW, and DNI PW
through PW OAM.
• The DNI PW enables dual-homing nodes in different chassis to exchange status
information, ensuring that the switching actions on PE1 and PE2 are coordinated.
The DNI PW also carries service packets if dual-homing protection switching is
triggered due to a fault. The QoS attribute and PW type of the DNI PW must be
consistent with those of the protected PWs (the working and protection PWs of
MC-PW APS). To ensure the normal running of MC-PW APS, configure a DNI PW
over the direct link between PE1 and PE2. You are advised to configure protection
routes for the DNI PW.
MC-PW APS: Protection Switching Scenario (1)

⚫ Failure in the active LAG on the AC side:
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
Standby
Active
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• MC-LAG:
▫ After a fault occurs on the LAG between PE1 and the router, PE1 and the
router exchange protocol packets, and services are switched to the LAG
between PE2 and the router. In this case, the AC-side LAG on PE2 becomes
active.
• MC-PW APS:
▫ The NNI-side services on PE1 are switched to the DNI PW because the AC-
side status of PE1 is down.
▫ The NNI-side services on PE2 are switched to its AC side because the AC-
side LAG is in the active state.
▫ PE3: No action is taken.
• Revertive switching: When the revertive mode is specified, MC-PW APS supports
revertive switching. After the link fault is rectified, services are automatically
switched back to the original path. The revertive switching processes in other
scenarios are similar.

⚫ PE1 failure:
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
Standby
Active
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• MC-LAG:
▫ After PE2 fails to receive protocol packets from PE1, the LAG between PE2
and the router is activated and set to the active state.
• MC-PW APS:
▫ PE3 fails to detect the link OAM packets between PE1 and PE3 and triggers
an SF_W alarm. Consequently, PE3 switches services to the protection PW
(PE3 -> PE2).
▫ PE2 receives the SF_W alarm from PE3 and switches services to the
protection PW (PE2 -> PE3).
▫ The NNI-side services on PE2 are switched to its AC side because the AC-
side LAG is in the active state.
▫ PE1: No action is taken.


⚫ Working PW failure:
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• MC-LAG:
▫ No action is taken.
• MC-PW APS:
▫ PE3 fails to detect the link OAM packets between PE1 and PE3 and triggers
an SF_W alarm. Consequently, PE3 switches services to the protection PW
(PE3 -> PE2).
▫ PE1 fails to detect the link OAM packets between PE1 and PE3 and uses the
DNI PW to notify PE2 of the working PW failure.
▫ AC-side services on PE1 are switched to the DNI PW, and services from the
DNI PW are routed to the AC side of PE1.
▫ NNI-side services on PE2 are switched to the DNI PW.

⚫ DNI PW failure:
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• In this scenario, services are normal and their paths remain unchanged.

⚫ Multi-point switching:
 Failure in the active LAG on the AC side
 DNI PW failure
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
Standby
Active
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• The initial status of this scenario is as follows: Protection switching has been
triggered due to a single point of failure in scenario 1.
• MC-LAG:
▫ No action is taken.
• MC-PW APS:
▫ Upon detecting a DNI PW fault, PE1 stops sending communication packets
to PE2.
▫ Upon detecting a DNI PW fault, PE2 stops sending communication packets

to PE1, triggers an SF_W alarm, and switches AC-side services to the

⚫ Multi-point failures:
 Working PW failure
 DNI PW failure
Working
PW PE1 Active
DSLAM PE3 Router
Protection Standby
PW
DNI PW MCSP
PE2
• The initial status of this scenario is as follows: Protection switching has been
triggered due to a single point of failure in scenario 3.
• In this scenario, protection switching is not triggered and services are interrupted.
Trigger Conditions of MC-PW APS

⚫ MC-PW APS supports automatic switching and external switching.
 Trigger conditions of automatic switching:
◼ Alarms: MPLS_PW_LOCV, MPLS_PW_OAMFAIL, MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEG, MPLS_PW_UNEXPMEP,
MPLS_PW_UNEXPPER, MPLS_PW_SD, and MPLS_PW_SF
◼ Hardware failures: subrack power failure, board failure, optical module failure, board removal
and insertion, board reset, and so on
 Trigger conditions of external switching (in descending order of priority):

◼ Switching clearing, switching lockout, forced switching, manual switching to working, manual
switching to protection, and exercise switching
MC-PW APS ERPS LPT (Packet)
Basic Concepts of ERPS

⚫ ERPS is an Ethernet ring protection protocol defined based on the APS protocol and
protection switching mechanisms. ERPS applies to Layer 2 Ethernet ring topologies, and
protects E-LAN services on Ethernet rings.
 If ERPS is configured for a ring network, the ring protection link (RPL) owner node blocks its port on
one side under normal conditions so that services are transmitted through its port on the other side.
This avoids service loops and broadcast storms.
 If a link, service flow, or node on the ring becomes faulty, the RPL owner node unblocks the port to
transmit services that cannot pass through the fault point. This achieves ring protection.
 Key points:
◼ Ring network
◼ Under normal conditions, a specified port is blocked to eliminate loops.
◼ When an error occurs, the redundant channel is unblocked for protection.
• ERPS stands for Ethernet ring protection switching.
• APS stands for automatic protection switching.
• MS-OTN devices support ERPS V1 and V2.
▫ V1 supports single-ring protection.
▫ V2 supports single- and multi-ring protection.

ERP Ring on a Single-Ring Network

RPL neighbor node
RPL neighbor port
East West
RPL next-neighbor port RPL port

West East
Ethernet ring node R-APS channel RPL owner node
East West
West East
Blocking RPL and RPL

RPL next-neighbor port neighbor ports
Ethernet service flow
Ethernet ring node
• On a single-ring network, a closed physical Ethernet ring constitutes an Ethernet

ring protection (ERP) ring.
• Basic concepts:
▫ Ring link: a bidirectional link between Ethernet ring nodes for transmitting
Ethernet services. In a narrow sense, a ring link refers to a non-RPL link.
▫ RPL: a ring link whose service channel is blocked when the Ethernet ring is in
the normal state.
▫ RPL owner node and RPL neighbor node: nodes that block the service
channel on the RPL to avoid service loops when the Ethernet ring is in the
normal state. An RPL owner node and an RPL neighbor node are responsible
for activating the service channel on the RPL when the Ethernet ring
becomes faulty.
▫ Ethernet ring node: node that detects Ethernet ring faults and implements
ERPS control on the Ethernet ring.
▫ RPL port: an RPL owner node's port that is connected to the RPL.
▫ RPL neighbor port: an RPL neighbor node's port that is connected to the RPL.
▫ RPL next-neighbor port: port that is connected to the RPL owner node or RPL
neighbor node.
▫ East port and west port: Assuming that services are transmitted in the
counterclockwise direction, the transmit port on an Ethernet ring node is an
east port, and the receive port on the node is a west port.
▫ Ring APS (R-APS) channel: The nodes on an ERP ring exchange R-APS
packets on R-APS channels to ensure that all nodes are coordinated to
implement ERPS. An R-APS packet contains a VLAN ID, which distinguishes
an R-APS packet from the Ethernet service packet and inband DCN packet.
Hence, the VLAN ID contained in an R-APS packet must be different from the
VLAN ID contained in an Ethernet service packet and an inband DCN packet.
▫ ERPS V1 does not involve the RPL neighbor node, RPL neighbor port, and RPL
next-neighbor port.
Switching on a Single-Ring Network (Non-RPL Fault)

RPL neighbor node
RPL neighbor port
R-APS (SF) East West

NE2
RPL port
West East
Ethernet ring node RPL owner node
East West
NE3 NE1
West NE4 East
R-APS (SF)
Ethernet ring node
• When an Ethernet ring is in the normal state, the east port on the RPL owner
node (NE1) is blocked. The west port on the RPL neighbor node (NE2) is also
blocked. Services are transmitted along the route NE2 -> NE3 -> NE4.
Switching on a Single-Ring Network (RPL Fault)

RPL neighbor node
RPL neighbor port
R-APS (SF, DNF) East West

NE2
RPL port
West East
Ethernet ring node RPL owner node
East West
NE3 NE1
West NE4 East
R-APS (SF, DNF)
Ethernet ring node
• When an Ethernet ring is in the normal state, the east port on the RPL owner
node (NE1) is blocked. The west port on the RPL neighbor node (NE2) is also
blocked. Services are transmitted along the route NE2 -> NE3 -> NE4.
ERP Between Two Intersecting Rings
RPL neighbor node RPL owner node

NE1 NE4 RPL
1 4
R-APS
channel
2 3
Major ring
NE2 Interconnection NE3

Sub-ring
node 2 3
Sub-ring link R-APS Sub-ring link

channel
NE6 NE5
Blocked port Ethernet service flow 6 5
RPL
RPL owner node RPL neighbor node
• A multi-ring network can be split into several closed and unclosed physical rings
on interconnection nodes. Each physical ring (either closed or unclosed) is an ERP
ring on the multi-ring network, and switching of each ERP ring is independent of
each other.
• Interconnection node: an Ethernet ring node shared by two or more Ethernet

rings (major rings or sub-rings).
• Major ring: an Ethernet ring connected to an interconnection node using two ring
ports.
• Sub-ring: an Ethernet ring connected to another Ethernet ring using two

interconnection nodes. A sub-ring is an unclosed ring.
• Sub-ring link: link that connects adjacent or interconnection nodes on a sub-ring.
A sub-ring link is controlled by a sub-ring.
• For an ERP ring on a single-ring network and that on a multi-ring network, the
basic concepts such as the RPL neighbor port, RPL next-neighbor port, and east
and west ports have the same meanings.
Switching Principles of Two Intersecting Rings
RPL neighbor node RPL owner node

NE1 NE4 RPL
1 4
Interconnection 2 3
node Major ring
NE2 NE3
R-APS (SF) Sub-ring
2 3
R-APS (SF)
R-APS (SF) Sub-ring link Sub-ring link
NE6 NE5 R-APS (SF)
Blocked port Ethernet service flow 6 5

RPL
RPL owner node RPL neighbor node
• A multi-ring network can be split into multiple independent ERP rings. The
switching principles of each ERP ring on a multi-ring network are the same as
those of the ERP ring on a single-ring network.
• In normal cases, NE4 (the RPL owner node on the major ring) blocks the port
connected to NE1 (the neighbor node), and NE1 also blocks the port connected
to NE4. NE6 (the RPL owner node on the sub-ring) blocks the port connected to
NE5 (the neighbor node), and NE5 also blocks the port connected to NE6. This
blocking mechanism prevents service loops on the major ring and sub-ring.
ERPS Trigger Conditions

⚫ Automatic switching triggered by any of the following alarms:
 ETH_LINK_DOWN, ETH_CFM_LOC, ETH_CFM_RDI, MAC_FCS_SD, ERPS_CFM_FAIL, R_LOS,
PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE, OTUk_SSF, OTUk_AIS, OTUk_LOF, ODUk_TCMn_SSF,
ODUk_PM_SSF, ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_LCK, ODUk_PM_OCI, OTUk_LOM,
ODUk_LOFLOM, OPUk_PLM, OPUk_MSIM, OTUk_TIM, ODUk_PM_TIM, ODUk_TCMn_TIM,
ODUk_TCMn_LTC, ODUk_TCMn_OCI, ODUk_TCMn_LCK, and ODUk_TCMn_AIS
⚫ Automatic switching triggered by hardware failures
⚫ External switching
• Automatic switching can be triggered by hardware failures, such as a subrack

power failure, board failure, optical module failure, board removal and insertion,
and board reset.
• Trigger conditions of external switching:

▫ External switching of ERPS can be triggered by running any of the following
commands (in descending order of priority):
▪ Switching clearing: clears external switching.
▪ Forced switching: immediately blocks the node port specified by the

command, regardless of whether a link fault occurs.
▪ Manual switching: blocks the node port specified by the command

only when no link fault occurs on the ring or no forced switching
condition exists.
ERPS LPT (Packet) MRPS
Introduction to LPT (Packet)

⚫ The LPT function is
used to detect and
report faults on Backup network
service access nodes

and the intermediate
service network,
ensuring the normal
Service
transmission of Access network Access
node link node link
important data.
Access Access
node A node B
Service Service
device A device B
• On a traditional network, services are protected against faults on service access

nodes or the intermediate service network. With growing user demands, when
faults occur both on a service access node and the intermediate service network,
traditional network functions fail to protect user services.
• The LPT function can be enabled to proactively detect and report faults on
service access nodes and the intermediate service network. If faults occur both on
a service access node and the intermediate service network, the user access
devices at both ends of the service network are notified to use the backup
network for communication, ensuring normal transmission of important data.
• Node types:
▫ Primary node: A primary node is the entity running the LPT protocol. The
system determines the LPT status based on the running status of the
primary node.
▫ Secondary node: A secondary node detects and transfers status changes, for
example, status changes of ports and remote nodes.
▫ In P2P LPT, there are one primary node and one secondary node. In point-
to-multipoint (P2MP) LPT, there are one primary node and multiple
secondary nodes.
Protection Switching and Revertive Switching of P2P LPT
Backup network
Reports a link Reports an

Stops reporting LPT_CFG_C Broken
the link fault fault alarm for
access node A. LOSEPORT control frame
alarm. alarm.
Non-broken
Recovers the
connection.
control frame
Service Access node B

Access node A network
Detects a Service Service
fault. Ends the Stops reporting the
device A device B
Detects fault connection. LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT
recovery. alarm.
• Protection switching:
▫ Service device A detects a fault on the link to access node A.
▫ Service device A reports a link fault alarm for access node A, and sends a
Broken control frame to service device B.
▫ After receiving the Broken control frame, service device B ends the
connection to access node B.
▫ Service device B reports an LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm.
• Fault recovery:
▫ Service device A detects that the fault on the link to access node A is
rectified.
▫ Service device A stops reporting the link fault alarm, and sends a
Non_Broken control frame to service device B.
▫ After receiving the Non_Broken control frame, service device B recovers the
connection to access node B.
▫ Service device B stops reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm.
P2MP LPT Switching – Link Fault on an Aggregation-Side

Access Node
Backup network
4. Reports an
LPT_CFG_CL
2. Reports a link 3. Ends the
OSEPORT
fault alarm for alarm. connection.
access node A.
Service
device C
Service Access
Service network node C
Access device A
node A 1. Detects
Service device B
a fault.
Access
4. Reports an
LPT_CFG_CLOS 3. Ends the node B
EPORT alarm. connection.
• Fault recovery:
▫ Service device A detects that the fault on the link to access node A is
rectified.
▫ Service device A stops reporting the link fault alarm, and sends Non_Broken
control frames to service devices B and C.
▫ After receiving the Non_Broken control frames, service devices B and C

recover the connections to access nodes B and C, respectively.
▫ Service devices B and C stop reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarms.

P2MP LPT Switching – Link Fault Alarm on an Access-Side

Node (Non-strict Mode)
Backup network
2. Reports a link
4. Reports an
fault alarm for 1. Detects
LPT_CFG_CLO
access node C. a fault.
SEPORT
alarm.
Service Access node C

Service device C
Service
Access device A network
node A Service
3. Ends the connection
to access node A after device B Access
receiving a Broken 6. Reports an
LPT_CFG_CLOS
node B
control frame from 5. Ends the connection.
service device C. EPORT alarm.
• P2MP LPT protection switching can be in either of the following modes:
▫ Strict mode: Protection switching is triggered on the primary node only

when all secondary nodes fail.
▫ Non-strict mode: Protection switching is triggered on the primary node as

long as one of the secondary nodes fails.
• Fault recovery:
▫ Service device B detects that the fault on the link to the access node is
rectified.
▫ Service device B stops reporting the link fault alarm, and sends a
Non_Broken control frame to service device A.
▫ After receiving the Non_Broken control frame, service device A recovers the
connection to access node A.
▫ Service device A stops reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm and sends
a Non_Broken control frame to service device C.
▫ After receiving the Non_Broken control frame, service device C recovers the
connection to access node C.
▫ Service device C stops reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm.
P2MP LPT Switching – Link Fault on an Access-Side Node

(Strict Mode)
Backup network
2. Reports a link
6. Reports an 1.
fault alarm for
LPT_CFG_CLO Detects
access node C.
SEPORT a fault.
alarm.
Service Access node C

Service device C
Service
Access node A device A
network
5. Ends the connection to Service device B
access node A after 4. Reports a Access
receiving Broken control link fault node B
frames from all other alarm for 3. Detects a fault.
service devices. access node B.
• Fault recovery:
▫ Service device B detects that the fault on the link to access node B is
rectified.
▫ Service device B stops reporting the link fault alarm, and sends a
Non_Broken control frame to service device A.
▫ After receiving the Non_Broken control frame, service device A recovers the
connection to access node A.
▫ Service device A stops reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarm and sends

a Non_Broken control frame to service device C.

P2MP LPT Switching – Service Network Fault (Non-strict

Mode)
Backup network
3. Reports an
LPT_CFG_CL 1. Detects
3. Reports an OSEPORT a service
2. Ends the connection to 2. Ends the
LPT_CFG_CLOSE alarm. network
access node A after receiving PORT alarm. connection to
fault.
a Broken control frame from access node C.
service device C.
Service Access
Service device C node C
Service
Access device A network
node A
1. Detects a Service device B
service network Access
fault. 5. Reports an 4. Ends the
LPT_CFG_CLOSEPOR
node B
connection.
T alarm.
• Fault recovery:
▫ Service devices A and B detect that the fault on the service network
between them is rectified.
▫ Service devices A and B recover the connections to access nodes A and B,

respectively.
▫ Service devices A and B stop reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarms,

and exchange Non_Broken control frames. Furthermore, service device A
sends a Non_Broken control frame to service device C.
P2MP LPT Switching – Service Network Fault (Strict Mode)
Backup network
1. Detects a
fault on the
3. Reports service
7. Ends the connection to 4. Detects a fault an network
access node A after on the service LPT_CFG_CL between
receiving Broken control network between OSEPORT service devices
frames from all other service devices A alarm. A and C. 2. Ends the
service devices. and B.
connection to
access node C.
Access Service Access node C

node A Service device A device C
Service
1. Detects a fault on network
the service network Service device B
between service 6. Reports an
devices A and C. Access node B
8. Reports an LPT_CFG_CLOSEPOR 4. Detects a fault on
T alarm. the service network 5. Ends the
LPT_CFG_CLOS
between service connection to
EPORT alarm.
devices A and B. access node B.
• Fault recovery:
▫ Service devices A and B detect that the fault on the service network
▫ Service devices A and B recover the connections to access nodes A and B,

respectively.
▫ Service devices A and B stop reporting the LPT_CFG_CLOSEPORT alarms,

and exchange Non_Broken control frames.
▫ Service devices A and C detect that the fault on the service network
▫ Service device C recovers the connection to access node C.

Furthermore, service devices A and C exchange Non_Broken control frames.
LPT Protection Trigger Conditions

⚫ Fault detection mode:
 LPT OAM:
◼ ETH_LOS, ETH_LINK_DOWN, PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE, and LASER_MODULE_MISMATCH
 PW OAM:
◼ Network side: MPLS_PW_LOCV
◼
User side: ETH_LOS, ETH_LINK_DOWN, PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE, and
LASER_MODULE_MISMATCH
• After LPT is enabled, a network fault is detected in either of the following modes:
▫ LPT OAM: The LPT protocol components exchange LPT packets between
LPT NEs on a service network, and determine the status of the LPT links
between the NEs based on the negotiation result.
▫ PW OAM: The LPT protocol components exchange LPT packets between
LPT NEs on a service network and determine the status of the LPT links
between the NEs based on the negotiation result and the status of PWs
carried on the LPT links. If negotiation using LPT packets fails or PWs are
faulty, the LPT protocol components consider the LPT links faulty.
▫ The LPT protocol components consider the LPT links normal only when
negotiation using LPT packets is successful and PWs are normal.
LPT (Packet) MRPS LMSP
MRPS Overview
⚫ MPLS-TP Ring Protection Switching (MRPS) protects packet services on ring
networks. When the forward working path is faulty, MRPS switches services to the
reverse protection path.
Single ring Intersecting rings
• Currently, MS-OTN products support two-fiber bidirectional ring protection.

MRPS Node Model

⚫ Working paths: Raw and
Rcw West East West East
⚫ Protection paths: Rap and

Rcp East West
⚫ Rap protects Rcw.

⚫ Rcp protects Raw.
West East
⚫ That is, the protection path
in one direction protects
East West East West
the working path in the
Raw: counterclockwise working path
other direction. Rap: counterclockwise protection path
Rcp: clockwise protection path
Rcw: clockwise working path
• Each node on the ring has two ports connected to adjacent nodes. To ensure that
the ports on the ring are in the same direction, assume that:
▫ Facing a ring, the port that signals traverse first on a node in the clockwise
direction is the east port. Each node on the ring has two ports: One is the
east port and the other is the west port.
• Ring label: Four ring labels are used to identify the four logical ring channels in
an MRPS protection group:
▫ Rcw: clockwise working path
▫ Rcp: clockwise protection path

▫ Raw: counterclockwise working path
▫ Rap: counterclockwise protection path

Service Transmission Principles on an MPLS-TP Ring Network

Payload
1. Pop Raw
2. Pop tunnel
NE1 NE2 NE3 3. Pop PW
Service dropping node
Payload
PW
Pass-through node Tunnel
Raw 43
1. Push PW Service Pass-through node

2. Push tunnel adding
3. Push Raw node Swap Raw
NE6 Payload Payload NE5 Payload Payload NE4
PW PW PW PW
Tunnel Tunnel Tunnel Tunnel
Payload Raw 63 Raw 63 Raw 53 Raw 53
Swap Raw
• Services on an MPLS-TP ring network require outer ring labels in addition to PW

and tunnel labels.
• The figure above uses a unidirectional service from NE5 to NE3 as an example.
The service channel is the counterclockwise working path. Transmission of
services in other directions is similar.
• Service adding node: indicates the first node that a service traverses on an MPLS-
TP ring, such as NE6 shown in the figure above. NE5 receives a service, and adds
a PW label, tunnel label, and ring label (for example, the counterclockwise
working path label shown above) to the service.
• Pass-through node: indicates the intermediate node that the service traverses in
an MPLS-TP ring, such as NE5 and NE4 shown in the figure above. NE5 and NE4
retain the PW label and tunnel label, but swap the ring label.
• Push: adds a label.
• Pop: removes a label.
• Swap: swaps a label.
Protection Switching on a Single MPLS-TP Ring
NE6 West East NE5 West East NE4
East West
Swaps a Rap label Swaps an Rcp label

for an Rcw label for a Raw label
West East
Swaps an Rcw label for a

Rap label
East West East West

NE1 Swaps a Raw label NE2 NE3
for an Rcp label Raw: counterclockwise working path
After switching, the service path from NE1 to NE4 is as follows: NE1 → NE2 →
Rap: counterclockwise protection path
NE1 → NE6 → NE5 → NE4 → NE3 → NE4
After switching, the service path from NE4 to NE1 is as follows: NE4 → NE3 → Rcp: clockwise protection path
NE4 → NE5 → NE6 → NE1 → NE2 → NE1 Rcw: clockwise working path
• As shown in the figure above, an MPLS-TP ring network consists of six nodes. A
service is added to the ring network through NE1, traverses NE2 and NE3, and is
dropped from the ring network through NE4. The service path from NE1 to NE4
is as follows: NE1 → NE2 → NE3 → NE4.
• When the link between NE2 and NE3 fails, NE2 and NE3 are the first to detect
the failure. NE2 switches the services on its east port from the counterclockwise
working path to the clockwise protection path (swapping a Raw label for an Rcp
label). NE3 switches the services on its west port from the clockwise protection
path to the counterclockwise working path (swapping an Rcp label for a Raw
label). After switching, the service path from NE1 to NE4 is as follows: NE1 →
NE2 → NE1 → NE6 → NE5 → NE4 → NE3 → NE4.
Protection Switching on Dual MPLS-TP Rings
NE7 NE9
NE8
Ring 2
NE10
NE6 NE4
NE5
Ring 1
NE1 NE3
NE2
• Two MPLS-TP rings are intersected, and NE4 and NE6 are intersecting nodes. In
normal cases, services are transmitted on the working path. Services are added to
the ring network through NE1, traverse NE2 and NE3, and are dropped from the
ring network through NE9. Services are transmitted across rings 1 and 2. The
service path is as follows: NE1 → NE2 → NE3 → NE4 → NE9.
• If an intersecting node (NE4) fails, when services are transmitted to NE3 on ring
1, NE3 detects the NE4 failure through OAM and switches the services from the
counterclockwise working path to the clockwise protection path. When the
services are transmitted to NE5 on the clockwise protection path, NE5 also
detects the NE4 failure and switches the services from the clockwise protection
path to the counterclockwise working path.
MRPS Trigger Conditions

⚫ Trigger conditions (in descending order of priority):
 Switching clearing (external switching) > Working path lockout (external switching) >
Protection path lockout (external switching) > Forced switching to protection (external
switching) > Signal fail (automatic switching) > Signal degrade (automatic switching) >
Manual switching to protection (external switching) > WTR (automatic switching) >
Exercise switching (external switching)
• MRPS supports automatic and external switching.
• MRPS is revertive.
MRPS LMSP Packet SNCP
Introduction to LMSP
⚫ Applicable to a P2P physical network, the packet linear multiplex section protection
(LMSP) scheme provides MS-layer protection for services transmitted between two
nodes.
⚫ Packet LMSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in multiplex section overheads (MSOHs) to
achieve automatic protection switching. Packet LMSP mainly applies to the scenario
where OptiX OSN devices are interconnected with radio network controllers (RNCs).
PSN SDH
MS-OTN RNC
• The packet LMSP scheme consists of the following parts:
▫ LMSP on MS-OTN devices
▫ LMSP on RNCs
LMSP Types
⚫ Classified by protection mechanism:
 1:1 packet LMSP
 1+1 packet LMSP
⚫ Classified by switching mode:
 Unidirectional switching
 Bidirectional switching
⚫ Classified by revertive mode:
 Revertive
 Non-revertive
• The packet LMSP scheme uses the K1 and K2 bytes in MSOHs to transfer
switching requests and thus to implement automatic protection switching. LMSP
can be classified into different types by protection mechanism, switching mode,
and revertive mode.
• Switching protocol:
▫ Bidirectional switching: The LMSP protocol is required.
▫ Unidirectional switching: The LMSP protocol is not required.

Principles of 1:1 Packet LMSP
NE A NE B
Forward working path
Forward protection path

Reverse working path
Reverse protection path Forward working path
Reverse protection path
• Packet LMSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in MSOHs of SDH frames to transmit
protocol information and thus control the receive and transmit paths of services.
In this way, packet LMSP protects MS-layer services.
• Bidirectional switching (switching process):

▫ Before switching, both the source end and sink end receive and transmit
services on the working path. The protection path cannot be used to
transmit extra services.
▫ When the sink end in a specified direction (NE B) detects SF on the working
path, it sends K bytes (request type: SF) to the source end (NE A) on the
protection path between NE A and NE B.
▫ NE A receives services from the protection path and sends K bytes (request
type: reverse request) to NE B on the protection path between NE A and NE
B.
▫ NE B receives services on the protection path.
Principles of 1+1 Packet LMSP Unidirectional Protection
NE A NE B
• Protection switching process:
▫ Before switching, the source end transmits service signals on both the
working and protection paths, and the sink end selectively receives service
signals on the working path.
▫ When detecting SF on the working path, the sink end in a specified
direction (NE B) reports SF to the system control board.
▫ When detecting SF on the working path but the protection path is normal,
the system control board instructs the sink end to selectively receive
services on the protection path.
▫ The services received at the source end (NE A) are not switched.
▫ NE A receives services on the working path, and NE B receives services on
the protection path.
• Revertive switching process:
▫ When detecting that the working path is recovered, NE B selectively
receives services on the working path after the WTR time elapses.
Principles of 1+1 Packet LMSP Bidirectional Protection
NE A NE B
• Protection switching process:

▫ Before switching, the source end transmits service signals on both the
working and protection paths, and the sink end selectively receives service
signals on the working path.
▫ When the sink end in a specified direction (NE B) detects SF on the working
path, it sends K bytes (request type: SF) to the source end (NE A) on the
protection path between NE A and NE B.
▫ NE A sends K bytes (request type: reverse request) to NE B on the
protection path.
▫ Services received at both the source and sink ends undergo protection
switching.
▫ Both NE A and NE B receive services on the protection path.
• Revertive switching process:
▫ After the sink end (NE B) detects that the working path is recovered, it
sends K bytes (request type: WTR) to the source end (NE A) on the working
path.
▫ NE A sends K bytes (request type: reverse request) to NE B on the working
path.
▫ Services received at both the source and sink ends undergo protection
switching.
▫ Both NE A and NE B receive services on the working path.
Trigger Condition of LMSP Switching

⚫ Board fault: A key board is faulty (for example, a line board is powered off or
cannot be detected).
⚫ SF: R_LOS, R_LOF, MS_AIS, and B2_EXC
⚫ SD: B2_SD
• Any of the preceding conditions will trigger switching.

Introduction to Packet SNCP
NE D
CE NE E NE A NE B CE
NE C
ODUk Working signal flow Packets

Universal
Line
line
board Cross-
Cross- board
Tributary connect Packet
connect
board board service
board
board
Line Universal
board line
board
ODUk SNCP Protection Packet SNCP
signal flow
• This slide describes how packet services are protected when a link, line board, or
universal line board is faulty if pure OTN devices are interconnected with OTN
devices that support the packet feature.
• NEs A, C, and D are pure OTN devices, and NEs B and E are OTN devices that
support the packet feature.
Normal State of Packet SNCP
Cross-connect Universal Cross-connect

board Line board line board board
ODUk Working Packets
signal flow Packet service
Tributary board board
Protection
Line board signal flow Universal line board
ODUk SNCP Site A Site B Packet SNCP
• Packet SNCP in the receive direction:
▫ The working and protection line boards transmit services to the working
and protection universal line boards, respectively.
▫ The working universal line board selectively receives the services.

▫ The working universal line board transmits the services to the cross-connect
board.
• Packet SNCP in the transmit direction:
▫ The cross-connect board transmits services to both the working and

protection universal line boards.
▫ The working and protection universal line boards transmit the services to
the working and protection line boards, respectively.
• ODUk SNCP in the receive direction:
▫ The tributary board works together with the cross-connect and line boards
to selectively receive services on the working path.
• ODUk SNCP in the transmit direction:
▫ The working and protection line boards work together with the cross-
connect board and tributary board to transmit services on both the working
and protection paths.
Line-Side Fault in the Receive Direction of a Universal Line

Board
board Line board Working line board board
ODUk signal flow Packets
Tributary Packet service
board board
Protection
▫ After a fault is detected on the working universal line board, packet SNCP
switching is triggered.
▫ The protection universal line board selectively receives the services, and
then transmits the services to the cross-connect board.

▫ Services are still received on the working path, without the need for
protection switching.
Fault on a Universal Line Board

Tributary signal flow Packet service
board board
Protection
▫ After a fault is detected on the working universal line board, packet SNCP
switching is triggered.

▫ After a fault is detected on the working universal line board, protection

switching is triggering in the transmit direction.
▫ The protection universal line board receives the services from the cross-
connect board, and then transmits the services to the protection line board.
▫ In the receive direction, services are switched to the protection path.
Line-Side Fault in the Receive Direction of a Line Board

board board
Protection
▫ Services are still received on the working path, without the need for
protection switching.

▫ In the transmit direction, services are switched to the protection path.
▫ The protection universal line board receives the services from the cross-
connect board, and then transmits the services to the protection line board.
▫ After a fault is detected on the working line board, protection switching is

triggered in the receive direction of ODUk SNCP.
Fault on a Line Board

board board
Protection
▫ After a fault is detected on the working line board, protection switching is

triggered in the receive direction of ODUk SNCP.
▫ Only the protection line board transmits services to the protection universal
line board.
Trigger Conditions of Packet SNCP

⚫ Packet SNCP can be classified into three types: SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S. The three
protection types differ in the capability of monitoring SM, PM, and TCM overheads
and therefore have different trigger conditions.
⚫ The trigger conditions for automatic protection switching of packet SNCP are as
follows:
 A board cannot be detected. For example, a board is removed or undergoes a cold reset.
 SF: OTUk_LOF, OTUk_AIS, and so on
 SD: OTUk_DEG, OTUk_EXC, and so on
• The SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S protection types of packet SNCP correspond to the
SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S protection types of ODUk SNCP respectively, and they
have the same application scenarios.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following are external switching conditions for
tunnel APS?
A. Switching clearing
B. SF switching
C. Protection tunnel lockout
D. Exercise switching
2. (True or False) In MRPS protection, when a fault occurs, a Raw label is swapped for a Rap
label and services are switched to the protection path.
A. True
B. False
• Answers:
▫ 1. ACD
▫ 2. False
Section Summary
⚫ This chapter describes various protection technologies for MS-OTN packet

protection, including:
 LAG and MC-LAG
 Tunnel APS, PW APS/FPS, and MC-PW APS
 ERPS
 LPT (packet)
 MRPS
 LMSP
 Packet SNCP

Summary
⚫ This chapter describes the protection principles of MS-OTN devices,

including device-level protection and network-level protection.
⚫ Device-level protection protects important boards inside devices.
⚫ Network-level protection protects signals on the network. This chapter
describes the basic concepts, switching principles, and trigger conditions of
network-level protection (OTN) and network-level protection (packet)
schemes.

intelligent world.


that
Routine NG WDM Device Maintenance
Foreword
⚫ The device and NMS maintenance ensures that a device has a good
running environment and works in the optimal state, which is significant
for the services on the live network.
Objectives

 Understand the precautions for routine maintenance.
 Be familiar with device and NMS maintenance operations.
 Perform routine maintenance as required.
Contents
1. Routine Device Maintenance

◼ Precautions for Routine Maintenance
▫ Basic Operations During Routine Maintenance
▫ Onsite Routine Device Maintenance
2. Routine NMS Maintenance
Warning and Safety Symbols
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Symbol indicating regular

ESD prevention symbol
cleaning of the air filter
Laser class symbol (1M or

Fan safety warning symbol
higher)
Grounding symbol
APD warning symbol
• ESD prevention symbol
▫ Indicates that you should wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves
when you touch a board. Otherwise, damage might be caused to the board.
• Laser class symbol

▫ Indicates the class of the laser. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams
launched from the optical port. Otherwise, damage might be caused to
your skin or eyes.
• Grounding symbol
▫ Indicates where a device is grounded.

• Symbol indicating regular cleaning of the air filter
▫ Indicates that the air filter should be cleaned periodically.
• Fan safety warning symbol
▫ Warns you not to touch the fan blade unless the fan stops moving.
• APD warning symbol
▫ Indicates that the overload value of an optical port is –9 dBm.

One-dimensional Bar Code of a Board
⚫ Bar code (example 1)
• The letter M in TN1M2 indicates a configuration board. The related configuration

information must be provided for the production of the board.
• LSX01 indicates the DWDM-type LSX board. LSX02 indicates the CWDM-type LSX
board.
• A board feature code is described as follows:
▫ The first five digits indicate the frequency of the DWDM-side optical
transmitter module.
▫ The sixth character (A or P) indicates the type of the DWDM-side optical

receiver module. A indicates the APD and P indicates the PIN.
▫ The seventh character indicates the type of the DWDM-side optical
transmitter module. For details, see the product documentation.
• You can query the bar code of a board on the NMS.

▫ Open the Network Management app and choose Resource > Project
Documents from the main menu. On the Project Document page, expand
Project Document and click Board Manufacturer Information. Then, click
the Board Manufacturer Information tab.
▫ Alternatively, right-click a board on the NE panel and choose Board
Manufacturer Information from the shortcut menu.
Two-dimensional Bar Code of a Board
• One-dimensional (1D) bar code: A 1D code contains the serial number of an

item, complies with the ISO/IEC 15417 Code128 standard, and is used for bar
code scanning.
• A BOM number refers to the ID of an item. It is a string of 8 to 17 characters
containing letters, digits, hyphens (-), and equal signs (=). A BOM number is also
known as a part number (PN). The BOM number of a board is generally a string
of 8 or 12 characters, and a maximum of 17 characters is allowed.
• A revision is the version of a product item. It records the changes in the technical
status of the product item, in the format of one letter and two digits.
• RoHS compliance indicates the environmentally friendly flag of an item. Y
indicates that the item complies with the RoHS5 standard, but whether the item
contains lead or is lead-free is not specified. Y1 and Y3 indicate that the item
complies with the RoHS5 standard and contains lead. Y2 indicates that the item
complies with the RoHS6 standard and is lead-free. N indicates that the item is
not environment-friendly.
• A serial number (SN) is the unique identifier of an item, which helps after-sales
personnel identify the warranty period. An SN is a string of 12, 16, or 20
characters containing digits and letters.
• A model can contain digits and letters. For a board, this field contains
information about the version, name, type, and correlation of the board.
• The country of origin indicates the country in which an item is manufactured.
Laser
⚫ Personal safety:

The laser beam emitted from the optical interface board is infrared light, which may cause
permanent eye injury.
⚫ Device safety:
 Use protective caps to cover optical ports and optical connectors that are not in use.
 Use an attenuator for hardware loopback.
 Replace optical interface boards or optical modules only when necessary.
 Before using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR), remove the pigtail between the peer
site and the optical interface board.
Recommended Not recommended

• Before using an OTDR, remove the pigtail between the peer site and the optical
interface board. This prevents high optical power from damaging the optical
receiver.
• Maintenance precautions for Raman amplifiers:
▫ The maximum optical power of the pump laser of a Raman amplifier
reaches 27 dBm. The LINE and EXT ports are connected to the E2000
connector, and the SYS and MON ports are connected to the LC-LC
connector.
▫ For the Raman amplifier board with backward pump, the strong pump light
enters fibers at the input end (LINE port) instead of the output end (SYS
port). Do not add boards or non-fiber devices, such as attenuators or fiber
patch cords at the input end.
▫ The bending radius of a pigtail must be greater than 3 cm. Otherwise, the
pigtail may be burnt.
▫ After the Raman amplifier board is powered on, the laser is turned off by
default. To turn on the laser, you need to issue a command. Before turning
on the laser, you must connect the fiber patch cord at the input end and
that of the customer's ODF cabinet. Ensure the cleanliness of a fiber
connector when removing or connecting a fiber. If the fiber connector is
unclean, it may be damaged.
▫ If the Raman amplifier board is used, the additional loss of a single point
on the fiber line must meet the following requirements:
▪ Do not use any fiber connector within 0–20 km.
▪ The additional loss of a single point within 0–10 km must be less than
0.1 dB (G.652) or 0.2 dB (G.655).
▪ The additional loss of a single point within 10–20 km must be less
than 0.2 dB (G.652) or 0.4 dB (G.655), and the return loss of a single
point must be greater than or equal to 40 dB.
Electricity
⚫ Precautions for power supply maintenance:
 Do not install or remove a device while the power is on.
 Do not install or remove power cables while the power is on.
 Before connecting power cables, verify that the labels of the power cables are consistent
with those of the cables connected.
⚫ Precautions for ESD protection:
 Before touching a device, or holding the
boards or IC chips, wear a pair of ESD
gloves or an ESD wrist strap.
• Electrical Safety
▫ High voltage
▪ The high voltage power supply offers power for the device operation.
Direct or indirect contact (through damp objects) with high voltage
and AC mains supply may result in serious injury.
▪ Non-standard and improper high voltage operations may result in fire
and electric shock. Therefore, you must abide by the local laws and
regulations when bridging and wiring AC cables through a certain
area. Only qualified personnel are allowed to perform high voltage
and AC operations.
▫ Power cable
▪ Do not install or remove the power cable while the power is on.
Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the
conductor may generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause fire
or eye injury.
▫ Tool
▪ During high voltage and AC operations, special tools must be used,
instead of common tools.
▫ ESD
▪ The static electricity generated by the human body may damage
electrostatic-sensitive components on circuit boards, such as the
large-scale integrated circuit (IC). Before operating devices, or holding
boards, circuit boards, or ICs, wear a properly-grounded ESD wrist
strap to prevent electrostatic-sensitive components from being
damaged by the static electricity on the human body.
Board Maintenance
⚫ ESD protection:
 Keep a board in an ESD bag when it is not in use.
 Wear a properly-grounded ESD wrist strap when taking out a board.
⚫ Moisture proof:
 Use desiccants in an ESD bag to keep the bag dry.
⚫ Mechanical safety:
 Avoid vibrations during board transportation because the board may easily be damaged
by the vibrations.
• When the board in an ESD bag is moved from a cold and dry place to a hot and
damp place, wait at least 30 minutes before unpacking the board. Otherwise, the
moisture condensed on the board surface may damage the board.
• To prevent damage caused by vibrations during board transportation, a standby

board is packaged in three layers from inside out: ESD shielding bag, vibration-
proof foam or plastic filler (also for ESD protection purpose), and packing box.
Contents

▫ Precautions for Routine Maintenance
◼ Basic Operations During Routine Maintenance
▫ Onsite Routine Device Maintenance
Checking the Running Environment (1)
⚫ Temperature and humidity requirements for the equipment room
Cabinet Temperature Subrack Temperature

- Long-term Short-term
–5℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 50℃ –10℃ to 55℃
Relative Humidity
Long-term Short-term
5% to 85% 5% to 95%
• Use a thermometer and a hygrometer to measure the temperature and humidity

of the equipment room. Measure the temperature and humidity at the place 1.5
m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the rack (no protection boards in front or
at the rear of the rack).
• The short-term operating conditions indicate that the successive working time of
a device does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated annual working time
does not exceed 15 days.
• To meet the preceding requirements, take the following measures in an
equipment room:
▫ Use temperature-control devices in the equipment room throughout the
year, regardless of the weather conditions.
▫ If the equipment room is located in a dry area, use a humidifier inside the
room or regularly clean the floor with a wet mop.
▫ If the equipment room is located in a damp area, use a dehumidifier.
• Check whether the equipment room meets the disaster protection requirements.
Ensure the following points:
▫ There should be portable foam fire extinguishers in the equipment room.
The fire extinguishers should be in their service life.
▫ There should be no rain leakage or water penetration in the equipment
room.
▫ There should be no mice or insects in the equipment room.
• Clean equipment room: Ensure that there is no dust on the cabinets, on the
device shelves, in devices, on the desks, or on the floor. The devices should be
tidy.
• Air conditioners must not be installed above devices and must not blow directly
towards devices. Air conditioners should be installed away from windows to keep
them from blowing moisture to devices.
Checking the Running Environment (2)
⚫ Cabinet power voltage
 DC voltage of –48 V/–60 V
 Voltage range: –48 V/–60 V±20%
⚫ Proper grounding
 A device is jointly grounded. The grounding resistance must be less than 4 ohms to
prevent the device from being damaged by lightning.
• An NG WDM device supports –48 V or –60 V DC power input. Fiber patch cords
need to be set on the power monitoring board for different power inputs. When
checking whether the power supply is normal, you also need to check the fiber
patch cord settings of the board.
▫ When the standard voltage of the input power is –48 V, the power voltage
should range from –38.4 V to –57.6 V.
▫ When the standard voltage of the input power is –60 V, the power voltage
should range from –48 V to –72 V.
• The grounding resistance of a device in a comprehensive communication building

should be less than 10 ohms. The smaller the grounding resistance, the better.
Checking Fans
⚫ The fan board dissipates heat generated in the chassis and is pluggable.
 Dissipates heat generated by the chassis so that the chassis can function properly and
effectively within the designated temperature range.
 The fan speed can be classified into three levels: low, medium, and high. The default level
is low. The fan speed can be adjusted manually.
Indicator Status Description

On (green) The fan board is working properly.
On (red) The fan board reports the FAN_FAIL alarm.
Off The fan board is not powered on.
• Before removing a fan board from the OptiXtrans E6600, loosen the screws on
the fan board.
• The fan board of an NG WDM device is hot swappable and can effectively
suppress inrush current generated during hot swap. You can directly remove the
fan board to clean it. When a fan board is removed, it is automatically powered
off. When the fan board is inserted, it is automatically powered on.
• If any one of the four fans in a fan board fails, the OptiXtrans E6600 can keep
running properly for 96 consecutive hours at an ambient temperature of –5°C to
40°C.
• Replace the fan board immediately if two or more fans fail in the board.
Observing Indicators: Cabinet and Subrack Indicators
Status
Color Indicator
On Off
A critical alarm is generated on the device.

Critical alarm No critical alarm is
Red Generally, this alarm is generated with a
indicator generated on the device.
sound.
Major alarm No major alarm is generated

Orange A major alarm is generated on the device.
indicator on the device.
Minor alarm No minor alarm is generated

Yellow A minor alarm is generated on the device.
indicator on the device.
The power supply of the

Green Power indicator The power supply of the device is normal.
device is interrupted.
• The cabinet and subrack alarm indicators indicate only current alarms.
Observing Indicators: Common Board Indicators (1)
⚫ Indicators on the front panel of a board indicate the running status and alarm status
of the board.
⚫ Board indicators
 STAT, SRV, PROG, INn, etc.
⚫ Other indicators
 Fan indicator, APIU indicator, and PIU indicator
• The following uses the OptiXtrans E6600 as an example to describe the board
indicators.
Observing Indicators: Board Indicators (2)
Indicator
Indicator C olor Status Description
Si lkscreen
Green Steady on The board is working properly.
Green Blinking The board is in the maintenance state.
Board working status
STAT Yellow Steady on A minor alarm is generated.
indicator
Red Steady on The hardware of the board is faulty.
- Off The board is not working, created, or powered on.
Green Steady on Services on the board are normal.
Yellow Steady on A minor alarm is generated.
SRV Service status indicator Red Steady on A critical or major service-related alarm is generated.
Red Blinking The module type does not match.
- Off No service is configured.
Red Steady on There is no receive optical power.
Blinking slowly (on for 300 ms and off for 700 ms): The optical power at the
local end is excessively low.
Red Blinking
WDM-side receive Blinking quickly (on for 300 ms and off for 300 ms): The optical power at the
INn optical power status local end is excessively high.
indicator
Green Steady on The receive optical power is normal.
Yellow Steady on Reserved
- Off The optical module is not detected or the board is not powered on.
In dicator
I n dicator Color Status Description
Silkscreen
Red Steady on An R_LOS alarm is reported on the optical port of the board.
Blinking (three times every
Red The receive optical power of the optical port on the board is excessively high.
second)
LOSn Alarm indicator Red Blinking (once every second) The receive optical power of the optical port on the board is excessively low.
Red Blinking (once every 3 seconds) The optical port receives an MS_RDI alarm.
The board cannot be detected, the optical module is absent, or no R_LOS alarm is
- Off
reported on the optical port of the board.
Port mode Green The M1 indicator is steady on. GE mode
M1/M2
indicator Green The M2 indicator is steady on. 10GE mode
Green Steady on The port is physically connected (link up), but does not receive and transmit data.
Blinking (three times every Blinking quickly (on for 300 ms and off for 300 ms): The receive optical power is
Red
Ethernet port second) excessively high.
connection/Data
Blinking slowly (on for 300 ms and off for 700 ms): The receive optical power is
L/A receiving and Red Blinking (once every second)
excessively low.
transmitting
indicator Orange Blinking The port is properly connected (link up), and is receiving or transmitting data.
The optical fiber is disconnected from the port or the port is abnormal (link
- Off
down/LOS).
Green Steady on The receive optical power of the port is normal.
Red Steady on An R_LOS alarm is reported on the optical port of the board.
LOS Alarm indicator Red Blinking quickly The receive optical power of the optical port on the board is excessively high.
Red Blinking slowly The receive optical power of the optical port on the board is excessively low.
- Off The board cannot be detected or the optical module is absent.
Indicator
Indicator Color Status Description
Silkscreen
Blinking quickly (on for 100 ms and off for 100 ms): Software
Green Blinking is being loaded to the board during the board power-on or
reset process.
Blinking quickly (on for 300 ms and off for 300 ms): The
Green Blinking board software is in the BIOS boot state during the board
power-on or reset process.
Blinking quickly (on for 100 ms and off for 100 ms): The
Red Blinking BOOTROM self-check fails during the board power-on or
reset process.
Software status
PROG • The upper-layer software is being initialized.
indicator Green Steady on
• The software is running properly.
• The memory self-check or upper-layer software loading

fails during the board power-on or reset process.
Red Steady on • The logic file or upper-layer software is lost during the
board running process.
• The pluggable storage card is faulty.
The board is not powered on or works in low power

- Off
consumption mode.
Indicator
Indicator C olor Status Description
Si lkscreen
Green Steady on The clock board is working properly.
Clock The clock board reports a major alarm (for example, an alarm indicating that a clock
Red Steady on
SYNC synchronization source is lost or a clock switchover occurs).
indicator Yellow Steady on The clock board reports a minor alarm (for example, CLK_LOCK_FAIL).
- Off The clock board is not powered on.
The system control board is working as the active one (in 1+1 protection).
Green Steady on
Service activation The system control board has been activated (without protection).
status indicator Blinking quickly (on for 100 ms and off for 100 ms): The system database on the
SCC_ACT Green Blinking
of the system system control board is being backed up.
control board The system control board is working as the standby one (in 1+1 protection).
- Off
The system control board has not been activated (without protection).
The cross-connect board is working as the active one (in 1+1 protection).
Service activation Green Steady on
status indicator The cross-connect board has been activated (without protection).
XCS_ACT
of the cross- The cross-connect board is working as the standby one (in 1+1 protection).
connect board - Off
The cross-connect board has not been activated (without protection).
Red Steady on A critical alarm is generated on the NE.
Critical alarm The board is working in the slave subrack.
CRIT
indicator - Off The board works properly in the master subrack.
The board is not powered on.
Observing Indicators: Other Indicators
Indicator Status Description
On (green) The fan is running properly.
On (red) A FAN_FAIL alarm is generated.

Fan indicator
On (yellow) The fan is undergoing a LAMP test.
Off The fan is not powered on.
On (green) The input power voltage is normal.
The input power voltage is abnormal. For

Power status indicator (PWR) On (red) example, undervoltage or overvoltage
occurs.
Off Power access fails.
Checking a Fiber Connector
⚫ Fiber surface observed by a microscope
Cladding Fiber Cladding Fiber Cladding

Fiber core
core core
Intact Damaged Flawed
• Note:
▫ The laser light is invisible and very dangerous. Avoid direct eye exposure to
laser radiation from the fiber connector or the optical port. Failure to follow
this warning can cause damage to the eyes, or even blindness. You are
advised to use a fiber microscope with a safety design or a desktop video
fiber microscope.
Cleaning a Fiber Connector
Using a cassette cleaner Using a lens tissue
• Procedure for using a cassette cleaner to clean a fiber connector

▫ Hold down the handle of the cassette cleaner. The shutter slides backward
and a new cleaning area is exposed.
▫ Hold the fiber connector lightly against the cleaning area.
▫ Gently drag the fiber connector on the cleaning area once. Repeat this
operation on another cleaning area along the same direction.
▪ Note: Do not use the same cleaning area to clean the fiber connector
for more than once. Otherwise, the fiber connector may be
contaminated or damaged.
▫ Release the handle to close the cassette cleaner and the cleaning area.
• Procedure for using a lens tissue to clean a fiber connector
▫ Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on a lens tissue.
▫ Use the lens tissue to clean the fiber connector, as shown in the upper right
figure.
▫ Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber connector.
▪ Keep the injector nozzle close to the connector surface without
touching it.
▪ First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of
concentrates may contain some sediments.
▪ If no compressed gas is available, use a cleaning roll.
Cleaning a Fiber Adapter
⚫ Dust-free cotton stick for SC and FC optical ports
⚫ Dust-free cotton stick for the LC optical port
⚫ Compressed air
• Procedure
▫ Turn off the laser of the optical port before cleaning. Disconnect the two
ends of the fiber to be cleaned.
▫ Use an optical power meter to test and ensure that the laser is shut down.
▫ Select a proper dust-free cotton stick based on the fiber adapter type.
▫ Drop a small amount of cleaning solvent on the dust-free cotton stick.
▫ Gently touch the fiber adapter with the dust-free cotton stick so that the
solvent to clean the adapter. Rotate the cotton stick clockwise four to five
times. Make sure that the tip of the dust-free cotton stick is directly
contacted with the adapter tip. Then, draw out the dust-free cotton stick
from the fiber adapter.
▫ Use the compressed gas to blow the fiber adapter.
▫ Note:
▪ When you use the compressed gas, keep the injector nozzle close to
the adapter surface without touching it.
▪ First spray the compressed gas into the air because the initial spray of
concentrates may contain some sediments.
▫ Use a fiber microscope to check the fiber end face. If the fiber end face is
still dirty, repeat the preceding steps.
▫ Connect the fiber adapter to the board or cover the optical port with a
protective cap.
▫ After the fiber adapter is properly connected to the board, turn on the laser
again.
Cleaning the Air Filter and Replacing a Fan Tray Assembly
Replacing the air filter Replacing a fan tray assembly
• Procedure for cleaning the air filter
▫ Hold the grooves on both sides of the air filter panel with both hands and
remove the air filter, as shown in the upper right figures. Clean the air filter
outdoors using water, wipe the air filter with a cloth, and then dry it with
an air blower.
▫ After cleaning the air filter, put it back to the fan tray assembly along the
guide rail at the bottom of the subrack. The upper left figure shows the
position of the air filter.
Loopback
⚫ Software loopback
⚫ Hardware loopback
 Client-side hardware loopback
Rx OUT
Optical attenuator
Tx IN
Client side WDM side
 WDM-side hardware loopback
Rx OUT
Optical attenuator
Tx IN
Client side WDM side
• When you perform a hardware loopback, add a proper optical attenuator

according to the receive optical power range of the board.
Testing the MON Port (1)
MON
Optical spectrum analyzer
• The MCA board can also be used for in-service test.
• Note: You are advised to turn on the internal attenuator of the optical spectrum
analyzer to avoid damage to the receiver optical module of the optical spectrum
analyzer due to excessively high optical power.
Testing the MON Port (2)
⚫ MON port split ratio
Ratio of the Optical Power of Signals
Ratio of the Optical Power of Signals
at the MON Port to That of
Board at the MON Port to That of Received
Transmitted Main Optical Channel
Main Optical Channel Signals
Signals
D40/D40V "MON"/"IN" = 10 dB -
M40/M40V/ITL - "MON"/"OUT" = 10 dB
RMU9 "MONI"/"EXPI" =15 dB "MONO"/"TOA" = 15 dB
WSD9 "MONI"/"IN" =15 dB "MONO"/"EXPO" = 15 dB
OAU1/OBU1/FIU - "MON"/"OUT" = 20 dB
EX40 "MONI"/"LINE" = 10.5 dB -
X40 "MOND"/"LINE" = 10 dB "MONM"/"LINE" = 10 dB
• The MON port is useful for the maintenance and troubleshooting of main optical
channel services.
Resetting a Board
⚫ Warm reset
 Perform a warm reset using the NMS.
 Perform a warm reset using the Web LCT.
 Perform a warm reset (on the system control board) using the RESET button.
⚫ Cold reset
 Perform a cold reset using the NMS.
 Perform a cold reset using the Web LCT.
 Perform a cold reset by removing and re-inserting a board.
• Warm reset
▫ Warm reset on the system control board:
▪ During a warm reset on the system control board, the FPGA will not
be updated, and configuration data in the memory will not be lost.
When a fault is detected, a warm reset is preferred.
▫ Warm resets on other boards:
▪ During warm resets on other boards, the FPGAs will not be updated
and services will not be affected. When a fault is detected, a warm
reset is preferred.
• Cold reset
▫ Cold reset on the SCC board:
▪ If the fault persists after a warm reset, perform a cold reset on the
SCC board.
▫ Cold resets on other boards:
▪ During cold resets on other boards, the FPGAs will be updated and
services will be affected. If the fault persists after a warm reset,
perform a cold reset on the board.
Inserting a Board
Board connector Backplane slot
• Wear an ESD wrist strap properly, and insert the plug into the ESD jack in the
subrack.
• If a filler panel is installed in the corresponding slot of the subrack, use a
screwdriver to loosen the captive screws anticlockwise on the filler panel, and
then pull the ejector levers outward to remove the filler panel.
• Hold the ejector levers on the front panel of the board and pull them outward, as
shown by step 1 in the figures above.
Removing a Board
Board connector Backplane slot
• Wear an ESD wrist strap properly, and insert the plug into the ESD jack in the
subrack.
• When removing a board, loosen the captive screws on the board, as shown by
step 1 in the figures above.
• Pull the ejector levers outward at the same time, so that they can make the
board out from the backplane, as shown by step 2 in the figures above.
• If the board is away from the backplane (about 1 cm), draw out the board
horizontally and gently, as shown by step 3 in the figures above.
• The removed board must be placed in an ESD box or bag. If no board is

configured in the slot, install a filler panel in the same way as installing a board.
• Note: If the front panel of a board is connected to power cables or pigtails,
remove them before inserting or removing the board.
Board Replacement Tools
⚫ ESD wrist strap or gloves: prevents sensitive components from being damaged by
static electricity on the human body.
⚫ Shielding bag (ESD bag): holds the components that need ESD protection.
⚫ Screwdriver: loosens/fastens screws on the board.
⚫ Optical power meter: tests the optical power.
• In addition, the NMS is required.
▫ Perform operations on components using the NMS, such as querying

alarms, uploading and downloading data, and performing protection
switching.
• You need to use the Web LCT on site.
▫ When replacing a system control, switching, and timing board, you can
perform the following operations using the Web LCT:
▪ Create an NE.
▪ Modify the NE ID, extended ID, and extended ECC.

▪ Create an NE user.
▪ Set NE attributes.
▪ Change the IP address of a gateway NE (GNE).

Replacing a Board (1)
Impact of Board Replacement on the System
Board Type
Protection Configuration
Client 1+1 protection Replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
If the working and protection channels of ODUk SNCP are configured on different boards, replacing the board will not
ODUk SNCP
affect services in the case of normal switching.
If the working and protection channels of ODUk SNCP are configured on the same board, replacing the board will
interrupt the services that traverse the board.
Intra-board 1+1 protection Replacing the board will interrupt services.
Inter-subrack wavelength protection Replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
Optical ERPS When a protection group is configured across boards, that is, the working and protection channels are not on the same
transponder LAG board, replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
unit (OTU) VLAN SNCP When a protection group is configured on the same board, replacing the board will interrupt the services that traverse
board SW SNCP the board.
If a service is added to the board, replacing the board will interrupt the added service.
STP/RSTP If the board to be replaced is only an intermediate E-LAN service forwarding node and adds no service, replacing the
MSTP board will trigger the protocol to recalculate an E-LAN service forwarding path. If a redundant path is available, the
services will recover after the protocol becomes stable.
During replacement of the local board, the LPT protocol will instruct the the peer board to shut down its client optical
LPT port and therefore trigger a subnet protection switching, resulting in a second-level service interruption. Replacing the
board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
Client 1+1 protection Replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
If the working and protection channels of ODUk SNCP are configured on different boards, replacing the board will not
ODUk SNCP
affect services in the case of normal switching.
OTN tributary If the working and protection channels of tributary SNCP are configured on the same board, replacing the board will
board Tributary SNCP
interrupt the services that traverse the board.
During replacement of the local board, the LPT protocol will instruct the the peer board to shut down its client optical
LPT port and therefore trigger a subnet protection switching, resulting in a second-level service interruption. Replacing the
board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
• If no protection is configured for a board, replacing the board will interrupt the
services that traverse the board.
• To replace the board, perform the following steps:
▫ Select a spare board. Select the spare board whose name, model,
parameters, and software version are the same as those of the board to be
replaced.
▫ Query and record the current alarms of the NE. For details, refer to
querying the current alarms and performance events on the NMS.
▫ Enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced on the
NMS.
▫ Check whether a service is configured on the board to be replaced. If the
board to be replaced is a protection board, replace it directly. If the board
to be replaced is a working board, switch the service to its protection board
and then replace the working board.
▫ Inform onsite maintenance engineers to remove the board to be replaced.
▫ Remove the board to be replaced from the chassis.
▫ Insert the new board.
▫ Check indicators on the new board. It takes about 5 minutes for a board to
work normally after being inserted. After the board works normally, the
indicator on the board should be green. If the indicator status is abnormal,
reseat the board or replace the board again.
▫ If the board removal indication function is enabled before board
replacement, disable this function on the NMS after the board replacement
is complete.
▫ Query alarms and performance events on the local NE and peer NE using
the NMS. Make sure that all the alarms and performance events in step 2
are cleared.
Board Type
Intra-board 1+1 protection Services on the board are interrupted.
OTN line If the working and protection channels of ODUk SNCP are configured on different boards,
ODUk SNCP
board replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
If the working and protection channels of tributary SNCP are configured on the same board,
Tributary SNCP
replacing the board will interrupt the services that traverse the board.
OTN protection: If ODUk SNCP is configured, replacing a board will not affect services in the case of normal
ODUk SNCP switching.
Intra-board 1+1 protection If intra-board 1+1 protection or tributary SNCP is configured, replacing a board will interrupt
Tributary SNCP services.
TDM protection:
Linear multiplex section protection (MSP)
Ring MSP
Universal line
SNCP When a protection group is configured across boards, that is, the working and protection
board
Packet protection: channels are not on the same board, replacing the board will not affect services in the case
Tunnel APS of normal switching.
PW FPS When a protection group is configured on the same board, replacing the board will interrupt
PW APS/LAG the services that traverse the board.
ERPS/Packet SNCP
LPT/MC-LAG
MRPS/MC-PW APS
• If no protection is configured for a board, replacing the board will interrupt the
services that traverse the board.
Board Type
Packet board Tunnel APS
PW APS/LAG When a protection group is configured across boards, that is, the working and protection channels are not
ERPS/PW FPS on the same board, replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
LMSP/LPT When a protection group is configured on the same board, replacing the board will interrupt the services
MRPS/MC-LAG that traverse the board.
MC-PW APS
SDH board:
Linear MSP When a protection group is configured across boards, that is, the working and protection channels are not
Ring MSP on the same board, replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
SNCP When a protection group is configured on the same board, replacing the board will interrupt the services
EoS board: that traverse the board.
LAG/LCAS/DLAG
During replacement of the local board, the LPT protocol will instruct the the peer board to shut down its
EoS board: LPT client optical port and therefore trigger a subnet protection switching, resulting in a second-level service
TDM board
interruption. Replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
If a service is added to the board, replacing the board will interrupt the added service.
EoS board: If the board to be replaced is only an intermediate E-LAN service forwarding node and adds no service,
STP/RSTP replacing the board will trigger the protocol to recalculate an E-LAN service forwarding path. If a
redundant path is available, the services will recover after the protocol becomes stable.
When a working service board is faulty, TPS protection rapidly switches the services that were transmitted
SDH board: TPS from the interface board to the working service board to the protection service board, to implement
protection. Replacing the board will not affect services in the case of normal switching.
• If no protection is configured for a packet board or TDM board, replacing the

board will interrupt the services that traverse the board.
• Regardless of whether protection is configured on the board, services that
traverse the board will be interrupted when the board is replaced. These boards
include:
▫ Optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) board
▫ Optical multiplexer/demultiplexer board
▫ Optical amplifier (OA) board
▫ Optical protection board

▫ Optical supervisory channel (OSC) board
▫ Auxiliary board
Replacing a System Control, Switching, and Timing Board
Start
No
15 minutes Are preparations
completed?
Yes
Replace one board. Replace one or
two boards.
Notify the onsite Yes The board to be Replace two boards.
engineers to replace replaced is the 5–25 minutes Replace the
the board. standby one. standby board.
No 10 minutes
Perform an active/standby Failed
Synchronize the Perform a rollback after the
switchover. 5–15 minutes
database. synchronization fails.
Notify the onsite engineers Successful 10 minutes

to replace the board.
Perform an active/ Failed Perform a rollback after the
5–10 minutes
standby switchover. active/standby switchover fails.
End Successful
5–25 minutes Replace the original
active board.
End
• Procedure
▫ Select a spare board.
▫ Query and record the current alarms related to the faulty board on the NE.
▫ Upload the NE data (that is, the board configuration data) to the NMS.
▫ Check consistency between the data on the NMS and the data on the NE.
Perform subsequent operations only after the data consistency check
between the NMS and NE is passed. If the consistency check is not passed,
data uploading through the NMS must be performed to ensure consistency
between the data on the NMS and the data on the NE.
▫ Query and record the user information of the NE, which may be used for
later restoration of the NE user data.
▫ Query and record the current user of the NE, which may be used for later
restoration of the NE user data.
▫ Query and record the gateway IP address and subnet mask, which may be
used for NE configuration parameter restoration.
▫ (Optional) Query and record the LSR ID of the NE, which may be used for
NE configuration parameter restoration.
▫ Back up the NE database. If an error occurs during board replacement, you
can use the NE database information backed up to restore the NE
database.
▫ Enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced on the
NMS.
Replacing a Power Supply Board
Removing the power plug Removing the power plug

of a PIU board of an APIU board
• Tools, instruments, and materials
▫ NMS, ESD wrist strap, and ESD shielding bag
• Precautions
▫ Do not remove or install a powered-on power supply board.
▫ Before replacing a PIU board, turn off all power supplies to the PIU board
and remove power plugs from the PIU board. After a new PIU board is
installed, insert the power plugs and turn on the power supplies to the PIU
board.
▫ Before replacing an APIU board, turn off the power switches on the APIU
board. After a new APIU board is installed, turn on the power switches.
Replacing a Fan Board
⚫ Impact on the system
 A device can run properly for 3 minutes without a fan. When the fan board is faulty,
replace it as soon as possible to prevent device faults caused by the heat dissipation
failure.
 Replacing the fan board does not affect services.
⚫ Precautions
 During fan board replacement, a device cannot dissipate heat. Therefore, you need to
replace the fan board as soon as possible.
 Do not touch the blades unless the fan stops rotating.
 A FAN_FAIL alarm will be reported when a fan board is faulty.
• Tools, instruments, and materials
▫ NMS, ESD wrist strap, and ESD shielding bag
• Procedure
▫ Select a spare board. Select a spare board whose parameters (such as the
name, model, and software/hardware version) are the same as those of the
faulty board.
▫ Query and record the current alarms related to the faulty board on the NE.
▫ Remove and replace the faulty board on site.

▫ Check whether the new board works properly.
Contents

▫ Precautions for Routine Maintenance
▫ Basic Operations During Routine Maintenance
◼ Onsite Routine Device Maintenance
Maintenance Record (1)
Item Frequency Status Remarks
Check the power supply in the equipment
room. □Normal □Abnormal
Check the temperature and humidity in the

equipment room. □Normal □Abnormal
Check the cleanness of the equipment room. □Normal □Abnormal

Daily
Check cabinet indicators. □Normal □Abnormal
Check board indicators. □Normal □Abnormal
Check audible alarms of a device. □Normal □Abnormal
Problems and solutions:
Unsolved problems:
Verification:
Maintenance Record (2)
Item Frequency Status Remarks
Check the orderwire phone. Monthly □Normal □Abnormal
Clean air filters. □Normal □Abnormal

Every 2–3 months
Check the fan tray assembly. □Normal □Abnormal
Check spare parts. □Normal □Abnormal
Check grounding cables and Yearly

□Normal □Abnormal
power cables.
Problems and solutions:
Unsolved problems:
Verification:
Section Summary
⚫ Precautions for Routine Maintenance

⚫ Basic Operations During Routine Maintenance
⚫ Onsite Routine Device Maintenance
Quiz
1. (True or false) All manual resets on site are cold resets.

A. True
B. False
2. (Single-answer question) On the OptiXtrans E6600, the LOSn indicator is red and
blinks once every three seconds. Which of the following statements is correct?
A. The optical port on the board reports the R_LOS alarm.
B. The optical port on the board reports the MS_RDI alarm.
C. The board is not detected.

D. The optical module is absent.
• Answers:
▫ 1: B
▫ 2: B
Contents

◼ Routine Maintenance Items on the NMS
▫ Daily Maintenance Items
▫ Monthly Maintenance Items
▫ Half-Yearly Maintenance Items
▫ Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS
Routine Maintenance Items on the NMS (1)
Item Maintenance Checklist
Check the status of NEs and boards.
Check current alarms.
Check historical alarms.
Daily maintenance Check the optical power of a board.
items Enable the performance monitoring function.
Check performance events.
Query the ambient temperature of a board.
Query the protection switching status.
Query and synchronize the NE time.
Check and record the input optical power of the demultiplexer.
Check and record the output optical power of the multiplexer.
Check and record the center wavelength, optical power, and OSNR of the
Monthly spectrum analyzer unit.
maintenance
items Check the embedded control channel (ECC) routes.
Manage NE data.
Back up NE data and NCE data.
Dump alarms, performance events, and logs.
Half-yearly Test protection switching.
maintenance
items Perform an active/standby switchover.
Perform a loopback.
Reset the board.
Modify GNE parameters.
Change the GNE for a non-GNE.
Search for WDM trails.
Other maintenance
operations on the Manage WDM trails.
NMS View the board manufacturer information report.
Manage the optical power of the network.
Change the TCM status.
Insert LCK.
Check the laser status.
Contents

▫ Routine Maintenance Items on the NMS
◼ Daily Maintenance Items
Daily Maintenance Item: Checking the Status of NEs and
Boards
Green: normal
Red: critical alarm
Orange: major alarm
Yellow: minor alarm
• The following table lists the mapping between alarm severities and handling
methods.
Alarm
Definition Handling Method
Severity
Fault alarms and events that have You need to handle a critical
global impact or cause NE alarm immediately.
Critical
breakdown, for example, board Otherwise, the system may
faults and timing board faults. break down.
You need to handle a major
Fault alarms and events of partial alarm in time. Otherwise,
Major
boards or lines. the important functions will
be affected.
These alarms help
Fault alarms and events that
maintenance engineers
Minor indicate whether boards or lines
locate and clear potential
work properly.
faults.
Alarms or events that do not affect
system performance or services but You do not need to handle
may impose potential impacts on warning alarms, but you can
the service quality of NEs or obtain the running status of
Warning
resources. Some alarms or events, the network and NEs by
for example, switching alarms, are viewing the warning alarm
prompts that are displayed when information.
the NE status is restored.
Daily Maintenance Item: Checking Current Alarms
• By querying the current alarms of the entire network and an NE, you can detect
device abnormalities in a timely manner.
▫ Choose Monitor > Alarm > Current Alarms from the main menu.
▫ Click Filter. On the panel that is displayed, set filter criteria and click OK.
The page for browsing current alarms is displayed.
Daily Maintenance Item: Checking Historical Alarms
• The procedure is as follows:
▫ Choose Monitor > Alarm > Historical Alarms from the main menu.
▫ Click Filter. On the panel that is displayed, set filter criteria and click OK.
The page for browsing historical alarms is displayed.
▫ Historical alarms: acknowledged and cleared alarms.
▪ Historical NE alarms refer to the cleared alarms stored in the

historical alarm library of the system control board.
▪ Historical NMS alarms refer to the alarms moved from the current
alarm library to the historical alarm library after they are
acknowledged and cleared on the NMS.
Daily Maintenance Item: Checking the Optical Power of a
Board
• In the NE Explorer, select a board with optical ports and choose Configuration >
Optical Power Management from the function tree.
• Click Query to query the optical power of the board.
Daily Maintenance Item: Enabling the Performance
Monitoring Function
• Enabling the performance monitoring function is a prerequisite for querying

performance events. If the current NE time is within the specified performance
monitoring time range, the NE monitors its performance automatically. If the
performance monitoring time range is not set or if the current NE time is not
within the performance monitoring time range, the NE does not monitor its
performance.
• The time set for From must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE.
To enable performance monitoring immediately, set From to a time just a little
later than the current time of the NMS and NE. To set the time for To, select the
check box on the left of To and ensure that the time set for To must be later
than that set for From. If the check box on the left of To is not selected,
performance monitoring is always enabled.
Daily Maintenance Item: Browsing Performance Data
• Procedure
▫ Choose Monitor > Performance > WDM Performance from the main menu
and click the Current Performance Data tab.
▫ Select the desired object from the Monitored Object Filter Criteria drop-
down list.
▫ Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute or 24-Hour.

▫ Select one or more boards from the navigation tree on the left and click
.
▫ Click Count. Select the desired options under Performance Event Type, and
select Display Zero Data under Display Options.
▫ Click Query to query the current bit error performance data on the NE.
▫ In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Daily Maintenance Item: Querying the Ambient
Temperature of a Board
• Procedure
▫ On the Main Topology page, right-click the desired NE and choose NE

Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer page is displayed.
▫ Select the corresponding board and choose Performance > Current

Performance from the function tree. Click Measure, select Working
Temperature, and click Query to query the working temperature of the
board.
▪ Note: Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute or 24-Hour as required.

Daily Maintenance Item: Querying the 1+1 Protection Status
of a Board
• Query the port protection switching status (optical line protection, intra-board
1+1 protection, and client 1+1 protection). The procedure is as follows:
▫ In the NE Explorer, click the NE on the left and choose Configuration > Port
Protection from the function tree. All port protection groups are displayed.
You can identify the protection type of a protection group based on the
value of Protection Type.
▫ Click Query and choose Query Selected or Query All from the drop-down
menu to query the switching status of the selected protection group or all
protection groups of the NE.
▫ In the Result dialog box, click Close.
• Query the 1+1 protection switching status of a board. The procedure is as
follows:
▫ In the NE Explorer, click the NE on the left and choose Configuration >
Board 1+1 Protection from the function tree.
▫ Click Query.
Daily Maintenance Item: Synchronizing NE Time
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the function tree.

▫ In the NE list, right-click an NE and choose Synchronize with NM Time from
the shortcut menu.
▫ In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. In the Result dialog box, click Close.
Contents

◼ Monthly Maintenance Items
Monthly Maintenance Item: Checking the Input Optical
Power of the Demultiplexer
• Query the input optical power of the demultiplexer, so that the point with
abnormal optical power can be detected and located in time.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Checking the Output Optical
Power of the Multiplexer
• Query the output optical power of the multiplexer, so that the point with
abnormal optical power can be detected and located in time.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Monitoring Wavelengths (1)
• The MCA, OMCA, and OPM boards are used to configure and query the optical
power and OSNR of fixed wavelengths. The OPM8 board is used as an example.
• Procedure
▫ Enable optical monitoring for the OPM8 board.

Monthly Maintenance Item: Monitoring Wavelengths (2)
▫ The MCA board is used to query the optical power and OSNR of each
wavelength on a specified channel.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Checking ECC Routes
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Communication > NE ECC Link
Management from the function tree.
▫ Click Refresh. The ECC routes on the NE are displayed in NE ECC Link
Management Table.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Managing NE Data
• Procedure
▫ Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the

main menu.
▫ In the left navigation tree, select one or more desired NEs and click .
▫ In the NE list, select one or more NEs and click Check Consistency;
alternatively, right-click one or more NEs and choose Check Consistency
from the shortcut menu.
▫ In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes. Then, a progress bar is displayed to
indicate the progress of the consistency check.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Backing Up NCE Data
• Procedure
▫ Log in to the NCE management plane.
▫ Choose Backup and Restore > Data Backup > Back Up Product Data from
the main menu.
▫ On the Back Up Product Data page, perform related operations.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Backing Up NE Data
• Procedure
▫ Open the Network Management app and choose Maintenance > NE

Software Management > NE Backup Policy Management from the main
menu.
▫ Click New Policy. In the dialog box that is displayed, select the NE type and
the corresponding NEs, and click Next.
▫ In the dialog box that is displayed, set parameters under Period Backup
Policy and Period Storage Policy, and click OK.
Monthly Maintenance Item: Dumping Data
• Procedure
▫ Choose System > Task Schedule > Task Management from the main menu.
▫ In the Task Type navigation tree, select Database Capacity Management,

Manual Dump, or Overflow Dump.
▫ You can double-click a task in the task list to set the task parameters. The
dump file can be in .xml or .csv format.
• Overflow dumping is mandatory. When the logs in the database reach the
maximum storage capacity, overflow dumping is performed.
• Periodic dumping is optional and serves as a supplement of overflow dumping.

You can set whether to perform periodic dump and specify the dump interval and
end time.
Contents

◼ Half-Yearly Maintenance Items
Half-Yearly Maintenance Item: Testing Protection Switching
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Port Protection from the

function tree.
▫ Right-click the desired protection group and choose a menu item from the
shortcut menu to perform a protection switching test.
Half-Yearly Maintenance Item: Performing an
Active/Standby Switchover
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the
function tree.
▫ Right-click the desired protection group and choose Working/Protection

Switching from the shortcut menu to perform an active/standby switchover.
Contents

◼ Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Performing a
Loopback
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, select the board that requires a loopback in the left
navigation tree.
▫ Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the function tree.

▫ Double-click the value in the Optical Interface Loopback column and select
a new value from the drop-down list as required.
▫ Click Apply. The loopback setting is complete.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Resetting a
Board
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, right-click the board to be reset in the left navigation

tree and choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset from the shortcut menu as
required.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Modifying GNE
Parameters
• Procedure
▫ Choose Topology > NE Onboarding > DCN Management for Transport NEs
from the main menu. Click the GNE tab.
▫ Right-click the desired GNE and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut
menu.
▫ In the Modify GNE dialog box, set Gateway Type.
▪ You are not advised to modify Port No..
▪ The IP address of the GNE must be in the same network segment as

the IP address of the NMS. Otherwise, set the corresponding network
ports, to make sure that the GNE is reachable from the NMS.
▫ Click OK. In the Result dialog box, click Close.

Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Changing the
GNE for a Non-GNE
• Procedure
▫ Choose Topology > NE Onboarding > DCN Management for Transport NEs
from the main menu.
▫ Click the NE tab.

▫ Right-click the value in the Primary GNE1 column corresponding to the
desired NE and select another GNE for the NE from the drop-down list.
▫ Click Refresh and check the result.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Searching for
WDM Trails
• Procedure
▫ Choose Service > View > WDM Trail from the main menu and click Search
for WDM Trail.
▫ In the dialog box that is displayed, set the pre-search and after-search
handling policies under Advanced settings.
▫ Click Next to start searching for WDM trails. Wait until the progress reaches
100%.
▪ If certain cross-connections conflict with each other and thus fail to

form an end-to-end trail, the information about these cross-
connections is displayed in the search result when the searching is
complete. You can rectify the problem according to the conflict
information.
▪ Certain cross-connections may conflict with each other when the

network architecture is changed or a trail that may cause an
interruption of service flows exists. You can determine whether
conflicting cross-connections exist by deleting certain routing
information such as deleting a cross-connection or a fiber.
▫ Click Next to view all discrete services on the network.
▫ After the search is complete, click Finish.

Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Managing
WDM Trails
• Procedure
▫ Choose Service > View > WDM Trail from the main menu and click Manage
WDM Trail.
▫ In the displayed Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box, set the filter
criteria to display the desired trails in the trail list.
▪ To filter all trails on the NMS, click Filter All.
▪ To add trails that meet the new criteria based on the existing trails,
click Incremental Filter.
▪ To filter the trails again according to the new criteria based on the
existing trails, click Secondary Filter.
▫ Select a trail and click the Transmission Media Layer Route tab in the lower
part of the page. The route of the entire trail is displayed.
▫ Select a trail and click the Signal Flow Diagram tab in the lower part of the
page. The optical signal flow direction of the entire trail is displayed.
▫ Right-click a trail and choose Browse Relevant Client Trails from the
shortcut menu. The corresponding client trails are displayed in the trail list.
▫ Right-click a trail and choose Browse Relevant Server Trails from the
shortcut menu. The corresponding server trails are displayed in the trail list.
▫ Right-click a trail and choose Query Relevant Optical Power > Show Optical
Layer from the shortcut menu. On the Optical Power Management page,
click the Port Optical Power tab and click Query. In the Result dialog box,
click Close.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Managing
Reports
• Procedure
▫ Choose Resource > Project Documents from the main menu and click Board
Manufacturer Information.
▫ Select one or more desired NEs in the left navigation tree and click .
The generated report is displayed on the right.
▫ Click Query to query the actual information from the NE.

▫ (Optional) Click Print or Save As to output the report.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Managing the
Optical Power of the Network
• Procedure
▫ Choose Configuration > Common > Optical Power/Attenuation

Management from the main menu.
▫ Select all NEs in the left navigation tree and click .

▫ On the Optical Power Management page, click Query. In the Result dialog
box, click Close.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Changing the
TCM Status
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board in the left navigation tree
and choose Configuration > OTN Overhead Management > TCM Overhead
from the function tree.
▫ Click Query in the lower right corner of the page to query the TCM
overhead settings.
▫ Double-click the value in the TIM Detection Mode column, and then enter
or select a new value.
▫ Click Apply.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Inserting LCT
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board in the left navigation tree
and choose Configuration > OTN Overhead Management > PM Overhead
from the function tree.
▫ Click Query in the lower right corner of the page to query the PM overhead
settings.
▫ Double-click the value in the LCK Insertion column, and then select a new
value.
▫ Click Apply.
Other Maintenance Operations on the NMS: Checking the
Laser Status
• When services are normal, the WDM-side and client-side lasers need to be turned
on.
• Procedure
▫ In the NE Explorer, select the desired board in the left navigation tree and
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the function tree.
▫ On the Basic Attributes tab page, view the value of Laser Status.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following statements occurs if the PROG indicator
on a board used for an NG WDM device is quickly blinking green?
A. The board hardware is faulty.
B. Services become abnormal.
C. A major alarm is generated on the board.
D. The flash memory is being written or the software is being loaded.
2. (True or false) GE trails are actually client trails.

A. True
B. False
• Answers:
▫ 1. D
▫ 2. A
Summary
⚫ Precautions for routine maintenance

⚫ Basic device and NMS maintenance operations
intelligent world.


that
NG WDM Alarm Signal Flow Analysis
Foreword
⚫ After the ITU-T recommendations on OTN series are introduced, the

monitoring and maintenance capabilities of WDM networks are effectively
improved. As OTN develops, the alarm and performance reporting
mechanisms of WDM networks become more flexible and complex.
Therefore, this course talks about how to analyze WDM alarm signal flows
and how to effectively use flexible alarm mechanisms to locate faults.
Objectives

 Understand the electrical-layer alarm mechanism of the NG WDM system and
describe the signal flow of electrical-layer alarms.
 Understand the optical-layer alarm mechanism of the NG WDM system and
describe the signal flow of optical-layer alarms.
 Use common NG WDM alarms to locate faults.
• NG WDM fully supports OTN-related suggestions. We describe the generation

mechanism of electrical-layer alarms, common alarm signal flows, and handling
methods.
Contents
1. Overview
2. Electrical-Layer Alarm Analysis
3. Optical-Layer Alarm Analysis
• The overview part reviews the basic knowledge of OTN, specifies the OTN
layering mode and the division method of each layer, and lays a foundation for
the subsequent optical-layer and electrical-layer overhead processing
mechanisms.
• The electrical-layer alarm and performance analysis part describes not only the
electrical-layer alarms defined in ITU-T G.709, but also the performance events
that come with the alarms. This part covers the following aspects:
▫ Electrical-layer overhead processing mechanism
▫ Electrical-layer alarm signal flow

▫ Common maintenance signals
▫ Electrical-layer alarm case analysis
• The optical-layer alarm analysis part mainly describes the optical-layer alarm
definitions and alarm signal flows defined in ITU-T G.798 and ITU-T G.709.
Overview
OPUk: optical channel payload unit k
⚫ OTN layers ODUk: optical channel data unit k
OTUk: completely standardized
IP ATM Ethernet STM-N
optical channel transport unit k
OPUk OTUkV: functionally standardized

Electrical ODUk (ODUkP, ODUkT) optical channel transport unit k
layer OTUk OTUkV OTUk OTUkV OCh: full functionality optical channel
OCh OChr OChr: reduced functionality optical
Optical OMSn channel
layer OPSn
OTSn
OMS: optical multiplex section
OTS: optical transmission section
OPS: optical physical section
• The OTN includes the optical layer and electrical layer. The electrical layer
consists of four levels: OPUk, ODUkP, ODUkT, and OTUk. The optical layer
consists of OCh (OChr), OMSn, OTSn (OPSn) and OSC.
• The difference between full functionality and reduced functionality is that the
OCh contains the complete optical-layer overhead, that is, non-associated optical
overhead (OOS), while OChr does not have the non-associated OOS.
• In this course, the optical-layer alarm analysis is based on the full functionality.
Electrical-Layer Overhead Frame Structure
3824
4080
3825
14
15
16
17
1
7
8
OTUk
1 Alignment overhead
OPUk overhead
2
ODUk OPUk
Clientpayload
signal OTUk
3 overhead FEC
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TC M
2 RES AC T TCM6 TCM5 TCM4 FTFL RES JC
4 GCC1 GCC2 APS/PCC RES PSI NJO
Client signal k:
OPUk: optical channel payload unit 1 - 2.5G
ODUk: optical channel data unit 2 - 10G
OTUk: optical channel transport unit 3 - 40G
Frame alignment overhead 4 - 100G
• Frame alignment overhead
▫ FAS: frame alignment signal
▫ MFAS: multiframe alignment signal
• OTUk overhead
▫ SM: section monitoring
▫ GCC0: general communication channel 0
▫ RES: reserved for international standardization
• ODUk overhead
▫ TCMACT: TCM activation/deactivation coordination protocol control

channel
▫ TCMi: tandem connection monitoring at the i level
▫ FTFL: fault type and fault location reporting communication channel

▫ PM: path monitoring
▫ EXP: experimental path
▫ GCC1/2: general communication channel 1/2
▫ APS/PCC: automatic protection switching and protection communication

control channel
OTN Layers (1/2)
⚫ Trails on a WDM network
Client trail
ODUk trail
OTUk trail
OCh trail
OMS trail
OTS trail
OTU OTU
MUX/
OTU MUX/ OA OA DMUX OTU
DMUX
OTU OTU
• The source and sink ends of a client trail are the client-side ports on an OTU
board. The client trail corresponds to an actual service (for example, 10GE
service) on the client side.
• The source and sink ends of an OCh trail are WDM-side ports on OTU boards.
• The source and sink ends of an OMS trail are the source and sink ports of
multiplexed signals. The OMS trail corresponds to a multiplexed signal trail.
• An OTS trail is a physical fiber connection between two adjacent OM/OD/OA

nodes on the main optical path.
• OTS, OMS, and OCh trails are optical-layer trails. OTUk, ODUk, and client trails
are electrical-layer trails.
OTN Layers (2/2)
⚫ Electrical-layer trails (using the N210 and T130 boards as an example)
TX1 T130 T130 TX1

RX1 N N RX1
2 2
30 X ODU1
30 X ODU1
30 X Any
30 X Any
...
... 1 1
TX30 TX30
0 0
RX30 RX30
OCh trail
OTU2 trail
ODU1 trail
Client trail
• Client trail: client trail of an optical channel
• ODUk trail: data -level trail of an optical channel
• OTUk trail: transport unit level trail of an optical channel
• OCh trail: optical channel trail

Contents
1. Overview

◼ Basic Concepts
▫ Electrical-Layer Alarm Signal Flow
▫ Common Maintenance Signals
▫ Electrical-Layer Alarm Case Analysis
Basic Concepts
⚫ WDM side: WDM side of an OTU board.
⚫ Client side: client side of an OTU board and receives services from the client device.
⚫ Middle part: middle part between the WDM side and the client side. It is a virtual
concept and not displayed on the NMS. This is introduced to describe the alarm
detection mechanism.
⚫ N#1: indicates channel 1 at client-side optical port N on the OTU board. 3#1:
indicates channel 1 of optical port 3 on the client side.
⚫ 1#N: indicates channel N at optical port 1 on the WDM side of an OTU board. 1#3:
indicates channel 3 of optical port 1 on the WDM side.
Electrical-Layer Overhead Processing - Source
⚫ The electrical-layer overheads are processed on OTUs, tributary units, or line units.
Specifically, there are two parts: source and sink.
Source function: of each layer
Mapping, Calculates Calculates Calculates

frequency BIP-8, writes BIP-8 and BIP-8 and
adjustment, PM and writes to SM, writes to
bit rate GCC1/2 GCC0, FAS, TCMi.
adaptation. overheads, and MAFS.
and generates
the ODUk
frame
structure. ODUkT
OPUk ODUkP (optional) OTUk
• At the transmit end, the OPUk performs mapping, frequency adjustment, and
rate adaptation on client signals.
• The ODUk writes ODUk overheads:
▫ Calculation and writing of TTI, BDI, STAT, and BIP-8 of PM at the ODUkP
layer.
▫ Writing of GCC1/2 and other bytes.

▫ If TCM (ODUkT) is enabled, TCMi needs to be written into the ODUkT
source function. That is, calculation and writing of TTI, BIAE, BDI, STAT, and
BIP-8 of TCMi.
▫ Generation of the ODUk frame structure.
• The OTUk layer provides the following source functions:
▫ Writes overhead bytes at the OTUk layer.
▫ Calculates the BIP-8.
▫ Writes bytes such as SM, GCC, FAS, and MFAS.
▫ Generates a complete OTUk frame structure.

Electrical-Layer Overhead Processing - Sink (1/3)
Detection Detection Detection Demapping

OCh Client
SM TCM PM OPUk
OTUk ODUkT ODUkP
(optional)
1. Detects overhead bytes such as FAS, MFAS, and SM.

2. Reports LOM, LOF, TIM, DEG, BDI, BEI, BIAE and IAE
defect information.
3. Inserts back BEI, BIAE, and BDI.
4. Inserts TIM and DEG.
5. Suppresses alarms.
6. Reports bit errors.
• The sink of the electrical-layer overhead is used to monitor the overhead at the
receive end, report the defect information, insert back or insert signals, suppress
alarms, and report performance events.
• The OTUk sink monitors each overhead and reports the defect information.
▫ Compares the TTI to be received with that received according to the preset
TIM mode, and notifies the peer end of the TIM information.
▫ Monitors BIP-8. If bit errors cross the threshold, a dDEG alarm is reported.
▫ Monitors the BDI byte. If the value is 1, a dBDI alarm is reported.
▫ Monitors the IAE byte. If the value is 1, a dIAE alarm is reported.
▫ Monitors the BIAE byte. If the value is 1011, a dBIAE is reported.
• Inserts back or inserts signals based on the defect information.
▫ Instructs the corresponding source function to insert BDI based on the
signal failure conditions transferred from the server layer and the dTIM
status at the local layer.
▫ Instructs the corresponding source to insert back BEI based on the BIP-8
situation.
▫ Instructs the corresponding source to insert back BIAE based on the IAE
situation.
▫ Generates trail signal failure information based on the signal failure
conditions transferred from the server layer and the dTIM status at the
local layer, and transfers the information to subsequent functions.
▫ Transfers the information to subsequent functions based on the value of
DEG.
• Alarm suppression
• Bit error reporting: reports local-end and remote-end bit error performance
events based on BIP-8 and BEI monitoring status.

OCh Client
SM TCM PM OPUk
OTUk ODUkT ODUkP
(optional)
1. Detects the TCMACT and TCMi bytes at the TCM sublayer.

2. Reports defect information of TIM, DEG, BIAE, OCI, LCK, and
AIS.
3. Inserts back or inserts signals based on the defect
information.
5. Reports bit error performance events.
• Monitors the overheads of the TCM sublayer and reports the defect information.
▫ If a TTI mismatch occurs, a dTIM alarm is reported.
Monitors the BIAE byte. If the value is 1011, a dBIAE is reported.
▫ Monitors the STAT byte. If the value is 000, a dLTC alarm is reported. If the
value is 111, a dAIS alarm is reported. If the value is 110, a dOCI alarm is
reported. If the value is 101, a dLCK alarm is reported. If the value is 010, a
dIAE alarm is reported.
• Inserts back or inserts signals based on the defect information (similar to
ODUkP).
• Alarm suppression.
• Note:
▫ The reporting of dDEG, dBIAE, and dBDI indicates that when the
corresponding bytes received in the receive direction of the local station
meet the reporting conditions such as DEG, BIAE, and BDI, the
corresponding alarms are reported to the opposite end through the
transmit direction of the OTU board. The alarms such as BDI are detected
and reported by the corresponding functional module at the opposite
station rather than the local station.

OCh Client
SM TCM PM OPUk
OTUk ODUkT ODUkP
(optional)
1. Detects the PM byte information at the ODUkP

sublayer.
2. Reports defect information of TIM, DEG, OCI,
LCK, and AIS.
3. Inserts back or inserts BEI, DEG, and path failure
information based on the defect information.
5. Reports bit error performance events.
• Monitors each overhead and reports the defect information.

▫ Compares the TTI byte to be received with the received TTI byte according
to the specified TIM mode, and reports the dTIM alarm.
▫ Monitors the STAT byte. If the value is 111, a dAIS alarm is reported. If the
value is 110, a dOCI alarm is reported. If the value is 101, a dLCK alarm is
reported.
• Inserts back or inserts signals based on the defect information.
▫ Instructs the corresponding source function to insert BDI based on the
signal failure conditions transferred from the server layer and the dTIM,
dAIS, dOCI, and dLCK status at the local layer.
▫ Instructs the corresponding source to insert back BEI based on the BIP-8
situation.
▫ Generates trail signal failure information based on the signal failure
conditions transferred from the server layer and the dTIM, dAIS, dOCI, and
dLCK status at the local layer, and transfers the information to subsequent
functions.
▫ Transfers the information to subsequent functions based on the value of
DEG.
• Alarm suppression.
Layers of Electrical-Layer Alarms
Layer Alarm
OTUk OTUk_LOF, OTUk_AIS, OTUk_LOM, OTUk_TIM, OTUk_DEG, OTUk_EXC, OTUk_BDI,
k = 1, 2, 3, 4 BEFFEC_EXC
ODUk_PM ODUk_PM_TIM, ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC, ODUk_PM_BDI, ODUk_PM_LCK,

k = flex, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 ODUk_PM_OCI, ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_LOFLOM
ODUk_TCMi ODUk_TCMi_TIM, ODUk_TCMi_DEG, ODUk_TCMi_EXC, ODUk_TCMi_BDI,

k = flex, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 ODUk_TCMi_LCK, ODUk_TCMi_OCI, ODUk_TCMi_AIS, ODUk_TCMi_LTC
OPUk
k = flex, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 OPUk_PLM, OPU2_MSIM, OPU3_MSIM, OPU4_MSIM
• The OTUCN_LOF is an alarm indicating that the FAS is abnormal. This alarm
occurs when the alignment processing is out of frame (OOF) in three consecutive
milliseconds.
• The OTUk_AIS is an alarm indicating OTUk alarms. An AIS signal is transmitted
to the downstream direction, indicating that a signal failure is detected in the
upstream direction. Currently, Huawei devices can detect this alarm but do not
report it.
• The OTUk_LOM is an alarm indicating that the MFAS is abnormal. This alarm is
generated when the multiframe locating is out of multiframe (OOM) in three
consecutive milliseconds.
• OTUk_TIM: OTUk trace identifier mismatch. This alarm occurs during the control
process when the trail trace identifier (TTI) at the opposite end mismatches that
at the local end while the TIM detection is enabled.
• OTUk_DEG: OTUk signals degraded. When bit errors are detected in burst mode,
this alarm is generated after signal degradation or bit error threshold-crossing
occurs. When bit errors are detected in Poisson mode, this alarm is generated
after signal degradation occurs.
• The OTUk_EXC alarm indicates that the bit errors exceed the specified threshold.
When bit errors are detected in Poisson mode, this alarm is generated after bit
errors exceed the specified threshold.
• OTUk_BDI: OTUk backward defect. This alarm is generated when a signal failure
in the SM is detected and the value of the BDI byte is 1.
• BEFFEC_EXC: pre-FEC BER threshold-crossing. Signals sent from the WDM side of
the opposite-end OTU have the FEC function. As a result, before performing FEC
in the receive direction of the WDM side of the local-end OTU, the local-end OTU
counts the bit error rate. This alarm occurs if the counted bit error rate crosses
the threshold.
Contents
1. Overview
2. Electrical-layer alarm analysis

▫ Basic Concepts
◼ Electrical-Layer Alarm Signal Flow
Electrical-Layer Alarm Signal Flow
1 Non-convergence OTU processing
SDH standard signals
Classification of electrical-
Non-convergence OTU processing
2
OTN standard signals
Convergence OTU processing SDH
layer alarms
3
standard signals
Convergence OTU processing OTN
4
standard signals
5 Regeneration OTU
6 OTU with cross-connection
OTU processing Ethernet service

7
signals
• The alarm signal flow of the WDM products varies with the signals processed by
the OTU. Therefore, the detection and transmission of alarms are different.
• There are three types of OTUs:
▫ Non-convergence OTU: converts only one channel of service signals

received on the client side.
▫ Convergence OTU: converges and converts multiple service signals received

on the client side.
▫ Regeneration OTU: used at a regeneration site to regenerate optical signals.
• According to the OTU type and the accessed service type, the preceding seven
cases are described.
• According to the types of accessed services, we mainly discuss the alarm

detection and transmission mechanism of the OTU board for SDH and OTN
standard signals.
▫ SDH standard signal: The accessed signal is in the SDH standard frame
format.
▫ OTN standard signal: The accessed signal is in the OTN standard frame
format.
Non-Convergence OTU Processing SDH Standard Signals (1/2)
Si te A Si te B
C lient side W DM side W DM side C lient side C lient device
R_LOS
R_LOS REM_SF R_LOF
R_LOF R_LOF
R_LOF REM_SF
MS_AIS
MS_AIS REM_SF MS_AIS
BI bit error
B1_EXC REM_SD B1 bit error
BI bit error
B1_SD B1 bit error
PM BIP-8 bit SD
error ODUk_PM_DEG/ Bit error
ODUk_PM_EXC
ODUk PM remote
bit error SM BIP-8 SD
performance event bit error OTUk_DEG/ Bit error
OTUk_EXC
OTUk remote bit
error performance SF
event OTUk_AIS
OTUk_AIS R_LOF
ODUk_PM_BDI
&OTUk_BDI SF
OTUk_LOM OTUk_LOM R_LOF
ODUk_PM_BDI
&OTUk_BDI
• Signal fail (SF) event detection.
• Signal degrade (SD) event detection.
• Alarm handling: The XXXX alarm or performance event is detected and reported.
• We describe the alarm signal flow when the OTU processes the R_LOS and
OTUk_LOF alarms. The signal flow for processing other alarms is similar.
▫ R_LOS
▪ The R_LOS alarm is received on the client side of the OTU at site A.
After the alarm is processed on the WDM side of the OTU, it is
inserted to the downstream site B, which transmits the signal to the
downstream client device and reports the alarm to the client device.
▫ PM BIP-8 bit error
▪ The WDM side of the OTU at site B detects the PM BIP8 bit error.
When the bit error crosses the threshold, the ODUk_PM_DEG or
ODUk_PM_EXC alarm is generated. (depending on the bit error
detection mode set by the board.) In addition, the ODUk PM remote
bit error performance event is sent back to the WDM side at site A.
Additionally, the bit error is transmitted to the client device in the
downstream of site B. A related alarm can be detected on the client
device.
Non-Convergence OTU Processing SDH Standard Signals (2/2)
Si te A Si te B
MFAS frames are
discontinuous. SF
OTUk_LOM SF is generated when
ODUk_PM_BDI
the TIM follow-up
&OTUk_BDI SF
PM TTI bytes action is enabled. R_LOF
ODUk_PM_TIM
mismatch.
ODUk_PM_BDI
SF
SM TTI bytes R_LOF
OTUk_TIM
OTUk_BDI mismatch.
SF is generated when
ODUk_PM_BDI the TIM follow-up
ODUk_PM_BDI
OTUk_BDI action is enabled.
OTUk_BDI
The pre-FEC BER crosses the threshold.
BEFFEC_EXC
SF
OTUk_LOF
OTUk_LOF R_LOF
ODUk_PM_BDI
OTUk_BDI SF
ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_OCI R_LOF
ODUk_PM_LCK ODUk_PM_LCK
ODUk_PM_BDI SF
R_LOS R_LOF
R_LOS
ODUk_PM_BDI
&OTUk_BDI
• We describe the alarm signal flow when the OTU processes the OTUk_LOF alarm.
The signal flow for processing other alarms is similar.
▫ The WDM side of the OTU at site B detects the OTUk_LOF alarm, and the
OTU sends the ODUk_PM_BDI and OTUk_BDI alarms back to the WDM side
of site A. After the alarm is processed on the client side of site B, the R_LOF
alarm is inserted to the downstream client device. The R_LOF alarm can be
detected in the client device.
Non-Convergence OTU Processing OTN Standard Signals (1/2)
Si te A Si te B
C lient side W DM side WDM side C lient side C lient device
R_LOS SF
R_LOS ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI SD
PM BIP-8 bit error ODUk_PM_DEG
ODUk_PM_DEG/ PM BIP-8 bit
ODUk_PM_EXC ODUk_PM_EXC error
SM BIP-8 bit error OTUk_DEG SD
OTUk_EXC SM BIP-8 bit error OTUk_DEG
OTUk remote bit error OTUk_EXC
OTUk remote bit
performance event
error performance
SD
event
ODUk_PM_DEG/ PM BIP-8 bit error
PM BIP-8 bit error ODUk_PM_EXC
SF
OTUk_LOF
OTUk_LOF ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI
SF
OTUk_LOM ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_LOM ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI SF
OTUk_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_AIS OTUk_LOF
OTUk_BDI SF
OTUk_LOM
OTUk_AIS OTUk_LOF
ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_LOM
OTUk_BDI OTUk_AIS
• We describe the alarm signal flow when the OTU processes the R_LOS and
OTUk_LOF alarms. The signal flow for processing other alarms is similar.
▫ R_LOS
▪ The R_LOS alarm is received on the client side of the OTU at site A.
After being processed on the WDM side of the OTU, the R_LOS alarm
is transmitted to site B. Then, the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected on
the WDM side of the OTU at site B, and an SF event is generated to
trigger the channel service switching. The ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is
further transmitted to the downstream client device at site B, and the
alarm is reported to the client device.
▫ OTUk_LOF
▪ The OTUk_LOF alarm is detected on the WDM side of the OTU at site
B, which sends the OTUk_BDI alarm to the WDM side of the OTU at
site A. Additionally, the alarm is sent to the downstream site B, where
it is processed on the client side of the OTU. In this case, the
ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the client device. The SF event is
generated on the WDM side of the OTU at site B, and a service
channel protection switching is triggered.
▪ The client side of the OTU at site A receives the OTUk_LOF alarm. The
OTU sends the OTUk_BDI alarm back to the upstream client device. In
addition, the OTUk_LOF alarm is processed on the WDM side of the
OTU and sent to site B. The WDM side of the OTU at site B detects
the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm, and then generates an SF event, triggering
a protection switching. The ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is further
transmitted to the downstream client device at site B, and the alarm
is reported to the client device.
Non-Convergence OTU Processing OTN Standard Signals (2/2)
Si te A Si te B
SF SF is generated when the TIM SF
SM TTI bytes mismatch. follow-up action is enabled. ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_TIM ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI SF is generated when the TIM
SF
SM TTI bytes mismatch. follow-up action is enabled.
OTUk_BDI
OTUk_BDI
OTUk_BDI OTUk_BDI
OTUk_BDI
All PM signals are transparently transmitted.
ODUk_PM_AIS SF
ODUk_PM_LCK ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_LCK ODUk_PM_LCK ODUk_PM_LCK
ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_OCI
SF
R_LOS
R_LOS ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI
• OTUk_TIM: After the OTU at site A receives the OTUk_TIM alarm on the client
side, the OTU returns the OTUk_BDI alarm to the upstream. When the TIM
follow-up action is disabled, the alarm is not transmitted to the downstream.
When the TIM follow-up action is enabled, an SF event is generated. The WDM
side of the OTU at site B reports the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm, which is transmitted
to the downstream. The client device reports the alarm. After the OTU at site B
receives the OTUk_TIM alarm on the WDM side, it does not send the alarm to
the downstream if the TIM follow-up action is disabled. If the TIM follow-up
action is enabled, an SF event is generated. After the alarm is processed on the
client side of site B, the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is reported by the client device.
• OTUk_BDI: The OTU detects the OTUk_BDI alarm that is sent from the upstream.
This alarm is not further sent to the downstream.
• ODUk_PM_TIM/ODUk_PM_BDI: The OTU transparently transmits all PM alarms.
• ODUk_PM_AIS/ODUk_PM_LCK/ODUk_PM_OCI: The client side of the OTU at site
A receives the ODUk_ PM_AIS/ODUk_PM_LCK/ODUk_PM_OCI signals, which are
not processed/reported at the local site. After the signals are transmitted to site
B, the OTU detects the ODUk_PM_AIS/ODUk_PM_LCK/ ODUk_PM_OCI alarm on
the WDM side, and generates the SF event to trigger the channel service
switching. The alarm is further transmitted to the downstream client device at
site B and reported to the client device.
• R_LOS: The WDM side of the OTU at site B detects the R_LOS alarm, and the
OTU sends the OTUk_BDI alarm back to the WDM side of site A. In addition, the
alarm is further sent to the downstream client side connected to site B. After the
alarm is processed on the client side, the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the
client device.
• The SF event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at site B, and a service
channel protection switching is triggered.
Convergence OTU Processing SDH Standard Signals (1/2)
Si te A Si te B
Intra-board Intra-board
module module
R_LOS
N#1 R_LOS N#1 REM_SF N#1 R_LOF
R_LOS
R_LOS
N#1 R_LOS SF N#1 REM_SF N#1 R_LOF
R_LOS
R_LOS
R_LOF
N#1 R_LOF N#1 REM_SF N#1 R_LOF
R_LOC N#1 REM_SF
N#1 R_LOC SD N#1 R_LOF
Bit error
N#1 bit error 1#N BIT bit error Bit error
A
N#1 A 1#N A A
B
N#1 B 1#N B B
C
N#1 C 1#N C C
D 1#N D
N#1 D D
• In the preceding figure, A, B, C, and D are other SDH alarms.

• For convergence OTU boards, this section considers the access of four services on
the client side as an example, such as TMX.
▫ All client-side signals are R_LOS.
▪ The four client sides of the OTU at site A access R_LOS signals. The
alarm signals are processed in the middle part of the OTU at site A
and then transmitted to site B. The REM_SF alarm is generated on the
client side of site B. Finally, the R_LOF alarm is detected on the client
device.
▪ The SF event is generated on the WDM side and each channel of the
OTU at site B, and a service channel protection switching is triggered.
▫ The single-channel signal on the client side is R_LOS.
▪ An SF event is generated in the corresponding channel in the middle
part of the OTU at station B, and a protection switching is triggered.
▪ On the client side of the OTU at site A, for example, channel 1 at
optical port 3, the R_LOS alarm signal is accessed. The alarm signal is
processed on the WDM side and the middle part of the OTU at site A
as well as the WDM side of site B, and then sent to the downstream.
The REM_SF alarm is generated on channel 1 at optical port 3 on the
client side of site B. Finally, the R_LOF alarm is detected on the client
device.
▫ The client-side signal is not R_LOS.
▪ The signal flow of the R_LOF and R_LOC alarms is similar to that of
the R_LOS.
▫ When any of other alarms is accessed, the same alarm is reported at each
detection point in the system.
Convergence OTU Processing SDH Standard Signals (2/2)
Si te A Si te B
C lient side Intra-board W DM side Intra-board

W DM side C lient side C lient device
module module
SF
R_LOS OTUk_LOF R_LOS R_LOF
OTUk_LOM
OTUk_LOF
OTUk_AIS R_LOF
OTUk_LOM
OTUk_AIS R_LOF
ODUk_PM_BDI &
OTUk_BDI SF R_LOF
ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
R_LOF
ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_OCI R_LOF
ODUk_PM_BDI Bit error
SD
PM_BIP bit error ODUk_PM_DEG/OD Bit error
Uk_PM_EXC
ODUk_PM remote bit Bit error
error performance event
SD Bit error
SM_BIP bit error OTUk_DEGOTUk
_EXC Bit error
OTUk remote bit error Bit error
performance event
the client side as an example.
▫ WDM-side R_LOS/OTUk_LOF/OTUk_LOM/OTUk_AIS/ODUk_PM_AIS/
ODUk_PM_OCI/ODUk_PM_LCK:
▪ The WDM side of the OTU at site B accesses and processes the alarm
signals. The OTU sends the ODUk_PM_BDI or OTUk_BDI alarm back
to the WDM side of site A. In addition, the alarm is sent to the
downstream client side connected to site B. After the alarm is
processed on the client side, the R_LOF alarm is detected in the client
device.
▪ The SF event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at site B, and
a service channel protection switching is triggered.
▫ Bit error alarms on the WDM side.
▪ The OTU at site B accesses and processes BER alarm signals on the
WDM side, and then sends remote BER performance events to the
WDM side of upstream site A. The BER alarm is further sent to the
client side of site B, and the BER alarm is detected in the client device.
▪ An SD event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at site B.
Whether an SD event serves as the trigger condition of a protection
switching can be configured manually.
▫ Question: If the receive end at site B receives the SM_BIP bit errors, what is
the alarm signal flow?
Convergence OTU Processing OTN Standard Signals (1/2)
Si te A Si te B
module module
R_LOS
SF
Inserts the OTUk_BDI. N#1 R_LOS N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_LOM SF
N#1 N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS
Inserts the OTUk_BDI. OTUk_LOM
SF
OTUk_LOF
N#1 N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS
Inserts the OTUk_BDI. OTUk_LOF SF
ODUk_PM_AIS N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS

N#1 ODUk_PM_AIS
A 1#N A
N#1 A 1#N A
B 1#N B
N#1 B 1#N B
C 1#N C 1#N C
N#1 C
BIT bit error SD
N#1 BIT bit error
1#N BIT bit error N#1 BIT bit error
▫ All client-side signals are R_LOS.
▪ The four client sides of the OTU at site A access R_LOS signals. The
alarm signals are processed in the middle part and WDM side of the
OTU at site A and then transmitted to site B. The ODUk_PM_AIS
alarm of the corresponding channel is generated in the middle part of
site B. Finally, the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the client
device.
▪ The SF event is generated on each channel of the OTU at site B, and a
service channel protection switching is triggered.
▫ The single-channel signal on the client side is
R_LOS/OTUk_LOF/OTUk_LOM.
▪ On the client side of the OTU at site A, for example, channel 1 at
optical port 3, the R_LOS/OTUk_LOF/OTUk_LOM alarm signal is
accessed. The alarm signal is processed on the WDM side and the
middle part of the OTU at site A as well as the WDM side of site B,
and then sent to the downstream. The ODUk_PM_AIS alarm of
channel 1 at port 3 is generated in the middle part of site B. Finally,
the ODUk_PM_AIS alarm is detected in the client device.
▪ An SF event is generated in the corresponding channel in the middle
part of the OTU at site B, and a protection switching is triggered.
▫ The client-side signals are not R_LOS/OTUk_LOF/OTUk_LOM signals.
▪ When any of other alarms is accessed, the same alarm is reported at
each detection point in the system.
Convergence OTU Processing OTN Standard Signals (2/2)
Si te A Si te B
Intra-board Intra-board C lient device
C lient side W DM side W DM side C lient side
module module
SF
R_LOS ODUk_PM_AIS
R_LOS
OTUk_LOF OTUk_LOF ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_LOM OTUk_LOM
OTUk_AIS OTUk_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_BDI &
OTUk_BDI SF ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_BDI Bit error

SD
ODUk_PM_EXC Bit error
PM_BIP bit error
ODUk_PM_DEG
ODUk_PM remote bit error Bit error
performance event SD
OTUk_EXC Bit error
SM_BIP bit error
OTUk_DEG
Bit error
OTUk remote bit error
performance event Bit error
▫ WDM-side
R_LOS/OTUk_LOF/OTUk_AIS/ODUk_PM_AIS/ODUk_PM_OCI/ODUk_PM_LC
K:
▪ The WDM side of the OTU at site B accesses and processes the alarm
signals. The OTU sends the alarm back to the WDM side of site A. In
addition, the alarm is further sent to the downstream client side
connected to site B. After the alarm is processed, the ODUk_PM_AIS
alarm is detected in the client device.
▪ The SF event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at site B, and
a service channel protection switching is triggered.
▫ WDM-side bit error alarms.
▪ The OTU at site B accesses and processes BER alarm signals on the
WDM side, and then sends remote BER performance events to the
WDM side of site A. The alarm is further sent to the client side of site
B, and it is detected in the client device.
▪ An SD event is generated on the WDM side of the OTU at site B.

Whether an SD event serves as the trigger condition of a protection
switching can be configured manually.
Alarm Signal Processing of the Regeneration OTU
Si te A Si te B (regeneration) Si te C
W DM side MFAS frames are W DM side 1 W DM side 2 W DM side
discontinuous.
OTUk_LOM
OTUk_BDI PM_TTI bytes
PM TTI bytes mismatch. ODUk_PM_TIM mismatch. ODUk_PM_TIM
TIM follow-up action
SM TTI bytes mismatch. is enabled.
OTUk_BDI
ODUk_PM_BDI ODUk_PM_BDI ODUk_PM_BDI
OTUk_BDI
OTUk_BDI
OTUk_LOF
OTUk_LOF ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI
ODUk_PM_AIS ODUk_PM_AISODU ODUk_PM_AIS
ODUk_PM_OCI k_PM_OCI ODUk_PM_OCIODU
ODUk_PM_LCK ODUk_PM_LCK k_PM_LCK
PM BIP-8 bit error
ODUk_PM_DEGODU ODUk_PM_DEG
k_PM_EXC ODUk_PM_EXC
SM BIP-8 bit error OTUk_DEG
OTUk_EXC
Bit error before FEC BEFFEC_EXC
R_LOS R_LOS ODUk_PM_AIS
OTUk_BDI
• For regeneration OTUs, all SM alarms are terminated at the local site and are not
transmitted to the downstream, except that the OTUk_LOF inserts the
ODUk_PM_AIS in the downstream. Other alarms are transmitted to the
downstream and reported on the WDM side of the OTU, except that the R_LOS
inserts the ODUk_PM_AIS to the downstream.
OTU Alarm Signal Processing with Cross-Connection
Si te A Si te B
C lient side W DM side W DM side C lient side
R_LOS 3#1 (RX1) 1#3 1#3 3#1 (TX1) REM_SF

4#1 (RX2) 1 (OUT) 1 (IN)
Bit error 4#1 (TX2) REM_SD
1#4 1#4
SF 5#1 (RX3) 5#1 (TX3) REM_SF
1#5 1#5
SD 6#1 (RX4) 6#1 (TX4) REM_SD
1#6 Di rect mode 1#6
3#1 (RX1) 1#3 1#3 3#1 (TX1) REM_SF/SD

SF/SD 4#1 (RX2) 1#4 1 (OUT) 1#4 4#1 (TX2)
1 (IN)
5#1 (RX3) 1#5 1#5 5#1 (TX3)
6#1 (RX4) 1#6 1#6 6#1 (TX4) REM_SF/SD
SF/SD C ross-connect
3#1 (RX1) 1#3 mode
4#1 (RX2) 1#4
5#1 (RX3) 1#5
6#1 (RX4) 1#6
• OTU boards with the cross-connect function support direct or cross-connect

transmission of services. Alarm signals are processed differently in the two
modes.
▫ Direct mode
▪ The REM_SF and REM_SD alarms at the downstream site indicate that
the signals at the corresponding port on the client side at the
upstream site fail or the number of bit errors at this port exceeds the
threshold. For example, when the services in channel 1 at optical port
3 on upstream unit A fail, channel 1 at optical port 3 on unit B at the
downstream reports the REM_SF alarm.
▫ Cross-connect mode
▪ REM_SF and REM_SD indicate something different in this mode. For
example, if services in channel 1 of optical port 4 on the board at
station A fail, the board at downstream B reports the REM_SF alarm
in channel 1 of optical port 3. If services in channel 1 at optical port 3
on upstream C fail, downstream B reports the REM_SF alarm in
channel 1 at optical port 6.
▪ Therefore, when the board reports the REM_SF or REM_SD alarm,
query the cross-connection status of the board at the upstream to
find the signal source. Then, check the client signal status of the
corresponding optical port/channel, such as the optical power, fiber,
and optical module, and take corresponding maintenance measures.
OTU Processing Ethernet Service Signals
Si te A Si te B
module module
R_LOS
R_LOS REM_SF LINK_ERR
Scenario 1: non-auto-
LINK_ERR negotiation mode
LINK_ERR NONE REM_SF
R_LOS REM_SF LINK_ERR

R_LOS
Scenario 2: auto-negotiation LINK_ERR
LINK_ERR LPT Disable
LINK_ERR mode NONE NONE
LINK_ERR LINK_ERR
PM BIP-8 bit error SD
ODUk_PM_DEG Bit error
ODUk PM remote bit ODUk_PM_EXC
error performance event SD
SM BIP-8 bit error OTUk_DEG Bit error
OTUk PM remote bit error OTUk_EXC
performance event SF
Processing of alarm
R_LOS
R_LOS si gnals when GE
OTUk_LOF services are
OTUk_LOF OTUk_LOM LINK_ERR
OTUk_LOM encapsulated into OTN
OTUk_AIS
OTUk_AIS frames
ODUk_PM_BDI &
OTUk_BDI
• After GE services are transmitted to the client side of the Ethernet OTU board,
the signal processing module encapsulates them into OTN or SDH signals,
corresponding to different alarm processing modes.
• The preceding figure shows the alarm processing flow when GE signals are
encapsulated into OTN. The alarm processing flow at the receive end on the
WDM side is similar to that of other OTN signals. The difference is that the
client-side device reports the LINK_ERR alarm.
• This section describes the alarm signal flow when the OTU processes the R_LOS
and LINK_ERR alarms. The signal flow for processing other alarms is similar.
▫ R_LOS
▪ The client sides of the OTUs at sites A and B work in non-auto-
negotiation mode. The R_LOS alarm signal is received on the client
side of the OTU at site A. The alarm signal is sent to site B after it is
processed on the WDM side of the OTU. In this case, the REM_SF
alarm is generated on the client side of the OTU at site B, and the
client device at site B reports the LINK_ERR alarm.
▪ The client sides of the OTUs at sites A and B work in auto-negotiation
mode. The R_LOS alarm signal is received on the client side of the
OTU at site A. The alarm signal is sent to site B after it is processed on
the WDM side of the OTU. In this case, the REM_SF and LINK_ERR
alarms are generated on the client side of the OTU at site B, and the
client device at site B reports the LINK_ERR alarm.
▫ LINK_ERR
▪ The client sides of the OTUs at sites A and B work in non-auto-
negotiation mode. The client signals at site A contain LINK_ERR
alarms, and the client signals are transmitted transparently from site
A to the WDM side of the OTU at site B.
▫ When the client sides of the OTUs at sites A and B work in auto-negotiation
mode, the client side of the OTU at site B does not report the LINK_ERR
alarm if the LPT function of the Ethernet board is disabled. When LPT is
enabled, the client side of site B reports the LINK_ERR alarm.
Contents
1. Overview

▫ Basic Concepts
◼ Common Maintenance Signals
Common Maintenance Signals
Management Network Layer
Signal
Function OTUk ODUkP ODUkT
Alignment
LOF/LOM Y Y –
monitoring
Connectivity
TTI Y Y Y
monitoring
AIS Y Y Y
OCI – Y Y
Maintenance LCK – Y Y
information LTC – – Y
BDI Y Y Y
BEI Y Y Y
IAE/BIAE Y – Y
Signal quality
Performance detection based on BIP-8 Y Y Y
monitoring
• ITU-T G.709 recommends that the following maintenance signals be provided at

the electrical layer:
▫ AIS (all 1s), PMI (payload loss indication), OCI (open connection indication),
LCK (lock), and FDI (forward defect indication).
• In addition, common maintenance signals include:
▫ IAE (introduced alignment error), BIAE (introduced backward alignment

error), BDI (backward defect indication), and BEI (backward error
indication).
Relationship Between OTN Maintenance Signals and Alarms
(1/4)
⚫ Relationship between LCK and common alarms
 The LCK is used to lock the signals of the user access point during a test. Generally, it is
manually inserted at the source end.
 After locking, the STAT byte is set to "101", and the corresponding section layer at the
receive end reports the LCK alarm.
N210 N210
1#ODU1 O O
E O
O O 1#ODU1 4 The ODU1_PM_AIS alarm
2#ODU1 D T T D 2#ODU1 i s detected and reported.
... / / ...
U U U U
O E
40#ODU1 2 2 2 2 40#ODU1
1 The ODU2_PM_LCK The ODU2_PM_LCK alarm is
2 detected and reported. The ODU2_PM_BDI
alarm i s i nserted. 5 alarm i s returned.
6 The ODU2_PM_BDI alarm 3 The AIS i s automatically i nserted to

i s detected and reported. the downstream ODU1.
• In line mode, the N210 board is a typical convergence OTU board.
• LCK signal frame structure:
▫ An LCK signal is transmitted to the downstream to indicate that the

upstream signal connection is locked and no signal passes.
▫ The ODUk_LCK insertion area is filled with "0101 0101". The insertion area
is the entire ODUk signal except FA OH and OTUk OH.
(2/4)
⚫ Levels and reporting mechanisms of common OCI alarms
No electrical cross- Electrical cross-
connection configured connections configured
X OCh λ1 X
TTA C UNQ2 UNQ2 C TTA
S The ODU0_LOFLOM alarm i s S
detected and reported.
The ODU0_PM_OCI alarm i s
suppressed.
Electrical cross-connections
configured and loopback on Electrical cross-
the line board connections configured
X OCh λ1 X
TTA C UNQ2 UNQ2 C TTA
S S
The ODU0_PM_OCI alarm i s

(3/4)
⚫ Levels and reporting mechanisms of common OCI alarms
No optical cross- Other Other Optical cross-
directions directions
connection configured connections configured
N210 R R N210
O FIU FIU O
N210 A A N210
D D
N210 M FIU FIU M N210
The OCh_OCI alarm is

• OCI alarm:
▫ No optical cross-connections are configured in the upstream service link, or

no fiber connection is configured from the OTU board to the MUX board. In
this case, the OCI signal is inserted in the downstream and terminated by
the downstream site.
(4/4)
⚫ Mechanism for reporting TTI-related alarms
 The SM TTI detection mode and TIM follow-up action are enabled at sites A and B.
 If the A->B SM field TTI mismatches...
Site A Site B
M F F D
4 OA I I OA 4
OTU OA OTU
0 U U 0
OSC The OTU2_TIM

The OTU2_BDI alarm is
detected and reported. alarm is detected
and reported.
The ODU2_PM_BDI alarm is
detected and reported. The ODU2_PM_SSF alarm is
Reported when the TIM follow-up action is enabled.
• If a PM TTI mismatch occurs between sites A and B, site B reports an

ODU2_PM_TIM alarm and site A reports an ODU2_PM_BDI alarm.
Contents
1. Overview

▫ Basic Concepts
◼ Electrical-Layer Alarm Case Analysis
Description
Node Fiber
⚫ XXXX = Italic words: assumed conditions (for example, a fiber cut occurs and the user inserts the LCK)
⚫ XXX —Follow-up actions (such as automatic AIS and BDI insertion)
⚫ XXX —Detected defects (such as R_LOS and ODUK_PM_AIS)
⚫ The following assumptions apply to all scenarios:
 The AIS insertion and suppression of the TIM alarms are enabled.
 The TIM detection mode is SAPI and DAPI.
 The ALS and IPA functions are disabled.
• SAPI & DAPI (source access point identifiers & destination access point
identifiers): Both the source and sink flags of a TTI are detected. An alarm is
reported when the source/sink flag of the TTI to be received is inconsistent with
that of the received TTI.
• ALS (automatic level shutdown)

• IPA (intelligent power adjustment)
Scenario: P2P ODU2
⚫ A bidirectional client signal is added and dropped at nodes A and C using common
OTU boards, and is transmitted over a long distance. At node B, the OTU board of
the regeneration type is used for electrical regeneration.
ODU2P
OTU2 OTU2
• Functions of P2P ODU2 nodes
ODU2P OTU2
source OCh source
source function
function function
Functions of nodes
A and C
ODU2P OCh sink
OTU2 sink
sink function
function
function
OCh sink OTU2 OCh source

OTU2 sink
function source function
function
function
Functions of
node B
OTU2 OTU2
OCh source source OCh sink
sink
function function function
function
P2P ODU2: LCK Inserted at Node A
ODU2_PM_LCK
ODU2_LCK ODU2_PM_aBDI

ODU2_PM_BDI
• After site A inserts the ODU2_LCK signal, site C reports the ODU2_PM_LCK minor
alarm and returns the ODU2_PM_BDI minor alarm to the upstream. The a in the
ODU2_PM_aBDI refers to the action of returning the alarm. Finally, the
ODU2_PM_BDI alarm is reported at site A.
• Note: Although the ODU2_PM_LCK alarm is minor, inserting this alarm will
interrupt the services carried by the optical port.
P2P ODU2: Fiber Cut Between A and B
R_LOS ODU2_PM_AIS
ODU2_aAIS
OTU2_aBDI ODU2_PM_aBDI
Site A Fiber cut Site B Site C
X
OTU2_BDI
ODU2_PM_BDI
• When a fiber cut occurs in the transmit direction from site A to B, the WDM side
of the OTU at site B reports the R_LOS alarm, which is critical. Then, the OTU
reports the OTU2_BDI minor alarm to the WDM side of the upstream A.
• Additionally, the alarm is further sent to the downstream of site B. After it is

processed at site C, the WDM side of the OTU at site C reports the ODU2_PM_AIS
minor alarm and sends the ODU2_PM_BDI minor alarm back to the WDM side of
site A.
P2P ODU2: Fiber Deterioration Between A and B
OTU2_DEG ODU2_PM_DEG
OTU2_aBEI ODU2_PM_aBEI
Fiber deterioration
OTU2_BEI
ODU2_PM_BEI
• When the fiber from site A to B in the transmit direction deteriorates, the WDM
side of the OTU at site B detects bit errors and reports the OTU2_DEG minor
alarm. In this case, the OTU2_BEI minor alarm is sent back to the WDM side of
site A.
• Additionally, the alarm is further sent to the downstream. After the alarm is
processed at site C, the WDM side of the OTU at site C reports the
ODU2_PM_DEG minor alarm. And the ODU2_PM_BEI minor alarm is sent back to
site A.
Summary & Reflection
⚫ In the NG WDM system, overheads are used to monitor the entire signal flow from the
transmit end to the receive end. That is, the corresponding path is monitored.
⚫ At the transmit end, signals are mapped, multiplexed, and written into overheads. At the
receive end, they are demultiplexed and demapped, and overheads are processed. If an
exception occurs, the corresponding alarm is reported. Generally, alarms are processed,
detected, and reported at the receive end.
⚫ The one who processes the alarm and detects the alarm should report the alarm.
⚫ A higher-order alarm can trigger a lower-order one.
⚫ When a fault occurs, find the affected trails, and locate the start and end points of each trail.
Detect signals at the end point. If the signals are abnormal, report an alarm.
⚫ Analyze the following two overhead application scenarios.
P2P ODU2: Severe Fiber Deterioration Between A and B
⚫ In the preceding P2P ODU2 networking, if the fiber between sites A and B severely
deteriorates, which of the following trails are affected? Which of the following
alarms are reported when the overhead of a trail is terminated by the terminal?
Which alarms can be sent back?
ODU2P
OTU2 OTU2
Severe fiber
deterioration
• The affected trails include the OTU2 trail from site A to site B and ODU2P from A
to C.
OTU2_LOF
ODU2_aAIS
ODU2_PM_AIS
Severe
OTU2_aBDI ODU2_PM_aBDI
deterioration
/
A B C
OTU2_BDI
ODU2_PM_BDI
Application of the Overheads on an OADM Node (1/3)
T130 N210 N210 T130 N210 N210 T130
ODU1P ODU1P
si nk source
ODU1P ODU2P OTU2 OTU2 ODU2P ODU2P OTU2 OTU2 ODU2P ODU1P
ODU1 cross-
ODU1 cross-
ODU1 cross-
connection
connection
connection
source source source si nk si nk source source si nk si nk si nk
ODU1P ODU2P OTU2 OTU2 ODU2P ODU2P OTU2 OTU2 ODU2P ODU1P
si nk si nk si nk source source si nk si nk source source source
ODU1P ODU1P
si nk source
OTU2 OTU2
ODU2P ODU2P
ODU1P (A–B) ODU1P (B–C)
ODU1P (A–C)
• The preceding figure shows the application of the ODU1/ODU2/OTU2 overheads

on an OADM network.
▫ Nodes A and C use the T130 and N210 boards to access client services and
process overheads. Node B uses the N210, T130, and N210 boards to add,
drop, and pass through services. The source and sink nodes of the OTU2,
ODU2P, and ODU1P overheads are marked in the figure. The WDM-side
wavelengths are on the OTU2 level. Three ODU1s are allocated as follows:
▪ First ODU1: A–B (Services are dropped at node B.)

▪ Second ODU1: A–C (Services pass through node B.)
▪ Third ODU1: B–C (Services are added at node B.)
Site A Fiber cut Site B Site C
T130 N210 X N210 T130 N210 N210 T130
ODU2P ODU2P
ODU1P (A–C)
Detects the
R_LOS/OTU2_SSF. 1
Inserts back the Inserts the
OTU2_BDI. 2 ODU2_PM_AIS. 2
3 Detects the 3
OTU2_BDI. 3 Inserts back the Inserts the Inserts the 3
ODU2_PM_BDI. ODU1_PM_AIS. ODU1_PM_AIS.
Detects the
4 ODU2_PM_BDI. Detects the Detects the
ODU1_PM_SSF. 4 ODU1_PM_SSF. 4
Inserts back the Inserts back the
Detects the ODU1_PM_BDI.
5 ODU1_PM_BDI.
5
5 ODU1_PM_BDI.
Detects the
6 ODU1_PM_BDI.
• When a fiber cut occurs in the direction from node A to node B, the preceding
figure illustrates the overhead processing and detection and alarm reporting. The
detailed process is as follows:
▫ Overhead processing and detection: When a fiber cut occurs between nodes
A and B, node B detects the R_LOS alarm and OTU2_SSF alarms and inserts
the OTU2_BDI back to node A. In addition to generating the ODU2_PM_AIS
and inserting the ODU2_PM_BDI back to node A, node B triggers the
insertion of the lower-order overhead (ODU1s of A–B and A–C)
ODU1_PM_AIS. Node B and node C detect their respective ODU1_PM_AIS
alarms. The ODU1_PM_AIS trigger the backward insertion of the
ODU1_PM_BDI. Node A then detects the ODU2_PM_BDI and
ODU1_PM_BDI from node B and the ODU1_PM_BDI from node C.
▫ Alarm reporting: Nodes A, B, and C report corresponding alarms after

detecting the overhead alarms. Node A reports the ODU1_PM_BDI,
ODU2_PM_BDI, and OTU2_BDI alarms (ODU1s of A–B and A–C). Node B
reports the R_LOS, OTU2_SSF, and ODU1_PM_SSF alarms. Node C reports
the ODU1_PM_SSF alarm. In this case, it can be inferred that the optical
signals in the transmit direction of node A and receive direction of node B
are interrupted.
Site A Fiber deterioration Site B Site C
T130 N210 N210 T130 N210 N210 T130
ODU2P ODU2P
ODU1P (A–C)
Detects the
1 OTU2_BIP-8.
Detects the
2
2 OTU2_DEG.
Inserts back the Detects the
2 OTU2_BEI. ODU2_PM_BIP-8.
3 3 3 3
Inserts back the Detects the Detects the Detects the
3 Detects the OTU2_BEI
ODU2_PM_BEI. ODU1_PM_BIP-8. ODU2_PM_DEG. ODU1_BIP-8.
Detects the Inserts back the Detects the
4 ODU2_PM_BEI. ODU1_PM_BEI. ODU1_PM_DEG.
Inserts back the
ODU1_PM_BEI.
4 4 4
Detects the
5 ODU1_PM_BEI.
Detects the Detects the
5 ODU1_PM_BEI. 4 ODU1_PM_DEG.
• When a fiber cut occurs between nodes A and B, the preceding figure illustrates
the overhead processing and detection, and alarm and performance event
reporting. The detailed process is as follows:
▫ Overhead processing and detection: When the fiber between nodes A and B
deteriorates, node B detects the OTU2_BIP8 bit error, then detects the
OTU2_DEG, and inserts the OTU2_BEI back to node A. At the same time,
node B detects the ODU2_PM_BIP8 bit error and inserts the ODU2_PM_BEI
back to node A. Therefore, ODU1_PM_BIP bit errors are detected in the
lower-order ODU1s (ODU1s A–B and A–C) at nodes B and C. The
ODU1_PM_BIP bit errors at nodes B and C cause both nodes to detect the
ODU1_PM_DEG and insert the ODU1_PM_BEI back to the corresponding
upstream nodes. Node A then detects the OTU2_BEI, ODU2_PM_BEI, and
ODU1_PM_BEI from node B and the ODU1_PM_BEI from node C.
▫ Alarm and performance event reporting: Nodes A, B, and C generate
relevant alarms and performance events after detecting the overhead
indications. Node A reports the ODU1_PM_BEI, ODU2_PM_BEI, and
OTU2_BEI performance events (ODU1s of A–B and A–C). Node B reports
the OTU2_DEG, ODU2_PM_DEG, and ODU1_PM_DEG alarms. Node C
reports the ODU1_PM_DEG alarm. In this case, it can be inferred that the
optical signals in the transmit direction of node A and receive direction of
node B deteriorate.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following about the electrical-layer

overhead processing of the source are true?
A. At the transmit end, the OPUk performs mapping, frequency adjustment, and rate
adaptation on client signals.
B. ODUkP calculates BIP-8 and writes PM and GCC1/2 overheads.
C. ODUkT calculates BIP-8 and writes TCMi.

D. OTUk calculates BIP-8 and writes SM, GCC0, FAS, and MAFS.
• Answer:
▫ 1. ABCD
Contents
1. Overview
Optical-Layer Alarm Detection Mechanism
⚫ OSC overhead structure
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 ... TS14 TS15 TS16 ... TS31
1 E1 Orderwire phone channel

2 F1 Codirectional 64 kbit/s data channel
3–13, 15 D1–D12 DCC used to transmit OAM information between sites
14 ALC ACL protocol channel
17 F2 User channel byte
18 F3 User channel byte
19 E2 Orderwire phone channel
Optical overhead byte used to transmit OTN optical
21–23 OOS
overheads
Other RES Reserved byte
• The alarm detection of optical-layer overheads is implemented through the OOS.

Although R_LOS and MUT_LOS alarms are optical-layer alarms, they are
detected and reported based optical power, not OSS.
▫ The OOS overhead is non-associated. It uses timeslots 21, 22, and 23 in the
OSC to transmit OTS, OMS, and OCh overheads.
▫ Whether the alarms and performance events of the optical-layer
management can be correctly reported is closely related to the fiber
connection configuration of a system. The implementation of optical-layer
alarm and performance detection depends on correct fiber management.
Fiber management is the first step of E2E service management. Fiber
channels are logically connected to create a channel for E2E service
configuration, which is the basis to manage alarms. That is, to maintain
alarms and performance events at the optical layer, correct optical-layer
trails must be available on both the NMS side and the NE side, to manage
alarms and performance events on the corresponding OTS, OMS, and OCh.
• If the OSC is not enabled in a WDM system or it does not carry the OOS
overhead (that is, the optical-layer overhead is not enabled), the optical-layer
overhead alarm and performance management cannot be implemented.
OTN Optical-Layer Alarm Processing - Scenario 1 (1/3)
OTU OTU
O O
OA OA
M D
OTU OTU
Client device
Client device
F F
SC1 I I SC1
U U
OTU OTU
O O
OA OA
D M
OTU OTU
Site A Site B
• This section describes the alarm signal flow at the optical layer processed by the
OTU board.
• The OCh, OMS, and OTS have many unique alarms. This section describes the
association between optical-layer alarms generated on each NE.
• In this scenario, there are two sites. Both site A and site B are OTM sites.
⚫ A fiber cut occurs in the direction from site A to site B.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI alarm.
⚫ The OA unit in the direction from A to B at site A is faulty.

 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS_P alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI_P alarm.
⚫ The input optical power of the OA board in the direction from A to B at site A is lost.
 The FIU board at site A inserts the OTS_PMI alarm, but the FIU board at site B does not report the OTS_LOS_P
alarm.
⚫ The fiber from the SC1 board to the FIU board at site A is broken.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS_O alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI_O
alarm.
⚫ The TTI to be received at site B is inconsistent with that transmitted at site A.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_TIM alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports
the OTS_BDI alarm.
⚫ The OM unit at site A is faulty.
 The OD unit at site B reports the OMS_LOS_P alarm, and the OM unit at site A reports
the OMS_BDI_P alarm.
⚫ The OTU board at site A is faulty.
 The OTU board at site B reports the OCh_LOS_P alarm.
OTU OTU
O O
OA OA OA
M D
OTU OTU
Client device
Client device
F F F F
SC1 I I SC2 I I SC1
U U U U
OTU OTU
O O
OA OA OA
D M
OTU OTU

• In this scenario, there are three sites. Site A and site C are OTM sites, and site B is
an OLA site.
• The OLA site only amplifies optical signals and terminates OTS trails. The OMS
and OCh trails are between A and C.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS alarm. The OD at site C reports the OMS_FDI or
OMS_SSF alarm. The FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI alarm. The OM at site A reports the
OMS_BDI alarm.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS_P alarm. The OD at site C reports the OMS_FDI_P or
OMS_SSF_P alarm. The FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI_P alarm. The OM at site A reports
 The FIU board at site A inserts the OTS_PMI alarm, but the FIU board at site B does not report the
OTS_LOS_P alarm.
⚫ The fiber from the SC1 board to the FIU board is broken.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS_O alarm. The OD at site C reports the
OMS_FDI_O or OMS_SSF_O alarm. The FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI_O alarm.
The OM at site A reports the OMS_BDI_O alarm.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_TIM alarm. The OD at site C reports the OMS_FDI
or OMS_SSF alarm. The FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI alarm. The OM at site A
reports the OMS_BDI alarm.
 The OD unit at site C reports the OMS_LOS_P alarm, and the OM unit at site A reports
 The OTU board at site C reports the OCh_LOS_P alarm.
West East client
client side side
Site B O O O O
T T T T
OTU OTU
U U U U
O O
OA OA
M D
OTU OA WSD9 RMU9 OA OTU
Client device
Client device
F F F F
SC1 I I SC2 I I SC1
U U U U
OTU OA RMU9 WSD9 OA OTU
O O
OA OA
D M
OTU O O O O OTU
T T T T
U U U U
Site A West client side East client side Site C
• In this scenario, there are three sites. Site A and site C are OTM sites, and site B is
a ROADM site.
• In this scenario, some wavelengths are added or dropped at the ROADM node.
That is, some wavelengths are used between sites A and B or between sites B and
C, and some wavelengths are used between sites A and C. Therefore, some OCh
trails are between A and B or B and C, and some OCh trails are between A and C.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI
alarm. At the same time, site C reports the OCh_FDI or OCh_SSF alarm (for the wavelength from
site A to site C).
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS_P alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the
OTS_BDI_P alarm. At the same time, site C reports the OCh_FDI_P or OCh_SSF_P alarm (for the
wavelength from site A to site C).
 The FIU board at site A inserts the OTS_PMI alarm, but the FIU board at site B does not report the
OTS_LOS_P alarm.
⚫ The fiber from the SC1 board to the FIU board at site A is broken.
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_LOS_O alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the
OTS_BDI_O alarm. At the same time, site C reports the OCh_FDI_O or OCh_SSF_O alarm (for the
 The FIU board at site B reports the OTS_TIM alarm, and the FIU board at site A reports the OTS_BDI
alarm. At the same time, site C reports the OCh_FDI or OCh_SSF alarm (for the wavelength from
site A to site C).
 The OD unit at site B reports the OMS_LOS_P alarm, and the OM unit at site A reports the
OMS_BDI_P alarm. At the same time, site C reports the OCh_FDI_P or OCh_SSF_P alarm (for the

The OTU board at site B reports the OCh_LOS_P alarm (for the wavelength from site A to site B).
The OTU board at site C reports the OCh_LOS_P alarm (for the wavelength from site A to site C).
⚫ The fiber from site B to site C is broken.
 The FIU board at site C reports the OTS_LOS alarm, and the FIU board at site B reports the OTS_BDI
alarm.
⚫ The OA unit in the direction from B to C at site B is faulty.
 The FIU board at site C reports the OTS_LOS_P alarm, and the FIU board at site B reports the
OTS_BDI_P alarm.
⚫ The input optical power of the OA board in the direction from B to C at site B is lost.

The FIU board at site B inserts the OTS_PMI alarm, but the FIU board at site C does not report the
OTS_LOS_P alarm.
⚫ The fiber from the SC1 board to the FIU board at site B is broken.
 The FIU board at site C reports the OTS_LOS_O alarm, and the FIU board at site B reports the
OTS_BDI_O alarm.
⚫ The TTI byte to be received at site C is inconsistent with that transmitted at site B.
 The FIU board at site C reports the OTS_TIM alarm, and the FIU board at site B reports the OTS_BDI
alarm.
⚫ The OM unit at site B is faulty.
 The OD unit at site C reports the OMS_LOS_P alarm, and the OM unit at site B reports the
OMS_BDI_P alarm.
⚫ The OTU board at site B is faulty.

 The OTU board at site C reports the OCh_LOS_P alarm (for the wavelength from site B to site C).
OCh-Layer Alarm Analysis (1/2)
⚫ OCh alarm reporting mechanism 1
 When the payload of OCh λ2 at the receive end is lost:
T130 X N210 OCh λ1 N210 X T130

C C
T130 S N210 OCh λ2 N210 S T130
R _LOS detected and reported

OTU2_BDI detected
and reported OTU2_SSF detected and reported
ODU2_PM_BDI detected ODU2_PM_SSF detected and reported
and reported
• This example shows the alarm signal flow at the OCh layer. The OCh overhead is
generated and terminated on the OTU board. Therefore, when an optical-layer
alarm is generated at the OCh layer, the OTU board at the downstream site
reports the corresponding alarm.
• When OTU2_SSF and ODU2_PM_SSF alarms are generated on the OTU board at
the receive end due to R_LOS, electrical-layer alarms such as OTU2_BDI and
ODU2_PM_BDI will be reported at the transmit end.
OCh-Layer Alarm Analysis (2/2)
⚫ OCh alarm reporting mechanism 2
Site A Site B
T N N T
1 2 M F F D 2 1
4 X OA OA 4
3 1 I I 1 3
0 0 0 U U 0 0 0
OSC
R _LOS detected and reported
OTU2_BDI detected
OTU2_SSF detected and
and reported
reported
ODU2_PM_BDI detected ODU2_PM_SSF detected and
and reported reported
• When an OMS trail that a wavelength traverses is interrupted, the corresponding

OTS will report a MUT_LOS alarm. At the same time, each OCh carried on the
OMS will report an R_LOS alarm.
OMS-Layer Alarm Analysis
Site A Site B
M F F D
OTU 4 X OA I
U
I
U
OA
OA 4 OTU
0 0
MUT_LOS detected and reported R_LOS detected and reported
MUT_LOS detected and reported
• When M40 and D40 boards coexist in a system, the system supports the
reporting and detection of the MUT_LOS alarm, and the downstream OTU board
reports the R_LOS alarm.
• When the RMU9 and WSD9 boards are used to set up a fiber array at a site (the
AMx of the RMU9 and the DMx of the WSD9 are interconnected in different
directions), OMS alarms cannot be detected or reported if the pigtail between
the AMx and DMx is faulty or incorrectly connected.
OSC-Layer Alarm Analysis
Site A Site B
M F F D
OTU 4 OA I I OA
OA 4 OTU
0 U U 0
OSC X OSC
OSC_RDI detected and reported

OSC_LOS detected and
reported
• This example shows the alarm signal flow at the OSC layer. The OOS overhead is
generated and terminated on the OSC board. Therefore, when an optical-layer
alarm is generated at the OSC layer, the downstream OSC board reports the
corresponding alarm.
• When the OSC board at the receive end generates a critical OSC_LOS alarm, the
corresponding OSC board at the transmit end reports a minor OSC_RDI alarm.
OTS-Layer Alarm Analysis (1/2)
Site A Site B
R_LOS detected
and reported
M F F D
I I
OTU 4
0
OA
U X U
OA 4
0
OTU
MUT_LOS detected
OSC OSC and reported
OSC_RDI detected and reported OSC_LOS detected and reported
• When the optical cable between two FIU boards is faulty, all downstream OA and
DMUX boards can detect and report the MUT_LOS alarm, and the downstream
OTU boards can report the R_LOS alarm.
• In this case, the downstream OSC boards cannot receive the OSC signal. Those at
the receive end report the OSC_LOS alarm (critical), and those at the transmit
end report the OSC_RDI alarm (minor).
OTS-Layer Alarm Analysis (2/2)
MUT_LOS detected and

reported
MUT_LOS detected
and reported
M F F D
Site A OTU 4 OA X I
U
I
U
OA 4 OTU Site B
0 0
OSC OSC
MUT_LOS detected
and reported R_LOS detected and
reported
• If a fiber cut occurs between the transmit-end OA board and FIU board, the
system supports the detection and reporting of the MUT_LOS critical alarm on all
downstream OA and DMUX boards and the R_LOS alarm on downstream OTU
boards.
• In this case, the OSC boards at the downstream can normally receive the OSC
signals. Therefore, they do not report the corresponding alarm.
Quiz
1. (Single-answer question) Which of the following alarms is reported when a fiber

cut occurs between the OA and FIU boards?
A. MUT_LOS
B. R_LOS
C. OTS_LOS
D. OMS_LOS
• Answer: A
Summary
⚫ In the course of alarm signal flow analysis, we have learned:

 Optical-layer alarm signal flow analysis
 Signal flow analysis of electrical-layer alarms and performance events
 Other alarm signal flows and processing methods
intelligent world.


that
NG WDM System Troubleshooting
Foreword
⚫ This chapter describes the main methods and means for locating faults of
WDM products. It provides maintenance personnel with the ideas and
methods for locating and handling faults. In addition, it provides typical
troubleshooting cases of WDM products. Maintenance personnel can
improve their fault locating capabilities by learning the troubleshooting
process.
Objectives

 Describe the methods and ideas for handling WDM faults.
 Describe the classification of common faults and corresponding handling
methods.
Contents
1. Troubleshooting Preparations
2. Fault Locating Ideas and Methods
3. Troubleshooting by Fault Type
4. Case Analysis
Requirements on Maintenance Personnel (1)
⚫ Professional skills
 Be familiar with WDM fundamentals.
 Be familiar with the causes of alarms in WDM systems and the principles of generating
alarm signal flows.
 Be proficient in handling common alarm signals.
⚫ Basic operations
 Master the basic operations on transmission devices.
 Master the basic operations on NMS devices.
 Master the basic operations on common test instruments.
• To troubleshoot optical transmission systems, maintenance personnel must have

professional skills and follow operational regulations. Maintenance personnel
should master the professional skills and knowledge that are described in this
section.
• For the causes and handling methods of alarms, refer to the Alarm and
Performance Event Handling.
• Common test instruments for the transmission system include the optical power
meter, SDH tester, SmartBits tester, optical spectrum analyzer, communication
signal analyzer, and optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). For details about
how to use these instruments, see the user manuals of them.
Requirements on Maintenance Personnel (2)
⚫ Awareness of project networking
 Be familiar with the networking of the project.
 Be familiar with the service configuration, wavelength assignment, optical distribution
frame (ODF) fiber routing, board versions, and device layout in equipment rooms.
 Be familiar with device running status in the local office.
 Be familiar with engineering documents and maintain them regularly.
⚫ Collection and saving of on-site data
 Before fault handling, maintenance personnel should first collect and save on-site data.
• This process includes periodic data collection when equipment is running

normally and data collection when faults occur in equipment. Before fault
handling, maintenance personnel should first collect and save on-site data.
Contents
4. Case Analysis
Basic Rules for Fault Locating
External first, then Multi-wavelength first,

(1) (4) then single-wavelength
internal
Locate
the fault (5)Bidirectional first, then
Network first, then NE (2) unidirectional
to an NE.
(6) Common first, then

High-severity first, (3)
individual
then low-severity
• Check for external faults and then internal faults.
▫ During system troubleshooting, check for external faults first. External

faults include fiber cuts, access of SDH devices, and power failures.
• Check for network faults and then NE faults.

▫ When a fault occurs in a transmission device, multiple sites, rather than a
single site, may report alarms at times. In this case, you must narrow down
the fault scope through analysis and judgment to quickly and accurately
locate the site where the fault occurs.
• Analyze high-severity alarms and then low-severity alarms.

▫ Analyze high-severity alarms first, such as critical and major alarms. Then,
analyze low-severity alarms, such as minor alarms and warning alarms.
• Analyze multi-wavelength signal alarms and then single-wavelength signal

alarms.
▫ When analyzing alarms, check whether the signals of multiple wavelengths
or only a single wavelength are faulty first. If the signals of multiple
wavelengths are faulty, locate the fault to the multiplexing part. After you
clear the fault of this part, the tributary signal alarms are cleared generally.
Common Fault Locating Methods
Basic troubleshooting methods
Alarm and
Signal flow Meter-based
performance Loopback Replacement
analysis testing
data analysis
• For common hardware faults, perform analysis, testing, and board replacement
in sequence.
▫ When a fault occurs, first analyze the service signal flow, alarms,
performance events, and performance data, thereby locating the faulty
point preliminarily.
▫ Then, measure the optical power section by section along the signal flow
and analyze the optical spectrum. Check whether any fiber patch cord or
optical cable is faulty. If no fiber patch cord or optical cable is faulty, you
can determine that a board is faulty.
▫ Finally, replace the board or optical fiber to rectify the fault.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Signal Flow Analysis (1)
⚫ Feature
 The service flow of a faulty WDM system is checked node by node to locate the fault.
⚫ Basic procedure
 Divide the entire network into several OMSs to determine the faulty section.
 Check whether the fault occurs unidirectionally or bidirectionally.
 Based on the fault information, locate the fault along the reverse signal flow.
• The key of signal flow analysis on services is that maintenance personnel must
have a general understanding of the entire network, be familiar with the fiber
connections of the maintained office, and understand the operations on the
NMS.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Signal Flow Analysis (2)
⚫ Channels for obtaining signal flow information
Signal Flow
Content Characteristic
Source
Network-wide NMS configuration information
Networking Oriented to the entire network and a large
and site types
diagram of the amount of information
Topology and amplifier configuration information
entire network Used to divide sections during fault locating
Wavelength allocation information
Oriented to the entire network and a large
amount of information
Fiber connections between sites
Display of the signal flow at a specific
NMS Protection information and intra-site signal flow
network layer
OMS/OCh/Client-based trail signal flow
Provision of corresponding alarm and
performance information
Fiber/cable distribution and connections in the

Fiber connection Oriented to a single site
office
diagram Display of actual fiber connections at a site
Positions of the ODFs, adapters, VOAs, and FOAs
• When locating a fault, NMS maintenance personnel need to roughly locate the
fault, and identify the faulty section and network layer. Then, on-site
maintenance personnel carefully analyze and locate the fault according to the
service flow in the office.
• This method requires maintenance personnel to master professional skills and

knowledge.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Alarm and Performance
Data Analysis (1)
⚫ Definition
 By analyzing a large number of alarms and performance events generated when a fault
occurs, you can roughly determine the type and location of the fault.
 For different boards, the generation, detection, and transmission of alarms vary according
to board types. With alarm signal flow analysis, you can quickly locate the point where
the fault occurs.
⚫ Obtaining alarms and performance data
 Current and historical alarms and a large number of abnormal performance events
reported by the NMS
 Cabinet indicators and board indicators
• Fault locating by obtaining alarm and performance information through the

NMS has the following features:
▫ In the case of complex networking, services, and fault information, a large
number of alarms and performance events may be generated when a fault
occurs. If there are too many alarms and performance events, it is tough for
maintenance personnel to analyze these alarms and performance events.
▫ This method is dependent on a normal computer, software, and

communication. If the computer, software, or communication is faulty, it is
less effective or impossible to obtain fault information by using this
method.
• When you obtain the alarm or performance information through the NMS,
ensure that the current operating time of each NE is correctly set. Otherwise, the
alarm and performance information may be incorrectly reported or sometimes
even not reported.
• During the maintenance, special attention should be paid to setting the NE time
to the current time after an NE is reconfigured. Otherwise, the NE will work at
the default time, which is not the current time.
• When some faults occur, no obvious alarm or performance event may be
reported, or sometimes even no alarm or performance event can be queried. In
this case, the alarm and performance data analysis method does not take effect.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Alarm and Performance
Data Analysis (2)
⚫ A comparison of fault locating by obtaining information on the NMS and fault
locating by observing indicators
Item NMS Device Indicator
Intended users NMS maintenance personnel Device maintenance personnel
Role in fault locating Dominant Auxiliary

Network-wide, large amount, and
Alarm information Single device, small amount, and unclear
accurate
Historical alarms Available Unavailable
Alarm generation time Visible Unknown
Performance event Visible Unknown

Computer, software, and
Completely dependent Irrelevant
communication
• Comparison between the two methods of obtaining information
▫ You can obtain fault information about a device through the NMS or by
observing indicators on the device. The two methods have their own
advantages. In practice, the two methods must be used together to locate a
fault.
▫ When handling a fault, maintenance personnel from the network
management center and field maintenance personnel must work jointly.
Generally, maintenance personnel from the network management center
lead the fault handling and field maintenance personnel cooperate and
take unified actions.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Meter-based Testing
⚫ Optical power test
 Obtain the accurate optical power of the test point.
 Compare the value with that queried in the performance event through the NMS.
⚫ Spectrum analysis test
 Perform online signal testing at the MON port.
 Test the single-wavelength optical power, center wavelength, and OSNR, and analyze the
gain flatness of the OA board.
• The meter-based testing method is generally used to resolve external issues of

transmission devices or device interconnection issues. The common test meters of
a WDM system include the optical power meter, optical spectrum analyzer, SDH
tester, and communication signal analyzer. The optical power meter and optical
spectrum analyzer are most commonly used.
• It is persuasive to use test meters to analyze and locate faults. However, this
method has high requirements on test meters and maintenance personnel.
• Although the optical power of each point can be obtained from the performance
data on the NMS, to obtain an accurate value, it is necessary to measure the
optical power of this point once again with an optical power meter. To obtain the
optical power of the main signal, you can detect the output optical power of the
MON port.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Loopback (1)
⚫ Feature
 It is applicable when the fault scope is known.
 It does not depend on in-depth analysis of alarms and performance data.
 It is suitable to troubleshoot board faults and line faults.
 Loopbacks are classified into software loopbacks and hardware loopbacks.
⚫ Precautions
 When performing a loopback on the optical path of the multiplexing part to locate a
fault, ensure that the OSNR, dispersion, and optical power meet the requirements of the
OTU board.
 The loopback method interrupts service signals.
• The loopback operation adversely affects normal services. Therefore, you are
advised to perform the loopback operation when traffic is light.
• During the loopback operation, ensure that the dispersion compensation meets
system requirements.
• Loopback is applicable when the fault scope is already known. The fault scope
can be divided into two sections, which are to be handled one by one. The
loopback method can be used to troubleshoot board faults and line faults.
• Note: Use FOAs or VOAs during the operation.

Common Fault Locating Methods: Loopback (2)
⚫ Software loopback
Outloop Inloop
Client-side Client-side
OTU OTU
outloop inloop
Client side WDM side Client side WDM side
WDM-side WDM-side
outloop OTU inloop OTU
⚫ Hardware loopback
Rx OUT Rx OUT
Optical attenuator Optical attenuator
Tx IN Tx IN
• Software loopback:
▫ Outloop is used to test whether the optical fiber line and connector are
normal.
▪ Outloop: a method of looping the signals received at an inbound port

to an outbound port on a local device without changing the structure
of the signals.
▫ Inloop is used to test whether signal processing on the board is normal.
▪ Inloop: a method of looping the processed signals from the outbound

port back to the inbound port on the local device.
• Hardware loopback:
▫ Hardware loopback refers to an action of manually connecting optical

fibers to physical ports (optical ports) to achieve signal loopback.
▫ When performing a hardware self-loop, you must add an appropriate
attenuator to prevent the optical receiver module from being saturated due
to strong receive optical power or from being damaged due to excessively
high optical power.
▫ A loopback on the main optical path can be implemented only through
hardware loopback.
Common Fault Locating Methods: Replacement
⚫ Feature
 Use a normal object to replace an object that is suspected to be abnormal.
 The replacement method is applicable to troubleshooting external transmission device
faults.
 This method requires spare parts.
⚫ Advantages
 Low requirements on maintenance personnel
 Practical operations
• The replacement method is applicable to troubleshooting external transmission

device faults, such as optical fiber, fiber adapter, SDH access device, and power
supply device faults. After a fault is located to a specific site, you can use this
method to check whether a board or module at the site is faulty.
• This method requires spare parts, and extra care is required during its application.
Any careless operation during the replacement may cause damage to parts and
boards and even result in other faults.
• The objects to be replaced can be optical fibers, boards, fiber adapters, optical
attenuators, SDH devices, or power supply devices.
Comparison of Common Methods
Requirement on
Method Application Scope Feature Maintenance
Personnel
Oriented to the entire network
Signal flow analysis General The fault scope can be accurately located, High
without affecting services.
Alarm and The entire network is evaluated. It can predict
performance data General potential device risks, which does not affect High
analysis services.
Isolating external faults and Convincing. It has requirements for test
Meter-based testing Relatively high
addressing interconnection issues meters.
Locating the fault to a site or Independent of analysis on alarms and Relatively high
isolating external faults performance events
Loopback Quick operations
Possible adverse impact on ECC
communication and services
Locating the fault to a board or

Replacement Simple, with need for spare parts Low
isolating external faults
Quiz
1. (True or false) The basic principle of fault locating is to accurately locate a fault to a site
or even a board.
2. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following are common fault locating methods?
A. Signal flow analysis

B. Alarm and performance data analysis
C. Meter-based testing
D. Loopback
E. Replacement
• Answer:
▫ 1. True
▫ 2. ABCDE
Contents
4. Case Analysis
Common Faults
⚫ Service configuration fault
⚫ Optical power abnormality
⚫ Service interruption
⚫ Bit error
⚫ ECC fault
⚫ Protection fault
Service Configuration Faults (1)
⚫ Symptom
 An error message is reported when a user attempts to create a single-site optical cross-
connection from the LSX board to an FIU board. The creation fails.
• The NMS displays the cause: The fiber/cable direction is incorrectly selected.
Select the direction again. Error code: 1107329322.
⚫ Cause analysis
 Cause 1: The single-site optical cross-connection is incorrectly configured.
 Cause 2: The intra-site logical fiber connections are incorrect.
⚫ Handling procedure
 Cause 1: Check the single-site optical cross-connection. It is found that the configuration is correct.

Cause 2: Check the fiber connections on the NMS along the signal flow from the LSX board to the
FIU board, as shown in the following figure.
 It is found that the logical fiber connection between the M40V and OAU1 boards is not established.
 After the optical fiber is connected on the NMS, the single-site optical cross-connection is
configured successfully.
⚫ Suggestions and summary
 Service configuration faults mainly include:
◼ Logical fiber connections are incorrect.
◼ Optical cross-connections are configured incorrectly.
◼ The timeslots at the receive and transmit ends of an electrical cross-connection are incorrectly
configured.
◼ The receive and transmit FEC/AFEC configurations are inconsistent.
◼ The receive and transmit configurations of the client-side attributes of OTU or tributary boards
are inconsistent.
• Logical fiber connections are incorrect.
▫ Generally, a message is reported indicating that the connection trail does

not exist or the fiber/cable direction is incorrect.
• Optical cross-connections are configured incorrectly.

▫ For example, an optical cross-connection should be configured for the OUT
port on the ROADM board, but the optical cross-connection is configured
for the EXPO port. In this case, the system reports a message indicating that
the connection trail does not exist.
• The timeslots at the receive and transmit ends of an electrical cross-connection

are incorrectly configured.
• The receive and transmit FEC configurations are inconsistent.
• The receive and transmit configurations of the client-side attributes of OTU or

tributary boards are inconsistent.
▫ For example, when the client-side service type of the LSX board is 10GE
LAN, the service mapping modes of the ports at the transmit and receive
ends must be the same.
Optical Power Abnormalities (1)
⚫ Fault categories and common causes
Category Fault Cause
The pigtail attenuation is too high. (The pigtail is bent, squeezed, or bound, or
its connector is contaminated.)
External fault
The line performance deteriorates.
The pigtail is incorrectly connected.
The device temperature is too high.
Device fault
The OTU or OA board fails, or its performance deteriorates.
⚫ Common symptoms
 A large number of bit errors occur in services.
 Services are frequently and transiently interrupted.
 Services are interrupted.
• The optical power is a key performance indicator of a WDM system. The

excessively low or high input optical power can cause the system to generate bit
errors, or even interrupt services.
• In addition to device faults, the possible cause of an optical power abnormality

can be the following: The pigtail connector is dirty, the pigtail damage increases
attenuation, or the bending radius of the pigtail is too small. Therefore, if the
optical power decreases due to unknown reasons, check the pigtail connection
and attenuation first. Specifically, check whether interfaces on the ODF,
attenuator, fiber adapter, and optical interface board are securely connected;
check whether interfaces on the ODF, attenuator, fiber adapter, and optical
interface board are clean; check whether the interface of the pigtail connector is
clean; check whether the pigtail is squeezed; check whether the bending radius of
the pigtail is too small and whether there is any cut; check whether the pigtail is
bound too tightly.
• During the commissioning of WDM devices, ensure that the pigtail connections
are correct. There are many fiber connections on WDM devices. Errors generally
occur on the fiber connections between an FIU and an OSC unit, between an FIU
and an OA unit, between an OTU and a multiplexer/demultiplexer unit, and to
OADM boards.
Optical Power Abnormalities (2)
⚫ Fault locating skills:
 To detect and locate optical power abnormalities in a timely manner, pay attention to the
following points during routine maintenance:
◼ Periodically back up the optical power value at each point of the system.
◼ Periodically back up the receive and transmit optical power values of important boards.
◼ Record the wavelength of each channel and the OSNR at each receive point.
◼ Master the typical input and output optical power values of different types of OTU boards and
OA boards.
 Common methods: alarm and performance data analysis, signal flow analysis
• Record and back up the optical power values of a system. These help to compare
the optical power values in different periods and find the abnormal optical power
point in time.
• Fault locating methods:

▫ Alarm and performance data analysis
▫ Signal flow analysis

▫ Replacement
▫ Meter-based testing
Service Interruptions (1)
The optical fiber or connector is abnormal.
The power supply is faulty.

External fault
The environment (temperature and humidity) is abnormal.
The line is faulty.
Device hardware fault The board performance deteriorates or the board fails.
Optical power abnormality Services are interrupted due to abnormal optical power.
Bit error Excessive bit errors cause the interruption of services.
Device interconnection fault The interconnection between WDM devices and other devices is abnormal.
• If the R_LOS, R_LOF, R_OOF, or MUT_LOS alarm is reported on a device, services

are interrupted.
• If the service interruption is regular in time, analyze the running environment
when the fault occurs. For example, the service interruption may be caused by
external interference or abnormal temperature.
• Service interruptions due to hardware faults are mainly caused by board
performance deterioration or failures. The boards that fail or have performance
deterioration include optical transponder unit (OTU) boards, optical amplifier
boards, and multiplexer/demultiplexer boards.
⚫ Common interruption scenarios (1)
Common alarms: MUT_LOS, and R_LOS and R_LOF on all OTU boards
Interruption of Possible causes: The line fiber is broken, the optical power is abnormal,
all services on or the MUX/DEMUX/OA board is faulty.
an NE
Common methods: signal flow analysis, alarm and performance data
analysis, meter-based testing, and replacement
Common alarms: R_LOS, R_LOF, R_OOF, and IN-POW_LOW reported

Service by the OTU (Rx)
interruption Possible causes: The output optical power of the client-side device is
of a single abnormal, the OTU board is faulty, or the pigtail is faulty.
channel on
the client side Common methods: loopback, meter-based testing, and alarm and
performance data analysis
• If all services are interrupted due to a line fiber cut, the OSC also reports the
R_LOS alarm.
• If only services on the main optical channel are interrupted and the OSC is
normal, there is a high probability that the optical power is abnormal or the
multiplexer/demultiplexer board or OA board is faulty.
• When a single-channel service on the client side is interrupted, you can view the
port where the alarm is reported by browsing alarms on the NMS. Generally, the
port is an RX port.
• Hardware loopback or software loopback can be used to quickly locate the fault
point where a single-channel service is interrupted.
⚫ Common interruption scenarios (2)
Common alarms: R_LOS, R_LOF, IN_POW_LOW, and OTU_LOF reported by the

Service OTU (IN)
interruption of Possible causes: The OTU board is faulty, the pigtail is faulty, or the FEC mode is
a single incorrectly set.
channel on the Common methods: loopback, signal flow analysis, meter-based testing, and
WDM side replacement
Common alarms: ODUk_LOF, LOM, R_LOS, LCK, and AIS reported by the OTU
board
Service
interruption Possible causes: The OTU maintenance signal is enabled, the receive and transmit
FEC modes do not match, and the channel protection is incorrectly configured.
caused by
misoperations Common methods: loopback, signal flow analysis, and alarm and performance
data analysis
• When a single-channel service on the WDM side is interrupted, corresponding

alarm is reported on the WDM side of the OTU board corresponding to the
channel where the service is interrupted. If the client-side signals received by the
OTU board are normal, this alarm is generally reported on the IN port.
• Different OTU boards support different FEC modes. Some OTU boards support
only AFEC, and some OTU boards support both FEC and AFEC. For the two OTU
boards at the transmit and receive ends of a wavelength channel, the FEC modes
of the two OTU boards must match each other. Otherwise, services may be
interrupted or a large number of bit errors may occur.
• The OTU board supports insertion of LCK and AIS maintenance signals. These
signals are usually used for channel maintenance when no service is carried on
an optical channel. Once the maintenance signals are manually inserted during
service transmission, the services carried on the optical channel are offset by the
maintenance signals. As a result, the services are interrupted.
• Common maintenance signals include ODUk_PM_LCK and ODUk_PM_AIS.

Bit Errors (1)
External interference
Device grounding issue
Optical power abnormality (too high or too low) or OSNR deterioration

External fault
Dispersion tolerance issue
Non-linear effect of fibers
Environment issue (high device temperature)
OTU board failure or performance deterioration

Device fault
OA board failure or performance deterioration
• Bit errors refer to the errors that occur in the code element during the
transmission. Bit errors are usually represented by bit. On the client side of an
OTU board in a WDM device, only the B1 and B2 bytes of SDH services are
monitored in the non-intrusive mode.
• NG WDM supports the OTN standard frame structure. Therefore, the complete
BIP-8 bit error detection mechanism is supported at the OTUk, ODUkP, and
ODUkT layers.
• Optical power abnormality: The possible causes of bit errors are as follows:
▫ Bit errors occur because the receive optical power is lower than the receiver
sensitivity: The optical power attenuation is large, and the input optical
power of the OTU board at the receive end is lower than the sensitivity of
the laser. As a result, bit errors occur on the OTU board.
▫ The OSNR decrease at the receive end causes bit errors: The optical power
decrease affects the OSNR at the receive end. If the OSNR margin is small,
the optical power decrease directly results in OSNR deterioration. As a
result, bit errors occur on the OTU board at the receive end.
Bit Errors (2)
⚫ Fault locating skills:
 Determine the channels involved in bit errors.
◼ Bit errors occur in all channels.
◼ Bit errors occur in some channels.
 Use the bit error detection bytes of OTU boards.

◼ On the client side of an OTU board, perform non-intrusive monitoring on the B1 bytes in SDH frames.
◼ On the WDM side of an OTU board, use BIP-8 bytes in OTN frames to monitor bit errors at each section
layer.

Use the replacement method.
◼ If bit errors occur only in one direction, you are advised to use the replacement method.
◼ Replace the optical fiber, OTU board, or OA board.
• There are two types of bit errors:
▫ If bit errors occur in all channels, the fault occurs on the line (between MPI-
S and MPI-R). In this case, check the main channel of the system, including
the optical amplifier, line cable, and related pigtail connections.
▫ If bit errors occur in some channels, these channels may be faulty or the
system may operate in a critical state in which OTU boards are faulty,
signals received on the client side are abnormal, or intra-NE pigtail
connections are incorrect.
• OTU boards provide BIP-8 bit error monitoring based on OTUk and ODUk on the
WDM side and the B1 byte bit error monitoring of SDH signals on the client side.
• The bit error monitoring mechanism at different layers can be used to quickly
locate a bit error fault to the WDM side or client side.
• Fault locating methods:
▫ Replacement
▫ Alarm and performance data analysis
▫ Section-by-section loopback
▫ Meter-based testing
Communication Faults: NE Unreachability
A single NE
Common alarms: NE_COMMU_BREAK and NE_NOT_LOGIN
being
unreachable by Possible causes: The AUX board is faulty, the hub or network cable is
the NMS disconnected, or the IP address or ID is changed by mistake.
Common alarms: NE_COMMU_BREAK, NE_NOT_LOGIN, and

All NEs (in a GNE_CONNECT_FAIL
subnet) being
unreachable Possible causes: The AUX board or hub is faulty, the network cable is
by the NMS disconnected, the gateway IP address or ID is incorrectly changed, or the
optical cable is faulty.
Frequent NE_COMMU_BREAK, NE_NOT_LOGIN, and GNE_CONNECT_FAIL

Frequent NE
alarms
unreachability
by the NMS Possible causes: NE IP addresses conflict, ECC communication is interrupted,
the ECC is overloaded, or NE user logins conflict.
• A single NE being unreachable by the NMS:
▫ Check whether the power supply of the NE is faulty. If yes, rectify the power
supply fault.
▫ Log in to the NE using the Web LCT. The current IP address and ID are
displayed. If the IP address or ID is incorrect, correct it based on the original
setting.
▫ If you cannot log in to the Web LCT, the SCC board is faulty. Reset the SCC
board. If the fault persists, replace the SCC board.
▫ Check whether the network cable connection between the NE and the hub
is loose.
▫ If the network cable is normal, change the hub port to which the network
cable is connected. If the fault is rectified, the original hub port is damaged.
• All NEs (in a subnet) being unreachable by the NMS:
▫ Generally, all NEs are unreachable by the NMS when the gateway NE is
faulty. Check whether a standby gateway NE is configured for these NEs in
the subnet. Check the status of the current gateway.
▫ When a fiber cut occurs, all NEs in the subnet also become unreachable by
the NMS. In this case, a large number of alarms and performance events
occur in the main optical path. Therefore, the services cannot run normally.
It is easy to determine the cause of this fault.
Communication Faults: ECC Faults
⚫ WDM communication modes:
 Between NMS and GNE: TCP/IP
 Between GNE and non-GNE: ECC

NE IDs conflict.
The pigtail of the OSC board is faulty.
Interruption of ECC communication
The SCC/OSC board is faulty.
The OTU board is faulty.
Intermittent ECC disconnection The clock tracing setting is incorrect.
Frequent system control board reset The network scale is too large, and the ECC is overloaded.
• During deployment commissioning, fiber connections may be incorrect because

the FIU board and OSC board have many ports with similar names. To prevent
incorrect connections during commissioning in one direction of an OSC board,
you can add an optical attenuator between the currently unused RM and TM
optical ports in the other direction of the OSC board to form a self-loop.
• When the SCC board is suspected to be faulty:
▫ Reset the SCC board on the first faulty NE along the signal flow, and then
check whether you can log in to the NE.
▫ If you cannot log in to the NE, remove the SCC board of the faulty NE to
make the ECC signals pass through the NE, and check whether the
downstream NE is restored.
▫ If it is restored, it can determine that the SCC board is faulty. In this case,
replace the SCC board.
• Common methods: replacement and hardware reset.
Protection Faults (1)
⚫ Protection switching cannot be triggered.
 Protection group parameters are set incorrectly.
 Manual switching, locked switching, or forced switching is configured manually.
 The fiber connections are incorrect.
 The protection channel is faulty.
 Electrical cross-connections are incorrectly configured.
 The board is faulty.
• Generally, protection faults are handled by checking parameter settings and

analyzing alarms.
Protection Faults (2)
⚫ Failure in automatic reversion
 The WTR mode of the protection group is set to non-revertive.
 The working channel is faulty.
• When the working channel is normal, services can be switched from the
protection channel back to the working channel only after the WTR time elapses.
Quiz
1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following are common fault types of

NG WDM?
A. Service interruptions
B. Transient service interruptions
C. Optical power abnormalities
D. Bit errors
E. Communication faults
F. Protection faults
• Answer:
▫ 1. ABCDEF
Contents
4. Case Analysis
Case 1 (1)
⚫ Fault symptom
 On a network using the OptiXtrans E6616, multiple boards on one site report the
HARD_BAD alarm and multiple services are interrupted. Preliminary analysis shows that
the four boards are faulty.
⚫ Cause analysis
 Possible causes of the interruption of services carried by faulty boards are as follows:
◼ Optical modules of the boards are faulty.
◼ Power supply modules of the boards are faulty.
• In addition, the HARD_BAD alarm may also be caused by environmental factors.

Case 1 (2)
⚫ Fault locating procedure
 Query the historical alarms of this NE. It is found that the faulty boards report the TEMP_OVER alarm and then the HARD_BAD
alarm. After they report the HARD_BAD alarm, services are interrupted. Check the subrack. It is found that the board
temperatures of the subrack reaches 119°C, 119°C, 82.6°C, and 72.7°C respectively. The four boards are repeatedly reset and
cannot work normally.
 The E6616 provides fan boards, which can automatically adjust the fan speed to control the internal temperature of the device.
Query the rotating speed of fan boards. It is found that the rotating speed is high, but the temperature inside the device is still
high. Therefore, it can be inferred that the heat dissipation of this subrack is abnormal.

Check the environment of the alarmed NE on site. It is found that the air filter of the NE is dusty and the air intake vent is
blocked, causing poor heat dissipation. This explains why the temperatures of the faulty boards are very high. Therefore, the
root cause as follows: The air intake vent of the air filter is blocked, causing poor heat dissipation. Consequently, the
temperatures of service boards increase gradually, and therefore the TEMP_OVER alarm is reported. The TEMP_OVER alarm,
however, is not cleared timely, so the alarmed boards keep working at high temperatures. As a result, some components of the
boards are burnt and services are interrupted.
• Summary and suggestions:
▫ Clean air filters regularly and ensure good heat dissipation on the device.
▫ Pay attention to the TEMP_OVER alarm and rectify the fault immediately.
Check whether the rotating speed of fans is set correctly or the air intake
vents of air filters are blocked.
▫ Clear alarms on the live network promptly.

Case 2 (1)
⚫ Case
O O
M OA OA D
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client O O Client
device D OA OA M device
U U
Site A Site B
⚫ Fault symptom
 One client service from site A to site B is interrupted, and the client device at site B receives a large
number of bit errors.
• Fault symptom: One client service from site A to site B is interrupted, and the
client device at site B receives no light or a large number of bit errors.
• Analysis: The client device at site B receives no light or a large number of bit
errors. The service signal flow received by the client device at site B is as follows:
client device at site A – OTU at site A – OMU at site A – OA at site A – OA at site
B – ODU at site B – OTU at site B – client device at site B. The possible causes of
the fault are as follows:
▫ The transmit part of site A is faulty.
▫ The optical path (including optical fibers and connectors) is faulty.

▫ The receive part of site B is faulty.
• The OA board provides input and output optical power detection functions. If an
OA board fault occurs, multiple wavelengths will be affected. Therefore, there is
a low probability that the OA board is faulty.
• The method of analyzing the signal flow at site B is similar to that at site A.
Case 2 (2)
⚫ Analysis
 The client device at site B receives no light or a large number of bit errors. The service
signal flow received by the client device at site B is as follows: client device at site A –
OTU at site A – OMU at site A – OA at site A – OA at site B – ODU at site B – OTU at site
B – client device at site B. The possible causes of the fault are as follows:
◼ The transmit part of site A is faulty.
◼ The optical path (including optical fibers and connectors) is faulty.
◼ The receive part of site B is faulty.
 The OA board provides input and output optical power detection functions. If an OA
board fault occurs, multiple wavelengths will be affected. Therefore, there is a low
probability that the OA board is faulty.
• The method of analyzing the signal flow at site B is similar to that at site A.
Case 2 (3)
⚫ Check the preceding possible causes one by one.
 Replace the OTU board at site A with a spare board. The fault persists.
 Replace the OTU board at site B with a spare board. The fault persists.
 Because only one service is interrupted, the possibility that the multiplexed-wavelength
fiber is faulty can be ruled out. After the optical fiber between the OTU board and the
client device is replaced, the service is restored.
⚫ Based on the preceding analysis, the service interruption is caused by the damaged
fiber between the client device and the OTU board.
• Analyze the fault section by section along the signal flow.

Case 3 (1)
⚫ Fault symptom
 The TN11TDX board at site A reports four ODU1_PM_SSF alarms, but the TN11NS2 board
does not report any abnormal alarms. The STM-64 services are interrupted.
T N N N N T STM-64
STM-64 WDM WDM
D S S S S D
X 2 2 2 2 X
BD-1 BD-2
• Fault type: service interruption

Case 3 (2)
⚫ Cause analysis
 The TN11NS2 board at site A is faulty.
 The cross-connections between the two TN11NS2 boards at site B are faulty. For example,
the TN11NS2 board, cross-connect board, or standby board is faulty.
 A fault occurs in the receive direction from site B to site C. The fault may be a line fault or
board hardware fault.
 The cross-connections from the TN11TDX board to the TN11NS2 board at site C are
faulty. For example, the TN11NS2 board, TN11TDX board, cross-connect board, or
standby board is faulty.
• When a service fault occurs on a WDM device, the common fault locating
method is as follows: Locate the fault from the fault point to the upstream
section by section and board by board.
Case 3 (3)
⚫ Fault locating
 Step 1: Check the alarms and performance events received on the WDM side of the
TN11NS2 board at site A.
◼ No alarm is reported on the TN11NS2 board. The pre-FEC BER is 8 and the post-FEC BER is 0.
No OTU2/ODU2 bit error is generated.
◼ Enable non-intrusive monitoring for four ODU1 channels on the TN11NS2 board. This board
reports four ODU1_PM_SSF alarms.
◼ The TN11NS2 board at site A and the line from site B to site A are normal. The fault alarm is
transparently transmitted from the upstream site.
Case 3 (4)
⚫ Fault locating
 Step 2: Check the alarms and performance events of the TN11NS2 boards at site B.
◼
Identify that no alarm is reported on the system side of the BD-1 NS2 board.
◼
Identify that the OTU2_DEG and ODU2_PM_DEG alarms are reported on the WDM side of the BD-2 NS2 board.
◼ Query the receive performance on the WDM side of the BD-2 NS2 board. The pre-FEC BER is 8.
◼
Query the historical alarms of the BD-2 NS2 board. The OTU2_DEG and ODU2_PM_DEG alarms are transiently reported
multiple times.
◼
Query the historical receive performance on the WDM side of the BD-2 NS2 board. The pre-FEC BER changes in multiple
periods within the range of 2 to 8 repeatedly.
◼
Query the historical receive performance on the WDM side of the BD-2 NS2 board. The receive optical power changes
within the range of –11 dBm to –7 dBm.
◼
The receive optical power of the BD-2 NS2 board at site B deteriorates. As a result, a fault occurs. Further analysis is
required to confirm the cause of the receive optical power deterioration of this board.
Case 3 (5)
⚫ Fault locating
 Step 3: Query the alarms and performance events of each board on the main optical path.
◼ Identify that the current alarms and performance events at the input optical port on the upstream OA board
of the BD-2 NS2 board are normal.
◼ Check the historical alarms and performance events of the input optical port on the upstream OA board of
the BD-2 NS2 board. The MUT_LOS alarm is transiently reported once, and the minimum input optical
power is –60 dBm in multiple performance periods.
◼ Check the historical alarms and performance events of the upstream TN12FIU board of the BD-2 NS2 board.
No historical alarm is reported, and the input optical power decreases by 8 dB.
◼ Check the historical alarms and performance events of the TN11SC2 board in the BD-2 NS2 board direction.
No historical alarm is reported, and the minimum input optical power is –60 dBm in multiple periods.
◼ Transient interruption has occurred on the main optical path from site B to site C. Because the receive
optical power of both the OA and OSC boards drops, it can be determined that the optical cable is faulty.
• The line fault is a transient interruption. Because the detection sensitivity of each
board is different, some boards may not report the LOS alarm and the minimum
receive optical power may not be reported as –60 dBm. However, you can check
whether LOS and IN_PWR_LOW alarms are reported based on historical alarms
and check whether the optical power drops based on the maximum and
minimum historical performance values.
Case 3 (6)
⚫ Fault locating
 Step 4: Check the transmit optical power from site C to site B.
◼ According to the historical performance data, the transmit optical power of the OA board from
site C to site B is normal.
◼ According to the historical performance data, the transmit optical power of the TN12SC2 board
from site C to site B is normal.
⚫ Conclusion
 According to the fault locating results, it can be determined that the optical cable
between sites B and C is faulty.
Case 4 (1)
⚫ Fault symptom
 OptiXtrans E9600 devices are used on a network. OTM1 (NE(111-33) and OTM2 (NE(111-40)) are
new sites, and OTM1 is the gateway NE. Currently, only the first wavelength is provisioned on the
N216 board and no client service is received.
 One day, the service wavelength of the N216 board is re-planned and the first wavelength is
changed to the 40th wavelength. When the engineer deletes the original single-site optical cross-
connection of OTM1 and creates a new optical cross-connection on the NMS, OTM2 becomes
unreachable by the NMS. In addition, a line fiber is displayed in red on the NMS.
⚫ Alarm
 OTM2 NE_NOT_LOGIN and NE_COMMU_BREAK alarms are reported on the NMS.
• Fault type: communication fault

Case 4 (2)
⚫ Cause analysis
 The SCC board of NE(111-40) is faulty.
 The OSC/OTU (ESC) board is faulty.
 The OSC/ESC is faulty.
• OSC/ESC faults include the fiber link faults between OTM1 and OTM2. However,
according to the fault symptom, the NE is unreachable by the NMS when service
configurations are deleted from the NMS. This operation does not cause any fiber
link problem. Therefore, this cause can be excluded.
Case 4 (3)
⚫ Troubleshooting
 On site, log in to NE(111-40) through the Web LCT. The login is successful. This indicates
that the SCC board of NE(111-40) is normal.
 Query the OSC board alarms and check the board hardware configuration of the NE. It is
found that no OSC board is configured in the system. That is, the ESC is used for
monitoring in the network.
 Currently, only the first wavelength is provisioned in the system. This wavelength,
however, is deleted. As a result, the ESC is interrupted and OTM2 becomes unreachable
by the NMS.
• Result: Re-create the single-site optical cross-connections of OTM1 and OTM2

and ensure that the receive optical power of the N216 board is normal. The fault
is rectified.
Case 4 (4)
⚫ Suggestions and summary
 The OptiXtrans E9600 can use the ESC or OSC to monitor the network running status.
 The ESC uses GCC bytes, while the OSC uses 1510 nm wavelengths to transmit
monitoring information.
 When the ESC is used for monitoring, ensure that at least one service channel is
commissioned normally.
Case 5 (1)
⚫ Fault symptom
10.5 dB 27.6 dB 27.0 dB 23.1 dB 21.5 dB 23.2 dB 14.2 dB
M D A A A A D
40 B104 B104 A103 A103 A103 A103 A101 A B103 40
V V
25.0 km 89.4 km 87.2 km 73.3 km 67.3 km 73.5 km 40.6 km
D A103 A103 A101 A101 A101 B104 B104 M

40 A 40
V A A A A D V
B103
A B C D E F G H
 In a 40-wavelength OptiX NG WDM system, G.652 DCMs are used for dispersion compensation in
the entire network. Currently, 192.1 THz to 194.2 THz and 196.0 THz wavelength channels are used.
The N216 (AFEC) board is used as the LU, and STM-64 signals are transmitted on the client side.
 During the commissioning, the pre-FEC BER of 192.1 THz to 194.2 THz is low (less than 1 x 10e-9),
but the pre-FEC BER of 196.0 THz is high (about 1 x 10e-4). In addition, the BEFFEC_EXC alarm is
reported, and the OTU2_DEG and ODU2_PM_DEG alarms are transiently reported.
• G.652 fibers are used between sites A and B, and G.655-LEAF fibers are used
between other sites.
Case 5 (2)
⚫ Alarm information
 BEFFEC_EXC
 OTUk_DEG
 ODUk_PM_DEG
• BEFFEC_EXC: pre-FEC BER threshold-crossing. Signals sent from the WDM side of
the opposite-end OTU have the FEC function. As a result, before performing FEC
in the receive direction of the WDM side of the local-end OTU, the local-end OTU
counts the bit error rate. This alarm occurs if the counted bit error rate exceeds
the specified threshold. The fault tolerance capability of the system is reduced,
which may affect service signal quality.
• OTUk_DEG: OTUk signal degradation. When bit errors are detected in burst
mode, this alarm is generated after signal degradation or bit error threshold-
crossing occurs. When bit errors are detected in Poisson mode, this alarm is
generated after signal degradation occurs. k indicates the rate level. For the
OptiXtrans E9600, the value can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. When this alarm is reported,
services at the optical port have bit errors, causing the failure or unavailability of
service signals.
Case 5 (3)
⚫ Cause analysis
 External fault
 Device fault
⚫ Handling procedure
 Check the environment of the equipment room. It is found that the equipment room
environment is good.
 Query network-wide alarms on the NMS. No abnormal temperature alarm is reported.
Therefore, the fault is not caused by device temperature.
 Use the optical power management function to check the receive optical power of the
40-wavelength N216 board. The receive optical power is –8 dBm and the receiver type
of the 40-wavelength N216 board is PIN, which are normal.
• For details about the causes of bit errors, see the preceding sections.
Case 5 (6)
 Test the 40-wavelength OSNR at point MPI-R. The OSNR is 21.3 dB, which is higher than 16 dB and normal.
 Analyze the dispersion compensation and check DCM settings. It is found that overcompensation has occurred.
◼ In the direction from site A to site H, replace DCM-D of NE C with DCM-A. Then, bit errors on all channels of NE H,
including the N216 board of 196.0 THz wavelength, are cleared.
◼
In the direction from site H to site A, replace DCM-D of NE F with DCM-A. Then, bit errors on all channels of NE A, including
the N216 board of 196.0 THz wavelength, are cleared.
10.5 dB 27.6 dB 27.0 dB 23.1 dB 21.5 dB 23.2 dB 14.2 dB

M D A A A A D
40 B104 B104 A103 A103 A103 A103 A101 A B103 40
V V
25.0 km 89.4 km 87.2 km 73.3 km 67.3 km 73.5 km 40.6 km
D A103 A103 A101 A101 A101 B104 B104 M

40 A 40
V A A A A D V
B103
A B C D E F G H
• When a dispersion compensation fiber (DCF) is used for compensation, the

compensation rate is not 100%.
• Suggestions and summary:
▫ Note that the OSNR is not directly affected by dispersion in this case, but
the dispersion exceeds the range tolerated by an OTU board. As a result, bit
errors are generated in the system. This is common during deployment on
an existing network.
Summary
⚫ Troubleshooting overview
⚫ Basic fault locating ideas and methods
⚫ Troubleshooting by fault type
intelligent world.


that

HCIP-Transmission V2.5 Training Material

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HCIP-Transmission V2.5 Training Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WDM Principles

⚫ The wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) technology is an advanced

⚫ On completion of this course, you will be able to:

2. WDM Transmission Media

3. Key Technologies of WDM

• On the completion of this chapter, you will be able to:

▫ Understand the basic concepts of WDM.

▫ Have a good command of the basic principles, transmission modes, and

Capacity expansion solution

• The linear transmission capability increase of space division multiplexing (SDM) is

▫ Disadvantage 2: The rate upgrade is not flexible.

▫ Highway: optical fiber

▫ Patrol car: supervisory signal

▫ Refueling station: optical regeneration (amplifier) station

▫ Gray car: client service

▫ Colored car: service on a different channel (wavelength)

▫ Lane: optical wavelength

• If an optical fiber is regarded as a multi-lane highway, a traditional TDM system

• The DWDM technology uses a number of wavelengths as carriers and transmits

Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit

• An OTU converts diverse wavelengths to standard wavelengths specified by ITU-T

• When optical signals need to be amplified to extend the transmission distance,

Client device Client device

• An integrated DWDM system does not use the wavelength conversion

Client device Client device

• An open DWDM system requires that the optical interfaces of multiplexing

ITU-T G.694.1 Extended C band: 192 wavelengths at a 25 GHz channel spacing

196.075 THz 192.100 THz 192.075 THz 191.300 THz

▫ C-band even wavelengths: There are 80 even-numbered wavelengths in

▫ Extended C-band even wavelengths: There are 96 even-numbered

• Compared with a DWDM system, a CWDM system provides a certain number of

1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following are the components of a

B. Optical amplifier (OA)

D. Optical supervisory channel/Electrical supervisory channel (OSC/ESC)

2. WDM Transmission Media

3. Key Technologies of WDM

Total reflection n1 Fiber core

Incidence angle θ1 Reflection angle θ3

Reflection and refraction of light

Material Air Water Glass Quartz Diamond

Total reflection of light

▫ As shown in the preceding figure, when the incidence angle θ (shown as

• It is easy to understand that the attenuation of an optical fiber can be greatly

• Light is a kind of high-frequency electromagnetic wave. Based on the wave optics

Multi-mode (850–900 nm)

800 900 12001300 1400 15001600 1700 nm

• The attenuation of an optical fiber depends on absorption attenuation, scattering

⚫ Chromatic dispersion (CD)

Dispersion slope compensation fiber (DSCF)

• DCF: dispersion compensation fiber

Elliptical fiber core

• PMD is the dispersion caused by different speeds of two orthogonal polarization

G.652 G.653: It has zero dispersion in the

1. (Multiple-answer question) Which of the following statements about fiber

D. The G.655 fiber is a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode fiber and is applicable to

2. WDM Transmission Media

3. Key Technologies of WDM

• If we want to turn DWDM into a commodity, how can we implement it on

• On the completion of this chapter, you will be able to:

▫ Understand the optical amplification technologies of DWDM.

▫ Understand the multiplexing and demultiplexing technologies of DWDM.

▫ Understand the optical supervisory channel (OSC) of DWDM.

⚫ Light source ⚫ Optical multiplexing